ANSI MV TechTopicsCatalog

TechTopics catalog
The released collection from No. 01 to No. 122
www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
Medium-voltage TechTopics is a series of papers that discuss issues of interest to users or specifiers of medium-voltage
electrical equipment, including:
5
- 15 kV arc-resistant, metal-clad switchgear (GM-SG-AR and NXAIR P)
5
- 38 kV non-arc-resistant, metal-clad switchgear (GM, GM-SG and GM38)
5
- 38 kV arc-resistant, gas-insulated switchgear (8DA10 and 8DB10)
5
- 27.6 kV metal-enclosed, load-interrupter switchgear (SIMOSEC)
2
.3 - 15 kV motor controllers (Series 81000™, SIMOVAC and SIMOVAC-AR)
1
5.5 - 38 kV outdoor vacuum circuit breakers (SDV6 and SDV7)
5
- 38 kV retrofit and replacement circuit breakers.
Topics discussed in medium-voltage TechTopics will include application, selection and discussion of the applicable standards
for these products. Medium-voltage TechTopics issues will be added to address recurring questions.
TechTopics No. 12, 40, 49, and 51 are reserved.
TechTopics issue Pages

No. 01 - Surge limiter application recommendations for metal-clad switchgear up to 15 kV 6-8
No. 02 - Loss of vacuum 9-10
No. 03 - Vacuum vs. SF6 11-12
No. 04 - kA rated circuit breakers and switchgear 13-16
No. 05 - Reclosing applications - minimum reclosing time 17-18
No. 06 - Three-cycle versus five-cycle interrupting time 19-20
No. 07 - Current transformers - Use of 600 V CT’s in metal-clad switchgear 21-22
No. 08 - Heat generation estimation for type GM switchgear (up to 15 kV) 23-24
No. 09 - Heat generation estimation for type GM38 switchgear (up to 38 kV) 25-26
No. 10 - Heat generation estimation for Series 81000™ controllers 27
No. 11 - Fast bus transfer times for type GMI circuit breakers 28-30
No. 13 - Use of latched contactors to switch transformers 31-32
No. 14 - X-radiation emissions by vacuum interrupters 33-34
No. 15 - Expected life of electrical equipment 35-36
No. 16 - Bus joint fundamentals 37-38
No. 17 - Main bus continuous current ratings 39-40
No. 18 - Bus joint and primary disconnect plating 41-42
No. 19 - Bus joint current density 43
No. 20 - Power factor correction capacitor - sizing for motors 44-47
No. 21 - “Bus bracing” in metal-clad switchgear 48-49
No. 22 - “Bus bracing” in metal-enclosed switchgear 50-51
No. 23 - Circuit breaker ratings - type GMI circuit breakers 52-55
No. 24 - Checking integrity of vacuum interrupters 56-57
No. 25 - Shunt reactor switching applications 58
No. 26 - Ground bus ratings 59-60
No. 27 - Standards for medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear 61-62
No. 28 - Standards for outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers 63-65
No. 29 - Derating factors for reclosing service 66-67
2
No. 30 - Altitude correction factors 68-69
No. 31 - Solar radiation correction factors 70-71
No. 32 - Capacitor switching applications 72-73
No. 33 - Clearance requirements in switchgear and control equipment 74-75
No. 34 - Three-cycle vs. five-cycle interrupting time - type 3AK1 circuit breakers 76-77
No. 35 - Transient recovery voltage 78-80
No. 36 - Early “b” contacts 81
No. 37 - Low current switching capabilities 82-83
No. 38 - Harmonic filter applications 84-85
No. 39 - Heat generation estimation for type NXAIR P switchgear (up to 15 kV) 86-87
No. 41 - Circuit breakers or switches - application considerations 88-89
No. 42 - Circuit breakers or vacuum contactors - application considerations 90-91
No. 43 - Interposing relay requirements 92-94
No. 44 - Anatomy of a short-circuit 95-97
No. 45 - Accuracy of current transformers (CTs) used in medium-voltage control equipment 98
No. 46 - Selection of current transformer (CT) ratio in medium-voltage control 99-100
No. 47 - 7.2 kV equipment basic insulation levels (BIL) 101-102
No. 48 - Fan-cooling control circuit for forced-air cooled circuit breakers 103-104
No. 50 - Ground sensor current transformer cable routing 105-106
No. 52 - Insulation of switchgear terminations 107-108
No. 53 - Use of SF6 gas in medium-voltage switchgear 109-111
No. 54 - Interrupter switch technology comparison - type SIMOSEC SF6 switch - conventional air switches 112-113
No. 55 - Capacitor trip devices 114-115
No. 56 - Switchgear outdoor enclosure type - Why isn’t it NEMA 3? 116-117
No. 57 - Arc flash hazard labels 118-120
No. 58 - What is the difference between E-rated and R-rated current-limiting fuses? 121-123
No. 59 - Control power sources for switchgear 124-125
No. 60 - Use of cable for connections in medium-voltage switchgear 126-127
No. 61 - Circuit breaker “standard duty cycle” 128-129
No. 62 - A bit of history on circuit breaker standards 130-131
No. 63 - Recovery of SF6 gas from type SIMOSEC switches at end-of-life condition 132-133
No. 64 - NFPA 70E - Changes in 2012 edition 134-135
No. 65 - Arc-furnace switching applications 136-138
No. 66 - Clearances 139-140
No. 67 - %dc component 141-142
No. 68 - Heat generation estimation for historic switchgear type D (to 4.76 kV) and type F (to 15 kV) with
143-145
air magnetic circuit breakers
No. 69 - Fast bus transfer times for type GMSG circuit breakers 146-147
No. 70 - Arc-resistant switchgear accessibility types 148-150
No. 71 - Generator circuit breakers 151-153
No. 72 - Generator circuit breaker applications - delayed current zeroes 154-156
No. 73 - Generator circuit breaker applications - transient recovery voltage 157-158
3
No. 74 - Heat generation estimation for type GM-SG or GM-SG-AR switchgear (up to 15 kV) 159-160
No. 75 - Ferroresonance in ungrounded systems with voltage transformers connected line-to-ground 161-162
No. 76 - Heat generation estimation for SIMOSEC load-interrupter switchgear 163-164
No. 77 - Residual voltage on load side of an open circuit breaker 165-167
No. 78 - Personal protective equipment (PPE) required with metal-clad switchgear 168-170
No. 79 - Working space required around electrical equipment 171-173
No. 80 - Special tests - type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker gearbox lubrication 174-176
No. 81 - Arc-flash incident energy mitigation 177-178
No. 82 - Continuous current capability in ambient temperatures other than 40 °C 179-181
No. 83 - Arc-resistant construction for outdoor distribution circuit breakers 182-184
No. 84 - Space heater - sizing and application principles 185-187
No. 85 - Temperature limitations for user’s power cables 188-189
No. 86 - Use of unshielded cables for connections in medium-voltage switchgear and motor controllers 190-191
No. 87 - Ground and test devices 192-198
No. 88 - Application of maintenance grounds in switchgear 199-201
No. 89 - Venting of exhaust gases from arc-resistant equipment 202-204
No. 90 - Temperature ratings for external cables 205-207
No. 91 - Current transformer relaying accuracies - IEEE comparted to IEC 208-211
No. 92 - Heat generation estimation for SIMOVAC non-arc-resistant and SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant
212-214
medium-voltage controllers
No. 93 - Capacitor switching performance classes 215-216
No. 94 - Circuit breaker interlocking and operating requirements 217-219
No. 95 - Tie circuit breakers and out-of-phase applications 220-222
No. 96 - Phase sequence versus phase arrangement 223-224
No. 97 - Ratings for retrofitted switchgear 225-227
No. 98 - Ground protection in metal-clad switchgear - ground sensor current transformers vs. residual
228-231
connection of current transformers
No. 99 - Special tests - type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker gearbox lubrication 232-234
No. 100 - Third-party listing - UL, C-UL and CSA 235-237
No. 101 - Siemens medium-voltage, gas-insulated switchgear bus differential protection 238-239
No. 102 - Tapered bus 240-242
No. 103 - Medium-voltage controllers - fixed mounted contactors compared to drawout contactors 243-244
No. 104 - Arc-resistant equipment ‒ sealing requirements 245-246
No. 105 - Fuses and overload protection for motor starting with class E2 controllers 247-249
No. 106 - Arc-resistant equipment ‒ exit of exhaust plenum from buildings 250-251
No. 107 - Dummy circuit breaker applications 252-254
No. 108 - Lightning-impulse (BIL) ratings for medium-voltage controllers 255-256
No. 110 - Corrosion prevention effects on electrical equipment life 257-258
No. 111 - SF6 gas and U.S. greenhouse gas emissions 259-260
No. 112 - Use of R-rated fuses in lieu of E-rated fuses for transformers 261-262
No. 113 - Preferred locations for current transformers 263-264
No. 114 - Low-ratio current transformers in medium-voltage controllers 265-266
No. 115 - Third-party listing/labeling and recognition 267-268
No. 116 - Arc-resistant switchgear ‒ accessibility type C 269-271
4
No. 117 - MOC / TOC switches 272-273
No. 118 - Bolted construction vs. welded construction 274-275
No. 119 - Momentary ratings – peak or rms? 276
No. 120 - High-potential testing – current doesn’t matter! 277-278
No. 121 - Ground return currents in gas-insulated switchgear 279-280
No. 122 - Current transformer thermal-rating factor 281-282
5
TechTopics No. 01
Surge limiter application recommendations for metal-clad
switchgear up to 15 kV
While current chopping is not a significant problem with 5. The reignition produces a high-frequency transient
Siemens vacuum interrupters, there are certain switching current, as the source-side and load-side voltages are
situations where special consideration should be given brought back together. If the magnitude of the high-
because of the possibility of multiple reignitions. Even frequency component is large enough, a current zero will
though they are rare, if multiple reignitions do occur, excess be produced that does not coincide with a natural current
voltages are possible on downstream (primarily inductive) zero.
equipment. Multiple reignitions can occur on almost any
6. The vacuum circuit breaker can interrupt the current at a
type of interrupting technology, including air magnetic, oil,
high-frequency current zero.
air blast, vacuum and SF6.
This process, once begun, repeats until the contact gap
Multiple reignitions can occur if the following sequence of
becomes sufficiently large that the dielectric strength of the
events occur together:
gap exceeds the voltage imposed across the gap. At this
1. A motor is switched OFF during starting, or while stalled point, further reignitions will not occur.
(locked rotor current flowing)
2. The interrupter contacts part just before (less than 1 ms) a
natural current zero
3. The circuit breaker interrupts at the natural current zero,
but before the contact gap is large enough to withstand
the recovery voltage following interruption
4. The circuit has a particular combination of load-side and
source-side capacitances and inductances that results in a
high-frequency transient recovery voltage (TRV) across the
interrupter contacts. If the “right” circuit parameters exist,
the rate-of-rise of the TRV can exceed the rate-of-rise of
dielectric strength in the contact gap. If this occurs, the
arc will reignite.
Answers for infrastructure.

Rated voltage kV 3.6 6 7.5 11 15
MCOV of ZnO element kV 2.9 3.6 5.4 9.0 11.0
Surge
limiter data Series gap sparkover voltage 1.2 μs x 50 μs wave kV 8 10 15 25 31
0.5 kA switching surge discharge voltage 8 μs x 20 μs wave kV 8 10 15 25 31
1.5 kA switching surge discharge voltage 8 μs x 20 μs wave kV 8.3 12.4 16.5 28.9 33.0
12.0
2.4 6.9 12.47
Solidly grounded wye system applications kV 8.32 ----
4.16 7.2 13.2
13.8
12.0
6.9
System 4.16 4.8 12.47
Delta system applications kV 2.4 7.2
applications 4.8 6.9 13.2
8.32
13.8
12.0
6.9
4.16 4.8 12.47
Low resistance or high resistance grounded wye system applications kV 2.4 7.2
4.8 6.9 13.2
8.32
13.8
Surge limiter part 18-665-161-xxx -001 -002 -003 -004 -005
Figure 1: Surge limiter selection according to system type
If multiple reignitions do occur, the downstream voltage can Surge limiters should also be applied when any load has less
escalate and damage the protected equipment. Figure 3 of than full insulation integrity, such as open dry-type
the paper entitled “Surge Limiters for Vacuum Circuit transformers, which frequently have less that full BIL
Breakers” by S. H. Telander, et. al., shows the escalation of capability.
voltage that accompanies multiple reignition, and Figure 4 of
Zinc oxide surge arresters, with their higher energy
this paper depicts the zone of conditions where multiple
absorption capability, can also be used. They are more
reignition might occur. As discussed in the paper, the region
expensive than surge limiters and if they are not needed to
of concern involves rotating machines, because of their large
protect against lightning or switching surges, are not
inductance and relatively weak insulation structure.
necessary.
To protect against the overvoltages caused by multiple
Surge limiters and surge arresters differ in several
reignitions, we recommend that surge limiters be applied on
fundamental respects. The type 3EF surge limiter can absorb
those circuits with conditions that fall within the zone.
the trapped energy associated with a vacuum interruption,
Essentially, this means that surge limiters should be applied
whereas a surge arrester has a greater energy absorption
for all applications in which a circuit breaker is used to supply
capacity to deal with system phenomena, including lightning
a motor that has a locked rotor current of 600 A or less. This
strikes and switching surges from all sources. The 3EF surge
recommendation applies to full-voltage starting applications.
limiter has a lower (i.e., better) protective voltage level than
It also applies to reduced-voltage starting applications, as the
an equivalent surge arrester.
circuit breaker can interrupt the locked rotor current if the
driven load jams or stalls.
In capsule form, our recommendations are as follows: Selection of surge limiters for use in equipment up to 15 kV
can be made using the application chart in Figure 1.
1. For transformers of full BIL rating, no additional protection
is needed. If applied in accordance with these recommendations,
Siemens vacuum interrupters will impose dielectric stress on
2. For transformers of reduced BIL rating, add some form of
load equipment that are not significantly different from the
protection (either surge limiters at the switchgear, surge
stresses associated with traditional air magnetic or oil circuit
capacitors at the transformer, or surge arresters at the
breakers.
transformer).
3. For motors with locked rotor current under 600 A, add
some form of protection (either surge limiters at the
switchgear, surge capacitors at the motor or surge
arresters at the motor).
4. For motors with locked rotor current over 600 A, no
additional protection is needed.
The information provided in this document contains merely general

descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Siemens Industry, Inc.

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
Subject to change without prior notice.

Order No.: E50001-F710-A154-X-4A00
All rights reserved.
© 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 02
Loss of vacuum
If a vacuum interrupter should lose vacuum, several operating As predicted, the “flat” interrupter did not successfully clear the
situations should be considered: affected phase, and the “flat” interrupter was destroyed. The
laboratory backup breaker cleared the fault.
a. With contacts open
Following the test, the circuit breaker was removed from the
b. When closing
switchgear cell. It was very sooty, but mechanically intact. The
c. When closed and operating normally soot was cleaned from the circuit breaker and the switchgear
cell, the faulty interrupter was replaced, and the circuit breaker
d. When opening and interrupting normal current
was re-inserted in the cell. Further short circuit interruption
e. When opening and interrupting a fault. tests were conducted the same day on the circuit breaker.
Cases a, b and c are relatively straightforward. Generally, the Field experience in the years since that test was conducted
system sees no impact from loss of vacuum in such a situation. supports the information gained in the laboratory experiment.
Cases d and e, however, require further discussion. One of our customers, a large chemical operation, encountered
separate failures (one with an air magnetic circuit breaker and
Suppose there is a feeder circuit breaker with a vacuum
one with a vacuum circuit breaker) on a particular circuit
interrupter on phase 3 that has lost vacuum. If the load being
configuration. Two different installations, in different
served by the failed interrupter is a delta-connected
countries, were involved. They shared a common circuit
(ungrounded) load, a switching operation would not result in a
configuration and failure mode. The circuit configuration, a tie
failure. Essentially, nothing would happen. The two good
circuit in which the sources on each side of the circuit breaker
phases (phase 1 and phase 2, in this example) would be able
were not in synchronism, imposed approximately double rated
to clear the circuit, and current in the failed interrupter
voltage across the contact gap, which caused the circuit
(phase 3) would cease.
breaker to fail. Since these failures resulted from application in
The alternative case of a grounded load is a different situation. violation of the guidelines of the ANSI/IEEE standards, and
In this case, interruption in the two good phases (phase 1 and greatly in excess of the design ratings of the circuit breakers,
phase 2) would not cause current to stop flowing in phase 3, they are not indicative of a design problem with the
and the arc would continue to exist in phase 3. With nothing to equipment.
stop it, this current would continue until some backup
However, the damage that resulted from the failures is of
protection operated. The result, of course, would be
interest. In the case of the air magnetic circuit breaker, the unit
destruction of the interrupter.
housing the failed circuit breaker was destroyed, and the
Since the predominant usage of circuit breakers in the 5-15 kV adjacent switchgear units on either side were damaged
range is on grounded circuits, we investigated the impact of a extensively, requiring significant rebuilding. The air
failed interrupter some years ago in the test lab. We magnetic circuit breaker was a total loss. In the case of the
intentionally caused an interrupter to lose vacuum by opening vacuum circuit breaker, the failure was considerably less
the tube to the atmosphere. We then subjected the circuit violent.
breaker to a full short circuit interruption.

The vacuum interrupters were replaced, and the arc by- In fact, the MTTF (mean time to failure) of Siemens power
products (soot) cleaned from both the circuit breaker and vacuum interrupters has now reached 57,000 years (as of
the compartment. The unit was put back into service. 2010).
Our test experience in the laboratory, where we routinely Questions raised by customers regarding loss of vacuum were
explore the limits of interrupter performance, also supports legitimate concerns in the 1960s, when the use of vacuum
these results. interrupters for power applications was in its infancy. At that
time, vacuum interrupters suffered from frequent leaks, and
More recently, several tests were performed in our high-power
surges were a problem. There was only one firm that offered
test laboratory to compare the results of attempted
vacuum circuit breakers then, and reports suggest that they
interruptions with “leaky” vacuum interrupters. A small hole
had many problems.
(approximately 1/8” diameter) was drilled in the interrupter
housing, to simulate a vacuum interrupter that had lost We entered the vacuum circuit breaker market in 1974, using
vacuum. The results of these tests were very interesting: Allis-Chalmers’ technology and copper-bismuth contact
materials. In the early 1980s, after becoming part of the
1. One pole of a vacuum circuit breaker was subjected to an
worldwide Siemens organization, we were able to convert our
attempted interruption of 1,310 A (rated continuous current
vacuum designs to use Siemens vacuum interrupters, which
= 1,250 A). The current was allowed to flow in the “failed”
had been introduced in Europe in the mid-1970s. Thus, when
interrupter for 2.06 seconds, at which point the laboratory
we adopted the Siemens vacuum interrupters in the U.S., they
breaker interrupted. No parts of the “failed” circuit breaker or
already had a very well established field performance record.
the interrupter flew off, nor did the circuit breaker explode.
The paint on the exterior of the interrupter arcing chamber The principle conceptual differences in the modern Siemens
peeled off. The reaminder of the circuit breaker was vacuum interrupters from the early 1960s designs lies in
undamaged. contact material and process control. Surge phenomena are
2. A second pole of the same vacuum circuit breaker was more difficult to deal with when copper-bismuth contacts are
subjected to an attempted interruption of 25 kA (rated used than with today’s chrome-copper contacts. Similarly, leaks
interrupting current = 25 kA), for an arc duration of 0.60 were harder to control with vacuum interrupters built largely
seconds, with the laboratory breaker interrupting the by hand than with today’s units. Today, great attention is paid
current at the time. The arc burned a hole in the side of the to process control and elimination of the human factor
arc chamber. The circuit breaker did not explode, nor did (variability) in manufacture.
parts of the circuit breaker fly off. Glowing particles were The result is that the Siemens vacuum interrupters today can
ejected from the hole in the arcing chamber. None of the be expected to have a long service life and to impose dielectric
mechanical components or other interrupters were stress on load equipment that is not significantly different from
damaged. Essentially, all damage was confined to the failed the stresses associated with traditional air magnetic or oil
interrupter. circuit breakers.
Our experience suggests rather strongly that the effects of a
vacuum interrupter failure on the equipment are very minor,
compared to the impact of failures with alternative interruption
technologies. But the real question is not what the results of a
failure might be, but rather, what is the likelihood of a failure? descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
The failure rate of Siemens vacuum interrupters is so low that use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
loss of vacuum is no longer a significant concern. In the early
1960s with early vacuum interrupters, it was a big problem. of contract.
A vacuum interrupter is constructed with all connections
between dissimilar materials made by brazing or welding. No
organic materials are used. In the early years, many hand- own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
production techniques were used, especially when borosilicate
glass was used for the insulating envelope, as it could not Siemens Industry, Inc.
tolerate high temperatures. Today, machine welding and batch 7000 Siemens Road
induction furnace brazing are employed with extremely tight Wendell, NC 27591
process control. The only moving part inside the interrupter is
the copper contact, which is connected to the interrupter end
Order No.: E50001-F710-A155-X-4A00
plate with a welded stainless steel bellows. Since the bellows is All rights reserved.
welded to both the contact and the interrupter end plate, the © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
failure rate of this moving connection is extremely low. This
accounts for the extremely high reliability of Siemens vacuum For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
interrupters today.
TechTopics No. 03
Vacuum vs. SF6
The technical literature over the past several decades includes For comparison, consider the problems of an air magnetic
a number of papers that discuss the merits and demerits of circuit breaker. No air magnetic circuit breaker includes a
vacuum and SF6 interrupting technologies. Of course, most of means to indicate that the arc chutes are not installed, or are
the papers are biased in favor of one of the competing installed incorrectly. The result of incorrectly installed arc
technologies, although several appear to strive for an unbiased chutes is usually complete circuit breaker destruction and
or neutral point of view. Perhaps the principle arguments used considerable damage to one or more switchgear cubicles. Yet,
by advocates of SF6 are: air magnetic circuit breakers were used for decades and no one
clamored for a “loss of arc chute integrity” indicator!
SF6 interrupter can be equipped with a low-pressure alarm
A
switch to give indication that gas pressure inside the The proponents of SF6 circuit breakers continually raise the
interrupter has been lost specter of catastrophic failure of circuit breakers on loss of
vacuum. To promote their SF6 technology, they feature their
Interruption in SF6 is “soft” (no current chopping).
low-pressure alarm switch option. The only reason they need
We believe that these issues are not significant relative to this option is because leaks in SF6 are a virtual certainty!
Siemens vacuum interrupters, and that the facts strongly favor
The reason that leaks are so much more likely with SF6 than
the use of vacuum as an interrupting medium.
vacuum relates to their construction. A vacuum interrupter is
Leak detection constructed with all connections between dissimilar materials
made by brazing or welding. No organic materials are used. In
SF6 proponents argue that a vacuum circuit breaker needs a
the early years, many hand production techniques were used,
“loss of vacuum detector” to be equivalent to an SF6 circuit
especially when borosilicate glass was used for the insulating
breaker with a low-pressure alarm switch. To our knowledge,
envelope, as it could not tolerate high temperatures. Today,
no supplier has a practical loss of vacuum detector on a
machine welding and batch induction furnace brazing are
vacuum circuit breaker. Over the years, various efforts have
employed with extremely tight process control. The only
been made to develop one, but they always stumble on one
moving part inside the vacuum interrupter is the copper
seemingly immutable law of the universe. It appears that any
contact, which is connected to the interrupter end plate with a
means to provide an indication (or remote alarm) on loss of
welded stainless steel bellows. Since the bellows is welded to
vacuum requires changes to the interrupter construction that
the contact stem and the interrupter end plate, the failure rate
radically increase the likelihood that a leak will occur.
of this moving connection is extremely low. The basic design
Further, the failure rate of today’s interrupters is so low that (welding/brazing) and the sophisticated process controls
loss of vacuum is no longer a significant concern. In the early account for the extremely high reliability of Siemens vacuum
1960s, it was a big problem. interrupters. As of 2010, the mean time to failure (MTTF) for
Siemens power vacuum interrupters had exceeded 57,000
interrupter years, illustrating that loss of vacuum is an
extremely remote occurrence.

In contrast, an SF6 interrupter requires a sliding or rotating seal The type 3EF surge limiter can absorb the trapped energy
at the point where the mechanism penetrates the wall of the associated with a vacuum interruption, whereas a surge
interrupter chamber. These seals can age and leak, so that a arrester has a greater energy absorption capacity to deal with
means to alarm on low pressure becomes mandatory. system phenomena, including lightning strikes and switching
surges from all sources. The 3EF surge limiter has a lower (i.e.,
The typical SF6 circuit breaker has twice the number of parts in
better) protective voltage level than an equivalent surge
the high voltage circuit as the equivalent vacuum circuit
arrester.
breaker. The typical number of moving parts in the high
voltage circuit is also twice as many. More significant, the Further information on the subject of voltage surges, which
number of inaccessible moving parts (under SF6 or vacuum) is can occur with vacuum interrupters, and their impact on
about 10 times as great! This last point is very significant, as equipment selection is contained in “Surge Limiters for Vacuum
moving parts obviously have a higher failure rate than non- Circuit Breakers,” by S. H. Telander, et. al., which appeared in
moving parts. The greater number of moving parts in the SF6 the July/August 1988 issue of the IEEE Transactions on Industry
circuit breaker dictates that it must be less reliable than a Applications. In capsule form, our recommendations for
vacuum circuit breaker. In some cases, an SF6 interrupter can vacuum circuit breaker application (vacuum contactor
be repaired, but only at the factory, which means that in most application recommendations differ) are as follows:
cases, the method of repair will in fact be replacement.
1. For transformers of full BIL rating, no additional protection is
The supporters of SF6 technology frequently claim that a needed.
leaking SF6 interrupter will still interrupt rated fault current one
2. For transformers of reduced BIL rating, add some form of
time. While this may sometimes be true, it is seldom true for all
protection (either surge limiters at the switchgear, surge
ratings, especially the high interrupting ratings common in
capacitors at the transformer or surge arresters at the
metal-clad switchgear and outdoor substation type circuit
transformer).
breakers. The dielectric strength and interrupting capacity of
SF6 circuit breakers depends on the existence of adequate gas 3. For motors with locked rotor current under 600 A, add surge
pressure. If the SF6 pressure drops to atmospheric level, there is protection (surge limiters at the switchgear, surge capacitors
no way of telling whether the arc chamber contains SF6, air or at the motor or surge arresters at the motor).
a mixture. As a result, there is no way to predict with
4. For motors with locked rotor current over 600 A, no
confidence the performance of the interrupter under such
additional protection is needed.
conditions.
‘Soft’ interruption
The other argument used extensively by advocates of SF6
technology is that vacuum circuit breakers chop current prior
to a natural current zero, and gas breakers do not. This is not
completely true, as chopping can occur with any type of
interrupting medium, including oil, air magnetic, vacuum, SF6
and air blast circuit breakers. Further, current chopping is a
statistical phenomenon, and also depends on the
characteristics of the circuit being switched and the amount of The information provided in this document contains merely general
current interrupted. There are numerous papers that discuss
application of vacuum circuit breakers in detail. While current further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
chopping was a major concern in the 1960s, when the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
common vacuum technology employed copper-bismuth of contract.
contacts, it is no longer an issue with today’s chrome-copper
contacts. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
The common areas of concern with application of vacuum own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
circuit breakers are transformers and motors. Siemens
application recommendations are contained on page 26 of the Siemens Industry, Inc.
selection and application guide for type GM-SG switchgear. We 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
recommend that all transformers have full BIL rating. Any
transformers that have reduced BIL (i.e., open dry-type Subject to change without prior notice.
designs) require surge protection. This can be provided by the Order No.: E50001-F710-A156-X-4A00
Siemens type 3EF zinc oxide surge limiter, or by a conventional All rights reserved.
zinc oxide surge arrester. Limiters and arresters differ in several © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
fundamental respects.
TechTopics No. 04
kA rated circuit breakers and switchgear
The rating structure for circuit breakers used in metal-clad The 1964 rating structure was based on a “constant MVA”
switchgear underwent major revision with the completion of interrupting capacity over a defined range of operating
the new ANSI/IEEE standards in 1999 and 2000. The voltages. At the maximum design voltage of the air magnetic
applicable standards (old and new) are detailed in Table 1. circuit breaker, the interrupting capacity was limited by the
ability of the arc chutes to handle the transient recovery
C37.06-2000 is a minor editorial revision of the 1997
voltage that appears across the circuit breaker contacts
edition. The 1997 edition was published in anticipation of
following interruption. As the operating voltage was
the changes in the ratings that were finally published in the
reduced, the interrupting capability of the circuit breaker
1999 versions of C37.04, C37.09 and C37.010. Together,
would increase, as the contacts could cope with higher
these revisions comprise the first major structural change to
interrupting currents and transient recovery voltage became
the circuit breaker rating standards since the change from
less of a concern. Finally, a limit would be approached at
the total (asymmetrical) current basis of rating to the
which the contacts could not absorb further increases in heat
symmetrical current basis of rating in 1964. C37.06 was
during interruption.
revised in 2009 with major organizational and technical
changes.
The rating structure introduced in 1964 (and modified in
1979 and again in 1987) recognized the prevalent medium-
voltage interruption technology (air magnetic) of the time.
Previous New
Standard Title
version version
C37.04 1979 1999 Rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers
1997
1979
C37.06 2000 AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis - preferred ratings and related capabilities
1987
2009
C37.09 1979 1999 Test procedure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
C37.010 1979 1999 Application guide for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
Table 1: The applicable standards

The maximum design voltage was designated as “V,” and The new rating structure continues the movement towards
the range over which the interrupting current capability harmonization of ANSI/IEEE requirements with those of IEC, a
increased as voltage decreased was defined in terms of process that has been pursued since 1951.
voltage range factor “K.” The voltage V/K defined the
What does this change imply for users of existing equipment
associated lower limit of voltage. In the range of V/K to V,
rated to the 1987 (or earlier) ratings? Probably very little.
the interrupting current varied so that the product of voltage
There are hundreds of thousands of circuit breakers installed
and interrupting current was a constant value. Stated more
that are rated to the old standards, and it is expected that
simply, the interrupting MVA (interrupting current X voltage
new circuit breakers and switchgear will be available with
X 1.732) was constant over this range. These relationships
the old “constant MVA” ratings for many years. New or
are summarized in Figure 1.
replacement circuit breakers with “constant MVA” ratings
The “constant MVA” rating structure served the industry, must continue to be designed, rated and tested to the old
both users and manufacturers, for many years. However, as standards, as the new standards do not define the full rating
new interrupting technologies became available, the structure or test requirements for the “constant MVA” circuit
“constant MVA” relationship became a poor representation of breakers.
the actual physics of interruption. In particular, one of the
desirable characteristics of a vacuum interrupter is the Gradually, however, the new “constant kA” circuit breakers
dielectric withstand capability across the open contacts and switchgear are becoming more widely used. The use
recovers nearly instantaneously following an interruption. of the “constant kA” ratings simplifies the application of
The practical effect of this is the interrupting capability of circuit breakers and switchgear, and also more accurately
the interrupter does not increase significantly as the represents the true physics of modern vacuum interruption
operating voltage is decreased from rated maximum design technology
voltage. Relating this fact to the “constant MVA” rating
structure, we see the voltage range factor of a vacuum
interrupter is essentially equal to 1.0. Figure 1: Relation of interrupting capability, close and latch capability,
rated maximum design voltage and rated symmetrical current "constant
This is one of the principle reasons that restructuring of the MVA basis"
circuit breaker ratings was undertaken by working groups
within IEEE and NEMA over the decade of the 1990s.
Tables 2 and 3 briefly summarize the ratings in the 1987 and
2000 versions of C37.06.
Close and latch capability =
It should be pointed out that the “historic MVA class” rms = 1.6 x K x I
included in the 1964 and 1979 versions of ANSI C37.06 peak = 2.7 x K x I
(but deleted in the 1987 version) were intended only
as convenient labels, not as an arithmetically accurate
calculation of the interrupting MVA for a given rating. For
example, the calculated MVA interrupting capacity for the Maximum symmetrical Interrupting capability =
350 “MVA class” is 338 MVA rather than 350 MVA. interrupting capability = rated I x
KxI (rated V/operating V)
TThe table of the new “constant kA” ratings has been kept
in the same format as the table for “constant MVA” ratings
to facilitate easy comparison. The “MVA class” is no longer
relevant. The voltage range factor (K) is also eliminated from
the new rating structure, but is shown as K = 1.00 in the new
table for comparison.
The close and latch ratings have been changed from 2.7 to
2.6 times the maximum symmetrical interrupting capacity
(peak amperes) and from 1.6 to 1.55 times the maximum Rated symmetrical interrupting
symmetrical interrupting capacity (rms amperes), to correct current I
mathematical errors in earlier standards.
V/K
Rated maximum voltage = V

Dielectric kV Close and latch kA
Historic Maximum Rated Maximum Range Continuous
"MVA" class kV kA kA factor current Impulse rms Peak
60 Hz
BIL 1.6 KI 2.7 KI
1,200
250 4.76 29 36 1.24 19 60 58 97
2,000
1,200
350 4.76 41 49 1.19 2,000 19 60 78 132
3,000
1,200
500 8.25 33 41 1.25 2,000 36 95 66 111
3,000
1,200
500 15.0 18 23 1.30 36 95 37 62
2,000
1,200
750 15.0 28 36 1.30 2,000 36 95 58 97
3,000
1,200
1000 15.0 37 48 1.30 2,000 36 95 77 130
3,000
1,200
1500 38.0 21 35 1.65 2,000 80 150 56 95
3,000
Table 2: ANSI C37.06-1987 (and 1964 and 1979) circuit breaker ratings ("constant MVA" rating basis)
Dielectric kV Close and latch kA
Historic Maximum Rated Maximum Range Continuous
"MVA" class kV kA kA factor current
Impulse rms Peak
60 Hz
BIL 1.55 KI 2.6 KI
40 40 1,200 62 104
Not
4.76 50 50 1.00 2,000 19 60 78 130
applicable
63 63 3,000 98 164
40 40 1,200 62 104
Not
8.25 50 50 1.00 2,000 36 95 78 130
applicable
63 63 3,000 98 164
Not 1,200
15.0 25 25 1.00 36 95 39 65
applicable 2,000
40 40 1,200 62 104
Not
15.0 50 50 1.00 2,000 36 95 78 130
applicable
63 63 3,000 98 164
1,200
Not 31.5 31.5 49 82
38.0 1.00 2,000 80 150
applicable 40 40 62 104
3,000
Table 3: ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009 (also 1997 and 2000) circuit breaker ratings ("constant kA" rating basis)

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A157-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 05
Reclosing applications - minimum reclosing time
Siemens circuit breakers used in metal-clad switchgear are Adjusted for the typical closing time of the circuit breaker, this
suitable for use in reclosing applications when applied in means there must be at least 0.26 seconds between the
accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/IEEE C37.04- closing of the tripping contact (for instance, the overcurrent
1999. In this standard, clause 5.5.1 defines minimum relay trip contact) and the initiation of the reclose command to
reclosing time as follows: the circuit breaker.
“5.5.1 Minimum reclosing time...The minimum reclosing The ANSI/IEEE application guide for high- voltage circuit
time of a circuit breaker is 0.3 seconds. This is the shortest breakers, ANSI/IEEE C37.010-1999, discusses the need for dead
permissible time in which the circuit breaker is required to time during reclosing operations in clause 5.9 as follows:
reclose with rated control voltage and rated pressure. It may
“5.9 Reclosing time… Before a circuit can be successfully
be necessary to add an external time delay to meet specific
re-energized, there must be sufficient dead time in the
application requirements....”
circuit breaker for the arc path at the fault to become
The purpose of this time delay is twofold. First, a minimum deionized. On a radial line where the load includes a large
time delay is needed to be reasonably sure that the arc at the motor component, arcing may be sustained after the breaker
fault location (out on the distribution lines) will not re-ignite at the source is opened. Synchronous motors and static
and thus create a second fault. This time is commonly referred capacitors included in the load will tend to prolong the
to as “deionization time.” Second, the time delay allows time period of arcing….”
needed for the circuit breaker’s mechanical linkages and
“...A dead time on the circuit of at least 135 ms is normally
latches to achieve a stable reset position before a closing
required to clear the fault’s ionized gases at 115 kV to
operation is initiated.
138 kV for circuit breakers without resistors across the
To apply a medium-voltage circuit breaker in a reclosing interrupters. The required dead time is greater for higher
application in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, the voltages or when selective pole tripping is used to clear only
user must ensure at least 0.30 seconds (300 ms) of time delay the faulted phases.
is incorporated between the initiation of tripping of the circuit
breaker and the completion of closing on the reclose
operation.

Dead times on the order of several seconds may be required The need for a minimum time delay on instantaneous reclosing
to allow secondary arcs to extinguish. (Secondary arcs result was less clear in earlier versions of the standards. Because of
from capacitive coupling between the normal and faulted this, it is reasonable to assume some initial reclose operations
phases.)” have failed in practice because the air at the point of the fault
had not deionized, and the fault re-ignited when the circuit
In accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.04, it is the user’s
breaker reclosed.
responsibility to ensure that the required 0.30 second time
delay is incorporated in the external control scheme. This All Siemens vacuum circuit breakers (including types GMSG,
time delay is not incorporated as an integral element of the 38-3AH3, SDV6 and GMI) are suitable for reclosing operations
circuit breaker mechanical design or electrical control when the reclosing system allows at least six cycles (100 ms)
circuitry. between “b” switch closing and the initiation of the close
command.
It is recognized some users will wish to reclose with a time
delay of less than 0.3 seconds (300 ms). As the time delay is
decreased from 300 ms, the possibility increases that a reclose
operation will fail due to excess ionization at the point of the
fault.
Sources vary in the estimates of the amount of time that must
be allowed between interruption of the fault and the The information provided in this document contains merely general
subsequent re-energization. Most of the sources indicate there descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
must be at least six cycles between arc interruption (on use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
opening) and contact make on the subsequent closing further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
operation. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
When consideration is given to extremes of circuit breaker
arcing time and closing time, we conclude that the reclosing All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
relay should be set to issue a reclose command no sooner than Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
six cycles (100 ms) after the “b” switch makes during an own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
opening operation.
If the reclosing relay does not monitor the “b” switch to 7000 Siemens Road
determine that the circuit breaker is open before it issues the Wendell, NC 27591
close command, then the reclosing relay should be set to issue
the reclose command no sooner than ten cycles (167 ms) after Order No.: E50001-F710-A158-X-4A00
the opening signal is issued. All rights reserved.
TechTopics No. 06
Three-cycle versus five-cycle interrupting time
This issue of TechTopics discusses the rated interrupting For Siemens type GMI, SDV and GMSG circuit breakers, the
time for circuit breakers used in metal-clad switchgear. average arcing time is approximately 9 ms, which is
Historically, ANSI/IEEE C37.04 (1979 or earlier) characterized representative of a very large number of interrupting tests in
circuit breakers with interrupting time classes, such as three the short-circuit test laboratory. The longest arcing time
cycle, five cycle and eight cycle. These classes always were observed during testing is typically 17 ms, which occurs on
rather gross approximations, because they made no tests with maximum offset asymmetrical current interruptions.
allowance for production variations, and also because the The latter are tests specifically intended to explore the outer
rated interrupting time could be exceeded by up to limits of interrupting performance.
50 percent under certain conditions. Further, a circuit
In accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.09-1999, tests must explore
breaker that was just slightly in excess of one rating class
both the shortest possible arcing time and the longest possible
would fall into the next higher (longer) class, giving the
arcing time.
impression of a radical change in performance that does not
necessarily reflect reality. Thus, there is a need to establish The longest possible arcing time results when contact part
some facts pertinent to discussion of three-cycle versus occurs just prior to a current zero that precedes a minor loop of
five-cycle circuit breakers. current. Because the first current zero occurs in a fraction of a
millisecond after contact part, and the second current zero
ANSI/IEEE standards no longer establish three-cycle and five-
occurs only a short time later (perhaps 1 ms to 2 ms), the
cycle classes, nor do they give assumed values for “contact-part
interruption does not take place until the current zero that
time” associated with a particular interrupting time. Instead,
ends the major loop of current.
rated interrupting time is now stated in terms of absolute time
in milliseconds. As stated, the purpose of these tests is to expose the circuit
breaker to the worst conceivable set of circumstances, so as to
ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.6 defines “rated interrupting
establish that under this most extreme condition the circuit
time” as “the maximum permissible interval between the
breaker successfully interrupts. These worst-case conditions
energizing of the trip circuit at rated control voltage and rated
rarely occur in actual installations.
operating pressure for mechanical operation, and the
interruption of the current in the main circuit in all poles.”
This definition makes it clear that the rating must consider the
‘worst-case’ conditions for all variables. Thus, it must consider
the longest arc duration under the most onerous conditions.
Of equal importance, it must consider the longest opening
time (including worst case production variations).

Type GMI circuit breakers Description Average time Range of values
For Siemens type GMI circuit breakers, the relevant data is
detailed in Table 1.
Opening time 33 ms 25 ms to 41 ms
If ANSI/IEEE C37.04 based rated interrupting time on nominal
opening time and average arcing duration, our type GMI circuit
breakers would be rated 42 ms (2.5 cycles). However, C37.04
states the rating has to be based on the worst-case conditions, Arcing duration 9 ms 2 ms to 17 ms
which means that the type GMI circuit breakers are rated 58 ms
(3.5 cycles). Actual interrupting times on production circuit
breakers could range from 42 ms (25 ms opening time + 17 ms Interrupting time 42 ms 27 ms to 58 ms
arcing duration) to 58 ms (41 ms opening time + 17 ms arcing
duration), using the worst case arcing duration.
What does this mean to a user with respect to application of Table 1: Type GMI circuit breakers (also type GMSG (five-cycle) circuit
the circuit breakers? Basically, nothing. The reason for this breakers)
relates to the way circuit breakers are tested in the short-circuit
test laboratory. When circuit breakers are tested for short-
circuit performance, they are tested to a philosophy that is
completely reversed from the manner in which they are rated. Description Average time Range of values
For ratings, the circuit breakers are rated in accordance with

the worst-case (longest) times. For testing, actual test Opening time 29 ms 25 ms to 33 ms
parameters are set up based on the worst-case short-circuit
conditions, which means the shortest possible times.
What does this mean for the GMI circuit breaker? Using the Arcing duration 9 ms 2 ms to 17 ms
data in Table 1, the circuit breaker is tested as though it is the
fastest circuit breaker, for example, with the shortest opening
time. Therefore, the short-circuit conditions are set up in the
laboratory to expose the circuit breaker to the conditions that Interrupting time 38 ms 27 ms to 50 ms
would occur if (for the GMI circuit breaker) it had an opening
time of 25 ms. Therefore, the circuit breaker is tested as
though it was a historic three-cycle circuit breaker (1.5-cycle Table 2: Type GMSG (three-cycle) circuit breakers
contact part time in terms of C37.04-1979, clause 5.10.2.2).
The result is that the type GMI circuit breaker has the
interrupting capability of a three-cycle circuit breaker, even
though we must rate it as a five-cycle circuit breaker.
If you consider only the nominal value for operating time The information provided in this document contains merely general
(33 ms opening) and worst-case arcing time (17 ms arcing), descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
the circuit breaker is a three-cycle circuit breaker. However, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
under the limits of production tolerances, it varies between further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
2.5 cycles and 3.5 cycles. Since ANSI/IEEE uses the “maximum respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
permissible interval,” it’s a five-cycle circuit breaker (since a
3.5-cycle class doesn’t exist). All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Type GMSG circuit breakers Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
For type GMSG circuit breakers, two rated interrupting times
are offered: 83 ms (five cycles) and 50 ms (three cycles). The Siemens Industry, Inc.
data for type GMSG (five-cycle) circuit breakers is the same as 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
shown in table 1. For type GMSG (three-cycle) circuit breakers,
the data is as shown in table 2. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A159-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 07
Current transformers (CTs) - Use of 600 V CTs in metal-clad switchgear
For many decades, it has been common practice to use 600 V To demonstrate the dielectric capabilities, C37.20.2 requires
window (‘donut’ or toroidal) current transformers (CTs) in that the switchgear be tested using a normal circuit breaker
metal-clad switchgear rated through 38 kV. Conceptually, use compartment equipped with the maximum complement of
of 600 V CTs in switchgear is exactly analogous to use of 600 V current transformers installed. Typically, our designs are similar
bushing CTs in outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers or in large for 1,200 A, 2,000 A and 3,000 A current ratings. Accordingly,
power transformers. the arrangement tested is the configuration with the highest
continuous current circuit breaker and compartment. This
Occasionally, we are asked to explain why such a practice is
arrangement is appropriate because it has the largest physical
justified. The simple answer is the voltage rating of the current
conductors used in the design, which, in turn, dictates that the
transformer (by itself) is irrelevant. The important question is
dielectric stress is more severe than for lower continuous
whether the complete system, of which the CT is a part, meets
current ratings having smaller conductors.
the performance requirements for the system. The dielectric
capability of the complete system is established by the Our types GM-SG (up to 15 kV) and type GM38 (up to 38 kV)
combination of air surrounding the circuit breaker primary switchgear designs have successfully passed all required design
runback conductor, the insulating tube incorporated in the tests, demonstrating that the integrated system meets the
primary disconnect assembly, the air between the CT and the ratings required by the standards.
primary disconnect assembly tube, plus the insulation of the
CT.
For metal-clad switchgear constructed to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2,
the complete system must meet the dielectric test
requirements (power frequency withstand as well as lightning
impulse withstand) for the completely assembled switchgear.

Why are 600 V window CTs commonly used in metal-clad
switchgear?
Window-type CTs are less costly than molded high-voltage
CTs, resulting in a more economical product for users.
Window-type CTs do not incorporate the primary
conductor as an integral component of the CT itself, thus
isolating the CT from major dielectric as well as thermal
stresses.
The primary conductor bracing for short-circuit forces is
provided by the switchgear structure and the circuit
breaker primary runback conductor, instead of by the CT,
which allows higher short-circuit levels.
Since the CTs are not located directly in the high-voltage
bus structure, they are more accessible for maintenance,
inspection, changeout (for example, if a ratio change is
needed) or for addition of CTs after initial installation.
Window CTs are readily available in multi-ratio descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
configuration. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Lead-times for window CTs are generally a fraction of respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
those for high-voltage CTs. of contract.
Use of window CTs allows the CTs to be installed in the All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
circuit breaker compartment, around the primary Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
disconnect assembly, which saves space in both the bus own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
compartment and in the cable compartment.
7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A160-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 08
Heat generation estimation for type GM switchgear (up to 15 kV)
We are often asked to provide estimated heat generation data The amount of heat generated is related to the square of the
for our equipment. This issue of TechTopics provides current, so a circuit breaker operating at one-half rated current
information that allows calculation of approximate heat will have heat generation only one-quarter of that at full-rated
generated by the type GM switchgear under assumed loading continuous current. Because the effect of the square
conditions. relationship is very significant, it is overly conservative to
estimate heat generation based on the assumption that all
The heat generation data given in the table is based on full-
sections and all circuit breakers each carry their rated
rated continuous current. Actual heat generation calculations
continuous current at all times. Air conditioning systems sized
must take into account the true loading of the equipment.
based upon such estimates will be much larger than the real
operating conditions will require.
Table 1: Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts (W)) for type GM switchgear (up to 15 kV)
Continuous current - circuit breaker (rows 1-3) or main bus (row 4)
Rated current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A 4,000 A

Category
Actual current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A 4,000 A
Circuit breaker cell with circuit breaker 475 W 871 W 1,396 W 2,480 W
Vertical section with main bus 154 W 187 W 220 W 390 W
Space heaters per vertical section 400 W 400 W 400 W 400 W
Voltage transformer (VT) rollout 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W
4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA

Control power transformer (CPT) (drawout or stationary)
rating rating rating rating
Microprocessor type 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W
Relaying and instrumentation
Electromechanical non-complex 100 W 100 W 100 W 100 W
per circuit breaker cell
Electromechanical complex 200 W to 300 W 200 W to 300 W 200 W to 300 W 200 W to 300 W

Notes on assumptions: Table 2: Calculations
1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

Heat
controlled by a thermostat. Hence, their load is Category
generation
represented as a continuous load. The purpose of
space heaters is to prevent condensation, and this is
2,000 A circuit breaker at 1,400 A = 871 x (1,400/2,000)2 = 427 W
not limited by the absolute temperature. Even when
a thermostat is used to control the heaters, it is set
to shut the heaters off at a temperature of 1,200 A circuit breaker at 250 A = 475 x (250/1,200)2 = 21 W
approximately 110 . Therefore, in an air-
conditioned room, the heaters would be energized A 1,200 A circuit breaker at 600 A = 475 x (600/1,200)2 = 119 W
continuously.
2. Heat generated by current transformers is ignored 1,200 A circuit breaker at 550 A = 475 x (550/1,200)2 = 100 W
as it is usually insignificant and varies according to
the CT ratio as well as the loading.
Total heat generation for circuit breaker cells 667 W
3. The CPT heat generation estimate is very
conservative and assumes the CPT is operated at Vertical sections with 2,000 A bus at 1,400 A =
B 275 W
full-rated capacity. If normal loading is at less than 3 x 187 x (1,400/2,000)2 =
full rating, heat generation may be adjusted by the
square of the percent loading. C Space heaters for three vertical sections = 3 x 400 = 1,200 W
4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

estimates are very approximate and are normally D VT rollout = 1 x 50 = 50 W
estimated on the basis of the number of circuit
breaker cells. Extensive relaying and E CPT = 1 x 4% x 10 kVA = 400 W
instrumentation may warrant additional
conservatism in the estimation of associated heat
generation. F Relaying and instrumentation = 4 x 50 = 200 W
5. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

Total estimated heat generation under assumed loading conditions 2,792 W
To estimate the heat generated under actual loading
conditions, determine the component heat generation
for each of the components indicated in Table 1. Estimated
heat generation for circuit breakers should be adjusted for
actual loading based on the ratio of the squares of the actual
current and the rated current.
To be precise, this adjustment should also be made for the
actual current loading of the main bus for each individual The information provided in this document contains merely general
vertical section, but this is frequently ignored in the interest of descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
simplification. Instead, the main circuit breaker loading is use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
usually assumed to be equal to the main bus loading in all further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
vertical sections. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
Example: Assume a lineup with three vertical sections, one
2,000 A main circuit breaker (loaded to 1,400 A), three All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
1,200 A feeder circuit breakers (loading 250 A, 600 A and Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
550 A), 2,000 A main bus and space heaters. The lineup
includes one VT rollout, one 10 kVA CPT and microprocessor Siemens Industry, Inc.
relaying, and instrumentation. The calculations would be as 7000 Siemens Road
described in Table 2. Wendell, NC 27591
If true loading were not considered (for example, all Subject to change without prior notice.
calculations performed on the basis of full-rated current), the Order No.: E50001-F710-A161-X-4A00
calculations would yield a heat generation of 4,707 W or about All rights reserved.
170 percent of the “real” heat generation. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 09
Heat generation estimation for type GM38 switchgear (up to 38 kV)
generated by the type GM38 switchgear under assumed continuous current. Because the effect of the square
loading conditions. relationship is very significant, it is overly conservative to
estimate heat generation based on the assumption that all
The heat generation data given in the table is based on full-
sections and all circuit breakers each carry their rated
rated continuous current. Actual heat generation calculations
continuous current at all times. Air conditioning systems sized
must take into account the true loading of the equipment.
Table 1: Approximate full load heat generation (in watts (W)) for type GM38 switchgear (up to 38 kV)
Rated current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A

Category
Actual current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A
Circuit breaker cell with circuit breaker 461 W 738 W 1,443 W
Vertical section with main bus 211 W 275 W 452 W
Space heaters per vertical section 1,000 W 1,000 W 1,000 W
Voltage transformer (VT) stationary 250 W 250 W 250 W
Control power transformer (CPT) (stationary) 4% of CPT kVA rating 4% of CPT kVA rating 4% of CPT kVA rating
Microprocessor type 50 W 50 W 50 W
Electromechanical non-complex 100 W 100 W 100 W
Electromechanical complex 200 W to 300 W 200 W to 300 W 200 W to 300 W

Notes on assumptions: Table 2: Calculations
1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

Heat
controlled by a thermostat. Hence, their load is Category
generation
represented as a continuous load. The purpose of
space heaters is to prevent condensation, and this is
2,000 A circuit breaker at 1,650 A = 738 x (1,650/2,000)2 = 502 W
not limited by the absolute temperature. Even when
a thermostat is used to control the heaters, it is set
to shut the heaters off at a temperature of 1,200 A circuit breaker at 850 A = 461 x (850/1,200)2 = 231 W
approximately 110º F. Therefore, in an air-
conditioned room, the heaters would be energized A 1,200 A circuit breaker at 200 A = 461 x (200/1,200)2 = 13 W
continuously.
2. Heat generated by current transformers is ignored 1,200 A circuit breaker at 600 A = 461 x (600/1,200)2 = 115 W
as it is usually insignificant and varies according to
the CT ratio as well as the loading.
3. The CPT heat generation estimate is very
conservative and assumes the CPT is operated at Vertical sections with 2,000 A bus at 1,650 A =
B 936 W
full-rated capacity. If normal loading is at less than 5 x 275 x (1,650/2,000)2 =
full rating, heat generation may be adjusted by the
square of the percent loading. C Space heaters for five vertical sections = 5 x 1,000 = 5,000 W
4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

estimates are very approximate and are normally D Set of VTs = 1 x 250 = 250 W
estimated on the basis of the number of circuit
breaker cells. Extensive relaying and E CPT = 1 x 5% x 15 kVA = 600 W
instrumentation may warrant additional
conservatism in the estimation of associated heat
generation. F Relaying and instrumentation = 4 x 50 = 200 W

conditions, determine the component heat generation
for each of the components indicated in Table 1. Estimated
heat generation for circuit breakers should be adjusted for
actual loading based on the ratio of the squares of the actual
current and the rated current.
To be precise, this adjustment should also be made for the
actual current loading of the main bus for each individual The information provided in this document contains merely general
vertical section, but this is frequently ignored in the interest of descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
simplification. Instead, the main circuit breaker loading is use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
usually assumed to be equal to the main bus loading in all further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
vertical sections. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
Example: Assume a lineup with five vertical sections, one
2,000 A main circuit breaker (loaded to 1,650 A), three All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
1,200 A feeder circuit breakers (loading 850 A, 200 A and Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
includes one set of VTs, one 15 kVA CPT and microprocessor Siemens Industry, Inc.
relaying, and instrumentation. The calculations would be as 7000 Siemens Road
described in Table 2. Wendell, NC 27591
calculations performed on the basis of full-rated current), the Order No.: E50001-F710-A162-X-4A00
calculations would yield a heat generation of 9,546 W. All rights reserved.
TechTopics No. 10
Heat generation estimation for Series 81000TM controllers
We are often asked to provide estimated heat generation data for To estimate the heat generated under actual loading conditions,
our equipment. This paper provides information that allows determine the component heat generation for each of the
calculation of approximate heat generated by the Series 81000TM components indicated in the table. For simplicity, assume that
motor controller equipment under assumed loading conditions. main bus loading in each vertical section is equal to the total
The heat generation data given in the table for motor controllers estimated load of the controller lineup, and adjust the heat
is on the basis of full load operation at 1.0 service factor, and generated for each vertical section by the square of the
assumes that each controller includes a 0.75 kVA control power percentage of total estimated load to rated main bus current.
transformer that is only lightly loaded when the motor is running. Space heater load should be assumed to be continuous.
For the main bus, the data assumes operation at full rated
continuous current.
Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts (W)) for

Series 81000TM motor controllers
Motor controller fuse size Maximum FLA FVNR RVAT
2R 26 A 440 W 710 W
3R 46 A 545 W 850 W The information provided in this document contains merely general
4R 64 A 645 W 975 W descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
6R 88 A 740 W 1,110 W use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
9R 123 A 775 W 1,215 W further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
12R 183 A 910 W 1,485 W respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
18R 272 A 1,290 W 1,930 W of contract.
24R 360 A 1,570 W 2,530 W
36R 420 A 2,090 W 3,290 W All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Rated current own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Vertical section with main bus 600 A 60 W Siemens Industry, Inc.

1,200 A 185 W 7000 Siemens Road
2,000 A 265 W Wendell, NC 27591

Space heaters, per vertical section 125 W Order No.: E50001-F710-A300-X-4A00
Voltage transformer trunnion 50 W © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.

Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

TechTopics No. 11
Fast bus transfer times for type GMI circuit breakers
Automatic fast bus transfer has been the subject of endless Thus, for the immediate future, the vast majority of bus transfer
technical papers over several decades. The “ideal” fast bus activity in large industrial facilities and in power generation plants
transfer action would transfer the load to the reserve source will involve conventional circuit breakers in medium-voltage
instantaneously on loss of normal supply, with no loss of power metal-clad switchgear.
to the load. This is nearly achievable with the new generation of
static transfer switches, but these switches are very costly, and
there are significant limitations on short-circuit capabilities with
the present static transfer switch systems.
Dead bus times for Siemens type GMI circuit breakers
Dead bus time, ms (cycles)

Source of closing signal
No arcing With arcing
-3 to 27 ms -14 to 21 ms
Simultaneous close and trip signals
-0.2 to 1.6 cycles -0.8 to 1.3 cycles
Trip, then close, using standard 52b contact on normal source 35 to 56 ms 24 to 50 ms

circuit breaker to initiate closing of reserve source circuit breaker 2.1 to 3.4 cycles 1.4 to 3.0 cycles
Notes:
n Assumes control voltage at rated value. n Standard 52b contact is equivalent to a traditional “fast b” contact.
n Dead bus time (no arcing) is the time from contact part on the normal The standard 52b contact closes approximately 3 ms after contact part.
source circuit breaker to contact make on the reserve source circuit n The upper and lower values consider the extremes of circuit breaker
breaker. operating times, 52b contact timing variation and arcing time duration.
n Dead bus time (with arcing) is the time from the end of arcing (non-fault
current) on the normal source circuit breaker to contact make on the
reserve source circuit breaker.

Transfer time is an important system design consideration, and If the reserve source circuit breaker closes when the two
several aspects should be evaluated in design of the transfer voltages are 180 degrees out-of-phase, the motor windings
scheme and in the selection of devices and settings: will be exposed to nearly double normal line-to-ground
1. If the reserve source circuit breaker is given a close signal voltage. Since the motor torque is related to the square of the
simultaneously with the trip signal to the normal source circuit applied voltage, as much as four times normal torque can be
breaker, overlap can result if the reserve source circuit breaker applied to the motor shaft. This high level of torque may be
closes before the normal source circuit breaker completes the sufficient to cause severe damage to the motor shaft or to the
interruption. During the overlap time, fault current exposure driven load.
increases dramatically and may exceed the interrupting n The inrush current will be very high and may exceed the
capacity of the circuit breakers used. However, since the normal locked-rotor current seen during a normal start of the
overlap period is short, many users feel that the likelihood of a motor. These high levels of current may cause thermal damage
fault during the overlap period is not sufficient to warrant use to the motor insulation, leading to premature failure of the
of circuit breakers with higher short-circuit interrupting ratings. winding insulation to ground.
During the overlap period, if the normal source should fail, the
n The very high inrush current may cause the protective relays to
normal source will become energized (backfed) from the
operate, and thereby shut down the load. This defeats the
reserve source, which may result in loss of both sources.
purpose of the original transfer, which is to keep the plant
Simultaneous signals, or a variant, have historically been
running.
commonly used for routine transfers. Users should carefully
assess the risks associated with overlap during transfers n The high inrush currents may lead to severe voltage sag on the
initiated with simultaneous signals. Except for routine reserve source, with the result that there may be inadequate
transfers, use of simultaneous close and trip signals is not torque to reaccelerate the motors. One or more of the motors
recommended. may fail to reaccelerate, with the possibility of damage to the
motor.
2. The transfer time should be short enough to avoid significant
slowing of motors, to avoid excessive inrush currents on 3. A scheme to implement fast bus transfer should never be
motors when the reserve source circuit breaker re-energizes implemented if the normal and reserve sources are not
the loads. This is important for a variety of reasons: synchronized. If it is possible that the sources may not be in
synchronism, a transfer scheme can be employed with a
n When the normal source fails, the driven (motor) loads slow
synchronism-check relay to prevent closing of the reserve
down and act as generators due to their inertia. As the motor
source circuit breaker if the two sources are out-of-phase
slows, the back electromagnetic field (EMF) of the motor slips
beyond a defined limit.
with respect to normal system voltage, producing a phase
angle between the back EMF and the reserve source. In the
worst case, the motor back EMF can be 180 degrees out-of-
phase with the system voltage.
4. If the two sources are not synchronized, or if the transfer 5. The automatic transfer function should be disabled if a short
cannot be completed quickly (say, within six cycles), the circuit exists on the load bus, i.e., when the normal source
transfer should be delayed. A common scheme for controlling circuit breaker is tripped by overcurrent or differential
transfer under such conditions employs a voltage protective protective relays. Generally, this is accomplished by using a
relay connected to the load bus to monitor residual bus lockout protective relay (device 86) to disable closing of the
voltage. The rule of thumb is that transfer is delayed until the reserve source circuit breaker in the event that overcurrent
residual bus voltage is no higher than 25 percent of normal protective relays initiate tripping of the normal source circuit
system voltage. breaker.
Experience in many systems has suggested that closing the
reserve circuit breaker with 25 percent or less residual bus
voltage will not result in excessive shock to the system. The
amount of time that will be needed for residual bus voltage to
decline to 25 percent will vary according to the amount of
motor load, motor type and associated inertia, but the order of
magnitude is typically five seconds or so. Certain kinds of
process plants may be able to tolerate this length of outage,
while many will not. For example, in large power generating
stations, if fans or pumps slow down appreciably, the boiler The information provided in this document contains merely general
may be pressure surged or a pump cavitated. An alternative to descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
the use of a residual bus voltage protective relay is to use a use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
time delay protective relay to impose sufficient time for the further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
residual voltage to decline to 25 percent or lower. One reason respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
this alternative is popular is that it eliminates the need for bus of contract.
voltage transformers, and the time delay protective relay is
somewhat less costly than a residual bus voltage protective Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
relay. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A301-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 13
Use of latched contactors to switch transformers
Medium-voltage controllers are synonymous with control of The latched contactor requires a reliable source of control power
motors up to 7.2 kV. However, medium-voltage controllers are for tripping. A dc (battery) source is preferred, but if the only
equally suitable as feeders for other types of loads, particularly source of control power is a control power transformer connected
transformers. For such loads, the contactor is often modified to to the primary voltage source, an ac capacitor trip device is
incorporate a mechanical latch so that the contactor does not appropriate.
automatically open when system voltage collapses. The close circuit should use a momentary contact pushbutton, so
The latched contactor is essentially identical in construction to a that the main coil is energized only during closing. Similarly, the
magnetically-held contactor. However, instead of relying on a trip (latch release) circuit should use a momentary contact
continuously energized main coil to keep the contactor closed, pushbutton. For automatic tripping from the protective relays, a
the latched contactor utilizes a mechanical latch to hold the normally open contact should be connected in the trip (latch-
contactor closed. In essence, the latched contactor emulates a release) circuit, and a normally closed contact from the protective
medium-voltage circuit breaker. However, there are distinct relay should be connected in the close circuit. The purpose of the
differences between a contactor and a circuit breaker that must normally closed relay contact in the close circuit is to assure that
be kept in mind. the main coil circuit is de-energized during tripping. It is also
desirable to include a lockout (86) relay function, either by means
Control circuit considerations
of the 86 function incorporated in some multifunction
A conventional magnetically-held contactor, once it is closed, microprocessor relays, or by means of a separate lockout relay.
remains closed as long as the main coil is energized. Most
It is important that the user’s external control circuit not include a
commonly, the control supply for the main coil circuit is a control
maintained contact in the close circuit. A latched contactor
power transformer supplied as an integral part of the complete
operates in the same manner as a magnetically-held contactor,
controller. Thus, for motor loads, the motor is automatically
and in addition, includes a mechanical latch. If the main coil
disconnected when system voltage collapses, thus preventing
circuit is continuously energized, the contactor will remain closed
damage to the motor.
even if the trip latch is operated.
By contrast, the latched contactor remains closed when the
Sources vary in the estimates of the amount of time that must
system voltage collapses. This is particularly desirable when the
be allowed between interruption of the fault and the
loads are of a type where it is desirable that the load be
subsequent reenergizing. Most of the sources indicate there
automatically reenergized when the system voltage returns, such
must be at least six cycles between arc interruption (on
as lighting transformers.
opening) and contact make on the subsequent closing
A magnetically-held contactor opens when a contact in the main operation.
coil control circuit opens. On the other hand, a latched contactor
is unlatched by the closing of a contact in the latch circuit,
allowing the contactor to open. Thus, the control required for a
latched contactor somewhat resembles that of a medium-voltage
circuit breaker.

Short-circuit and overload considerations Contactors are designed to have low-energy control power
A contactor used to supply a transformer differs from a contactor requirements. As a result, they may operate relatively slowly. For
used to supply a motor only in the characteristics of the current- the contactors used in Siemens SIMOVAC and SIMOVAC-AR
limiting fuses. Fuses used to protect motor circuits are Class R medium-voltage controllers, the typical closing time is 40 ms for
fuses, with protective characteristics tailored to the application 400 A and 70 ms for 720 A and the opening time is 90 ms for
400 A and 35 ms for 720 A. While these times are much longer
needs of motors. For transformer feeders, the fuses should be
than the operating times for circuit breakers, they generally do
Class E fuses, designed to provide proper protection for
not require any special consideration in control circuits or with
transformers.
respect to system operating procedures.
Contactors, without fuses, have only a limited interrupting
Latched contactors are integrated in the design of the medium-
capacity. Therefore, the contactor must always be used in
voltage controllers, avoiding the need for transition sections and
combination with current-limiting fuses. Complete overcurrent
large switchgear enclosures as would be needed with circuit
and short-circuit interruption capability is provided by the
breakers.
combination of the contactor for interrupting normal load
currents and moderate overload currents, and the current-limiting Since the latched contactor uses fuses for short-circuit protection,
fuses for interrupting currents above the capabilities of the in the event of a heavy fault, the fuses may operate. If this occurs,
contactor alone. the downtime associated with replacement of the fuses is longer
than that required if a circuit breaker is used. However,
Overcurrent relays should be used to provide protection for
experience suggests that heavy faults are relatively rare, so it is
moderate overload currents, so that unnecessary fuse operation
unlikely that this will be a major issue.
is avoided. This protection must be coordinated with the
continuous current-carrying ability of the fused contactor. Since For additional discussion on the comparative aspects of
fuses generate a considerable amount of heat, it is not contactors and circuit breakers, refer to TechTopics No. 42.
uncommon for the fuses to be sized somewhat larger than the Summary
continuous current would suggest. Therefore, overcurrent relays
not only provide overload protection for the transformer, but also Latched contactors have been used for decades to feed
provide overload protection for the fused contactor. This is transformer and other non-motor loads, and their use has grown
appropriate, since the function of the fuses is to provide short- significantly in recent years. Use of latched contactors is
circuit protection, not overload protection. particularly appropriate when transformers are fed from medium-
voltage controllers.
Single-phase protection
Modern motor overload protective devices often incorporate
protection to automatically disconnect a motor in the event that
one phase of the incoming supply is lost. However, for non-motor
feeders, this “single-phase protection” may not be necessary or
desirable. For example, capacitors or lighting loads are usually not
harmed by single phasing. Nevertheless, the user should consider
whether single-phase protection is appropriate. The most
common way to achieve this function is to provide blown-fuse
trip accessory, which is mechanically actuated by a plunger on The information provided in this document contains merely general
the current-limiting fuse. With this option, when any single
primary current-limiting fuse operates, the indicator plunger on further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
the fuse actuates the tripping bar, which causes the contactor to respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
open. of contract.
Other application considerations
The latched contactor shares many of the application Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
characteristics of magnetically-held contactors. Unlike a circuit own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
breaker, a contactor is designed for frequent operation, and
latched contactors provided in Siemens SIMOVAC and SIMOVAC-
7000 Siemens Road
AR controllers are suitable for 200,000 electrical operations. The Wendell, NC 27591
size of transformer that can be fed from a contactor is, of course,
limited by the available fuses (especially at 7.2 kV), as well as by Subject to change without prior notice.
the continuous current capability of the contactor. Order No.: E50001-F710-A165-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 14
X-radiation emissions by vacuum interrupters
Vacuum circuit breakers have, for many years, included a label to

The task force determined that a reasonable cumulative exposure
advise users of the potential for emission of X-radiation under
limit was 500 milliroentgens (mR) per year. It was also estimated
certain conditions. These labels led users to wonder what the real
that a person performing high-potential tests would perform no
exposure to X-radiation might be.
more than 2,000 one-minute tests in a year, or 33.3 hours of
Many newspaper articles written in the 1960s warned of the tests. The 500 mR upper limit, in 33.3 hours of tests, defined a
hazards associated with radiation emissions from color TV limitation of 15 mR/hour (at a distance of one meter) for a
picture tubes and from microwave ovens. This led to the passage vacuum interrupter. This became the limit used for qualification
of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This of a vacuum interrupter to ANSI C37.85. This standard also
act was written in very generic language, with the result that any established the requirement that manufacturers provide an
device that can emit radiation under any circumstances was appropriate X-radiation label on the vacuum interrupter or on the
subject to the Act. In addition to imposing requirements on TVs, circuit breaker.
microwaves, medical X-ray equipment, nuclear facilities, and
Experience has suggested that these limits were conservatively
other sources of radiation, the language of the Act includes
derived, and further, that the actual emission levels from vacuum
vacuum interrupters.
interrupters are well below the limits established in ANSI C37.85.
Under what circumstances can a vacuum interrupter emit X-rays? A few pertinent reasons for this level of conservatism include:
X-rays may be produced when a substantial voltage is imposed
n The cumulative exposure limit of 500 milliroentgens (mR) per
across open contacts in a vacuum. For vacuum interrupters, this
year is about 10 percent of the limit established by current
means that X-rays may be produced when a voltage well above
government regulations.
the operating voltage is imposed across the open contacts. For
practical purposes, this means that X-rays are not produced n The assumed level of 2,000 high-potential tests per year is
during normal operation, and only become of any significance more than nearly any user might actually perform in a year.
when dielectric (high-potential) tests are being conducted. X-rays n X-radiation exposure is inversely related to the square of the
are not produced when the contacts are closed, or when the distance from the vacuum interrupter. Thus, doubling the
interrupter is de-energized. distance from the vacuum interrupter reduces the X-radiation
In response to the passage of the Radiation Control Act, a joint exposure by a factor of four.
task force of representatives of the industry and government was n For electrical safety reasons, test personnel generally maintain
formed. Tests of X-radiation emission by vacuum interrupters distances from the object under test well in excess of the one-
from all manufacturers were conducted. In addition, exposure meter distance used to establish the emission limits in the
limits established by government regulations were evaluated in standard.
comparison to normal test practices to determine reasonable
limits on X-radiation emission by vacuum interrupters. The results
of these studies formed the basis for ANSI C37.85, “Alternating-
Current High-Voltage Power Vacuum Interrupters — Safety
Requirements for X-Radiation Limits,” first issued in 1972.

n Modern vacuum interrupters exhibit levels of X-radiation Decades of experience have shown that there is little practical
emission well below the allowable limits in the standard. exposure to X-radiation from vacuum interrupters. X-rays are
Siemens’ vacuum interrupter emission is of the order of a few produced only with open contacts, and are insignificant at normal
percent of the limits established in the standard. These low operating voltages. During high-potential testing, the exposure is
levels of X-radiation emission are verified by annual also at low levels if test personnel remain at distances appropriate
certification testing conducted by a branch of the German for the test voltage involved. Even thought the exposure is low,
government. X-radiation labels are required in order to comply with the original
1968 legislation.
The emission limits established in ANSI C37.85 assume that high-
potential tests are conducted at the “field test” voltage allowed in
the relevant apparatus standards. The field test voltage is
75 percent of the factory test on new equipment. Field test
voltages for vacuum interrupters on Siemens’ circuit breakers are
shown in the table.
Field test voltages
Rated maximum Factory Field Field

Circuit breaker type design voltage test voltage test voltage test voltage
(kV) (kV rms) (kV rms) (kV dc)
4.76 kV 19 kV 14 kV 20 kV
GMSG circuit breakers used in GM-SG or GM-SG-AR metal-clad switchgear 8.25 kV 36 kV 27 kV 38 kV
15.0 kV 36 kV 27 kV 38 kV
38-3AH circuit breakers used in GM38 metal-clad switchgear 38.0 kV 80 kV 60 kV 85 kV
15.5 kV 50 kV 37.5 kV 53 kV
SDV outdoor circuit breakers 25.8 to 27.6 kV 60 kV 45 kV 64 kV
38.0 kV 80 kV 60 kV 85 kV
The dc test voltage is listed even though it is not officially

supported by ANSI. Practically, it is recognized that dc high-
potential test equipment is more easily transported than ac high-
potential test equipment, so most field dielectric tests are
conducted using dc. However, it is important that dc high- The information provided in this document contains merely general
potential test equipment employing unfiltered half-wave rectifiers
not be used. These test sets often produce peak voltages much further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
higher than indicated by the test set. Therefore, the actual respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
voltage applied to the vacuum interrupter by such test sets will be of contract.
significantly higher than the voltage for which the vacuum
interrupter is qualified. This, in turn, has two unfortunate All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
consequences. First, and most important, the level of X-radiation Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
emission may be much higher than that which occurs at the
correct test voltage. Second, the leakage current during the test Siemens Industry, Inc.
may be so high that test personnel may conclude that the 7000 Siemens Road
vacuum interrupter has lost vacuum, when it has not. For these Wendell, NC 27591
reasons, dc high-potential test devices using half-wave
rectification must not be used to test vacuum interrupters. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A303-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 15
Expected life of electrical equipment
How long should electrical equipment last? However, if the equipment were operated at its full
temperature capability continuously 24 hours per day, 365
If engineers were surveyed regarding the life they expect
days per year, the life expectancy of the insulation would be
from electrical equipment, the answers would probably
pretty short. If this is so, why do we see examples of
range from a minimum of 20 years to a maximum tending
electrical equipment still in service 40 years or more after it
towards infinity. It is not unheard of to find an ancient open-
was installed?
frame circuit breaker mounted on a two-inch thick slate
panel still carrying current after 50 years. Consider the effect of elevated temperatures on insulation.
The life of insulation follows a physical relationship based
The answer to this important question, however, is not as
on temperature, expressed by the Arrhenius† equation:
simple as quoting statistics or giving a set figure. The
engineer only has to look around at the extreme range of k = Ae -Ea/RT
operating conditions and environments, and the differing
In this form, the equation is not terribly useful. However, if
levels of past maintenance to realize the futility of trying to
we take the natural logarithm and rearrange the terms, it
arrive at one numerical answer. If the electrical equipment is
becomes a generalized expression for a straight line:
located in a high rise, modern office building, there is a
good chance that general cleanliness prevails and ln k = ln A – (Ea/R) * (1/T)
temperatures are moderate. On the other hand, consider the Since A, Ea and R are constants, this becomes a straight line
same equipment in a paper mill or in a dust-filled with a negative slope of (Ea/R) plotted against the inverse of
environment, perhaps even in the tropics, and the life temperature (1/T).
expectancy cannot be the same.
The practical use of this expression is for estimating the life
It should be obvious that a good maintenance schedule and of electrical insulation, which would be the value “k” in the
regular inspections are required to keep electrical equipment Arrhenius expression. There are a wide variety of insulating
in good working order, just as it would for a fine materials used in switchgear equipment, but a general rule-
automobile. There is another factor working against of-thumb is the life of electrical insulation is reduced by half
longevity that deserves more attention than it usually gets. for each rise of 10 °C in insulation average temperature. The
That factor is temperature. ANSI/IEEE standards for metal- most commonly used indicator of electrical insulation life is
clad and metal-enclosed switchgear limit the total dielectric capability, so the Arrhenius expression becomes an
temperature for most bus conductors to 105 °C. This results indicator of dielectric life.
from the maximum design ambient of 40 °C, plus the
allowable temperature rise of 65 °C. Thus, the maximum
continuous temperature that most insulating materials will
be exposed to is 105 °C.

This is how accelerated life testing is accomplished. An Users can’t change the laws of physics, but users do have
insulation material is placed in a controlled oven and held at some input for the conditions in which electrical products
an elevated temperature to compress the time-to-failure. are applied. Ambient temperature, loading, maintenance
When failures do occur, the engineer works backwards to and environmental conditions are within the user’s control.
establish the mean time to failure (MTTF) at normal
temperatures.
†
r. Svante August Arrhenius was a Swedish scientist, professor of
D
Let’s look at a practical example of these concepts and the physics and the founder of physical chemistry. In 1903, he received
implications for the expected life of insulation in electrical the Nobel Prize for Chemistry for his study of ionic theory.
equipment. Suppose we have a material that has an
expected life of 20,000 hours at 125 °C. What would its
approximate life be at other temperatures?
For this example, if the material is used in switchgear with
105 °C maximum total temperature at rated continuous
current, it would have an MTTF of 9.1 years. On the other
hand, if the total temperature is reduced by 20 °C, the life
would increase to over 36 years.
Temperature Life (hours) Expected life
185 313 0.4 months

175 625 0.9 months
165 1,250 1.7 months
155 2,500 3.5 months
145 5,000 6.9 months
135 10,000 13.9 months
125 20,000 2.3 years
115 40,000 4.6 years
105 80,000 9.1 years
95 160,000 18.3 years
85 320,000 36.5 years
75 640,000 73 years
The temperature of a bus bar and therefore, of the

insulation material that supports and surrounds it, is a The information provided in this document contains merely general
function of the ambient temperature around the bus bar,
and the square of the loading. Thus, if 100 percent current further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
yields 65 °C temperature rise, 80 percent loading will respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
produce 64 percent of 65 °C, or 42 °C temperature rise. This of contract.
is a reduction of 23 °C from the temperature at 100 percent
loading, resulting in an increase of life expectancy from nine All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
years to about 40 years. Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
This example illustrates the dominance of temperature as a
determinate of insulation life, and explains why electrical Siemens Industry, Inc.
equipment applied conservatively is still in use after 40 7000 Siemens Road
years of more. Ambient temperature is also significant, but Wendell, NC 27591
of lesser importance as its effect is not a square relationship.
When we design switchgear equipment, our objective is that Order No.: E50001-F710-A304-X-4A00
the equipment will have an insulation life upwards of 30 All rights reserved.
years when applied in a reasonably conservative manner in
the usual service conditions defined in ANSI/IEEE standards. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
Of course, the quality of maintenance and the installed
environment will have a very significant effect. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
TechTopics No. 16
Bus joint fundamentals
Proper design of bus bar joints is a necessity for long equipment

life. The objectives that a good bolted bus bar joint must fulfill Cap screw Flat washers
include: Bus bars
It must provide good conductivity, so that the bus system

will meet the temperature rise requirements in the ANSI/IEEE Lock washers
standards.
It must withstand thermal cycling, so that the low-resistance Figure 1: Anatomy of a bolted bus bar joint
joint will be maintained for the life of the equipment.
The joint pressure should be high (for good conductivity), but
not so high that cold flow of the bus material occurs, which Figure 1 shows a bolted bus bar joint, simplified to show two bus
would cause the joint to deteriorate with time. bars connected using a single bolt. Except in rare situations, the
bus bars are silver plated (standard) or tin plated (optional), to
The joint should have good resistance to corrosion in normal
improve the resistance to corrosion. The bolt is a high-strength,
installation environments.
grade 5 cap screw, while the nut is a grade 2 (heavy wall) nut.
It must be able to withstand the mechanical forces and thermal The joint includes a large diameter, thick, flat washer on both
stresses associated with short-circuit conditions. sides of the joint, adjacent to the bus bars. A split lock washer is
installed under the nut to assure that the joint stays tight over the
life of the equipment.

Why do we use a grade 2 nut with a grade 5 bolt? The grade 2 Figure 2 shows the distribution of forces in a bolted bus
nut is more ductile than the grade 5 bolt, so that when the nut bar joint. To obtain a low-resistance bus bar joint, we must
is torqued in place, the threads in the nut will tend to be swaged establish and maintain sufficient pressure, and distribute the
down and burnished to a degree, which results in a more equal pressure over a large area. Initially, the two bus bars mate at
distribution of load on all threads. This spreads the force more only a few peaks or high spots. As the bolt is tightened, the
evenly and avoids unacceptable stress levels in the bolt and the bus conductors begin to deform, bringing more of these peaks
nut. into contact. At the design pressure, there is a relatively larger
Some users request that special, non-magnetic hardware be contact area, so that there are a multitude of parallel electrical
used in bus joints. Historically, particularly in open bus systems connections between the bus bars.
exposed to the weather, difficulties were encountered with As shown in Figure 2, the force is concentrated more heavily
corrosion, and this may be one reason that some still ask for around the bolt hole. Since the pressure is highest in the
non-magnetic hardware. Others prefer non-magnetic hardware vicinity of the bolt hole, the surface irregularities in this area
because of the perception that it results in a lower temperature are flattened out as the mating surfaces are forced into more
rise. While these reasons may have had merit decades ago, intimate contact. The joint resistance in this area will be lower
Siemens feels they are unnecessary today. Non-magnetic than elsewhere in the joint. As distance from the bolt hole
hardware (usually stainless steel or silicon bronze) is expensive increases, pressure decreases and joint resistance increases.
and difficult to obtain. In addition, the tensile strength and yield Beyond the area defined by the washer, pressure decreases
strength of non-magnetic hardware is lower than that of high- rapidly and little effective current-carrying capacity results.
strength steel, so that tightening torques will generally be lower Figure 2 shows how the large diameter washers serve to
with the special hardware. The net effect of lower torque and distribute the clamping force more uniformly over a wider area
pressure may very well counterbalance any slight temperature than would be the case with a smaller washer, or none at all.
rise benefit associated with non-magnetic hardware. A properly designed, bolted bus bar joint will allow the bus
Siemens also specifies that the flat washers are to have larger system to meet the temperature rise limits imposed by the
diameter and greater thickness than standard washers. The ANSI/IEEE standards, and will also have the thermal and
purpose of the washers is to distribute the clamping force of the mechanical capability to withstand the heat generated and
bolts over a wider area. To accomplish this, a washer is needed forces imposed under the worst-case short-circuit conditions.
that is relatively rigid, with a larger diameter than would be
normal for the size bolt used. If a normal, small diameter, thin
washer (or worse, none at all) is used, the joint will deteriorate
over time because of cold flow of copper from the high-pressure
region directly under the bolt head (or the nut).
Elastic limit of
condictor material
Pressure PSI
Maximum
Pressure Average The information provided in this document contains merely general
pressure descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
Lapped Hole Lapped further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
bars bars respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Thick rigid washers to
Wendell, NC 27591
distribute the applied
bolt force
Figure 2: Distribution of forces in a bolted bus bar joint Order No.: E50001-F710-A305-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 17
Main bus continuous current ratings
The continuous current ratings of bus bars used for main bus The underlying philosophy of the standards is to establish
and connections in medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear performance requirements, rather than setting an arbitrary
are determined by the requirements of ANSI/IEEE standard “formula” for determining the size or quantity of bus bars. User
C37.20.2-1999. This standard requires that the bus conductors specifications calling for a limit on current density are obsolete.
used in a switchgear design pass a continuous current test Originally, they may have had some validity when many
(often referred to as a “temperature-rise” or “heat-run” test). installations were custom built at the installation site or in a
The temperature rise at the end of the test must not exceed local fabrication shop.
the limits established by the standard, as summarized in Such assemblies seldom had the benefit of rigorous design
Table 1. The test must continue until the temperature rise of all testing conducted to verify the integrity of the design, and
points monitored is less than 1 °C in one hour, considered to be usually had relatively low-continuous current and short-circuit
the time at which temperature rise has stabilized. current ratings.
Table 1: Temperature rise limits in switchgear
Our experience is that the allowable current density varies
widely, depending on a number of factors that can affect
Application Temperature rise limit temperature rise. Some of these include:
Continuous current rating; the law of diminishing returns
Buses and connections with silver-surfaced applies to the sizing of bus bars, in other words, as the
65 °C
or tin-surfaced connecting joints continuous current rating increases, the current density of
the bus will ordinarily decrease
Size and shape of bus bars; a thicker bus bar is not as
In addition, the bus system must successfully pass the short- efficient as a narrow bus bar, and a single thick bar is not as
circuit tests specified in the standard. The short-time withstand efficient as multiple bus bars (of equal total cross-sectional
current test verifies that the bus system can carry the rated area) with space between the bus bars
short-time withstand current for two seconds, which imposes Configuration of the bus; bars arranged with the wide
the most severe thermal stress on the conductors, joints and dimension oriented vertically are more efficient than when
supports. The momentary withstand-current test subjects the the bars are oriented horizontally
bus system to the maximum offset current (e.g., the close and
Spacing between bars of the same phase; bars spaced
latch peak-current rating of the associated circuit breakers)
farther apart are more efficient
during a test period of 10 cycles, which tests the mechanical
strength of the bus system. Proximity to magnetic materials; steel bus-compartment
barriers or other magnetic-enclosure elements can
Some user specifications request that bus bars be sized based
dramatically affect temperature rise, particularly for higher
on current density – typically 1,000 A/in2 (and sometimes as
continuous current ratings
low as 750 A/in2). Notice that the requirements of the ANSI/
IEEE standards do not stipulate a particular current density.

Spacing between bars of differing phases; proximity effects This table illustrates that current density is not a valid criterion
can increase the apparent resistance of a conductor, and for sizing of bus bars. For low continuous current ratings, a
thus, its temperature rise current density requirement of 1,000 A/in2 would result in a
Air flow in the vicinity of the bus; improving air flow around bus larger than required by temperature rise performance.
the bus will remove heat at a higher rate, thus decreasing For higher bus continuous current ratings, the current density
temperature rise criterion (1,000 A/in2) would result in a bus bar that would fail
to meet temperature rise requirements by a substantial margin.
Proximity to other sources of heat; for example, circuit
breakers
Emissivity of the bus; bare bus bars that are covered with a
dark or dull coating will exhibit a lower temperature rise
Presence of insulation and type of insulation; conformal
insulation (such as fluidized-bed epoxy) decreases the
temperature rise compared to a bare bus bar, whereas non-
conformal insulation (such as loose fitting sleeves) may
increase temperature rise.
Table 2 gives a brief review of the sizes of bus bars used for
various main bus continuous current ratings in Siemens types The information provided in this document contains merely general
GM-SG and GM-SG-AR (up to 15 kV) and GM38 (up to 38 kV) descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
metal-clad switchgear. In each case, the design tests validate
temperature rise performance within the 65 °C limit in the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
standards. of contract.
Table 2: Main bus sizes All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Main bus continuous current rating own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Type of equipment
1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
Types GM-SG Quantity One One Two
Wendell, NC 27591
and GM-SG-AR bus size 0.25 X 4 0.38 X 6 0.38 X 6
switchgear Current Subject to change without prior notice.
(up to 15 kV) 1,200 A/in2 889 A/in2 667 A/in2
density Order No.: E50001-F710-A306-X-4A00
Quantity One One Two © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
Type GM38 bus size 0.25 X 4 0.50 X 5 0.50 X 6
switchgear
(up to 38 kV) Current
1,200 A/in2 800 A/in2 500 A/in2
density
TechTopics No. 18
Bus joint and primary disconnect plating
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2, the standard for medium-voltage metal- Silver plating is nearly ideal for switchgear bus joints. Silver
clad switchgear, specifies temperature rise limits for buses and corrodes (tarnishes) over time, but silver tarnish is nearly as
connections as shown in Table 1. From this table, it is clear good a conductor as pure silver. Silver is relatively hard, making
that the manufacturer has a substantial incentive to use plated it suitable for sliding joints (for example, primary disconnect
connection joints. Bus bars sized on the basis of unplated assemblies) and for rotating joints (for example, moving switch
connection joints will require approximately double the blades). Perhaps the only disadvantage of silver is that it
material that will be required with silver-plated or tin-plated corrodes heavily in certain environments, particularly those
buses. having concentrations of hydrogen sulfide.
Table 1: Temperature rise limits in switchgear
Application Temperature rise limit
Buses and connections with unplated copper-to-copper connecting joints 30 °C
Buses and connections with silver-surfaced or tin-surfaced connecting joints 65 °C
Connection to insulated cables, unplated copper-to-copper (note 1) 30 °C
Connections to insulated cables, with silver-surfaced or tin-surfaced connections (note 1) 45 °C
Note 1: Limits for connections to cables assume 90 °C cables
Why do the standards allow a higher temperature rise if Tin plating is a good material for non-sliding and non-rotating
the connecting joints are plated? The answer lies in an applications. Tin maintains good conductivity over time, and
understanding of the basic objective of the design of a bus performs well in the presence of hydrogen sulfide. However,
joint, which is to achieve a low-resistance joint that will tin is soft and has higher resistance than silver. Both of
remain so over the life of the equipment. Simple unplated these characteristics make it unsuitable for use in primary
copper-to-copper joints do not fulfill this objective, unless the disconnects for power circuit breakers or for moving switch
temperature rise is held to a relatively low value. Copper oxide blades.
is a poorer conductor than pure copper, and copper oxidizes at Because of the overall performance advantage of silver, our
a more rapid rate as temperature increases. practice is to provide silver plating for bus connection joints,
primary disconnect assemblies, and cable connection terminal
pads in switchgear and on circuit breakers.

As an option we can provide tin plating of main bus connecting
joints and cable connection terminal pads in the switchgear
stationary structure. Primary disconnect assemblies and all
plated connections on circuit breakers remain silver plated.
Silver-plated surfaces should be coated with Siemens electrical
contact lubricant to provide a degree of protection from harsh
environments, such as those including hydrogen sulfide.
In order to maintain low-resistance connections over the life of
the equipment, a few basic maintenance concepts should be
observed:

Keep bus connections clean

Do not use abrasives (such as scouring pads, wire brushes,
no-oxide grease) to clean plated surfaces

In all environments, keep sliding or moving surfaces
lubricated with a thin film of Siemens electrical contact
lubricant

In severe environments, keep all silver-plated surfaces The information provided in this document contains merely general
lubricated with a thin film of Siemens electrical contact descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
lubricant

Keep bolted joints tight. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A307-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 19
Bus joint current density
In TechTopics No. 16, we discussed the fundamentals of good For these reasons, whenever possible, we design our bus
bolted bus bar joint design. In this issue, we discuss the topic joints to have a single row of bolts across the width of the
of bus joint current density. Some users request a particular bus bars, with the number of bolts determined by the width
maximum value of current density in bus joints, but this of the bus and the configuration of the joint. Our bus joint
design criterion may not have any relation to the resulting configurations have passed continuous current tests to verify
temperature rise of the bus system. that the bus system operates within the 65 °C temperature rise
We saw in TechTopics No. 16 that most of the actual current limitation of the standards. They have also passed short-circuit
transfer in a bus joint occurs under the area defined by the tests, including short-time withstand current and momentary
heavy flat washer used under the bolt head and under the nut. withstand-current tests, to verify that the designs withstand
The result is that regions of the joint not in the area defined the thermal and mechanical stresses associated with short-
by the washer carry little current. They also do not have a circuit duties.
significant effect on temperature rise of the joint. Therefore,
increasing the area of the bus connection joint, by itself, does
little to reduce the temperature rise of the bus system.
We could also try to improve the performance of a bus joint (in
other words, lower its temperature rise) by adding more bolts.
However, as with many other aspects of electrical engineering, descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
the “law of diminishing returns” applies. Usually, bus joints are use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
constructed with a single row of bolts (one, two or three bolts, further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
depending on bus size), located across the width of the bus respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
bar. If we add a second row of bolts, we find that the second of contract.
row has only a small effect on the temperature rise of the joint.
The reason for this is that most of the current transfer occurs in
the row of bolts located closest to the end of the bus bar. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Over the years, we have learned that the current density in
the joint is not necessarily correlated with the temperature Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
rise performance of the joint. Of much greater importance
Wendell, NC 27591
is the manner in which the clamping pressure of the bolts is
distributed over as wide an area of the bus joint as possible. Subject to change without prior notice.
Also important are the general factors that influence Order No.: E50001-F710-A308-X-4A00
temperature rise in the bus system, as discussed in TechTopics All rights reserved.
No. 17. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.

TechTopics No. 20
Power factor correction capacitor - sizing for motors
Use of power factor correction has increased significantly in To understand how to compensate for the poor power factor
recent years as utilities have implemented power factor penalty of a motor, we need to look at the components of the motor
clauses in their supply contracts. Apart from the energy cost current. The real power-producing work is done by the
implications, poor power factor is undesirable because a resistive component of the current, which varies with the
low power factor requires larger size conductors for a given load on the motor. The reactive current of the motor consists
kW load. Higher line currents associated with a low power of two components. The first is the magnetizing current that
factor also result in higher losses in the conductors and in establishes the magnetic flux in the core, which allows the
transformers for a given kW load. motor to function. The magnetizing current is essentially
Power factor basics constant regardless of load.
Power factor is the ratio of the real power (kW) to the apparent The second component of reactive current is the leakage
power (kVA), as shown in the figure below. Mathematically, reactance current, and this component varies according to the
the power factor is the cosine of the angle Θ. load on the motor.
kW (real power)
Θ corrected kVAR corrected
Θ uncorrected
kVA (apparent power)

kVAR added to
improve PF

The leakage reactance current is relatively small, so that the Over-correction (and self-excitation)
total reactive current is relatively constant (compared to the It is important not to over-correct when sizing capacitors that
kW variation) over the range of motor no-load to motor full- are connected in parallel with the motor. The motor requires
load. For a range of medium-voltage machines sampled, the reactive power (kVARs) to create the magnetic flux. The power
ratio between full-load reactive current and no-load reactive factor correction capacitor can supply the kVARs required by
current varied from 140 percent to 260 percent (depending on the motor when the motor is switched off. At the instant that
machine design, speed and voltage). For perspective, the ratio the motor is switched off, the motor and the driven load are
between full-load kW and no-load kW is in the order of at full speed. When the motor is switched off, the motor and
4,000 percent. load inertia will continue to drive the motor. If the magnetizing
Because the variation in reactive current is relatively low over current required by the motor is available from the charged
the load range of the machine, a capacitor sized to compensate capacitor, the motor will operate as a voltage generator and
to a desired power factor level at full load will maintain the maintain the voltage on the motor.
power factor in the near vicinity of the desired level over the In the preferred situation, the power factor correction
entire load range. Typically, a capacitor sized to correct full-load capacitors are sized at or below 90 percent of the no-load kVAR
power factor to 95 percent will maintain power factor in the requirement of the motor. If the capacitors are too large, the
95 percent to 98 percent area over the full range from no-load motor can be subjected to self-excitation, which will result in
to full-load. excessive voltages applied to the capacitors and motor. The
The switching device and the conductors used to connect to capacitors are sized based on 90 percent of the no-load kVAR
the power factor correction capacitors must be sized for at requirement because the manufacturing tolerance of the
least 135 percent of the rated current of the capacitors, as capacitors is –0 percent, +15 percent.
required by Article 460 of the National Electrical Code® The parallel combination of the capacitors and the motor
(NFPA 70®) (NEC®). inductance forms a resonant circuit. If the capacitance is
Location of power factor correction capacitors lower than the magnetizing reactance of the motor (under-
Ideally, power factor capacitors should be connected on the correction), the resonant frequency is higher than the power
load side of the contactor and switched as a unit with the system frequency. Thus, as the motor slows down after
motor. This arrangement minimizes the switching costs, as an disconnection, the generated voltage will not pass through
additional switching device is not needed. This also provides a the resonant frequency, and the voltage to which the motor is
path for the capacitor to discharge quickly when the contactor exposed will not be hazardous.
is opened. More importantly, it automatically adds capacitance On the other hand, if the capacitance is equal to the
to the system only when the load with the poor power factor is magnetizing reactance of the motor (critical-correction), the
present. This avoids the possibility of over-compensation in the resonant frequency equals the power system frequency. Under
system, which can occur with large bulk capacitors. this situation, the motor can be exposed to overvoltage due to
If the capacitors are connected on the load side of the self-excitation.
contactor, but on the line side of the current transformers Finally, if the capacitance is larger than the magnetizing
used for the overload relay, the settings of the overload relay reactance of the motor (over-corrected), the resonant
can be based directly on the (uncorrected) motor data. If frequency is less than the frequency of the power system.
the capacitors are connected on the load (motor) side of Thus, as the motor slows down after disconnection, the
the current transformers, the settings for the overload relay generated voltage frequency will pass through the resonant
must be determined from the motor data, adjusted by the frequency of the inductive-capacitive circuit. Tests have shown
effect of the power factor correction capacitors. To avoid this that the voltage on the motor and capacitors can range up
complication, it is preferred that the capacitors be connected to 175 percent of normal system voltage, and can result in
on the line side of the current transformers. damage to the capacitors, the motor and the driven load.
Do not connect power factor capacitors directly to the motor Because of the hazards of self-excitation, ANSI/IEEE 18-1992
when: stated that the total kVAR of capacitors connected in parallel
Using a solid-state (“soft”) starter with the motor shall not exceed the amount of kVAR required
to correct the no-load power factor to unity, in order to avoid
Using open-transition on reduced-voltage starters (high- overvoltage due to self-excitation. This same requirement
transient torques) was contained in the NEC as recently as 1981, but has
If the motor can be restarted before it has a chance to slow (unfortunately) been dropped from later editions.
down appreciably (high-transient torques) When the 2002 edition of IEEE 18 was issued, this
If the motor load is a high-inertia load (long deceleration requirement was transferred to a new application guide for
time and self-excitation) shunt capacitors, IEEE 1036, and in the 2010, this valuable
information was deleted. Instead, reference was made to IEEE
For reversing machines (high-transient torques)
141 (the “Red” book), where it appears in clause 8.9.3.2.
For two-speed motors.
Excessive torque on re-energization A simplified procedure for determining the size of power factor
Power factor correction capacitors should not be used if the correction capacitors is:
motor can be re-energized quickly after disconnection. When 1. Obtain motor data from the manufacturer:
capacitors are connected in parallel with the motor inductance, (Preferred) no-load magnetizing kVAR (this may be difficult
the capacitor can supply some or all of the current required to to obtain)
create the magnetic flux. As the motor continues to rotate due
to the motor and load inertia, the motor generates a voltage. (Second best) motor no-load amperes from motor
As the motor slows, this voltage moves out-of-phase with the manufacturer (or, measure no-load amperes with machine
system voltage. In the worst case (with capacitors oversized, running)
high-inertia load and a motor with a steep magnetization Motor horsepower (HP), full-load efficiency, full-load power
curve), the generated voltage can reach 175 percent of system factor (PF).
voltage. If re-energization occurs under this condition, with
2. Determine desired corrected PF (not over 95 percent).
the system voltage and the motor voltage 180° out-of-phase,
the motor can be subjected to transient torques far in excess of 3. Calculate required kVARs as:
its capabilities. In tests, transient torques as high as 20 times
normal have been measured.
kVARrequired for correction =
As a general guide, if the kVAR of the capacitors is equal to or [HP x 0.746 (watts/HP)/efficiency] x factor from table
less than the motor magnetizing kVAR, and the motor load is
not a high-inertia load, the generated voltage should decay
within about five seconds. Therefore, the motor should not be
(The factor shown in the table is the difference in the
re-energized for at least five seconds after disconnection when tangents of the power factor angle for uncorrected and
using parallel-connected power factor correction capacitors. corrected PF.)
Sizing of power factor correction capacitors 4. Calculate no-load (motor magnetizing) kVAR.
The preferred size for power factor correction capacitors should
(ideally) be provided by the motor manufacturer. If the motor kVARmotor magnetizing =
manufacturer’s recommendation is not available, the size of no-load (A) x motor voltage (kV) x 1.732
the capacitors can be determined as described in this section.
Mathematically, the kVARs required for correction can be
computed from the relations shown in the figure on page four, ( Note: This is not mathematically correct, but the error is
and from the following equations: less than one percent provided the no-load power factor is
less than about 14 percent.)
5. Compare (desired) kVAR required for correction to 0.90 x (no-load)
kVAR = kW x tan Θ kVARmotor magnetizing. Select capacitors equal to the desired kVAR,
kVARuncorrected = kW x tan Θuncorrected but never more than 0.90 x no-load kVAR. If this does not
kVARcorrected = kW x tan Θcorrected match a standard capacitor size, use the next smaller size.
kVARrequired for correction = kW x (tan Θuncorrected - tan Θcorrected) References:

ANSI/IEEE 18-1992, “Shunt Power Capacitors,” clause 8.3.1

ANSI/NFPA 70-2011, “National Electrical Code (NEC),”
Article 460

ANSI/NFPA 70-1981, “National Electrical Code (NEC),”
Article 460-7(a)
ANSI/IEEE 141-1993, “Recommended Practice for Electric
Power Distribution for Industrial Plants,” clause 8.9

Beeman, D. “Industrial Power Systems Handbook,” McGraw-
Hill (1955), Chapter 8.
Correction factors for capacitor selection
Desired corrected power factor

85.0 86.0 87.0 88.0 89.0 90.0 90.5 91.0 91.5 92.0 92.5 93.0 93.5 94.0 94.5 95.0
60 0.714 0.740 0.767 0.794 0.821 0.849 0.863 0.878 0.892 0.907 0.923 0.938 0.954 0.970 0.987 1.005
61 0.679 0.706 0.732 0.759 0.787 0.815 0.829 0.843 0.858 0.873 0.888 0.904 0.920 0.936 0.953 0.970
62 0.646 0.672 0.699 0.726 0.753 0.781 0.795 0.810 0.825 0.839 0.855 0.870 0.886 0.903 0.919 0.937
63 0.613 0.639 0.666 0.693 0.720 0.748 0.763 0.777 0.792 0.807 0.822 0.837 0.853 0.870 0.887 0.904
64 0.581 0.607 0.634 0.661 0.688 0.716 0.731 0.745 0.760 0.775 0.790 0.805 0.821 0.838 0.854 0.872
65 0.549 0.576 0.602 0.629 0.657 0.685 0.699 0.714 0.728 0.743 0.758 0.774 0.790 0.806 0.823 0.840
66 0.519 0.545 0.572 0.599 0.626 0.654 0.668 0.683 0.697 0.712 0.728 0.743 0.759 0.775 0.792 0.810
67 0.488 0.515 0.541 0.568 0.596 0.624 0.638 0.652 0.667 0.682 0.697 0.713 0.729 0.745 0.762 0.779
68 0.459 0.485 0.512 0.539 0.566 0.594 0.608 0.623 0.637 0.652 0.667 0.683 0.699 0.715 0.732 0.750
69 0.429 0.456 0.482 0.509 0.537 0.565 0.579 0.593 0.608 0.623 0.638 0.654 0.670 0.686 0.703 0.720
70 0.400 0.427 0.453 0.480 0.508 0.536 0.550 0.565 0.579 0.594 0.609 0.625 0.641 0.657 0.674 0.692
71 0.372 0.398 0.425 0.452 0.480 0.508 0.522 0.536 0.551 0.566 0.581 0.597 0.613 0.629 0.646 0.663
72 0.344 0.370 0.397 0.424 0.452 0.480 0.494 0.508 0.523 0.538 0.553 0.569 0.585 0.601 0.618 0.635
73 0.316 0.343 0.370 0.396 0.424 0.452 0.466 0.481 0.495 0.510 0.525 0.541 0.557 0.573 0.590 0.608
74 0.289 0.316 0.342 0.369 0.397 0.425 0.439 0.453 0.468 0.483 0.498 0.514 0.530 0.546 0.563 0.580
Uncorrected power factor
75 0.262 0.289 0.315 0.342 0.370 0.398 0.412 0.426 0.441 0.456 0.471 0.487 0.503 0.519 0.536 0.553
76 0.235 0.262 0.288 0.315 0.343 0.371 0.385 0.400 0.414 0.429 0.444 0.460 0.476 0.492 0.509 0.526
77 0.209 0.235 0.262 0.289 0.316 0.344 0.359 0.373 0.388 0.403 0.418 0.433 0.449 0.466 0.483 0.500
78 0.183 0.209 0.236 0.263 0.290 0.318 0.332 0.347 0.361 0.376 0.392 0.407 0.423 0.439 0.456 0.474
79 0.156 0.183 0.209 0.236 0.264 0.292 0.306 0.320 0.335 0.350 0.365 0.381 0.397 0.413 0.430 0.447
80 0.130 0.157 0.183 0.210 0.238 0.266 0.280 0.294 0.309 0.324 0.339 0.355 0.371 0.387 0.404 0.421
81 0.104 0.131 0.157 0.184 0.212 0.240 0.254 0.268 0.283 0.298 0.313 0.329 0.345 0.361 0.378 0.395
82 0.078 0.105 0.131 0.158 0.186 0.214 0.228 0.242 0.257 0.272 0.287 0.303 0.319 0.335 0.352 0.369
83 0.052 0.079 0.105 0.132 0.160 0.188 0.202 0.216 0.231 0.246 0.261 0.277 0.293 0.309 0.326 0.343
84 0.026 0.053 0.079 0.106 0.134 0.162 0.176 0.190 0.205 0.220 0.235 0.251 0.267 0.283 0.300 0.317
85 0.000 0.026 0.053 0.080 0.107 0.135 0.150 0.164 0.179 0.194 0.209 0.225 0.240 0.257 0.274 0.291
86 0.000 0.027 0.054 0.081 0.109 0.123 0.138 0.152 0.167 0.183 0.198 0.214 0.230 0.247 0.265
87 0.000 0.027 0.054 0.082 0.097 0.111 0.126 0.141 0.156 0.172 0.187 0.204 0.221 0.238
88 0.000 0.027 0.055 0.070 0.084 0.099 0.114 0.129 0.145 0.160 0.177 0.194 0.211
89 0.000 0.028 0.042 0.057 0.071 0.086 0.102 0.117 0.133 0.149 0.166 0.184
90 0.000 0.014 0.029 0.043 0.058 0.074 0.089 0.105 0.121 0.138 0.156
91 0.000 0.015 0.030 0.045 0.060 0.076 0.093 0.110 0.127
92 0.000 0.015 0.031 0.047 0.063 0.080 0.097
93 0.000 0.016 0.032 0.049 0.067
94 0.000 0.017 0.034
95 0.000
The information provided in this document contains merely general Siemens Industry, Inc.
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual 7000 Siemens Road
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of Wendell, NC 27591
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms Subject to change without prior notice.
of contract. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A127-X-4A00
All product designations may be trademarks or product names of © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
own purposes could violate the rights of the owners. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 21
”Bus bracing” in metal-clad switchgear
For decades, users and specifiers of metal-clad switchgear Rated short-time withstand current – This is the average
have used the phrase “bus bracing” to define a specific level symmetrical current that the switchgear must be able to
of mechanical strength for the bus system of metal-clad withstand for a period of two seconds.
switchgear. However, this term is not used in any of the How do the above ratings relate to the ratings of the
standards that contain the major requirements for metal- components used in the switchgear assembly? As one would
clad switchgear. Further, no specific rating for bus bracing is expect, the ratings directly correlate to produce a coordinated
specified in the standards. This problem with ill-defined terms system.
has been confusing for years. The purpose of this issue of
TechTopics is to discuss the requirements for switchgear buses Momentary-current and peak-withstand current ratings –
and to define what is meant when the term “bus bracing” is Historically, the standards specified a momentary-current
used. (rms asymmetrical or rms total current) rating. In fact, the
NEC® 490.21 (A)(4) still uses “momentary” to designate
The principle standard applicable to metal-clad switchgear is the maximum asymmetrical current. However, for many
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999. As it relates to the bus ratings, this years, the ANSI/IEEE C37-series of standards have been
standard defines several ratings: moving away from the concept of the asymmetrical rms
Rated momentary-withstand current – This is the maximum current towards the concept of the peak current. The reason
rms total (asymmetrical) current the switchgear bus must for this is that it is the magnitude of the peak current that
withstand, and is measured at the major peak of the determines the maximum forces applied to the conductors.
maximum cycle of the maximum offset phase. The test to Because of this shift in the philosophy of the standards, the
verify this rating requires a test duration of at least 10 cycles equivalent requirements are stated somewhat differently in
of power frequency. During this test, the peak current at the the various standards.
major peak in the maximum cycle must be at least
260 percent of the rated short-time current of the
switchgear.
Rated peak-withstand current – This is not strictly a rating,
but it is the peak current value (260 percent) that must
be attained during the momentary withstand-current test
described above.

Circuit breaker rating or characteristic Units Value Coordinating switchgear rating or characteristic
Short-circuit (interrupting) current Short-time withstand current

kA sym 100% = IST
(ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.8.1) (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.6)
Short-time withstand current Short-time withstand current

kA sym 100% of IST
(ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.8.2.3.b) (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.6)
Maximum permissible tripping delay Short-time withstand current

Seconds 2s
(ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009, Table 1) duration (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.6)
Closing and latching current Peak withstand current

kA peak 260% of IST
(ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.8.2.3.a) (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.3)
Closing and latching current Momentary current

kA rms 155% of IST
(calculated rms current corresponding to the peak current) (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.3)
Close and latch current duration Momentary current duration

Cycles 10 cycles
(ANSI/IEEE C37.09-1999, clause 4.8.4.1) (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, clause 5.4.3)
For circuit breakers rated on the “constant MVA” basis What are the equivalent ratings? The following table is based
(refer to TechTopics No. 4), the momentary rating is most on the “kA-rated” circuit breakers in accordance with the
often expressed in rms asymmetrical amperes and is the coordinated standards issued in 1999-2000.
“closing and latching” rating. However, the closing and Finally, the “bus bracing” is most commonly considered to be
latching rating may be specified in peak amperes. The the momentary current expressed in rms asymmetrical current,
rms asymmetrical rating was listed in ANSI C37.06-1979, because this equates to the historic usage of the “momentary”
while the peak current value was used in term. However, bus bracing may be expressed either in rms
ANSI C37.06-1987. asymmetrical current (155 percent of IST) or in peak current
For circuit breakers rated on the “constant kA” basis (260 percent of IST), as either form demands the same
(refer to TechTopics No. 4), the peak withstand current performance from the switchgear buses and connections.
corresponds to the closing and latching rating of the
circuit breaker, in ANSI C37.06-1997 or ANSI/IEEE C37.06-
2009, expressed in peak amperes.
Short-time current rating – Here, the standards have
been consistent over time. The short-time current rating
of the switchgear buses and connections must match
the “maximum permissible tripping delay” value for the
associated circuit breakers (see clause 5.8.2.3 of ANSI/IEEE
C37.04-1999 and Table 1 of ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009), which
is two seconds for the circuit breakers used in metal-clad
switchgear. The information provided in this document contains merely general
Note: The standard allows use of devices in the switchgear further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
that have a rated short-time current duration of less than respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
two seconds. Most notably, low-ratio current transformers or
wound-type current transformers may fall into this category. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
The protective device coordination study must take these Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
reduced durations into account. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A310-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 22
”Bus bracing” in metal-enclosed switchgear
For decades, users and specifiers of metal-enclosed power Rated short-time withstand current – This is the average
circuit breaker switchgear have used the phrase “bus bracing” symmetrical current that the switchgear must be able to
to define a specific level of mechanical strength for the withstand for two periods of 0.5 seconds, separated by a
bus system of the switchgear. However, this term has not 15-second interval of zero current.
historically been used in any of the standards that contain the How do the above ratings relate to the ratings of the
major requirements for metal-enclosed switchgear. Further, components used in the switchgear assembly? As one would
no specific rating for bus bracing is specified in the standards. expect, the ratings directly correlate to produce a coordinated
This problem with ill-defined terms has been confusing for system:
years. The purpose of this issue of TechTopics is to discuss the
requirements for switchgear buses and to define what is meant Rated peak-withstand current – Historically, the standards
when the term “bus bracing” is used. have not stated the peak current-withstand rating as an
explicit rating. Instead, this performance requirement has
The principle standard applicable to metal-enclosed power been embedded in the testing requirements for the circuit
circuit breaker switchgear is ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002. As it breakers and the switchgear, so that the user would not
relates to the bus ratings, this standard defines several ratings: have be concerned with it. The peak withstand current
Rated short-circuit withstand current – This is the required of the switchgear corresponds directly to the
symmetrical current that the switchgear bus must withstand prospective peak current for the circuit breaker when it is
for a test duration of at least four cycles. During the test to tested in accordance with ANSI C37.50 (reference clause
verify this rating, the peak current must be at least 4.9.3.3.3 for 230 percent peak current for unfused circuit
230 percent (for unfused circuit breakers) or 216 percent breakers, and 4.9.3.3.4 for 216 percent peak requirement
(for fused circuit breakers) of the smallest frame size circuit for fused circuit breakers).
breaker used in the assembly. Rated short-time current – The switchgear requirement
Rated peak-withstand current – This is not strictly a rating, corresponds directly to the short-time test requirement for
but it is the peak current value (230 percent or unfused circuit breakers in ANSI C37.50 (reference
216 percent) that must be attained during the rated short- clause 4.10.4). Short-time ratings are not applicable to fused
circuit withstand current test described above. circuit breakers as the fuse will not allow the current to flow
for the duration of a short-time test.

What are the equivalent ratings?
Circuit breaker rating or characteristic Units Value Coordinating switchgear rating or characteristic
[Unfused circuit breakers] short-circuit (interrupting) current Short-circuit withstand current (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002,
kA sym 100% = ISC
(ANSI/IEEE C37.13-2008, clause 5.6.1) clauses 5.4.4 and 6.2.5.1)
[Fused circuit breakers] short-circuit (interrupting) current Short-circuit withstand current (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002,
kA sym 100% = ISC
(ANSI/IEEE C37.13-2008, clause 5.6.2) clauses 5.4.4 and 6.2.5.1)
[Unfused circuit breakers] short-time withstand current Short-time withstand current (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002,
kA sym 100% of ISC
(ANSI/IEEE C37.13-2008, clause 5.5.1) clauses 5.4.3 and 6.2.4)
[Fused circuit breakers] short-time withstand current Not Not applicable (ANSI/IEEE C37.51-1989,
kA sym
(ANSI/IEEE C37.13-2008, clause 5.5.2) applicable clause 4.7, paragraph 4)
[Unfused circuit breakers] making current Peak current requirement during the short-circuit withstand
kA peak 230% of ISC
(ANSI C37.50-2012, clause 4.9.9) test (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002, clause 6.2.5.1)
[Fused circuit breakers] making current Peak current requirement during the short-circuit withstand
kA peak 216% of ISC
(ANSI C37.50-2012, clause 4.9.9) test (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002, clause 6.2.5.1)
Finally, the “bus bracing” is most commonly considered to In more formal terms:
be short-circuit current rating of the switchgear, expressed For switchgear assemblies with no fused circuit breakers,
as a symmetrical current. However, some users may wish to the rated short-circuit withstand current is the short-circuit
determine the equivalent values in other terms. The equivalent current rating of the circuit breaker with the lowest short-
values are: circuit current rating in the assembly.
For switchgear assemblies with only fused circuit breakers,
Circuit rms rms X/R and PF the rated short-circuit withstand current is the short-circuit
Peak
breaker type (sym) (asym) of test circuit current rating of the fused circuit breakers used in the
assembly.
Unfused 100% 230% 133% X/R = 6.6 PF=15%
For switchgear assemblies with both fused and unfused
Fuses 100% 216% 124.7% X/R = 4.9 PF=20% circuit breakers, the rated short-circuit withstand current is
the short-circuit current rating of the unfused circuit breaker
with the lowest short-circuit current rating in the assembly.
The values for the asymmetrical current conversion shown in

the fourth column are from note 5 of ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-2002
clause 5.4.4. The corresponding values for the X/R ratio and
power factor (PF) are shown in the fifth column of the table
above. The information provided in this document contains merely general
The difference between the peak current requirements with use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
unfused circuit breakers (230%) and fused circuit breakers (216 further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
percent) is due to the differing X/R requirements in UL standards respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
(UL 248 series) for current limiting fuses as compared to those of contract.
of unfused equipment in ANSI C37.50 and ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1.
Regardless of how the bus bracing requirement may be stated, Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
the same performance is required of the switchgear buses and own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
connections.
The required short-circuit withstand current for the switchgear 7000 Siemens Road
assembly depends on the assortment of circuit breakers included Wendell, NC 27591
in the assembly. The requirement is that the short-circuit
capability of the switchgear assembly is determined by the Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A128-X-4A00
short-circuit capability of the “poorest” circuit breaker included in
the assembly (which is the “weak link”). © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 23
Circuit breaker ratings - type GMI circuit breakers
TechTopics No. 4 discussed the changes in the ratings structure Finally, as voltage is decreased further, a limit is approached
for medium-voltage circuit breakers used in metal-clad at which the contacts cannot absorb further increases in
switchgear. This issue of TechTopics includes more detailed heat during interruption. The maximum design voltage was
versions of the ratings tables for type GMI circuit breakers, both designated as “V,” and the range (the “constant MVA” region)
for the “constant MVA” and the “constant kA” ratings. over which the interrupting current capability increases as
The structure of ratings for these circuit breakers is defined in voltage decreases is defined in terms of voltage range factor
the following standards: “K.” The voltage V/K defines the associated lower limit of
voltage.
"Constant MVA" "Constant kA"

Standard Title
ratings ratings
ANSI/IEEE
1979 1999 Rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers
C37.04
ANSI 1979 1997 AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis–preferred ratings and related
C37.06 1987 2000 required capabilities
ANSI/IEEE
1979 1999 Test procedure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
C37.09
ANSI/IEEE
1979 1999 Application guide for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
C37.010
The 1999-2000 revisions comprise the first major structural In the range of V/K to V, the interrupting current varies so the
change to the circuit breaker rating standards since the product of voltage and interrupting current is a constant. Thus,
change from the total (asymmetrical) current basis of rating interrupting MVA is constant over the range from V/K to V.
to the symmetrical current basis of rating in 1964. The 1964 The “constant MVA” rating structure does not conform to
rating structure reflects a “constant MVA” ratings basis over the physics of modern interrupting techniques. For today’s
a range of operating voltages, and reflects the air-magnetic vacuum interrupters, the interrupting capability of the vacuum
interruption technology then common. At the maximum interrupter does not increase significantly as the operating
design voltage, interrupting capacity is limited by the ability of voltage is decreased from rated maximum design voltage.
the circuit breaker to withstand the transient recovery voltage The 1999-2000 revisions to the standards recognized this
across the circuit breaker contacts following interruption. As by changing the voltage range factor (K) to equal 1.0, which
the operating voltage is reduced, the interrupting capability effectively removes it from the rating structure.
increases, as the air-magnetic arc chutes can more readily
handle the reduced transient recovery voltage.

Because there is a huge installed base of circuit breakers
that are rated to the old standards, we expect that new
circuit breakers and switchgear will be available with the
old “constant MVA” ratings for many years. “Constant MVA”
circuit breakers must be designed, rated, and tested to the old
standards, as the new standards do not define the full rating
structure or test requirements for the “constant MVA” circuit
breakers.
Gradually, however, the new “constant kA” circuit breakers
and switchgear will become more widely used. The use of
the “constant kA” ratings simplifies the application of circuit
breakers and switchgear, and also more accurately represents
the true physics of modern vacuum interrupters.
Type GMI circuit breaker ratings (historic “constant MVA” rating basis)
These ratings are in accordance with the following standards:
A
NSI/IEEE C37.04-1999 standard rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
A
NSI C37.06-1987 AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis – preferred ratings and related
required capabilities
A
NSI/IEEE C37.09-1979 standard test procedure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
A
NSI/IEEE C37.010-1999 application guide for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
Circuit breaker type

Measured parameter Units 5- 5- 7- 15- 15- 15-
GMI-250 GMI-350 GMI-500 GMI-500 GMI-750 GMI-1000
Nominal voltage class kV 4.16 4.16 7.2 13.8 13.8 13.8
General
Nominal 3-phase MVA class 9 MVA 250 350 500 500 750 1,000
Rated Maximum design voltage (V) 2 kV rms 4.76 4.76 8.25 15.0 15.0 15.0
voltage Voltage range factor (K) 3 ---- 1.24 1.19 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.30
Power
kV rms 19 19 36 36 36 36
Insulation Withstand frequency
levels voltage levels Lightning
kV crest 60 60 95 95 95 95
impulse (BIL)
Rated 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
values 1,200 2,000 2,000 1,200 2,000 2,000
Continuous 4
A rms
2,000 3,000FC4 3,000FC4 2,000 3,000FC4 3,000FC4
4,000FC4 4,000FC4 4,000FC4 4,000FC4
Rated current Short-circuit (at rated maximum
kA rms sym 29 41 33 18 28 37
design voltage) (I) 5, 6, 10
Interrupting time Cycles 5 5 5 5 5 5
Permissible tripping delay (Y) Sec 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rated maximum design
KV rms 3.85 4.0 6.6 11.5 11.5 11.5
voltage (V) divided by K (=V/K)
Current Max. sym interrupting (K x I) 7 KA rms sym 36 49 41 23 36 48
Related Short-time current (K x I)
kA rms 36 49 41 23 36 48
required (three seconds)
capabilities 58 66 37 58
Closing and Asymmetrical (1.6 x K x I) 8 kA rms 78 77
78 opt1 77 opt1 58 opt1 77 opt1
latching
(momentary) 97 111 62 97
Peak (2.7 x K x I) 8 kA peak 132 130
132 opt1 130 opt1 97 opt1 130 opt1
Footnotes:
1
High closing and latching (momentary) rating available for special application.
2
Maximum voltage for which the circuit breaker is designed and the upper limit for operation.
3
K is the ratio of the rated maximum design voltage to the lower limit of the range of operating voltage in which the required symmetrical and
asymmetrical interrupting capabilities vary in inverse proportion to the operating voltage.
4
4,000FC indicates that fan cooling is included in the switchgear structure for this rating. The circuit breaker for the 3,000 A rating may be located in the
upper cell or in the lower cell of a vertical section. The circuit breaker for the 4,000 A rating must be located in the upper cell of the vertical section.
4,000 A rating is not available in outdoor equipment. Some models use fan cooling for 3,000 A.
5
To obtain the required symmetrical interrupting capability of a circuit breaker at an operating voltage between 1/K times rated maximum design voltage
and rated maximum design voltage, the following formula shall be used:
Required symmetrical interrupting capability = rated short-circuit current (I) x [(rated maximum design voltage)/(operating voltage)]
For operating voltages below 1/K times rated maximum design voltage, the required symmetrical interrupting capability of the circuit breaker shall be
equal to K times rated short-circuit current.
6
Within the limitations stated in ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1979, all values apply to polyphase and line-to-line faults. For single-phase-to-ground faults, the specific
conditions stated in clause 5.10.2.3 of ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1979 apply.
7
Current values in this row are not to be exceeded even for operating voltage below 1/K times rated maximum design voltage. For operating voltages
between rated maximum design voltage and 1/K times rated maximum design voltage, follow footnote 5 above.
8
Current values in this row are independent of operating voltage up to and including rated maximum design voltage.
9
“Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class” is included for reference only – this information is not listed in ANSI C37.06-1987.
10
Standard duty cycle is CO – 15 s – CO.
Type GMI circuit breaker ratings (new “constant kA” rating basis)
These ratings are in accordance with the following standards:
A
NSI/IEEE C37.04-1999 standard rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers
A
NSI/IEEE C37.06-2009 AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis – preferred ratings and related
required capabilities
A
NSI/IEEE C37.09-1999 standard test procedure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
A
NSI/IEEE C37.010-1999 application guide for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical current basis
Circuit breaker type

Rated values Units 5- 5- 5- 7- 15- 15- 15- 15- 15-
GMI-31 GMI-40 GMI-50 GMI-40 GMI-20 GMI-25 GMI-31 GMI-40 GMI-50
Maximum design voltage (V) 1 kV rms 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
Voltage range factor (K) 2
---- 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Power
kV rms 19 19 19 36 36 36 36 36 36
Withstand frequency
voltage Lightning
levels impulse kV crest 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 95
(BIL)
1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
1,200 2,000 2,000 2,000 1,200 1,200 1,200 2,000 2,000
Continuous 3 A rms
2,000 3,000FC3 3,000FC3 3,000FC3 2,000 2,000 2,000 3,000FC3 3,000FC3
4,000FC3 4,000FC3 4,000FC3 4,000FC3 4,000FC3
Short-circuit (I) 4, 5 kA rms sym 31.5 40 50 40 20 25 31.5 40 50
83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83
Interrupting time ms cycles
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Permissible tripping delay (Y) Sec 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Max. sym interrupting (I) kA rms sym 31.5 40 50 40 20 25 31.5 40 50
% dc component % 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
Short-time current (I)
kA rms 31.5 40 50 40 20 25 31.5 40 50
(three seconds)
Closing and latching
(momentary) kA rms 49 62 78 62 31 39 49 62 78
asymmetrical (1.55 x I)
Closing and latching
kA peak 82 104 130 104 52 65 82 104 130
(momentary) peak (2.6 x I)
Footnotes:
1
Maximum voltage for which the circuit breaker is designed and the upper limit for operation.
2
K is listed for informational purposes only. For circuit breakers rated on a “kA basis,” the voltage range factor is 1.0.
3
4,000FC indicates that fan cooling is included in the switchgear structure for this rating. The circuit breaker for the 3,000 A rating may be located in the
upper cell or in the lower cell of a vertical section. The circuit breaker for the 4,000 A rating must be located in the upper cell of the vertical section.
4,000 A rating is not available in outdoor equipment. Some models use fan cooling for 3,000 A.
4
All values apply to polyphase and line-to-line faults.
5
Standard duty cycle is O – 0.3 s – CO – 15 s – CO.
of contract. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A129-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 24
Checking integrity of vacuum interrupters
Recently, one of our customers asked us to explain why we Clause 5.8 of this standard has this to say on the subject:
recommend the use of a dielectric (power-frequency) test to 5.8 Vacuum integrity tests
check for the integrity of the vacuum in a vacuum interrupter.
The customer asked what standard dictated that a dielectric The purpose of vacuum integrity tests is to demonstrate
(power-frequency) test be used. that the pressure on the vacuum interrupter is still below
the maximum level required for the acceptable performance
A dielectric (power-frequency) test is appropriate for any of the switching and insulating functions. The vacuum
electrical equipment, but this issue is a matter of practicality, level will have been checked by the vacuum interrupter
not of standards. For old technologies,such as, air-magnetic manufacturer before shipping the unit to the circuit breaker
circuit breakers, the user could visually examine the arc chutes manufacturer. Therefore, the tests identified in this standard
for integrity, and could also examine the contacts. However, for are to demonstrate that the assembly of the vacuum
any circuit breaker with sealed interrupters (such as, vacuum interrupter into the circuit breaker and the operation of the
or SF6), it is not possible to visually determine the internal circuit breaker do not affect the vacuum integrity of the
condition of the arc interrupting structure or examine the interrupters.
contacts. Therefore, another means is needed to determine the
dielectric condition of these vital elements. Measuring the pressure inside of a vacuum interrupter is
a very difficult task and those measurements can only be
Vacuum interrupter contacts are designed so they practically performed on a vacuum interrupter by itself, not when
never wear out. Our circuit breakers (typically) are capable installed in a circuit breaker. Therefore, the requirements of
of 10,000 interruptions at full-load current, which is also the this standard are limited to the use of a voltage withstand
typical mechanical endurance of the operating mechanism. test to verify that the vacuum pressure is still within the
Depending on the interrupting rating, the vacuum interrupters acceptable limits.
are capable of 20 to 100 full-fault current interruptions.
Compared to the endurance of the old technologies, the After assembly, the vacuum circuit breaker shall be subjected
contact life of vacuum circuit breakers is nearly unlimited. By to a dielectric withstand test to demonstrate its integrity. The
comparison, air-magnetic circuit breakers were only required test voltage shall be stated by the manufacturer and the final
to endure four full-fault current operations before rebuild or dielectric test shall be carried out after the routine mechanical
replacement. production tests. These tests may be combined with the
requirements of 5.16.
What about dielectric integrity? Since the inside of the vacuum
interrupter cannot be visually examined, the only practical This basically says that vacuum integrity is checked by means
means to check vacuum integrity is a dielectric test across the of a dielectric test across the open contacts. On a new 15 kV
open contacts. This is recognized in a variety of standards, but circuit breaker, this is performed at 36 kV ac. For a used circuit
the major ANSI/IEEE standard is C37.09-1999. breaker, the test voltage should be 75 percent of the new test
voltage, or 27 kV for this example. The 75 percent level for
field dielectric tests is established in ANSI/IEEE C37.010,
clause 5.5.1, and provides a margin for normal deterioration,
minor contamination, and the like.

The use of a dielectric (power-frequency) test to check vacuum For “clean” applications (environments that meet the “usual
integrity is also incorporated in ANSI C37.85-2002. This service conditions” in ANSI /IEEE C37.20.2), we recommend
document is entitled “Power Vacuum Interrupters — Safety a vacuum integrity test at normal maintenance (for the type
Requirements For X-Radiation Limits,” and clause 6 is as GMI circuit breaker, five years or the number of operations
follows: appropriate to the rating as shown in the instruction manual).
6. Dielectric withstand voltage tests on used interrupters For environments that are more severe, the dielectric (power-
frequency) test should be performed more frequently to
Dielectric withstand voltage tests should be performed by detect contamination of the external surfaces of the vacuum
users of switchgear devices to prove the ability of insulating interrupter (the inside of the vacuum interrupter is not affected
materials and spacings to withstand specified over-voltages by the environmental conditions).
for specified times without dielectric breakdown or puncture.
The test voltage levels used for field tests are typically 75
or 80 percent of the levels used on new equipment by the
suppliers. Such tests should be conducted as commissioning
tests before new equipment is placed into service, as tests
before recently maintained equipment is returned to service,
and in general, as part of a comprehensive preventive
maintenance program.
Power-frequency withstand voltage tests may also be used
to establish the vacuum integrity of vacuum interrupters. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Suppliers shall prescribe the test procedures, including gap further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
settings and test voltages, for conducting power-frequency respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
withstand voltage tests on used vacuum interrupters or of contract.
switchgear utilizing vacuum interrupters.
When power-frequency withstand voltage tests are performed Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
on used vacuum interrupters, or on switchgear components own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
utilizing vacuum interrupters (including contactors, switches,
circuit breakers and the like), precautions shall be taken for Siemens Industry, Inc.
the safety of test personnel. If distances normally required 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
for electrical safety are maintained, X-radiation exposure to
test personnel generally does not exceed established dose Subject to change without prior notice.
limits (refer to ANSI N43.3-1993). Nevertheless, adequate Order No.: E50001-F710-A313-X-4A00
precautions such as shielding or distance should be used All rights reserved.
to protect personnel against possible higher X-radiation © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
occurrences due, for example, to incorrect contact spacing,
or to the inadvertent application of voltages in excess of the For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
values prescribed in Column 3 of Table 1.
TechTopics No. 25
Shunt reactor switching applications
Shunt reactors are often used to compensate for the capacitive Because of the possibility of exciting resonances when multiple
charging current in unloaded transmission lines. Shunt reactors reignitions occur, Siemens recommends that all shunt reactor
may be connected directly to the line, but such application applications incorporate a custom-engineered overvoltage
is relatively infrequent. More often, they are connected to protection circuit. The components of the overvoltage
the tertiary winding of a transformer, when compensation of protection devices must always be individually matched to the
a high-voltage (≥115 kV) line is required. Reactors are used network characteristics in order to assure proper protection.
to compensate for line capacitance when the line is lightly
loaded, and are typically switched out as the load increases. The circuit should include an RC circuit to prevent resonant
Because the amount of compensation needed varies with harmonics in the reactor coil. In addition, surge arresters
loading on the line, shunt reactors are typically switched daily. located at the reactor are recommended if the reactor current
The circuit breaker used for shunt reactor switching will thus is 600 A or less.
experience a large number of operations.
The typical parameters associated with shunt reactor switching
are these:
Current: Up to 2,000 A
Power factor: 15% lagging The information provided in this document contains merely general
During opening operations, multiple reignitions can
excite resonant oscillations in the reactor coil.
Remarks:
For reactor currents of less than 600 A, high stresses can of contract.
result from virtual current chopping.
The high rate of rise of recovery voltage during opening
interruptions makes this a very difficult switching duty for own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
historic interruption technologies, such as air-magnetic circuit
breakers. Vacuum circuit breakers are well suited to switching Siemens Industry, Inc.
duties with high rate of rise of recovery voltage. Vacuum 7000 Siemens Road
circuit breakers also require very little maintenance for the high Wendell, NC 27591
number of operations.
Shunt reactors are somewhat like open circuit transformers, Order No.: E50001-F710-A314-X-4A00
but they normally have a much lower value of inductance. The All rights reserved.
lower inductance results in a lower value of surge impedance. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
Therefore, they are less vulnerable to damage resulting from
current chopping. However, if multiple reignitions occur, these
can excite resonant oscillations in the reactor coil. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics

TechTopics No. 26
Ground bus ratings
Purchaser’s specifications sometimes require that the ground As a side comment, it should be mentioned that installations
bus in metal-clad switchgear have a continuous current rating, subject to the National Electrical Safety Code® (NESC®) (ANSI/
typically 600 A. Such requirements illustrate a common IEEE C2) often use the equipment ground conductor as the
misunderstanding about the function of a ground bus in return path for single phase-to-ground loads. Such systems are
switchgear. outside the scope of the discussion in this issue of TechTopics.
In installations subject to the National Electrical Code® (NEC®) Since the purpose of the equipment grounding conductor is only
(ANSI/NFPA®), the equipment ground conductor is not intended to carry return current in the event of a fault involving ground, it
to carry normal load current. The ground bus is intended to is required to have the same short-circuit capability as the main
carry current only when some sort of fault occurs that involves bus system of the switchgear. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999
ground. (clause 5.4.6) requires that the switchgear short-time current
The equipment ground conductor is connected to the metallic rating be equal to the short-time rating of the associated circuit
structure of the switchgear, to maintain the enclosure at ground breakers, and the main bus and connections be tested to
potential. If the ground bus were to carry normal load current withstand this current for two seconds. Likewise, the ground bus
(such as unbalance current in a three-phase, four-wire circuit), is tested to the same requirement (refer to clause 6.2.4.2), with
the resulting voltage drop on the ground bus could create a the test current applied between the nearest main bus phase
shock hazard for personnel. Any normal currents in the fourth conductor and the ground bus.
wire should be constrained to flow only over the dedicated
neutral conductor. In turn, the neutral conductor is only to be
connected to the equipment grounding conductor at a single
point. Thus, while the neutral conductor and the equipment
grounding conductor are connected together, they do not
present parallel paths for normal current flow.

ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 (refer to clauses 6.2.3.2 and 6.2.3.1) also
requires that the ground bus withstand the same peak current
exposure as the main bus. This is most commonly referred to
as the momentary withstand, and requires that the ground bus
withstand a 10-cycle momentary test between the nearest main
bus phase conductor and the ground bus, with a peak current
equal to the peak closing and latching current rating of the
associated circuit breakers. The peak closing and latching current
rating for the new “kA-rated” circuit breakers (ANSI C37.06-
2009) is 260 percent of the symmetrical short-time current
rating of the circuit breakers.
To summarize, the ground bus in metal-clad switchgear does not
have a continuous current rating. Instead, it must have a short-
time rating and a momentary current rating that match the
ratings of the switchgear.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A315-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 27
Standards for medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear
Most of the standards applicable to our products are voluntary Nearly every specification that is prepared for medium-voltage
consensus standards, although compliance with these metal-clad switchgear contains a statement that requires
standards may be invoked by contract requirements, or may be the equipment to comply with “the applicable IEEE, ANSI
mandated by applicable laws or regulations. In the U.S., such and NEMA standards.” Most users are very familiar with the
standards are generally developed under standards developing major standard for metal-clad switchgear, ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2.
organizations (such as IEEE, NEMA, UL, NFPA®, and others) Often, users do not understand the full spectrum of standards
who are recognized by ANSI for development of standards. applicable to this type of equipment, and are not aware of the
ANSI establishes “essential requirements” (see www.ansi.org/ interrelations between the various standards.
essentialrequirements/) to assure that the processes by which First, a little bit of history. Where did “the standards” originate?
the standards are developed have these attributes: In the early years of the electrical industry, the first standards
O
penness were created by The Electric Power Club, which became
B
alance NEMA in 1926 as a result of a merger with the Associated
Manufacturers of Electrical Supplies. Also, the American
D
ue Process Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE) worked on switchgear
A
n appeals process standards. In the middle years of the last century, the
various standards organizations began work to consolidate
C
onsensus
the standards requirements. The focus of efforts resulted in
Consensus is defined as general agreement, but not necessarily improvements to AIEE standard 27.
unanimity, and includes a process for attempting to resolve
In 1963, when AIEE and the Institute of Radio Engineers (IRE)
objections by interested parties, as long as all comments
merged to form IEEE, this standard became IEEE 27, which
have been fairly considered, each objector is advised of the
formed the basis for ANSI/IEEE C37.20. This standard covered
disposition of his or her objection(s) and the reasons why,
switchgear assemblies across the voltage spectrum, including
and the consensus body members are given an opportunity to
low-voltage power circuit breaker switchgear (to 600 Vac),
change their votes after reviewing the comments. There are
medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear (above 1,000 Vac up
several hundred standards developing organizations accredited
to 38 kVac) and metal-enclosed load interrupter switchgear
by ANSI, including those listed earlier. ANSI conducts periodic
(above 1,000 Vac up to 38 kVac). In 1987, C37.20 was greatly
audits of accredited SDOs to assure that their procedures
revised to create separate standards, C37.20.1, C37.20.2 and
are being followed, and that they do conform to the ANSI
C37.20.3, one document for each of the major equipment
“Essential Requirements.”
classes.

Today, the principle standards that apply to medium-voltage
metal-clad switchgear are these:
Document Rev. Sponsor Title Working group

C37.20.2 1999 ANSI/IEEE Metal-Clad Switchgear IEEE
C37.04 1999 ANSI/IEEE Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers IEEE
AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis –
C37.06 2009 ANSI/IEEE IEEE
Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities for Voltages above 1000 V
Standard Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a
Symmetrical Current Basis
C37.010 1999 ANSI/IEEE Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis IEEE
C37.24 2003 ANSI/IEEE Guide for Evaluating the Effect of Solar Radiation on Outdoor Metal-Enclosed Switchgear IEEE
C57.13 2008 ANSI/IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers IEEE
Alternating-Current High-Voltage Power Vacuum Interrupters –
C37.85 2002 ANSI NEMA
Safety Requirements for X-Radiation Limits
C37.20.6 2007 ANSI/IEEE 4.76 to 38 kV – Rated Ground and Test Devices Used in Enclosures IEEE
Conformance Test Procedures for Indoor Alternating-Current High-Voltage
C37.54 2002 ANSI NEMA
Circuit Breakers Applied as Removable Elements in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
C37.55 2002 ANSI Metal-Clad Switchgear Assemblies – Conformance Test Procedures NEMA
Of these, by far the most significant are C37.20.2 for the Periodically, we see requirements for the circuit breakers to
switchgear and C37.04, C37.06, C37.09 and C37.010 for the conform to NEMA standard SG4. This standard covers outdoor
circuit breakers. Each of these documents has been revised in high-voltage circuit breakers, and specifically excludes circuit
the 1999 to 2000 time frame (and again in 2009 for C37.06). breakers used in metal-clad switchgear. Thus, NEMA standard
The last two documents, C37.54 and C37.55, are the SG4 is not applicable.
documents used by third-party firms, such as UL. These Siemens does not take a position as to the proper applicability
standards are applicable only when third-party conformance of any particular standards over other accepted standards. We
(e.g., “listing”) is required for the equipment. design and manufacture our products with primary concern for
The last column of the table indicates the organization that the safety of our customers and users, regardless of applicable
sponsors the working group that maintains the standard. standards. Siemens makes no warranties or guarantees of
compliance with any standards except by specific contractual
Accredited Standards Committee (ASC) C37 sponsors the relationship with our customers and as marked on the products
conformance standards C37.54 and C37.55. The working themselves when delivered from the manufacturer.
groups for these documents are NEMA technical committees.
The voting representation within ASC C37 conforms to
the ANSI requirements for balanced representation. Equal
delegations represent IEEE, NEMA and the Electric Light descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
& Power (users) group, represented by the Edison Electric use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Institute. further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
Various other organizations also have voting representatives,
of contract.
including representatives of testing organizations, installation
contractors, government entities and the like. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
The procedures of ASC C37 assure that no one interest Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
group (producers, users or general interest) has the ability to
dominate the process of creation or approval of the standards. Siemens Industry, Inc.
The list of standards in the table is not all-inclusive, but does 7000 Siemens Road
include the major standards. There are others that apply, such Wendell, NC 27591
as those for protective relays, device numbers, wire and the
like. It is interesting to note that there are no NEMA standards Order No.: E50001-F710-A316-X-4A00
listed. For the most part, IEEE and NEMA have cooperated over All rights reserved.
several decades to incorporate the applicable sections of the © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
historic NEMA standards into the relevant ANSI/IEEE or ANSI
documents. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 28
Standards for outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers
Most of the standards applicable to our products are voluntary Nearly every specification that is prepared for outdoor high-
consensus standards, although compliance with these voltage circuit breakers includes a statement that requires
standards may be invoked by contract requirements, or may be compliance with “the applicable IEEE, ANSI and NEMA
mandated by applicable laws or regulations. In the U.S., such standards.” Most users are familiar with the major standards
standards are generally developed under standards developing for outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers, ANSI/IEEE C37.04
organizations (such as IEEE, NEMA, UL, NFPA®, and others) and ANSI/IEEE C37.06. Often, users do not understand the full
who are recognized by ANSI for development of standards. spectrum of standards applicable to outdoor circuit breakers,
ANSI establishes “essential requirements” (see www.ansi.org/ and are not aware of the interrelations between the various
essentialrequirements/) to assure that the processes by which standards.
the standards are developed have these attributes: First, a little bit of history. Where did “the standards” originate?
O
penness In the early years of the electrical industry, the first standards
B
alance were created by The Electric Power Club, which became
NEMA in 1926 as a result of a merger with the Associated
D
ue Process Manufacturers of Electrical Supplies. Also, the American
A
n appeals process Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE) worked on circuit
breaker standards. In the middle years of the last century, the
C
onsensus
various standards organizations began work to consolidate
Consensus is defined as general agreement, but not necessarily the standards requirements. The focus of efforts resulted in
unanimity, and includes a process for attempting to resolve improvements to AIEE standard 19, for oil circuit breakers. This,
objections by interested parties, as long as all comments in turn, formed the basis for the first American Standard (ASA)
have been fairly considered, each objector is advised of the in the 1940s.
disposition of his or her objection(s) and the reasons why,
The ASA standards had designations of C37.4, C37.6 and
and the consensus body members are given an opportunity to
C37.9, which defined the requirements for the “total current”
change their votes after reviewing the comments. There are
or “asymmetrical” basis of rating high-voltage circuit breakers.
several hundred standards developing organizations accredited
In the 1960s, with the adoption of the “symmetrical” basis
by ANSI, including those listed earlier. ANSI conducts periodic
of ratings, new standards C37.04, C37.06 and C37.09 came
audits of accredited SDOs to assure that their procedures
into being. These standards became identified as ANSI/IEEE
are being followed, and that they do conform to the ANSI
standards when the AIEE and the Institute of Radio Engineers
“Essential Requirements.”
(IRE) merged to form IEEE in 1963, and ASA evolved into the
United States of America Standards Institute (USASI) and then
into ANSI.

Today, the principle standards that apply to outdoor high-
voltage circuit breakers are these:
Document Rev. Sponsor Title Working group
C37.04 1999 ANSI/IEEE Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers IEEE
AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis –

Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities for Voltages above 1000 V
C37.09 1999 ANSI/IEEE Standard Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis IEEE
C37.010 1999 ANSI/IEEE Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis IEEE
SG4 2009 NEMA Alternating-Current High-Voltage Circuit Breakers NEMA
C37.24 2003 ANSI/IEEE Guide for Evaluating the Effect of Solar Radiation on Outdoor Metal-Enclosed Switchgear IEEE
C57.13 2008 ANSI/IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers IEEE
Alternating-Current High-Voltage Power Vacuum Interrupters –

C37.85 2002 ANSI/IEEE NEMA
Safety Requirements for X-Radiation Limits
Requirements for Electrical Control for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a

Symmetrical Current Basis
C37.12 2008 ANSI/IEEE AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis – Specifications Guide IEEE
Of these, by far the most significant are C37.04, C37.06, The list of standards above is not all-inclusive, but does include
C37.09 and C37.010. Each of these documents has been the major standards. There are others that apply, such as
revised in the 1999 to 2000 time frame (and again in 2009 for those for protective relays, device numbers and the like. It
C37.06). is interesting to note that only one NEMA standard, SG4, is
The last column of the table indicates the organization that listed. For the most part, IEEE and NEMA have cooperated over
sponsors the working group that maintains the standard. several decades to incorporate the applicable sections of the
historic NEMA standards into the relevant ANSI/IEEE or ANSI
Accredited Standards Committee (ASC) C37 sponsors the documents. NEMA SG4 was revised in 2009 to address those
standard C37.85, which specifies X-radiation limits and issues not covered adequately in the ANSI/IEEE standards. The
methods of determination for vacuum interrupters. The major areas covered in SG4 are RIV testing, sound levels, special
working group for this document is a NEMA technical applications (arc furnaces), terminal configurations, current
committee. transformer installation and wiring requirements, as well as
The voting representation within ASC C37 conforms to installation and maintenance recommendations. Most of the
the ANSI requirements for balanced representation. Equal information in SG4 2009 has been offered to IEEE for inclusion
delegations represent IEEE, NEMA and the Electric Light in presently active revisions of C37.04 and C37.09.
& Power (users) group, represented by the Edison Electric The material formerly in NEMA SG4 that was not transferred
Institute. to IEEE has been moved to a new publication, SG11. This
Various other organizations also have voting representatives, information primarily concerns maintenance of historic outdoor
including representatives of testing organizations, installation circuit breakers.
contractors, government entities and the like.
The procedures of ASC C37 assure that no one interest
group (producers, users or general interest) has the ability to
dominate the process of creation or approval of the standards.
Over the years, major strides have been made in harmonizing
the requirements of the ANSI/IEEE standards with the
requirements of the IEC standards (primarily IEC 60056, which
has recently been re-identified as IEC 62271-100). Over the
next few years, working groups within the High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Subcommittee of the IEEE Switchgear Committee
will be working to further harmonize with the international
standards.
Siemens does not take a position as to the proper applicability
of any particular standards over other accepted standards. We
design and manufacture our products with primary concern for
the safety of our customers and users, regardless of applicable
standards. Siemens makes no warranties or guarantees of
compliance with any standards except by specific contractual
relationship with our customers and as marked on the products
themselves when delivered from the manufacturer.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A317-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 29
Derating factors for reclosing service
Most Siemens vacuum circuit breakers are suitable for In the 1979 edition of ANSI/IEEE C37.04, the interrupting
multiple-shot reclosing duty. Applications on overhead capability of the circuit breaker is derated for reclosing duty in
utility distribution circuits very often involve reclosing. For accordance with the following:
such circuits, experience suggests that many faults are of a
A derating factor (“d”, in percent) is calculated according
temporary nature, as when phase lines blow together, tree to the interrupting capability of the circuit breaker at the
limbs fall on two phase lines, or when animals bridge the gap rated system voltage. For a historic “constant MVA” rated
from one phase to another or to ground. When this occurs, an circuit breaker (refer to TechTopics No. 4 and No. 23), the
overcurrent will result, which should be detected by protective interrupting capability increases as the system voltage is
relays. When the voltage source is removed, the lines have an reduced, until it reaches a maximum at V/K or below. The
opportunity to fall clear of each other, or the tree limb may fall derating factor “d” is equal to the calculated interrupting
away from the lines. Then, after the ionized gas in the vicinity capability at the system voltage, divided by six. Thus, for
of the fault location has been allowed to dissipate, it may be a nominal 500 MVA “constant MVA” circuit breaker (rated
possible to successfully re-energize the line. 18 kA at 15.0 kV, K factor = 1.3, V/K = 11.5), the calculated
The rated duty cycle for circuit breakers has traditionally been interrupting capability at 12.0 kV would be 22.5 kA, so that
CO – 15 s – CO, or two close-open operations separated by “d” would be 3.75 percent.
a 15-second interval of zero current. This duty cycle existed
The interrupting capability is derated by “d” for each
until the approval of ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999. At that time, the interruption operation over two in a reclosing cycle.
standard duty cycle for reclosing service became
O – 0.3 s – CO – 3 min – CO, or an instantaneous (actually,
A reclosing cycle consists of all interruptions that occur within
0.3 s) reclosure followed by a second reclosure after a three- a 15-minute time period.
minute interval. With the change of standard duty cycles, the
The interrupting capability is derated by a fraction of “d”
recommendations of the standards changed with respect to to the extent that any reclosing operation occurs in less
the degree of derating required for reclosing duty. than 15 seconds after the preceding interruption. Thus, an
instantaneous reclosure would cause derating of
[(15-0)/(15)] x “d” =“d” percent. Similarly, a reclosing
operation with 10-second delay would involve derating of
[(15-10)/15] x “d” = 0.333 “d” percent.

A reclosing cycle cannot include more than five opening It should be noted that the actual capabilities of the circuit
operations. breakers cannot be tested in the short-circuit laboratory to
For example, suppose we have a 500 MVA “constant MVA” the extreme limits, because of limitations involved with short-
circuit breaker, applied at 12.0 kV, in the following reclosing circuit testing. Most short-circuit laboratories use a short-circuit
cycle: generator as the source of fault current. The short-circuit
generator is connected to the power system, and brought
up to the desired speed. Then, it is disconnected from the
O – 0.3 s – CO – 10 s – CO – 2 min - CO power system, and the rotating inertia provides the motive
power when the short-circuit is imposed. As a result of the
short-circuit, the generator slows down, so that less inertia is
For this condition, the calculated interrupting capability at available for a second short-circuit.
12.0 kV is 22.5 kA and “d” is 3.75 percent. The total derating
Most laboratories can adjust the machine to accommodate
adjustment would be as follows:
two opening operations in rapid sequence, but generally, a

Total interruptions equals four, less the standard capability significantly longer time is required if a third or subsequent
of two interruptions, which gives an “excess” of two. Thus, fault operation is required. This longer time is required so the
derating for total interruptions is two “d” percent. generator can be reconnected to the power system, brought

The first reclose is an instantaneous (essentially zero) back up to speed, and then disconnected in advance of the
operation, for which the derating is [(15-0)/(15)] x “d” = short-circuit operation.
one “d” percent. Because it is not possible to completely validate the approach

The second reclose has a 10-second delay, for which the in the 1999 edition of ANSI/IEEE C37.010, we favor a more
derating is [(15-10)/15] x “d” = 0.333 “d” percent. conservative approach as in ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1979. Since
ANSI/IEEE C37.010-1999 is an Application Guide, rather than

The third reclose has a two-minute delay, so no derating for a Standard, it is a matter of engineering judgement to be
a “fast” operation is needed. exercised by the user in determining the degree of adjustment

The total derating required is [2.00 + 1.00 + 0.33] [0.0375] (if any) applied to interrupting capacity under reclosing duty.
= [3.33] [0.0375] = 0.125, or 12.5 percent.

The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker, adjusted to
reflect the actual reclosing duty cycle, is 22.5 kA X 0.875 =
19.7 kA.
The preceding discussion describes the calculation of
interrupting capability for reclosing duty, which is contained
in ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1979. During the discussions that took
place while the 1999 revisions of the standards were being
discussed, it was recognized that the 1979 standards reflected
the physics of historic (air-magnetic and oil) interruption
technologies. Modern vacuum interrupters have capabilities
well beyond those of the historic technologies. As a result, The information provided in this document contains merely general
the calculation of derated interrupting capacity for reclosing descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
duty for vacuum interrupters was eliminated in the 1999 use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
edition of the applicable document (ANSI/IEEE C37.010). Thus, further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
the user may now apply circuit breakers to reclosing duty respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
without consideration of derating for either the number of
interruptions in the reclosing cycle, or for “fast” operations. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A318-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 30
Altitude correction factors
Medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear and outdoor high- For a number of years, there has been controversy in the
voltage circuit breakers have ratings that are based on IEEE Switchgear Committee regarding the appropriate
application under “usual service conditions,” as defined in the altitude correction factors, with the result that the factors
applicable standards. Essentially, the “usual service conditions,” were removed from C37.04-1999, and a note was added to
defined in the ANSI/IEEE standards encompass: C37.20.2-1999 to indicate the factors were under review.

Ambient temperature within the range of –30 °C to +40 °C Accordingly, this discussion will recount the historic adjustment
factors for medium-voltage products.

Altitude 1,000 m (3,300 ft) or below
Parenthetically, it should also be noted that low-voltage

No significant solar radiation power circuit breaker switchgear (e.g., ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1)

No significant adverse environmental considerations (e.g., equipment uses different altitude correction factors.
corrosive fumes, dust, excessive humidity and the like). Accordingly, the discussion in this issue of TechTopics does not
apply to low-voltage switchgear equipment.
This issue of TechTopics discusses the adjustments required
for applications above 1,000 m in altitude. Historically, the In brief, the historic altitude correction factors that must
altitude correction factors for high-voltage circuit breakers be applied to the ratings of medium-voltage metal-clad
were contained in ANSI/IEEE C37.04, while those for medium- switchgear and outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers are as
voltage metal-clad switchgear were in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2. follows:
Altitude correction factors – general
Rating Adjustment
Maximum design voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (BIL) Adjust downward 1% per 100 m over 1,000 m altitude
Power-frequency withstand voltage (high-potential)
Continuous current Adjust downward 1% per 500 m over 1,000 m altitude
For convenience, altitude correction

factors for several altitudes are as follows:
Altitude correction factors – selected altitudes
Altitude (m/ft)
1,000 1,200 1,400 1,500 1,600 1,800 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000
Characteristic
3,280 3,940 4,600 4,920 5,250 5,900 6,560 8,200 9,840 11,500 13,125
Voltage 1.00 .98 .96 .95 .94 .92 .90 .85 .80 .75 .70
Current 1.00 .996 .992 .990 .988 .984 .980 .970 .960 .950 .940

For example, suppose we have an application of metal-clad Recommendations:
switchgear with ratings as shown in column 2, applied at
The maximum continuous service voltage (rated system
an altitude of 2,000 meters. The application of the altitude voltage plus maximum sustained overvoltage) must not
correction factors would give the following capabilities at exceed the calculated voltage capability at the site altitude,
2,000 meters altitude: 13.5 kV in this example. For most systems, ANSI C84.1
indicates that the maximum system voltage limit is
106 percent of the rated system voltage. Therefore, for this
Rating for example, the rated system voltage should not exceed
Capability
Rating "usual service ACF
at 2,000 m 13.5 kV/106 percent = 12.7 kV.
conditions"

For most applications, the adjustment to continuous current
is insignificant. Equipment is seldom applied at the limits
Maximum design voltage 15.0 kV .90 13.5 kV of its continuous current capability, and even if the load
current rating matches the equipment rating, the ambient
Lightning impulse withstand temperature at higher altitudes is often lower than the
95 kV .90 85.5 kV
voltage (BIL) 40 °C ambient that is used for the basis of ANSI/IEEE ratings.
For this example, the two percent reduction in continuous
Power frequency withstand current capability would be fully offset by a reduction in
36 kV .90 32.4 kV
voltage maximum ambient temperature from 40 °C to 37.3 °C.

The adjustments in dielectric capabilities, particularly
Continuous current the BIL, are much more significant. Careful consideration
Main bus 2,000 A .98 1,960 A must be given during the overall system design phase to
Main circuit breaker 2,000 A .98 1,960 A insulation coordination studies, and surge arresters should
Feeder circuit breakers 1,200 A .98 1,176 A be considered for all circuits to protect the equipment
from transient voltages in excess of its capabilities. This is
of particular importance when one considers that higher-
altitude locations are often areas of higher-than-normal
isokeraunic (thunderstorm) activity.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A319-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 31
Solar radiation correction factors
Medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear and outdoor high- When applied outdoors, the temperatures inside electrical
voltage circuit breakers have ratings that are based on equipment are affected by solar radiation, wind and the
application under “usual service conditions,” as defined in the external ambient temperature, as well as by the loading on the
applicable standards. Essentially, the “usual service conditions” equipment. In general, the equipment is rated on the basis of
defined in the ANSI standards encompass: a maximum ambient temperature of 40 °C, and is rated on the

Ambient temperature within the range of –30 °C to +40 °C basis that the temperature rise is due entirely to heat release
resulting from the current loading.

Altitude 1,000 m (3,300 ft) or below
The impact of solar radiation varies by geographic location,

No significant solar radiation degree of exposure to sunlight, time of day and season. As

No significant adverse environmental considerations (e.g., ANSI/IEEE C37.24 discusses, it is not economical to design
corrosive fumes, dust, excessive humidity and the like). electrical equipment with custom ratings to correspond
with a particular set of solar radiation conditions. For similar
This issue of TechTopics discusses the adjustments required
reasons, it is usually not appropriate to design for all the
for applications subject to significant solar radiation. ANSI/
influences to simultaneously fall into their most adverse ranges
IEEE C37.24-2003, “Guide for Evaluating the Effect of Solar
(e.g., maximum ambient temperature, highest load current,
Radiation on Outdoor Metal-Enclosed Switchgear,” discusses
maximum solar radiation, zero wind, etc.). Therefore, it is
the issues relevant to evaluating the adjustment required to
the responsibility of the user to determine appropriate solar
account for solar radiation. This application guide is used not
radiation correction factors for the particular installation.
only for medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear, but also for
outdoor high-voltage circuit breakers. Since the medium- If the factors affecting the equipment internal temperature
voltage control standards do not deal with this issue, we only reach their “worst case” conditions for a few hours per day,
would suggest that the principles of ANSI/IEEE C37.24 are also and only on a few days per year, the increase in temperature
appropriate for medium-voltage controller applications. inside the unit probably only has a minor effect on the useful life
of the equipment. This subject is discussed in TechTopics No. 15.

Using the concepts discussed therein, we see that one hour of The recommended adjustment for solar radiation is to decrease
operation with an internal temperature 10 °C higher than the the continuous current capability by approximately one percent
limits of the standards is approximately equivalent to two hours for each °C that the 30-year monthly normal maximum
of operation at the limiting temperature of the standards. Thus, temperature exceeds 25 °C. Thus, in a location in which the
operating for four hours per day for 10 days per year at these 30-year monthly normal maximum temperature is 35 °C (e.g.,
conditions would cause a decrease of expected life of the order Austin, Texas), a solar radiation correction factor of 0.90 would
of 4 x 10 x (2-1) = 40 hours, or a bit over a day and a half per be appropriate.
year. In the overall “scheme of things,” such a decrease in life This issue of TechTopics provides only a brief summary of the
would not normally be considered significant. discussions in ANSI/IEEE C37.24. The reader is encouraged
Historically, the standard color for outdoor electrical equipment to review the complete version of ANSI/IEEE C37.24, which is
was ASA No. 24 dark blue-gray. In recent years, it has become available from IEEE.
much more common to use ANSI 61 light gray or ANSI 70 sky
gray. The color of the enclosure makes very little difference with
respect to dissipation of the heat generated internally (e.g., due
to the current loading), but light color exterior finishes reflect a
larger share of incident solar radiation, thus decreasing internal
temperature rise due to solar radiation.
In the 1950s, studies were done by several manufacturers, and The information provided in this document contains merely general
these indicated that the maximum internal temperature rise for descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
a dark (black) enclosure due solely to solar radiation is about use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
15 °C. In contrast, the data suggests that the temperature rise
due to solar radiation for a light gray enclosure would be only of contract.
about half as great.
A word of caution here is appropriate. The data suggests that the All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
decrease in temperature rise due to use of a light color may be
completely overcome when the enclosure is dirty. Therefore, it
is recommended that allowance for reduced temperature due to Siemens Industry, Inc.
the use of light color enclosure color be used only with caution. 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
The basic technique employed in ANSI/IEEE C37.24 is to assume
that the maximum temperature rise due to solar radiation is Subject to change without prior notice.
15 °C. To maintain the equipment within its temperature limits, Order No.: E50001-F710-A320-X-4A00
the continuous current capability must be adjusted whenever All rights reserved.
the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C –15 °C = 25 °C. The © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
application guide contains tables of 30-year monthly normal
maximum temperature for a large number of locations in the For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
U.S. and Canada.
TechTopics No. 32
Capacitor switching applications
Capacitor switching is an application for which vacuum circuit The worst situation occurs when the inductance between
breakers are well suited. In fact, it was the first practical the two capacitor banks is very low, and the second bank
application of vacuum switching devices in the late 1950s. The is connected to the bus when the system voltage (and the
reason that vacuum is well suited as a switching technology voltage on the first capacitor bank) is at an instantaneous
for capacitive circuits is because the rate of increase of the maximum. Under this situation, the natural frequency of the LC
dielectric capability of the contact gap following interruption is circuit is extremely high.
extremely high. For these reasons, the inrush current peak and the inrush
The major challenge for any circuit breaker in capacitor current frequency for back-to-back capacitor bank switching
switching relates to initial energization of capacitor banks. must be limited. The applicable limits for the peak current and
While energizing one bank (isolated bank switching) is severe, the inrush current frequency are shown as follows:
paralleling of capacitor banks, commonly referred to as back-to-
Peak inrush current must be limited to 10 kA or less.
back switching, is far more onerous. If two capacitor banks are
located in close proximity, high inrush currents can occur when
Inrush current frequency should not exceed 4,240 Hz.
one capacitor is already energized and the second capacitor
bank is switched in. To compound the situation, these inrush
currents can be of very high frequency.

The capacitive current switching capability of the circuit
breaker must account for the increase of current over
nameplate capacitor bank ratings. ANSI/IEEE C37.012-2005,
clause 6.10.1, discusses this in some detail. The required
current switching capability and the continuous current rating
of the conductors used to feed the capacitor bank must be
increased to account for the following:

The manufacturing tolerance for kVAr of capacitors is
–0 percent, +15 percent.1

The capacitors can be continuously energized at up to
10 percent overvoltage, which increases the capacitive
current by the same amount.

Capacitors will carry harmonic currents as a result of the
capacitor connections, and because capacitors present a low-
impedance path for the flow of harmonic currents. Depending
on the manner of connection, these currents may be as high
as 10 percent.
To account for these factors, the capacitor current calculated descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
based on nameplate ratings must be increased by a factor use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
of 1.35 to determine the capacitive current switching further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
capacity required of the switching device, and to determine respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
the continuous current carrying capacity required of the
connections to the capacitor bank. This factor is required by All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
C37.012, as well as by the National Electrical Code® Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
(see 460-24). own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Footnote:
1
Note that C37.012-2005 states tolerance on kVAr as -0% to +15%, while
7000 Siemens Road
IEEE 18-2002 revised the tolerance to -0% to +10%. Other codes
Wendell, NC 27591
(particularly the NEC®) have not reduced the adjustment factor from 1.35.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A321-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 33
Clearance requirements in switchgear and control equipment
A question that arises periodically concerns the In the case of equipment investigated by UL, these design
requirements of the standards regarding clearance between tests are conducted with UL participation as part of the UL
conductors or between conductors and ground in procedures for investigation of products.
switchgear and control equipment. The question usually The standards require that the manufacturer demonstrate
refers to the nebulous term, “the standards”, suggesting the dielectric performance of the products to the conditions
confusion as to what “the standards” might be. A number of as given in the standards during design tests, which for
these issues of TechTopics have dealt with discussions of the clearance discussions are the one-minute power frequency
various standards developing organizations, and the reader withstand voltage test (high potential, or hipot) and the
is referred to them for background discussion. For the lightning impulse withstand voltage test, which
purposes of this issue of TechTopics, “the standards” are: demonstrates the basic insulation level or basic impulse
IEEE C37-series standards for high-voltage circuit breakers level (BIL) of the equipment. For example, the hipot test
and switchgear assemblies, including C37.04, C37.09, voltage for 15 kV metal-clad switchgear is 36 kV for one
C37.20.2, and C37.20.3. minute, while the impulse test voltage for this equipment is
95 kV (with the standard 1.2 x 50 μs wave shape).
A
NSI C37.54, C37.55, C37.57, and C37.58, conformance
test standards supplementing the IEEE C37 standards. The dielectric performance of the equipment is affected by a
great many factors, including:
U
L 347, for medium-voltage controllers (which replaces
the older NEMA ICS3 standard). Distance between conductors, and to the enclosure
Except for UL 347, these standards do not specify minimum S

hape of the conductors and adjacent conductive
clearances in switchgear or control equipment. UL 347 is an elements including those of the enclosure
exception, as it does provide minimum clearances, but our Insulation, if any, on the conductors
experience indicates that if the minimum clearances used in
UL 347 are actually used in a product, the product will not A
tmospheric conditions, including atmospheric pressure
meet the dielectric test voltage levels in UL 347. and humidity
So, if “the standards” do not specify minimum clearances, Cleanliness of the equipment
what does the manufacturer use, and how does the user Aging of insulation.
know that they receive a product that performs in
accordance with the standards? The answer to this hinges The shape of the conductors and the shape of nearby
on a basic philosophy of IEEE standards, as well as UL enclosure parts is critical. In typical switchgear or controller
standards. The basic philosophy is that the manufacturer is sections, the conductors may be oriented with flat surfaces
free to design the equipment in whatever manner they towards each other, or with the narrow edges towards each
desire, provided that the product must pass the design other.
(type) tests in the respective standards.

The nearby enclosure elements may be smooth (a steel During dielectric testing, the equipment, conductors and
panel) or may have protruding sharp edges (the flange of a insulating members must be clean and uncontaminated.
formed panel or structural support). Conductors may run in The result is that the tests demonstrate the performance
parallel, or may cross each other at an angle. Conductor under “ideal” (and repeatable) conditions, and performance
joints and their protruding hardware also affect the in the installation site will not match the values obtained
dielectric performance. The profile of the conductor is also during design tests.
very significant, and is in fact why bus bars in medium-
Various standards and application guides recognize this, and
voltage equipment are almost always full-round-edge bars.
specify that a “protection margin” be used in insulation
Square-edged bus bars must be used with care as the sharp
coordination studies. This attempts to reconcile the rated
corners require greater clearance to achieve the same
dielectric values to the actual capabilities of the equipment
dielectric performance. Sharp corners result in higher
in real installations, where the insulation may be degraded
dielectric stress than that with rounded edges.
by age, atmospheric conditions that are not “ideal”, the
As if this were not sufficiently complicated, add the equipment and the insulating surfaces that are not clean,
complication of insulated conductors and uninsulated and other factors. Some documents suggest a protection
conductors. Even in metal-clad switchgear, there are margin of 15 percent, but the guide for application of metal-
numerous elements of the equipment where conductive oxide surge arresters, IEEE C62.22, indicates factors from 15
materials are not insulated, such as at primary disconnects, percent to 30 percent depending on application, the most
on voltage or control power transformers, at the vacuum common value mentioned being 20 percent.
interrupter of circuit breakers and other areas. Insulation is
Some readers may ask about the clearance requirements in
used to decrease the likelihood of dielectric failures as well
the IEEE C57 series of standards, such as C57.12.00 (power
as to allow for a reduction in the size of switchgear
transformers) or C57.19.01 (transformer bushings) or
structures. In areas where the conductors are insulated, the
similar standards. These standards state required clearances
space between conductors or to ground can be much lower
for conductors exposed to the weather, such as bushings on
than would be possible with uninsulated conductors.
power transformers. Therefore, these applications involve
The great variety of dielectric conditions inside the exposure to rain, snow, and other influences. Accordingly,
switchgear or controller leads to the conclusion that no these standards not only specify dielectric tests levels but
single clearance distance between conductors, or between also specify minimum clearances with due consideration to
conductors and ground, gives assurance that the equipment the environmental effects.
will meet the dielectric performance required by the
Conversely, the environment of conductors inside metal-
standards. The only valid way to have confidence in the
enclosed or metal-clad switchgear, or inside medium-
design of the equipment is to subject it to the dielectric tests
voltage motor control centers, is treated as an indoor
required by the standards.
environment not subject to rain or snow inside the
Each manufacturer has developed “rules” that the enclosure. This is the reason that standards for conductors
manufacturer uses when designing special configurations exposed to the weather do not apply to conductors inside
not part of the standard product. Such special metal enclosures.
configurations may be associated with unusual incoming or
outgoing power connections (such as a large number of
power cables per phase), special connections to adjacent
equipment (such as power transformers or existing
switchgear), or unusual sections such as utility revenue
metering sections. The manufacturer has validated these descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
“rules” during design dielectric tests of previous equipment, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
and uses them to create special arrangements to satisfy the further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
ever-changing requests of users. Since these “rules” have respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
been validated during previous design tests, it is not of contract.
necessary to conduct new design dielectric tests each time a
special arrangement is created.
The standards also specify that dielectric ratings apply under own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
standard conditions (temperature = 20 C°, pressure =
101.3 kPa [14.7 psi], absolute humidity 11 g/m3). Of course, Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
standard conditions seldom if ever occur during testing.
Wendell, NC 27591
Therefore, the required voltages during testing must be
corrected to adjust them to match the actual test conditions Subject to change without prior notice.
and equate them to the performance at standard conditions. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A139-X-4A00
The requirements of the standards are intended to produce
test conditions and parameters that are repeatable and are
less likely to be affected by the choice of a particular test For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
laboratory. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
2
TechTopics No. 34
Three-cycle vs. five-cycle interrupting time - type 3AK1 circuit breakers
This issue of TechTopics discusses the rated interrupting For Siemens type 3AK1 circuit breakers, the average arcing
time for circuit breakers used in metal-clad switchgear. time is approximately 9 ms, which is representative of a very
Historically, ANSI/IEEE C37.04 characterized circuit breakers large number of interrupting tests in the short-circuit
with interrupting time classes, such as three cycle, five test laboratory. The longest arcing time is 17 ms during
cycle and eight cycle. These classes always were rather 60 Hz testing. The longest arcing time occurs on tests with
gross approximations, because they made no allowance for maximum offset, asymmetrical current interruptions, during
production variations, and also because the rated interrupting tests designed to explore the outer limits of interrupting
time could be exceeded by up to 50 percent under certain performance. In accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.09-1999, tests
conditions. Further, a circuit breaker that was just slightly must explore both the shortest possible arcing time and the
in excess of one rating class would fall into the next higher longest possible arcing time. The longest possible arcing time
(longer) class, giving the impression of a radical change in occurs when contact part occurs just prior to a current zero
performance that does not reflect reality. Thus, there is a need that precedes a minor loop of current. Because the first current
to establish some facts pertinent to discussion of three-cycle zero occurs in a fraction of a millisecond, and the second
versus five-cycle circuit breakers. current zero occurs only a short time later (perhaps 1-2 ms),
ANSI standards no longer establish three-cycle and five-cycle the interruption does not take place until the current zero that
classes, nor do they give assumed values for “contact-part ends the major loop of current.
time” associated with a particular interrupting time. Instead, As stated, the purpose of these tests is to expose the circuit
rated interrupting time is now stated in terms of absolute time breaker to the worst-conceivable set of circumstances, to
in milliseconds. establish that under this most extreme condition, the circuit
ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.6, defines “rated interrupting breaker successfully interrupts. In the real world, such
time” as “the maximum permissible interval between the interruptions probably never occur. Certainly, they would
energizing of the trip circuit at rated control voltage and comprise a very tiny fraction of one percent of short-circuit
rated operating pressure for mechanical operation, and the interruptions.
interruption of the current in the main circuit in all poles.”
This definition makes it clear that the rating must consider the
“worst-case” conditions for all variables. Thus, it must consider
the longest arc duration under the most onerous conditions. Of
equal importance, it must consider the longest opening time
(including worst-case production variations).

For Siemens type 3AK1 circuit breakers, the relevant data is as As indicated earlier, ANSI/IEEE C37.06 shows a preferred
follows: interrupting time of 83 ms, and this is the rating shown on the
circuit breaker rating label.
Description Average time Range of values
What does this mean to a user with respect to application of
Opening time the circuit breakers? Basically, nothing. The reason for this
First shunt trip coil position 58 ms 50 – 65 ms relates to the way that circuit breakers are tested in the short-
Second (optional) trip coil position 38 ms 31 – 45 ms
circuit test laboratory. When circuit breakers are tested for
Arcing duration 9 ms 2 – 17 ms short-circuit performance, they are tested to a philosophy that
Interrupting time is completely REVERSED from the manner in which they are
First shunt trip coil position 67 ms 52 – 82 ms rated. For ratings, the circuit breakers are rated in accordance
Second (optional) trip coil position 47 ms 33 – 62 ms with the worst-case (longest) times. For testing, actual test
parameters are set up based on the worst-case short-circuit
The type 3AK1 circuit breaker is available with multiple shunt conditions, which means the shortest possible times.
trip coils. The normal trip coil is referred to as the first shunt What does this mean for the type 3AK1 circuit breaker? Using
trip coil, so-named because it mounts in the first physical the data above, the circuit breaker is tested as though it is the
position for a trip coil on the circuit breaker. This coil is fastest circuit breaker (with the shortest opening time). The
designed to have relatively low operating currents, and is used short-circuit conditions are set up in the short-circuit laboratory
for over 95 percent of all applications. For circuit breakers to expose the circuit breaker to the conditions that would occur
employing this trip coil, if ANSI/IEEE C37.04 based rated if (for the type 3AK1 circuit breaker) it had an opening time of
interrupting time on average opening time and average arcing 31 ms. Therefore, the circuit breaker is tested as though it has
duration, Siemens type 3AK1 circuit breakers would have an a historic interrupting time of 2.9 cycles.
interrupting time of 67 ms (4.0 cycles). However, ANSI/IEEE
C37.04 says the rating has to be based on the worst-case The result is that the type 3AK1 circuit breaker has the
conditions, which means that the type 3AK1 circuit breakers interrupting capability of a three-cycle circuit breaker, even
have a real interrupting time of 82 ms (4.9 cycles) with the first though we must rate it as a five-cycle (83 ms) circuit breaker.
shunt trip coil. Actual interrupting times on production circuit
breakers could range from 67 ms (4.0 cycles) (50 ms opening
time + 17 ms arcing duration) to 82 ms (4.9 cycles) (65 ms
opening time + 17 ms arcing duration), using the worst-case
arcing duration. Since ANSI/IEEE C37.06 lists the preferred
interrupting time as 83 ms (five cycles), the type 3AK1 circuit
breaker rating label indicates that the rated interrupting time is
83 ms.
Optionally, the type 3AK1 circuit breaker can be equipped
with a second shunt trip coil, where the name indicates that
the coil mounts in the second physical trip coil position on the
circuit breaker. This trip coil is typically used only when the
user wishes to have redundant trip coils. Accordingly, use of The information provided in this document contains merely general
the second shunt trip coil is rare. This coil uses sophisticated descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
mechanical energy storage to reduce operating time while use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
maintaining low operating current values. For circuit breakers
employing this trip coil, if ANSI/IEEE C37.04 based rated of contract.
interrupting time on average opening time and average arcing
duration, Siemens type 3AK1 circuit breakers would have an All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
interrupting time of 47 ms (2.8 cycles). However, ANSI/IEEE Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
C37.04 says the rating has to be based on the worst-case own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
conditions, which means that the type 3AK1 circuit breakers
have a real interrupting time of 62 ms (3.7 cycles) with the
7000 Siemens Road
second shunt trip coil. Actual interrupting times on production Wendell, NC 27591
circuit breakers could range from 48 ms (2.9 cycles) (31 ms
opening time + 17 ms arcing duration) to 62 ms (3.7 cycles) Subject to change without prior notice.
(45 ms opening time + 17 ms arcing duration), using the Order No.: E50001-F710-A322-X-4A00
worst-case arcing duration. All rights reserved.
TechTopics No. 35
Transient recovery voltage
In reviewing specifications, misconceptions and misstatements On the source side of the circuit breaker, there is a source
concerning the concept of transient recovery voltage are often of system voltage, producing a sinusoidal voltage at system
seen. frequency. Also on the source side are the system inductance
A typical example of a well-intended but misguided L and the capacitance in the vicinity of the circuit breaker. This
specification requirement: capacitance C is shown as a line-to-ground value, as this is
most relevant to TRV discussions. Capacitances remote from
the circuit breaker are not of great significance relative to TRV.
Example 1:
Each circuit breaker shall meet the related required transient The fault being interrupted is located close to the circuit
voltage withstand capabilities as described by paragraph breaker terminals. A close-in fault is used for this discussion, as
5.9 of IEEE C37.04. Manufacturer shall provide test data on this is considered to produce the most severe TRV condition.
maximum transient voltage surge created by circuit breaker. With a fault located immediately adjacent to the circuit breaker
load-side terminals, we observe that the voltage across the
Transient recovery voltage (TRV) is defined in the “IEEE circuit breaker contacts following interruption will be the
Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions” voltage across the capacitor. Since the fault has essentially zero
(formerly known as IEEE Std 100) as “the voltage transient impedance, the capacitance is effectively in parallel with the
that occurs across the terminals of a pole of a switching device circuit breaker.
upon interruption of the current.”
Thus, transient recovery voltage is the voltage to which the L Circuit breaker
circuit breaker terminals are exposed following interruption.
For a vacuum circuit breaker, this is the voltage that will appear
across the vacuum interrupter, and which it must withstand in Source V = Fault
order to sustain an interruption. V cos ωt C
Figure 1 may be used to discuss the concept of TRV, and to
illustrate where TRV comes from. The circuit shows the elements
of a power system that are relevant to TRV.
Figure 1: TRV equivalent circuit

A short-circuit current is limited by the source-side inductance The system would be underdamped, meaning that the
L. Since the fault is essentially entirely inductive, the system capacitor voltage will not approach system voltage
voltage will be 90 degrees out of phase with the fault current. asymptotically, but rather, will overshoot and oscillate around
Thus, when the fault current approaches a natural current the system voltage value. Due to the small amount of damping
zero, the system voltage will be approaching a maximum. This in the system, the capacitor voltage will gradually settle down
is shown in Figure 2. and follow the system voltage waveform.
From this discussion, we can see that TRV is a function of the
system parameters, primarily the source-side inductance, as
Transient recovery well as the capacitance to ground in the near vicinity of the
voltage, Vc (t) circuit breaker. The circuit breaker itself plays little or no role in
“making” the TRV. Rather, the circuit breaker has to be able to
withstand the TRV in order to sustain a successful interruption.
System voltage In this discussion, a short-circuit fault has been assumed.
Moreover, while not apparent from the discussion, we have
assumed a symmetrical fault interruption. The literature on TRV
t substantiates that the TRV associated with asymmetrical fault
interruptions is less severe.
Fault current Further, we have assumed a close-in fault. In ANSI/IEEE C37.04
(refer to Figure 4 in the standard), the required TRV that a
circuit breaker must be able to withstand is presented. As
Figure 2: TRV vs. system voltage and current discussed in ANSI/IEEE C37.04 and ANSI/IEEE C37.011
(Table 1), the worst case TRV for the circuit breaker occurs
at reduced fault magnitudes. The maximum TRV value that
the circuit breaker must withstand is 117 percent of the TRV
After the circuit breaker contacts have parted, but prior to withstand requirement at 100 percent of rated short-circuit
interruption, the voltage across the circuit breaker contacts will current. This 117 percent TRV withstand value applies at
be equal to the arc voltage. For a vacuum circuit breaker, the reduced fault current values of 10 percent of rated short-circuit
arc voltage is very low, of the order of 20 to 150 volts. In turn, current, as shown in ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009, Table 3 (circuit
the arc voltage will be essentially equal to the voltage across breakers in metal-clad switchgear) or Table 7 (outdoor circuit
the source-side capacitance, since the impedance of the fault breakers).
is nearly zero. Thus, at the instant of interruption of current,
Interruption of load currents has not been discussed, as the
the voltage across the vacuum interrupter and the voltage
resulting TRV is much lower than the TRV for fault currents.
across the source-side capacitance are very low. Compared to
The reason for this is that switching of load currents involves
the system voltage at this instant, the source-side capacitance
relatively high power factors, typically 75 percent or higher. In
voltage can be thought of as being zero.
the limiting case, with unity power factor, the system voltage
When the fault current is interrupted by the circuit breaker, the and the current to be interrupted are in phase.
source voltage supply will supply current to the capacitance
Thus, when interruption occurs, the driving voltage for
to bring the capacitor voltage to the system voltage. The time
charging of the parallel capacitance is near zero, and voltage
frame of interest in discussions of TRV is very short – a few
transients are insignificant.
tens of microseconds. Accordingly, in this time frame, the
system voltage can be thought of as a constant value at
the peak of the system 60 Hz voltage. Thus, there is a very
significant driving voltage to charge the capacitor.
The circuit now is a basic LC circuit, and the current in the
capacitor will have a natural frequency determined by the
values of L and C. For most practical applications, the natural
frequency of the LC circuit will be considerably higher than
the system frequency. For illustration purposes, the natural
frequency of the voltage waveform for charging of the
capacitor is shown in Figure 2 at a lower frequency than would
exist in reality.
What are the typical values for medium-voltage circuit
breakers? Let us consider a common 15 kV class circuit breaker
for metal-clad switchgear (e.g., type GMSG) and a 15.5 kV
outdoor circuit breaker (e.g., type SDV7):
Type
Circuit breaker for
Outdoor circuit breaker
metal-clad switchgear
(ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009, Table 7)
(ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009, Table 3)
Maximum design voltage (V) 15.0 kV 15.5 kV
TRV peak value uc 25.7 kV 29.2 kV
At 100% interrupting current
Time to peak t3 66 μs 32 μs
TRV peak value uc 31.2 kV 34.2 kV
At 10% interrupting current
Time to peak t3 15 μs 13 μs
When short-circuit interrupting design tests are conducted

to document the performance of the circuit breaker, the test
circuit in the short-circuit laboratory must be configured to The information provided in this document contains merely general
produce an “inherent TRV” that is at least as severe as the
values above. The “inherent TRV” of the test circuit must be further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
at least as severe as these values in order to have a valid test. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
The actual TRV during the test will almost always differ, as the of contract.
circuit breaker modifies the TRV (reduces it, because of the
resistance in the arc). All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A323-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 36
Early “b” contacts
From time to time, we receive requests for modification of Today, with all “b” contacts fulfilling the requirement for
circuit breakers to incorporate “early ‘b’ contacts.” These are early “b” contacts, there is no longer a need for a distinction
also sometimes called “fast ‘b’ contacts.” With modern vacuum between standard “b” contacts and early “b” contacts.
circuit breaker designs, it is no longer necessary to provide an
early “b” contact. This TechTopics edition explains why this is
no longer necessary.
Most requests for early “b” contacts involve automatic transfer
schemes, and are caused by the desire to minimize the “dead
bus” time. Refer to TechTopics No. 69 for a discussion of fast The information provided in this document contains merely general
bus transfer times for type GMSG circuit breakers. descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
On the Siemens vacuum circuit breakers, all “b” contacts are further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
early “b” contacts. We define an early “b” contact as one that respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
makes as close as possible to circuit breaker main contact part of contract.
during the opening operation. On our vacuum circuit breakers,
the “b” contacts make at approximately the same time as main
contact part. Tests indicate that “b” switch make occurs at own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
about 2 milliseconds (ms) before main contact part (subject to
variation, which is expected to be less than ± 4 ms). Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
For historical perspective, the user need for early “b” contacts
Wendell, NC 27591
originated back in the days of air-magnetic circuit breakers.
For some designs, “b” switch make occurred as much as 30 to Subject to change without prior notice.
40 ms after main contact part. For “fast transfer” applications, Order No.: E50001-F710-A324-X-4A00
users quite properly did not want to wait an “eternity” (30 to All rights reserved.
40 ms is an eternity) for the “b” contact to make, as this contact © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
is used to initiate the automatic transfer sequence.

TechTopics No. 37
Low current switching capabilities
It is amazing how long it takes old “problems” to die in the At duties below 25 percent of the required asymmetrical
power engineering field. One of these old “problems” concerns interrupting capability at rated maximum voltage, the circuit
the interrupting time of medium-voltage circuit breakers when shall be interrupted, but the time required for interruption
switching low currents. The interrupting time of a vacuum may be greater than the rated interrupting time by as much
interrupter does not increase as the value of the rms current as 50 percent for 5- and 8-cycle breakers, and one cycle for
gets small, but despite this, we continue to see specifications breakers of three cycles and less…
that dwell on this issue long after it became moot. The interrupting time for a close-open operation at a specified
Early versions of the ANSI/IEEE standards for medium-voltage duty shall not exceed the rated interrupting time by more
circuit breakers recognized that the air-magnetic interruption than one cycle for 5- and 8- cycle breakers, and 1/2 cycle for
technology available had difficulty coping with low current breakers of three cycles and less…
levels during switching. As a result, the standards permitted These early standards reflected the physics associated with
the circuit breaker to have a longer interrupting time than the air-magnetic interruption technology that was the “state
its rated interrupting time for low-level currents. ANSI/ of the art” at the time. In the air-magnetic circuit breaker,
IEEE C37.04-1979 discussed this in clause 5.7, as follows the arc is driven into the arc chute by a combination of two
(extraneous information excluded): forces. The most significant is the electromagnetic force
5.7 Rated interrupting time generated in blowout coils associated with the arc chute. This
The rated interrupting time of a circuit breaker is the force is related to the magnitude of the current, so that the
maximum permissible interval between the energizing of force is very high at high current levels. On the other hand,
the trip circuit at rated control voltage, and the interruption the electromagnetic force is near zero at low current levels.
of the main circuit in all poles on an opening operation, Accordingly, another technique is needed to cause the arc to
when interrupting a current within the required interrupting move into the arc chute when the current to be interrupted is
capabilities, and equal to 25 percent or more of the required low. Air-magnetic circuit breakers incorporated a puffer system,
asymmetrical interrupting capability at rated maximum using a stream of air created upon opening of the contacts to
voltage. push the arc toward the arc chute. Of course, the force of the
puffer was relatively low, and this resulted in a considerable
lengthening of the interrupting time at very low currents.

The standards permitted interrupting time to increase for any On fully-offset, asymmetrical interruptions at the full rating,
operation below 25 percent of rated asymmetrical interrupting the arcing time can go up to about 17 ms, but that is because
current. High interrupting capacity air-magnetic circuit breakers current zeros can be as much as 15 ms apart on a fully-offset
(5 kV, 350 MVA and 15 kV, 1,000 MVA) often required creative wave.
engineering to meet even the extended interrupting times In summary:
allowed by the standards.

Interrupting time for a vacuum interrupter does not increase
A number of consulting engineers and other sophisticated as the current is reduced.
users were aware of this lengthened interrupting time. It may
also be that some manufacturers experienced interruption
The standards require tests to confirm the low current
failures attributed to difficulties with very low current switching capability of the circuit breaker.
switching. At any rate, detailed specification requirements It is no longer necessary for users to specify special
began to appear, intended to assure that the products offered requirements in this area. The required performance is now
would be suitable for switching all currents, whether very high adequately addressed in the latest standards, and proven in the
short-circuit currents or very low load currents. An example of design tests required by ANSI/IEEE standards. We believe the
such a specification clause was: time has come for this old “problem” to finally fade away.
Breakers shall be capable of interrupting inductive loads
having power factors in the range of 20 percent lagging to
80 percent lagging, with current values in the range of The information provided in this document contains merely general
two percent to 100 percent of the breaker continuous current descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
rating. These loads shall be interrupted without exceeding the use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
rated interrupting time by more than 2.5 cycles for opening
operations, and 3.5 cycles for close-open operations. of contract.
Subsequently, more definitive load switching requirements
were added to the standards to alleviate these concerns. Today, All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
for example, ANSI/IEEE C37.09-1999 requires tests at three
percent to seven percent and 95 percent to 100 percent of
rated continuous current. Siemens Industry, Inc.
With the advent of vacuum interruption technology, 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
lengthening of interrupting times for low current switching
ceased to be an issue. Vacuum circuit breakers do not have Subject to change without prior notice.
a longer interrupting time for small currents. For our circuit Order No.: E50001-F710-A325-X-4A00
breakers, average arcing time is 8-9 ms across the entire range, All rights reserved.
from near-zero current to the maximum symmetrical current. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 38
Harmonic filter applications
In recent years, Siemens has noticed increasing application of

All filter banks must be switched OFF (open) when
harmonic filters in a variety of industrial situations. Harmonic the circuit breaker feeding the dedicated filter bank
filters are primarily intended to deal with power quality issues switching devices is to be closed. After the circuit
arising from loads that create harmonics, such as drives. breaker is closed, the filter banks must then be switched
Harmonic filters are also used extensively in installations ON in sequence by the dedicated filter switching
involving electric arc furnaces. devices.
Filter circuit applications are often called “capacitor switching” The filter bank system should be controlled so that the
applications, but they are very different from capacitor banks are switched ON from lowest order harmonic to
switching applications. A filter circuit combines some aspects highest order harmonic.
of inductance switching, and other aspects of capacitance The filter bank system should be controlled so that the
switching. The result is an application that has characteristics banks are switched OFF from highest order harmonic to
unlike either of these. lowest order harmonic.
To evaluate a potential filter application for suitability, specific In short, switch the circuit breaker ON first, then switch
information is required, including: each filter bank ON from lowest to highest harmonic;

The system one-line diagram. It should show any switching switch each filter bank OFF from highest to lowest
device for individual filter banks if the circuit breaker is to harmonic, and then switch the circuit breaker OFF.
switch multiple filter banks simultaneously.
Multiple filter banks are connected directly to the

If there are multiple filter banks, at least two switching switchgear, with an individual filter circuit breaker to
configurations appear to be common. switch each individual filter bank.

Multiple filter banks, each with a dedicated filter
The filter bank system should be controlled so that the
switching device (typically, a contactor), are connected banks are switched ON from lowest order harmonic to
together, and the feeder to the filter banks is switched highest order harmonic.
by a single circuit breaker. The filter bank system should be controlled so that the
banks are switched OFF from highest order harmonic to
lowest order harmonic.

Confirmation that the switching sequence to be used conforms
to the above. If not, the specific switching sequence must be
fully defined.

The size of filter bank at each harmonic, and the actual
harmonic to which each filter is tuned. Most frequently, third,
fifth and seventh harmonics are involved, although Siemens
has also observed second, ninth and eleventh. This information
is used to evaluate the inrush current and inrush frequency, so
that these can be compared to the limits for the circuit breaker.

The actual, nominal system voltage and the allowable short-
term overvoltage for normal operation. This is necessary to
allow evaluation of the voltages to which the circuit breaker
will be exposed during switching. ANSI standard C84.1
generally is based on a maximum system voltage of the order
of 105 percent to 106 percent of nominal system voltage.
Some additional comments that should be made, relating to the
general application issues for Siemens’ vacuum circuit breakers:

Peak inrush current is limited to 10 kA.

Filter voltage after switching OFF must not exceed the rated
maximum voltage for the circuit breaker. (Filter voltage after use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
switching OFF is higher by the ratio of [harmonic number further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
squared]/[harmonic number squared minus 1.0]. Thus, the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
worst case is a second harmonic filter, which exposes the of contract.
circuit breaker to 133 percent of the nominal voltage.)

If the voltage exposure (considering system operation at the Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
maximum of the normal voltage range, typically 105 percent own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
to 106 percent of nominal system voltage) exceeds the rated
maximum design voltage of the circuit breakers and Siemens Industry, Inc.
switchgear, then equipment rated for the higher voltage must 7000 Siemens Road
be used. Another possible solution is to use two circuit Wendell, NC 27591
breakers in series, but the more normal solution would be to
use higher voltage equipment. Order No.: E50001-F710-A326-X-4A00

If the installation also involves an arc furnace, further All rights reserved.
consideration is needed, particularly with respect to voltage © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
transients.
Due to their special nature, each harmonic filter application must
be individually reviewed. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
TechTopics No. 39
Heat generation estimation for type NXAIR P switchgear (up to 15 kV)
Siemens is often asked to provide estimated heat generation The amount of heat generated is related to the square of
data for our equipment. This issue of TechTopics provides the current, so a circuit breaker operating at one-half rated
information that allows calculation of approximate heat current will have heat generation only one-quarter of that
generated by the switchgear under assumed loading at full-rated continuous current. Because the effect of the
conditions. square relationship is very significant, it is overly conservative
The heat generation data given in the table below is on the to estimate heat generation based on the assumption that
basis of full-rated continuous current. Actual heat generation all sections and all circuit breakers each carry their rated
calculations must take into account the true loading of the continuous current at all times. Air conditioning systems sized
equipment. based on such estimates will be larger than the real operating
conditions require.
Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts) for type NXAIR P switchgear (up to 15 kV)

Category
Circuit breaker cell with circuit breaker 605 W 1,350 W 2,250 W 3,500 W
Forced air cooling fan (4,000 A circuit breaker cells only) --- --- --- 75 W
Space heaters per circuit breaker cell 200 W
Space heaters per auxiliary cell 100 W plus 100 W for each rollout tray
Voltage transformer (VT) rollout 50 W
Control power transformer (CPT) (drawout or stationary) 4% of CPT kVA rating
Relaying and instrumentation per circuit breaker cell:
50 W
microprocessor type
Notes on assumptions:
1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally controlled by a thermostat; hence, their load is represented as a continuous load. The purpose of space
heaters is to prevent condensation, and this is not limited by the absolute temperature. Even when a thermostat is used to control the heaters, it is set to
shut the heaters off at a temperature of approximately 110 ºF. Therefore, in an air-conditioned room, the heaters would be energized continuously.
2. Heat generated by current transformers is ignored as it is usually insignificant, and varies according to the CT ratio, as well as the loading. The data
above includes the maximum number of CT cores per circuit breaker compartment.
3. The CPT heat generation estimate is very conservative and assumes that the CPT is operated at full-rated capacity. If normal loading is at less than full
rating, heat generation may be adjusted by the square of the percent loading.
4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation estimates are very approximate. Extensive relaying and instrumentation may warrant additional
conservatism in the estimation of associated heat generation.

To estimate the heat generated under actual loading If true loading were not considered (e.g., all calculations
conditions, determine the component heat generation for performed on the basis of full rated current), the calculations
each of the components indicated in the table. Estimated heat would yield a heat generation of 8,770 watts, nearly double
generation for circuit breakers should be adjusted for actual the “real” heat generation.
loading based on the ratio of the squares of the actual current
and the rated current. To be precise, this adjustment should
also be made for the actual current loading for each individual
vertical section, but this is frequently ignored in the interests
of simplification. Instead, the main circuit breaker loading is
usually assumed to be equal to the main bus loading in all
vertical sections.
Example:
Assume a lineup with six vertical sections, one 3,000 A main
circuit breaker (loaded to 2,150 A), four 1,200 A feeder circuit
breakers (loading 850 A, 250 A, 600 A and 450 A), with
3,000 A main bus, and including space heaters. The lineup
includes one VT rollout, one 10 kVA CPT rollout, and
microprocessor relaying and instrumentation. The calculations
would be as follows:
Category Heat generation
3,000 A circuit breaker at 2,150 A = 2,250 x (2,150/3,000)2 = 1,155 W
1,200 A circuit breaker at 850 A = 605 x (850/1,200)2 = 304 W

A
Total heat generation, circuit breaker cells 1,721 W
Forced air cooling fan (4,000 A circuit breaker cell only) ---
B
Vertical sections with 3,000 A bus at 2,150 A = 6 x 350 x (2,150/3,000)2 = 1,079 W
Space heaters for 4 circuit breaker cells = 5 x 200 = 1,000 W

C
Space heaters for 1 auxiliary cell with two rollouts = 100 + (2 x 100) = 300 W
D VT rollout = 1 x 50 = 50 W
E CPT = 1 x 4% x 10 kVA = 400 W
F Relaying and instrumentation = 5 x 50 = 250 W
of contract. Order No.: E50001-F710-A327-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 41
Circuit breakers or switches - application considerations
Siemens is often asked to discuss the application

Medium-voltage, fused, load-interrupter switches are
considerations that favor the use of medium-voltage circuit favored when:
breakers, and those that favor the use of medium-voltage,
Continuous load current is low
fused, load-interrupter switches. This is one of those age-old
questions, so this issue of TechTopics is devoted to it.
Central monitoring/control is not needed; manual control
is acceptable or electrical operation is infrequent
To compare the application of medium-voltage circuit breakers
and of load-interrupter switches, we must understand the
Switching is infrequent; low endurance (150 to 500
basic characteristics of each switching technology. operations, depending on rating) is acceptable
The table on the next page shows the major characteristics of

Process continuity is not critical
medium-voltage circuit breakers and load-interrupter switches
Loads are widely dispersed.
that influence the application. Of course, the table entries are
In industrial applications, a medium-voltage, fused, load-
generalized, and the information varies by the voltage and
interrupter switch is most frequently used as the primary
current ratings of the equipment. This is particularly true for
disconnect for a load center substation transformer. A load-
load-interrupter switches, where the endurance capabilities
interrupter switch is well suited to this application, as load
vary greatly according to the ratings. However, the table is
currents are low, switching is infrequent and remote control is
valid for an overall understanding.
not ordinarily needed.
From the data in the table, Siemens makes these observations:
Medium-voltage, metal-clad switchgear with drawout circuit

Medium-voltage circuit breakers are favored when: breakers is suitable for main power distribution in a large

Continuous load current is high installation, with each feeder circuit breaker feeding several
load center substations, each having a fused, load-interrupter

Central monitoring/control is needed; remote control is switch on the primary of the transformer. The circuit breakers
necessary are suitable for switching high currents, and for control from

Switching is frequent; high endurance (1,000s of a remote location. Since the circuit breakers can switch short-
operations) is needed circuit currents and be ready for immediate closing, they are

Process continuity is critical suitable where process continuity is critical.

Loads are concentrated. When applied and maintained properly, both medium-voltage
circuit breakers and load-interrupter switches should provide
decades of reliable service. Applied incorrectly, either can lead
to major headaches.

Characteristic Circuit breaker Load-interrupter switch
Moderate (usually 600 A, but 1,200 A also available).

Continuous current High (1,200 A, 2,000 A, 3,000 A or 4,000 A)
Current is limited to a lower value by available fuses.
Switch currents from very low (magnetizing) values to

continuous rating of switch (typically 600 A or 1,200 A
Switching capability load break. Switch (alone) cannot interrupt fault
full system short-circuit current
currents.
Fuses interrupt short-circuits.
Low (250 to 500 operations for 15 kV, 150 to 350 for
High (typically 10,000 operations)
Endurance – mechanical 38 kV) (refer to ANSI C37.22) (type SIMOSEC =
(see ANSI/IEEE C37.06)
1,000 operations).
High Low
Typically 10,000 operations at rated continuous For 600 A current switched, five operations at 38 kV,
Endurance – electrical current for vacuum 30 at 15 kV, 50 at 4.76 kV (refer to ANSI C37.22) (type
Typically 30 to 100 operations at full short-circuit SIMOSEC = 100 operations at 600 A).
rating for vacuum Short-circuit endurance is not given in standards.
Not suitable if high or very high endurance needed

Not appropriate if very high endurance
Application limitations Not suitable for motors, capacitors, filters, reactors or
(100,000s of operations) is needed
furnaces
Electrically operated (manual operation for

Manually operated (electrical operation)
Operation maintenance or emergency)
Not appropriate for complex control schemes
Suitable for complex control schemes
Fuses required
Protective relay tripping not recommended due to
Overcurrent/short-circuit protection Requires protective relays
limited interrupting capability of switch (must block
tripping for currents above load break rating)
If electrically operated, can be arranged for remote

Remote operation Well suited
operation
Control power needed for protective relays, circuit Control power not required unless electrically operated,
Control power
breaker operation and space heaters (if present) or for space heaters
Drawout, if metal-clad (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2)
Construction Stationary
Stationary, if metal-enclosed (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3)
Larger enclosure Smaller enclosure
Space requirements
NEC® required workspace equal NEC® required workspace equal
Purchase cost Relatively high Relatively low
Medium (long maintenance intervals, need to clean

Low (simple mechanism, need to clean insulation,
insulation)
Maintenance replace fuses)
Drawout feature allows maintenance of circuit
Main bus shutdown required for switch maintenance
breaker without main bus shutdown

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
Order No.: E50001-F710-A329-X-4A00
of contract.
TechTopics No. 42
Circuit breakers or vacuum contactors - application considerations
Siemens is often asked to discuss the application

Medium-voltage NEMA Class E2 controllers (fused
considerations that favor the use of medium-voltage circuit contactors) are favored when:
breakers, and those that favor the use of medium-voltage
Typical loads include motors or smaller transformers
NEMA Class E2 controllers (fused contactors). This is one of
those recurring questions, so this issue of TechTopics addresses
Continuous load current is low or moderate (e.g., smaller
it. motors or transformers)
To compare the application of medium-voltage circuit breakers

Switching is very frequent (e.g., daily or several times per
and of fused contactors, we must understand the basic day); very high endurance (100,000s of operations) is
characteristics of each switching technology. needed
The table on the next page shows the major characteristics of

Process continuity is compatible with fuse replacement
medium-voltage circuit breakers and medium-voltage fused time
contactors that influence the application. Of course, the table
Reduced-voltage starting is needed to reduce starting
entries are generalized, and the information varies by the duty (and voltage fluctuation) on system.
voltage and current ratings of the equipment. However, the
Historically, circuit breakers have been used for medium-
table is valid for an overall understanding.
voltage motors in certain industries, especially in utility
From the data in the table, Siemens makes these observations: generating stations. As these stations have aged, and station

Medium-voltage circuit breakers are favored when: operation has changed from base-load to peaking service,
many of these motor-starting circuit breakers have experienced

Typical loads include transformers, capacitors, larger total operations well in excess of the endurance required
motors, generators or distribution feeders by the ANSI/IEEE standards. As a result, these applications

Ratings required exceed those of vacuum contactors have had higher maintenance costs than if medium-voltage
(400 A or 720 A at up to 7.2 kV) fused contactors had been used originally. In contrast, users

Continuous load current is high (e.g., larger transformers, in the process industries have long favored the use of fused
larger motors) contactors for such applications, and have enjoyed long service
with lower maintenance costs.

Switching is not very frequent (e.g., weekly or monthly);
high endurance (1,000s of operations) is satisfactory When applied properly, both medium-voltage circuit breakers
and medium-voltage fused contactors should provide decades

Process continuity is critical (e.g., no time for fuse of reliable service. Applied incorrectly, either can lead to major
replacement) headaches.

Reduced-voltage (RV) starting is not needed (RV starting
complicates switchgear bus arrangements).

Characteristic Circuit breaker Contactor (NEMA E2 with fuses)
Moderate (400 A enclosed – NEMA size H3, or 720 A enclosed –

Continuous current High (1,200 A, 2,000 A, 3,000 A or 4,000 A)
NEMA size H6) in SIMOVAC controller

interrupting capability of vacuum contactor without fuses
Switch currents from very low (magnetizing) values to (at least 10 x continuous rating)
Switching capability
full system short-circuit current Fuses operate for currents higher than the interrupting
capability of the vacuum contactor alone, up to the
interrupting capacity of the fuse
High (typically 10,000 operations)

Endurance – mechanical Very high, 750,000 operations for 400 A and 400,000 for 720A
(refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.06)
Very high
High
Switching continuous current, 400,000 operations for 400A or
For vacuum, typically 10,000 operations at rated
200,000 operations for 720 A
Endurance – electrical continuous current
Switching short-circuit current, endurance data not
For vacuum, typically 30 to 100 operations at full
established in NEMA or UL standards; short-circuit current
short-circuit rating
interruption requires replacement of current-limiting fuses
Application limitations Not appropriate for very high endurance applications Well suited for very frequent switching operations
Electrically operated (manual operation for

Operation Electrically operated only
maintenance or emergency)
Usually magnetically held – vacuum contactor opens on loss

of system voltage; vacuum contactor will close automatically
Mechanically latched – circuit breaker remains
Control scheme on system voltage return with two-wire control; manual restart
closed on loss of system voltage
required on system voltage return with three-wire control
Latched contactors are available
Overcurrent/ Requires protective relays for overload protection and current-

Requires protective relays
short-circuit protection limiting fuses for short-circuit protection
Short-circuit let-through High (three to five cycles or more of short-circuit Low (current-limiting fuses interrupt in 1/4 cycle for highest
energy current) short-circuit currents, and peak magnitude is limited)
Remote operation Well suited Well suited
Control power needed for protective relays, circuit Control power usually provided by control power transformer
Control power
breaker operation and space heaters (if present) (CPT) incorporated in the controller
Drawout, if metal-clad (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2)

Construction Drawout or stationary
Stationary, if metal-enclosed (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3)
Smaller enclosure
Larger enclosure
Space requirements NEC® required workspace equal
NEC® required workspace equal
Rear access not required
Purchase cost Relatively high Moderate
Medium (long maintenance intervals, need to clean

Maintenance Low (simple mechanism, need to clean insulation, replace fuses)
insulation)
TechTopics No. 43
Interposing relay requirements
Remote control of circuit breakers is becoming much more A few salient points extracted from ANSI/IEEE C37.90 are:
prevalent as the use of monitoring and central control 5.7.1 Tripping output performance requirements:
equipment grows. When remote control is used, interposing
relays are generally required to avoid a large voltage drop in “Tripping output circuits shall meet the following
the close and trip coil circuits. Here are a few thoughts on the specification for performance: The contacts or output circuit
proper selection of interposing relays. shall make and carry 30 A for at least 2000 operations in
a duty cycle... The load shall be resistive for both dc and
Current ratings ac and the current shall be interrupted by independent
Interposing relay contacts used in close and trip circuits must means…”
have the ability to make and carry the current of the close 5.7.2 Continuous and interrupting ratings of tripping
and trip coils. For our type GMSG circuit breakers, the control output circuits:
current data is as follows: “Tripping output contacts intended by the manufacturer to
The interposing relay contact is directly analogous to a tripping be for tripping duty only shall be identified as such and may
output contact on a protective relay, so it is instructive to have no continuous or interrupting duty…”
review the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C37.90 for tripping The requirement in ANSI/IEEE C37.90 for a making capability of
output contacts of protective relays. 30 A is appropriate for older design circuit breakers. However,
the operating currents of modern circuit breakers are often
much lower than those of the historic designs, as indicated in
the table for the type GMSG circuit breaker above.
Control voltage and current

Nominal rated control voltage Control voltage range Close coil current (A) Trip coil current (A)
Close Trip
48 Vdc 38-56 28-56 2.9 11.4/301
125 Vdc 100-140 70-140 1.0 4.8/7.41
250 Vdc 200-280 140-280 0.5 2.1/4.21
120 Vac 104-127 104-127 0.9 ---
240 Vac 208-254 208-254 0.4 ---
Footnote:
1
First value is for five-cycle (83 ms) rated interrupting time, second value is for three-cycle (50 ms) rated interrupting time.

The philosophy embodied in ANSI/IEEE C37.90 is appropriate Typical control scheme
for the application to tripping of circuit breakers, and The basic elements of typical controls are shown in the
similar logic applies to application of interposing relays in schematic diagram. A few observations on the control scheme:
closing circuits. The interposing relay has to have a making
capability, but does not have to have a significant interrupting
Interposing relays are connected to the same control voltage
capacity. This is so because the close and trip coil currents supply as is used for the circuit breaker. Many contacts
are interrupted by the “a” or “b” switch contacts on the circuit used to initiate remote closing or tripping, particularly PLC
breaker. contacts, cannot handle the higher control voltages (e.g.,
125 Vdc) used in the circuit breaker control scheme. In such
Therefore, the interposing relay should be able to make the cases, the interposing relay coil should be connected to the
current of the close or trip coil of the circuit breaker. The lower control voltage of the PLC (typically, 24 Vdc), and
contacts also need to be able to carry the current for the time actuated by the contact from the PLC. The interposing relay
necessary for circuit breaker operation, but this is not a severe output contact should be connected in the circuit breaker
requirement. The duration of the closing or tripping current control circuit.
with modern circuit breakers is several tens of milliseconds,
so the relay is not required to carry the current for a long
Interposing relay contacts must provide a signal duration
time. The interposing relay contacts do not need to be able to of at least 50 ms. Latched-type relays must not be used.
interrupt the coil currents. Maintained contacts must never be used to actuate a circuit
breaker close or trip circuit.
Typical interposing relays

The interposing relay coil should have a very low operating
A wide variety of relays are suitable for use in interposing current, to minimize voltage drop in the control circuit from
relay applications. The most extensively-used relays over the the remote actuating contact to the interposing relay coil.
decades are the GE type HFA and Westinghouse (ABB) type
SG relays. These are older designs, and take somewhat more
The minimum pickup voltage for the interposing relay must
space than newer relays, but have a long record of success. be compatible with the minimum control voltage specified
More recently, a number of smaller relays have been used for in ANSI/IEEE standards for the switchgear. For dc tripping
interposing applications. Among these are relays from Potter circuits, the control voltage range in ANSI/IEEE C37.06 is
& Brumfield (KRP), Struthers & Dunn (219) and even some of 56 percent to 112 percent of the rated voltage. For example,
the miniature (“ice cube”) relays from several suppliers. Any of the range for 125 Vdc circuits is 70 to 140 Vdc. In contrast,
these relays are suitable provided they meet the voltage and the control voltage range given in ANSI/IEEE C37.90 for
current requirements of the application. protective relays is 80 percent to 112 percent of rated
voltage, or 100 to 140 Vdc for our example.

In this scheme, the circuit includes truck-operated cell (TOC)
contacts responsive to the position of the circuit breaker
in the cell. These contacts are used to make the local
control switch close contact (CS/C) operative only in the
TEST position. The local control switch trip contact (CS/T) is
operative in both the TEST and CONNECTED position. The
TOC contacts are used to make the remote control contacts
(201T and 201C) operative only in the CONNECTED position.
Most users prefer that remote control contacts be operative
only in the CONNECTED position. User preferences are less
pronounced regarding local control circuits, with some
users desiring that local circuits be operable only in the TEST
position, and others desiring that local control circuits be
operable in both CONNECTED and TEST positions.
Symbols The information provided in this document contains merely general
52/a Aux switch (open when CB open) use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
52/b Aux switch (closed when CB open) further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
52SRC Close coil of contract.
52T Trip coil
CS/C Control switch (local) close contact Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
CS/T Control switch (local) trip contact own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
RL Red indicating lamp

GL Green indicating lamp 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
201C Interposing relay, close
201T Interposing relay, trip Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A331-X-4A00
Truck operated cell switch, closed when CB in
TOC/a All rights reserved.
connected position
Truck operated cell switch, open when CB in
TOC/b
connected position For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
LS Limit switch (spring charged)

TechTopics No. 44
Anatomy of a short-circuit
This issue of TechTopics discusses a short-circuit current The figure is constructed with a symmetrical rms current value
waveform, and more specifically, the fully-offset, asymmetrical of 1.00 A as the base, to allow direct comparison to the ratios
short-circuit. This is the worst-case short-circuit considered in given in the standards for other variables, such as the closing
the standards for metal-clad switchgear (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2) and latching current.
and circuit breakers (ANSI/IEEE C37.04), as it imposes the
highest mechanical forces on the conductors and their
supports.
The fully-offset, asymmetrical short-circuit current wave is
shown below.
Current (Isc = 1.00) Instantaneous (total) current

dc component S-factor (C37.04-1979)
2.50
instantaneous
dc component (in decimal form) (multiply by 100
2.00
for %dc component) (C37.04-1999)
1.50
1.00
0.50
0.00
-0.50
-1.00
-1.50
Symmetrical current (ac component)
-2.00
0
180
360
540
720
900
1,080
1,260
1,440
1,620
1,800
1,980
2,160
2,340
2,520
2,700
2,880
3,060
3,240
3,420
3,600
Time (in degrees)

Initially, we assume that the pre-fault current is zero. When Current
Comments
a short-circuit occurs, the current changes over time from parameters
the initial value to the value that would exist under steady- This is the symmetrical current (ac component) in
state short-circuit conditions. This value is the “symmetrical Short-circuit the diagram. The symmetrical current is assumed
current” in the figure, also referred to as the “ac component” (interrupting) to remain constant. The current waveform shown
rating has an rms value of 1.000 A, with a peak
of the short-circuit current. In the ideal case, where the circuit
magnitude of 1.414 A.
resistance is zero and the current is limited only by the circuit
inductance, the short-circuit current and the system voltage This is the value of the first peak of the fully-
Closing and offset, asymmetrical current, taken from the
would be out-of-phase by 90°. Thus, the worst-case instant for
latching current “instantaneous current” curve in the diagram. The
initiating the short-circuit current would be when the system (for circuit value of the first peak for a 60 Hz system is 2.60,
voltage is zero. breakers) or peak and is measured at 1/2 cycle of power frequency
In the real world, the circuit resistance is non-zero. Thus, the withstand current (180 electrical degrees). The first peak produces
(for switchgear) the most severe mechanical forces between
worst case does not occur when the system voltage is zero.
(in peak amperes) conductors, and therefore is the critical
Rather, it occurs a few degrees from zero voltage, but that mechanical value for bus bars and their supports.
nicety will be ignored in this discussion.
This is the rms value corresponding to the peak
By definition, the short-circuit current is limited only by the withstand current discussed above. The rms value
circuit inductance. The current in an inductor cannot change is not shown in the diagram, but it is easily seen
instantaneously from the initial value (zero) to the steady state Momentary as the basis of the diagram with an rms
current (in rms symmetrical current of 1.000 A. Because the
value (in the figure, -1.414 A, the peak value of a symmetrical
amperes) whole diagram is referenced to 1.000 A, the value
current of 1.00 A). To achieve a current balance at the instant of the momentary current is equal to the S-factor.
of short-circuit initiation, consider that the short-circuit current The S-factor at 1/2 cycle (180 electrical degrees) is
consists of an ac component (the symmetrical component) and 1.55.
a dc component, which accounts for the difference between %dc component is initially 100% at time 0. At 1/2
the steady-state short-circuit current at the instant of fault %dc component
cycle (180 electrical degrees), it is 83%.
initiation and the initial zero value.
In the figure, the dc component must be equal in magnitude
to the instantaneous value of the symmetrical steady-state
The actual dc component of the fully-offset, asymmetrical
current at time zero. Thus, the dc component at time zero
short-circuit current wave is shown in the figure, and is
must be 1.414 A, and is opposite in sign to the instantaneous
1.414 A at time zero, declining exponentially, approaching
value of the symmetrical short-circuit current at time zero.
zero after about 10 cycles. The dc component, in decimal form,
The dc component of the short-circuit declines exponentially is also shown, and the data from the figure must be multiplied
from the initial value, with a time constant that is determined by 100 to convert it to %dc component. The %dc component is
by the values of the circuit inductance (X) and resistance (R). In also referred to as the % asymmetry in older standards.
both the ANSI/IEEE and the IEC standards, the time constant of
The total short-circuit current, labeled as the instantaneous
dc decay is standardized at 45 ms, which corresponds to an X/R
(total) current in the diagram, is the sum of the symmetrical
ratio of 17 for a 60 Hz system.
current (ac component) and the actual dc component.
The dc component is expressed as the %dc component and is
The %dc component concept underlies the requirements
calculated from the following:
contained in the 1999 revisions to the major circuit breaker
%dc = 100e − ( t / τ )
standards, including ANSI/IEEE C37.04, C37.06, C37.09 and
C37.010. In the 1979 versions of these standards, the dc
component was accounted for by an S-factor, the ratio of the
τ = ( X / R) / 2πf asymmetrical (total) current (expressed in rms current) and
the symmetrical rms current. The concepts of S-factor and
%dc component are mathematically equivalent, even though
Item Description
they express the concept in different ways. The S-factor at any
%dc dc component expressed in percent instant of time is shown in the diagram for comparison to the
e, the base of the natural (Naperian) logarithms, modern %dc component parameter.
e
approximately 2.71828 1828459045
The S-factor and the %dc component are related by the
the instant of time, in ms, for which the %dc component is expression:
t
desired
τ time constant of dc decay, in ms Itotal
S= = 1+2(%dc/100)2
X system inductance to the point of the fault, in ohms Isymmetrical
R system resistance to the point of the fault, in ohms
ƒ system frequency, in hertz
The S-factor curve allows us to make an observation about the To this point, the entire discussion has been referenced to
asymmetrical (total) current. Notice that the S-factor declines a symmetrical current of 1.000 A rms. This makes it easy
from its maximum value, 1.732 at time zero, approaching to calculate the various currents for a “real” short-circuit
1.00 after only about five cycles. Since an S-factor of 1.00 is current rating. For this example, consider a rated short-circuit
equivalent to a symmetrical current, the S-factor indicates that interrupting current of 50 kA, which yields the following “real”
a fully-offset, asymmetrical current declines to a symmetrical values for the various parameters:
current in only a few cycles.
Value from
TechTopics No. 21, “Bus bracing in metal-clad switchgear,” Parameter
diagram
Calculated value
discussed the concept of “bus bracing,” and lists various current
Short-circuit interrupting
values corresponding to parameters given in the standards. To 1.000 50.0 kA rms
current
tie the anatomy of a short-circuit to the factors discussed in
TechTopics No. 21, let’s look at the factors in TechTopics No. 21 Peak withstand current 2.6001 130.0 kA peak
and read where they come from on the waveform of the fully- Momentary current (rms) 1.550 1
77.5 kA rms
offset, asymmetrical short-circuit current. 23.8 kA
%dc component at contact part 0.4761
The factors listed in the table on page 2 relate to the “bus instantaneous
bracing” discussion in TechTopics No. 21, and so relate to the rms symmetrical (total) current
1.2061 60.3 kA rms
mechanical capability of the equipment to withstand the forces at contact part
during short-circuits.
A different issue is that of the actual current to be interrupted Footnote:
by a circuit breaker when the fully-offset, asymmetrical short-
1
Values indicated in current wave on page 1.
circuit current occurs.
The purpose of this issue of TechTopics is to try to explain, in
To evaluate this, the time of contact part must be known, since
simple terms, the characteristics of the short-circuit current,
this determines the amount of dc offset that the circuit breaker
and how these characteristics relate to the parameters
has to handle. The opening time for the type GMSG circuit
established in the relevant standards. Unfortunately, the
breaker with three-cycle interrupting time is 29 ms nominal,
standards can be difficult to understand as they are not
with a range of 25 ms to 33 ms for production circuit breakers.
intended to be tutorial. As a result, the standards use jargon
To this time, add an allowance for relay operating time, which
that obscures the basic physics involved.
is assumed to be 1/2 cycle (8.3 ms) in the standards. This gives
a contact part time of 37.3 ms nominal, with a range of
33.3 ms to 41.3 ms.
Testing of the product is concerned with the worst case. The
worst case is the shortest possible contact part time, which
is 33.3 ms (two cycles or 720 electrical degrees) for the type
GMSG circuit breaker. By examination of the diagram, the
values of interest at contact part are:
%dc component 47.6 percent
S-factor 1.206. descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
Since the diagram is referenced to a symmetrical current of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
1.000 A rms, the rms asymmetrical (total) current is given by respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
the S-factor, 1.206 A of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A332-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 45
Accuracy of current transformers (CTs) used in medium-voltage control
equipment
In specifications for medium-voltage motor control equipment, For most applications, the CTs provided with SIMOVAC and
purchasers sometimes specify high relay accuracy ratings SIMOVAC-AR medium-voltage control equipment have a
for the current transformers (CTs). While high relay accuracy relaying accuracy of C10. The overload protective relays used
ratings are frequently necessary for circuit breaker applications, with today’s controllers are low burden devices, and the length
high accuracy for CTs in medium-voltage motor control of wire in the CT circuit is small, so the burden of the wiring is
equipment is seldom needed for the application. small. Therefore, the standard C10 accuracy is satisfactory.
In circuit breaker applications, there is a need for accuracy While Siemens can provide higher accuracies (e.g., C20 or
at relatively high levels of short-circuit current, and if the C50) for many CT ratios, the extra cost of the higher accuracy
protective relays are located remotely from the circuit breaker seldom conveys an economic benefit
(and its CTs), the secondary circuit will have appreciable
burden. This is a common consideration for outdoor circuit
breakers, or for circuit breakers in metal-clad switchgear used
with remote transformer differential relays.
The situation in medium-voltage motor control equipment is
quite different. In NEMA Class E2 control, current interruption The information provided in this document contains merely general
is performed by the vacuum contactor for load currents, descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
during starting and for moderate overload currents. However, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
interruption of short-circuit currents is accomplished by
current-limiting fuses. Class R fuses are used for motor starting of contract.
applications, and Class E fuses are used for protection of
transformers and non-motor loads. The coordination of the All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
fuse time-current characteristic and the vacuum contactor Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
(and its overload protective relay) is designed so that the own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
current-limiting fuse will interrupt first for all currents above
approximately eight to 12 times the full load current of the
7000 Siemens Road
motor. Wendell, NC 27591
Since the current-limiting fuse performs the interruption
for short-circuit currents, the CTs do not need to have great Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A333-X-4A00
accuracy for such currents. As a practical matter, the CT does
not have to provide for accurate sensing of currents above the © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
motor locked-rotor current.

TechTopics No. 46
Selection of current transformer (CT) ratio in medium-voltage control
Selection of the appropriate current transformer (CT) ratio d. The CT secondary current at motor FLA (refer to step b)
for motor controllers is relatively straight-forward, but must should be no higher than 4.0 A.
consider a number of factors. The CT ratio is selected to e. The CT secondary current at motor LRA (refer to step c)
provide proper overload protection to the machine. Short- should be no higher than 24.0 A
circuit protection considerations are not a factor, as the short-
circuit protection in a NEMA Class E2 controller is provided by f. If the conditions in steps d and e are both satisfied, and the
the current-limiting fuses (refer to TechTopics No. 45). The CT secondary wire length (total loop distance) is under
application procedure that Siemens uses to select the CT ratio 20 feet, and the wire size is at least #14AWG, then the
is as follows: selected CT ratio is ok.
a. Multiply motor full-load current (FLA) x 1.5. Select the g. If the conditions in either steps d or e are violated, the
standard CT primary rating closest to the 1.5 x FLA figure as engineer must specifically evaluate the accuracy of the CT to
a first approximation. assure that the CT will have the necessary accuracy for the
application. This requires calculation of secondary burden,
Example: motor FLA = 72 A including the burden of the protective device, in order to
72 x 1.5 = 109 A, select 100:5 CT make a decision.
b. Calculate the CT secondary current at motor FLA. Since the individual evaluation per step g is pretty rare, it will
Example: 73 A/(100/5) = 3.65 A not be discussed further in this example.
c. Calculate the CT secondary current at motor locked-rotor
current (LRA).
Example: motor LRA = 650 percent FLA,
(6.5 x 73 A)/(100/5) = 23.7 A

Siemens methodology is simplified (very conservative), so
that the maximum number of applications will be met by the
standard CT selected from steps a through f, and it is seldom
necessary to perform a more extensive individual evaluation
per step g. Siemens methodology assumes all worst-case
conditions (e.g., historic mechanical relays, multiple devices in
CT circuit, longest wire circuit in any controller configuration,
etc.).
Since the base calculation starts from 150 percent of the motor
FLA, this seldom yields a CT ratio of less than 125 percent of
the motor FLA. In fact, step d essentially requires that the CT
primary current rating be at least 125 percent of motor FLA.
Step e is used to avoid issues when the motor LRA is higher
than 600 percent of the full load current (FLA).

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A335-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 47
7.2 kV equipment basic insulation levels (BIL)
The differences in insulation levels, or withstand voltages, of Consider the most extreme situation with respect to insulation
differing types of electrical equipment can be quite puzzling. levels, for equipment used on 6.9 kV systems. Since most users
The differences do make sense, and relate to the application commonly think of insulation strength in terms of the rated
of the equipment. To a minor degree, differences among the BIL, the discussion will focus on BIL.
ratings of equipment exist because the equipment standards Metal-clad switchgear is often the main service equipment for
are created in different organizations. However, the major the facility, supplied directly from the utility system. The utility
reason that insulation levels differ among different types of system is often an overhead line system, with direct exposure
equipment relates to the equipment’s role in the distribution to lightning, or only slightly shielded from lightning surges.
system. Thus, the BIL requirements for switchgear are relatively high,
Insulation levels in electrical equipment are characterized by but not as high as for outdoor power transformers and outdoor
the withstand voltages used during the design tests. circuit breakers exposed to lightning.
There are two basic classifications of insulation strength: basic 6.9 kV metal-clad switchgear has the same dielectric capability
insulation level (BIL) or lightning-impulse withstand voltage, as 15 kV class metal-clad switchgear (95 kV BIL). Liquid-filled
and power-frequency withstand voltage (often called “hipot” power transformers usually have 95 kV BIL at 6.9 kV. Outdoor
voltage). distribution type 15.5 kV circuit breakers (e.g., the Siemens
type SDV7), are rated 110 kV BIL.
Insulation levels for equipment system voltage (or voltage rating of winding) = 6.9 kV
Lightning-impulse
Power-frequency withstand
Type of equipment Reference standard withstand voltage
voltage kV, rms
(BIL) kV, peak
Power transformers (liquid) (8.7 kV class) IEEE C57.12.10 95 kV 26 kV
Outdoor distribution circuit breakers (15.5 kV class) ANSI/IEEE C37.06 110 kV 36 kV
Metal-clad switchgear (8.25 kV class) ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 95 kV 36 kV
Dry-type transformers (8.7 kV class) ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 45 kV 19 kV
Medium-voltage motor control (MVC) UL 347 60 kV 17.5 kV1
Medium-voltage motors NEMA MG1 26.2 kV3 14.8 kV2
Footnotes:
1
2,000 V + (2.25 x nominal voltage rating) = 2,000 + (2.25 X 6,900) = 17.5 kV
2
1,000 V + (2 x nominal voltage rating) = 1,000 + (2 x 6,900) = 14.8 kV
3
Refer to discussion. 14.8 kV x √ 2 x 1.25 = 26.2 kV

Switchgear and circuit breakers most often feed transformers Essentially, all transformers and a number of other voltage-
and other circuit breakers, both relatively “robust” from the sensitive devices (such as, autotransformers, reactors, CPTs,
dielectric standpoint. The BIL of the upstream equipment surge arresters and surge capacitors) are disconnected from
is coordinated with that of the served equipment, as the the MVC when the impulse test is performed. This may sound
insulation capability (BIL rating) of the equipment increases as like “cheating,” but really isn’t. These devices all would take
the exposure to lightning increases (e.g., as you move closer to very high currents when the voltage rises, preventing the
the utility source). voltage from rising to the level required for the test. Therefore,
Well after this basic concept was embodied in the standards, they are disconnected from the MVC equipment for dielectric
dry-type transformers were introduced. Since air is used as testing. They are also disconnected from switchgear during
the insulating medium, of course, the insulation level of the dielectric testing.
dry-type transformer is less than that of liquid-filled power It is recognized that machines have very poor insulation, and
transformers. As shown in the table, a dry-type transformer therefore, CPTs, autotransformers and reactors in MVCs are
has a standard rated BIL of 45 kV for 8.7 kV class windings. allowed to have the BIL capability allowed by their respective
This is considerably less than the BIL level of liquid-filled standards.
transformers, so use of surge arresters was very common All of this reflects the fact that MVCs are intended to feed
in the early years. In recent years, insulation in dry-type machines that have low dielectric capabilities. Also, it is
transformers has improved, but conservative engineers rare for MVCs to have direct exposure to lightning. For MVC
still often specify surge arresters for “standard BIL” dry-type installations that have exposure to voltage surges, surge
transformers. More recently, VPI, VPE and cast epoxy windings arresters should be specified.
have become available on dry-type transformers, so it is
becoming much more common to require a “power class” BIL Philosophically, when a lightning surge comes down the line,
(95 kV) on dry-type transformers. it doesn’t stop just before it reaches the connected equipment
to ask, “What BIL are you?” It doesn’t change its voltage level to
Now, we turn to medium-voltage motor control (MVC) suit the BIL of the equipment it is about to hit. Lightning surges
equipment. MVC equipment became popular in the late don’t come in 30 kV, 45 kV, 60 kV or similar values. A lightning
1940s and early 1950s, and predominantly was used to feed strike is millions of volts and tens of kA. Accordingly, if the
2.3 kV and 4.0 kV machines. A motor has no BIL capability, application involves direct lightning exposure, surge protection
strictly speaking. IEEE 141-1992 (the “Red Book”) shows a in accordance with the applicable standards (primarily ANSI/
value for “impulse strength” in table 6-4, based on a proposal IEEE C62.21) must be specified when the equipment is
from a working group. The proposed impulse strength value purchased.
was 125 percent of the peak value of the power-frequency
withstand voltage. In our example, the power-frequency In summary, the differences in BIL requirements arise primarily
withstand voltage is 14.8 kV, with a peak value of 20.9 kV and from differences in the dielectric capabilities of the served
a corresponding “impulse strength” of 26.2 kV. equipment and exposure levels.
This proposed “impulse strength” has not been incorporated

in the motor standards, and is mentioned solely to illustrate
that motor insulation levels are considerably lower than the
insulation levels of the equipment used to supply power for the
motors.
Since the motor starting contactor feeds a machine with a use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
very low impulse capability, there is little value to requiring further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
a high BIL of the vacuum contactor. Even so, the makers respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
of the vacuum contactors in the early years were relatively
conservative, and many had backgrounds in circuit breaker All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
type equipment. Accordingly, the vacuum contactors came Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
to be designed for 60 kV BIL, which is the BIL level of 4.76 kV own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
switchgear.
Vacuum contactors also employ a control power transformer 7000 Siemens Road
(CPT) to supply power for the contactor main coil. With Wendell, NC 27591
drawout designs, the CPT is often on the drawout carriage. The
CPT is usually of open, dry-type construction for cost reasons Subject to change without prior notice.
and for space considerations. This led to an exclusion of the Order No.: E50001-F710-A336-X-4A00
CPT from the BIL requirement (impulse test) in the standard for All rights reserved.
MVC equipment.
TechTopics No. 48
Fan-cooled control circuit for forced-air cooled circuit breakers
Fan cooling is a commonly used means to increase the Similar thoughts apply to the use of fan cooling for circuit
continuous load capability of power transformers, and has been breakers in metal-clad switchgear. Fan cooling of circuit
used for decades. Fan cooling is appropriate when the extra breakers in metal-clad switchgear has been used for decades to
capacity available in the transformer is needed only during accommodate heavy loading for relatively short periods, such
non-routine operating circumstances, or when abnormal as a few hours or a few days. Fan cooling is most commonly
conditions prevail. used to match the current-carrying capability of secondary main
An example of non-routine operating circumstances is the use circuit breakers to the load capability of the associated upstream
of fan cooling of transformers in a double-ended substation power transformer, when the transformer is operating in the
configuration. This allows one transformer to handle the entire forced-air cooling mode.
load of the substation when one of the transformers is out of One major difference between the application of fan cooling
service and the secondary tie circuit breaker is closed. to transformers and to switchgear concerns losses. In both
An example of abnormal conditions is the need to cope with transformers and switchgear, increasing the current increases
very heavy loads often present during extremely hot weather. the losses as the square of the current. However, the order
When a record heat wave happens, air conditioning and chiller of magnitude of the losses in switchgear compared to power
loads increase, and the transformer can safely bear the increased transformers is radically different. Thus, use of fan cooling for
loading if it is within the fan-cooled rating of the transformer. circuit breakers in switchgear does not incur the steep energy
cost penalty that occurs with use of the fan-cooled rating of a
In either of these situations, fan cooling of the transformer transformer.
is used to meet unusually high loading conditions that only
happen occasionally, perhaps a few days a year. Fan cooling is Because the penalty associated with losses is much lower for
an economic way to handle these short-term loading situations fan-cooled circuit breakers than for fan-cooled transformers,
without undue investment in facilities. use of fan cooling of circuit breakers for long durations is not of
concern. The circuit breaker is capable of operating in its fan-
cooled mode at rated current indefinitely.

1 2
1 3 PB1 51 TD2 X ALARM

120VAC SUPPLY 2 4 PUSH TO TEST CIRCUIT
51
PWR
5 TD1
FAN SPLY 51
6 CG
1/2HP
A1 B1 A1 B1 AIR SW
TD1 TD2 X
A2 A2
Typical fan-cooling control circuit schematic diagram
The typical control schematic that Siemens uses for the fan
A push-to-test circuit is provided with PB1. This allows for
cooling circuit of the circuit breaker is shown on this page. The exercising of the fan scheme. The test circuit operates
operation of the control circuit is as follows: through TD2, which is an instantaneous pickup, time-delay

The forced-air fan is controlled by a single-phase overcurrent dropout device. When the pushbutton is depressed, the
relay (51), normally connected to a current transformer (CT) fan starts immediately. When the pushbutton is released,
in phase two of the primary circuit. The overcurrent relay the fan continues to run until the dropout time on TD2 is
should be set to pickup at a reasonable current value. We reached. The test circuit checks the whole system beyond
prefer that the pickup be approximately 90 percent to 95 the current relay. The pushbutton also opens the supply to
percent of the self-cooled, continuous-current capability of the alarm circuit, so that the alarm circuit is also tested if the
the circuit breaker. pushbutton is depressed for a period longer than the dropout
time of timer TD1.

The overcurrent relay (51) normally-open contact actuates
timer (TD2). In turn, timer (TD2) energizes auxiliary contactor
(X), which energizes the fan itself. Timer (TD2) is an
instantaneous pickup timer, with time-delay dropout. The
dropout time delay allows the fan to continue running for a
time after the load current through the circuit breaker drops
below the dropout set point of the overcurrent relay (51).
This allows for the removal of any residual heat in the circuit
breaker. The time delay also allows for a “ride through” on
the fan in the event of fluctuating currents. If the current is
only below the set point of the overcurrent relay (51) for a
few minutes, and then rises again, the fan continues to run The information provided in this document contains merely general
through the whole period. descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual

The time delay for starting of the fan is controlled by the further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
overcurrent relay. A setting of five-seconds delay on the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
overcurrent relay is common. of contract.

The overcurrent relay normally-closed contact is connected to All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
a timer (TD1), which is set to provide a time delay on dropout. Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
When the overcurrent relay contact opens, TD1 drops out own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
after a time delay. The timer typically has an adjustment
range of five to 100 seconds, and a setting of 30 seconds is Siemens Industry, Inc.
appropriate. Thus, when the timer times out, TD1 drops out, 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
closing the TD1 contact in the alarm circuit.

The normally-closed contact of timer (TD1) is connected in Subject to change without prior notice.
series with a normally-closed contact from an air flow switch Order No.: E50001-F710-A337-X-4A00
(AIR SW). This circuit is provided to activate a remote alarm All rights reserved.
in the event that the scheme calls for the fan to start, but air
flow does not occur in the time delay period set on timer TD1. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
The alarm circuit also is actuated on loss of control power to
the fan circuit. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
TechTopics No. 50
Ground sensor current transformer cable routing
Zero-sequence ground current sensing has been used for When the system is grounded through an impedance, an
sensitive ground current protection for decades, but questions alternative method is needed to sense ground current. To
still are raised by installers and specifiers. This issue of achieve the required sensitivity, the current transformer (CT)
TechTopics discusses the proper installation of load cables to ratio must be independent of the expected phase currents. A
achieve correct ground current sensing. toroidal CT with a window that is large enough to enclose all
Strictly speaking, any method of ground current sensing phase conductors is used. This CT is commonly referred to as a
involves detecting zero-sequence currents. For solidly zero-sequence CT, even though it is only one means to monitor
grounded systems, connecting the phase current transformers zero-sequence currents.
together with a common return allows measurement of When there are too many cables for one zero-sequence ground
zero-sequence current in the common lead, if there is no CT, multiple zero-sequence CTs can be used. It is essential that
neutral load current. The vector sum of the phase currents is each set of three-phase cables and the corresponding ground
equal to the zero-sequence ground current. This technique cables pass through a single, zero-sequence CT. For example,
is appropriate if the system is solidly grounded and the with three cables per phase, two three-phase sets of cable
potential ground currents are high. However, if ground current and the corresponding ground cables could pass through
magnitude is restricted (as by a ground resistor), the sensitivity one CT, and the remaining three-phase set of cables and the
of the residual connection is ordinarily not adequate. The corresponding ground cables would pass through a second CT.
phase current transformer ratio must exceed the maximum This assures that all of the currents are balanced, and that the
expected continuous load current or expected overloads, and continuous current-carrying capability of the zero-sequence
therefore the ground current sensitivity is limited. ground CT is not exceeded.

Under normal load conditions, the vector sum of the three-
phase currents is near zero. It is not exactly zero as the system Switchgear bus or feeder terminal bars
Cable terminations (insulated)
capacitive charging current of the load circuit is non-zero. The
three-phase cable charging currents sum to a zero-sequence
current, typically under 1 A for a relatively short distance of
Stress cone cable terminations
load-side cable. For our purposes, we can ignore this current
and consider the normal current as zero.
When one load-side phase conductor fails to ground, the Ground shield wire:
All ground shield wires must be
resulting vector sum of the phase currents no longer is zero. If routed back through the ground
sensor CT opening, and be connected
to the equiment ground bus on the Equipment ground bus
the system is resistance grounded, the zero-sequence ground load side of ground sensor CT.
CT will see a ground current determined by the resistance of

Zero-sequence ground
the ground resistor, plus the resistance of the load circuit. For sensor current transformer Ground cable lug
example, if the phase cable faults to ground, the voltage across

the ground resistor will be the normal phase-neutral voltage,
and the ground current will equal the ground resistor rating. Floor or enclosure
Conduit: Terminate and connect to
On the other hand, suppose the load is a motor with wye- ground on load side of ground sensor CT
connected windings, and a fault occurs in one phase Figure 1: Correct cable installation with zero-sequence ground current
90 percent of the winding distance from line to the neutral transformers.
(e.g., the fault is within 10 percent of the neutral point). Then,
the voltage across the ground resistor will be only 10 percent
of the normal phase-neutral voltage, and the ground current
will be only 10 percent of the ground resistor rating.
So, the objective is to measure the ground return current, and
only the ground return current. This means that the load-side
cables must be installed so that the ground return current will
not affect the current transformer output current.
Figure 1 shows the proper installation of phase and ground
cables with a zero-sequence ground current transformer. The
important features are:

All phase cables must pass through the CT opening.

The phase cable shield must be terminated with a stress
cone kit between the zero-sequence ground CT and the
cable lug.

The phase cable shield ground conductor must be routed
back through the zero-sequence ground CT.

The cable shields and the cable shield ground conductors The information provided in this document contains merely general
must not contact any grounded surface of the switchgear descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
enclosure between the cable lugs and the zero-sequence use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
ground CT. further development of the products. An obligation to provide the

The cable shields must be connected to the switchgear of contract.
ground bus on the load side of the zero-sequence ground
CT. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

The incoming conduit (or armor for IAC cable) must be own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
properly bonded and connected to ground on the load side
of the zero-sequence ground CT. Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road

The cables should be located toward the center of the
Wendell, NC 27591
CT opening, and should not be allowed to contact the CT
case. If the cables are directly against the CT case, it could Subject to change without prior notice.
lead to localized saturation of the CT core under through- Order No.: E50001-F710-A338-X-4A00
fault conditions, leading to false operation. Typically, the All rights reserved.
mounting plate for the zero-sequence ground CT can be © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
used to restrict the cables so that they pass through the
approximate center of the CT window.
TechTopics No. 52
Insulation of switchgear terminations
Siemens occasionally receives queries from users or their Connections must be insulated
installation contractors regarding the need for insulation of the C37.20.2 uses the term “connections,” which includes any
user’s power connections to metal-clad switchgear. The user’s connection to the primary bus, and specifically includes
power connections must be insulated to the same performance the user’s power connections (cable terminations, bus duct
levels as are required of the switchgear itself. The user’s power connections, or the like) to the switchgear. All connections must
connections are typically insulated with tape in accordance be insulated.
with the manufacturer’s instructions, or may be insulated with
optional, preformed boots available from most switchgear Reduction of fault likelihood
manufacturers. ANSI/IEEE metal-clad switchgear requires insulated primary
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 for metal-clad switchgear defines “metal- conductors. It is usually assumed that this is to allow the
clad” as, among other things, switchgear in which the “primary equipment to be more compact, but this is only a minor
bus conductors and connections are covered with insulating consideration. The real intent of having insulated conductors in
material throughout” (clause 3.1.5.e). The standard goes on to metal-clad switchgear is to reduce the likelihood of occurrence
explain the rationale for requiring that primary conductors and of arcing faults. There have been many technical papers that
connections be insulated in clause 7.9, which says (in part): emphasize the value of insulated conductors in reducing the
likelihood of an arcing fault.
This insulating covering is a requirement of metal-clad
switchgear (see 3.1.5) and is provided to minimize the Insulation is a component of the insulation system
possibility of communicating faults and prevent the In ANSI/IEEE switchgear, the insulation covering is not the
development of bus faults that would result if foreign objects entire insulation system of the switchgear, but is actually one
momentarily contacted bare bus. This insulating covering part of a coordinated system of insulation, supports and the air
is usually only a part of the primary insulation system, and surrounding the conductors. The insulation covering the bus
in such cases the outer surface of this insulating covering bars is required to withstand rated line-line voltage between
will not be at ground potential. It should not be assumed, the conductor and the outside surface of the insulation for
therefore, that personnel can contact this insulating covering one minute (clause 6.2.1.3, Test for bus-bar insulation). To
with complete safety. understand this requirement in the context of the overall design,
This paragraph contains multiple “nuggets” of wisdom on the think of this requirement as a one-minute power frequency
subject of insulation in metal-clad switchgear, in general, and on test for the insulation itself. For 15 kV switchgear, this would
insulation of user’s power terminations. require a one-minute test withstand of 15 kV across the bus or
conductor insulation.

The complete equipment has a requirement of 36 kV for the
The manufacturer may add barriers but may not have
one-minute power-frequency withstand voltage test. Therefore, performed design tests to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 to verify
the standards require that the insulation, by itself, have at that the equipment meets the dielectric performance
least 15 kV/36 kV, or just over 40 percent of the total insulation requirements of the standard, including both the power
capability of the system. This means that in 15 kV switchgear, frequency (one-minute) withstand voltage and the lightning
as much as 60 percent of the insulation integrity is contained impulse withstand voltage levels.
in the air surrounding the conductors. So, if the user’s power
Addition of interphase/outerphase barriers increases the
terminations are not covered with insulation, something in the “clutter” in the termination area. If the barriers must be
vicinity of 40 percent of the dielectric strength of the insulation removed to provide access for examination of the main bus,
system is lost. the barriers make the operation more difficult, and may also
Outer surface of insulation not at ground potential make it less likely that the main bus area will be periodically
The last portion of the paragraph reminds the user of the inspected. Moreover, if the barriers are removed during
standard that the outer surface of the insulation is not at maintenance and are not replaced, the dielectric capabilities
ground potential, and is therefore not safe to touch. Energized of the equipment are compromised.
insulated conductors in switchgear must be treated as energized Summary
conductors.
Insulated user power terminations are required by the
Other considerations standards for metal-clad switchgear.
The dielectric capability of a switchgear design is a carefully
Insulation reduces the likelihood of occurrence of arcing
considered balance between dielectric performance, faults.
manufacturing cost, equipment size, ease of assembly and
Insulation is required to meet the dielectric performance
installation and a host of other factors. The manufacturer levels of the standards.
seeks to minimize the variations between various designs (for
example, between 1,200 A, 2,000 A, 3,000 A and 4,000 A
configurations) and to maximize the use of standard
components across various designs. Phase-phase conductor
spacing is standardized in each manufacturer’s design, with
the size of the conductor varying to suit the continuous current
rating. Because of this, lower continuous current designs may
appear to have sufficient clearance so that they do not require
insulation of the user’s power terminations. However, this is
unwise, as seemingly adequate phase-phase clearance between
energized parts does not necessarily imply adequate phase-
ground clearance.
In addition, the manufacturer has to consider power-frequency
voltage withstand capability (as discussed earlier in this issue),
and must also consider impulse withstand capability. The
manufacturer conducts lightning impulse withstand tests to The information provided in this document contains merely general
verify the performance of their designs. Equipment designed to descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
have insulated user power terminations is not likely to meet the
lightning impulse withstand performance levels of the design if respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
the terminations are not insulated. of contract.
Some users request special designs to accommodate
uninsulated user power terminations, such as by installing
insulating barriers between the phases, and between the outer own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
phases and ground in the user’s power termination areas. This
can be done, but is generally undesirable for these reasons: Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road

Since the terminations would not be insulated, it causes
Wendell, NC 27591
the switchgear to fail to comply with ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2
standards for metal-clad switchgear. Subject to change without prior notice.

Addition of barriers increases the cost of the equipment. Order No.: E50001-F710-A339-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 53
Use of SF6 gas in medium-voltage switchgear
In this issue, the use of SF6 (sulfur hexafluoride) gas in medium- The SF6 molecule, has six fluorine atoms placed symmetrically
voltage switchgear is discussed. SF6 has been widely used in around a sulfur atom. The symmetrical arrangement leads
high-voltage circuit breakers for decades, but its use in medium- to extreme stability, a very desirable characteristic for an
voltage equipment is relatively recent. In the medium-voltage insulating gas. This gives the gas a very high dielectric capability,
arena, Siemens uses SF6 gas in the load-interrupting switch approximately three times the dielectric strength of air at
and switch-disconnector in type SIMOSEC metal-enclosed load- atmospheric pressure. As a result, equipment using SF6 as an
interrupter switchgear rated up to 27.6 kV, and as the insulation insulating medium can be considerably more compact than
medium in gas-insulated vacuum circuit breaker switchgear equipment using air as the insulating medium.
types 8DA/DB. SF6 is a highly electronegative gas, an advantage for both
Characteristics and properties dielectric performance and interruption capability. This means
A few physical properties of SF6 include: that the molecule has a strong electron affinity, so that the gas
molecule tends to catch free electrons and build heavily negative

Colorless, odorless, non-toxic and non-flammable ions, which do not move fast. This prevents (or at least retards)

Inert the electron avalanche that precedes a flashover.

Non-corrosive SF6 is a “self-healing” dielectric, in that it is largely undamaged
by breakdown. This makes it highly suitable as an interrupting

Thermally stable (decomposition does not occur below
medium. The dielectric strength of the gas does not decrease
500 °C)
due to decomposition, such as occurs with arcing or arc

Density approximately five times that of air. interruption. It has excellent cooling properties at temperatures
associated with arc extinguishing, as the gas uses energy when
it dissociates, which provides the significant cooling effect. The
process is reversible, so that nearly all of the SF6 recombines
after interruption. Thus, very little of the SF6 is “used up” during
interruption, particularly for interruption of moderate (load)
currents.

SF6 dissociates during arcing into its atomic constituents, Environmental issues
one sulfur atom and six fluorine atoms. There are secondary In recent years, SF6 has been widely discussed in the
reactions with contacts and insulation exposed to the arc, but environmental arena. SF6 is recognized as a very potent
such secondary reactions are relatively minor for load current greenhouse gas. The U.S. EPA reports that SF6 has an
interruptions, increasing in significance when very high currents atmospheric lifetime of around 3,200 years, and a global
are interrupted, such as at the full rating of a high-voltage circuit warming potential (100-year horizon) of 23,900 times that of
breaker. CO2. The EPA 2010 report of greenhouse gas inventory (refer
While pure SF6 is odorless, contaminated SF6 has a pungent http://epa.gov/climatechange/emissions/downloads10/US-
or unpleasant odor. The fumes irritate the nose, mouth and GHG-2010_Report.pdf) shows SF6 emissions associated with
eyes. The irritation occurs in seconds, well in advance of any electrical transmission and distribution for 2008 as 13.1 TgCO2Eg
danger from poisoning. As mentioned previously, this degree of (page 242, table 4-92), a decrease of about 51 percent from
contamination of the SF6 gas would not be expected in a device emissions in 1990. TgCO2Eg is the expression for GWP-weighted
that switches moderate load currents (e.g., a load interrupter emissions for all gases and denotes teragrams (or million metric
switch or a switch-disconnector), but would be expected in a tons) of CO2 equivalent. The emissions of 13.1 TgCO2Eg was
circuit breaker that interrupts short-circuit currents. about 0.2 percent of the total 6,956.8 TgCO2Eg for all greenhouse
History gas emissions in the U.S. for 2008 (refer to pages 28-30, table
ES-2). A CIGRE working group, WG23.02, studied SF6 use in the
SF6 first became available in the late 1940s in laboratory electric industry, and estimated that the electrical emissions of
quantities. Large-scale industrial production began about 1953. SF6 gas into the atmosphere accounted for approximately
By the 1960s, a number of designs of high-voltage SF6 circuit 0.1 percent of the total global warming potential of gases in the
breakers were available. Predominantly, these were so-called atmosphere (as of 1999). By contrast, CO2 contributes around
“two-pressure” designs, in which a relatively low pressure was 60 percent of the total global warming potential in the same
used for insulation purposes, and a high-pressure system was time period.
used to interrupt the current. These early units experienced
relatively high gas leakage. As the experience with SF6 in high- The major reason that the electrical use of SF6 has such a low
voltage circuit breakers grew, the manufacturers introduced impact on global warming is that electrical usage is on the basis
“single-pressure” designs and improved sealing techniques, of a “closed system.” In part due to the cost of the gas, and
greatly reducing the leakage rate. Today’s high-voltage SF6 circuit primarily to reduce environmental impact, the gas is carefully
breakers have leakage rates below one percent per year. “protected” at all stages during the lifecycle. Processes are
controlled during manufacture to assure that gas losses are held
SF6 usage to a minimum. The switchgear is designed so that leakage of gas
SF6 has been used extensively in non-electrical applications. over the life of the switchgear is minimal.
Since SF6 is inert, it is very attractive to the magnesium At the end-of-life condition, there are widely available service
industry. Magnesium reacts spontaneously in the presence of firms who specialize in recovering used SF6 gas for shipment
oxygen, so a heavier-than-air cover gas is used to isolate the to gas reprocessing firms. These service firms also keep up-to-
molten magnesium from oxygen as the magnesium cools. The date on the proper handling procedures and regulations for
aluminum industry has used SF6 gas in casting operations, to the handling of SF6 gas and byproducts. Used SF6 gas can be
reduce the porosity of cast aluminum parts by exclusion of recovered and reprocessed for reuse. Nearly all of the SF6 gas
hydrogen during the manufacturing process. The semiconductor in use in electrical equipment will ultimately be recovered and
industry uses SF6 gas in plasma etching and to clean chemical reused.
vapor deposition tools. SF6 has been used, usually together with
argon, as a filler gas in thermally-insulated windows. Significant research has been conducted to find a substitute
for SF6 gas in electrical products. A lengthy report has been
Finally, in what seems a bizarre use, SF6 was used for the “gas issued by National Institute of Standards and Technology
cushion” in a number of sports footwear products, including (NIST) on potential alternatives to pure SF6 for insulation and
some endorsed by widely-known sports personalities. arc interruption, concluding that there is no replacement gas
In electrical equipment, SF6 is used for nearly all high-voltage immediately available to use as an SF6 substitute. Separately, L.
(over 38 kV) circuit breakers worldwide. It is also used in gas- Niemeyer studied the issue and concluded that “a functionally
insulated substations (GIS) and gas-insulated lines (GIL), highly equivalent substitute gas for SF6 does not exist” (L. Niemeyer:
suited to urban power transmission applications. In the medium- “A systematic search for insulation gases and the environmental
voltage realm (up to 38 kV), SF6 has been used outside the U.S. evaluation,” Gaseous Dielectrics VIII, Plenum, NY, 1998). NIST
for circuit breakers having relatively low interrupting ratings. The also indicated that there are significant questions concerning
market for high interrupting capacity circuit breakers (such as the performance of gases other than pure SF6. In short, it
used in metal-clad switchgear) is dominated by vacuum circuit appears that use of SF6 will continue into the foreseeable future
breakers. SF6 is used extensively worldwide for low switching in electrical equipment. At this time, there is no indication that
capacity switches. In these applications, SF6 allows for extremely the U.S. EPA will restrict the use of SF6 in electrical equipment ,
compact switching devices, sealed-for-life construction, and very but requirements for reporting SF6 inventories and losses will be
low maintenance. implemented soon.
SF6 use in types 8DA/8DB switchgear Summary
Insert new paragraph “Types 8DA/DB medium-voltage, vacuum SF6 has excellent dielectric properties, and is well suited for
circuit breaker switchgear use low-pressure SF6 as an insulating use in interrupting devices for relatively low switching ratings,
medium for all primary voltage components. Fixed-mounted, such as for load interrupter switches as used in the type
vacuum circuit breakers are used for circuit interruption, and the SIMOSEC switchgear line. Its use in gas-insulated, medium-
equipment incorporates three-position switches (CLOSED-OPEN- voltage vacuum circuit breaker types 8DA/DB switchgear allows
READY-TO-GROUND) for transfer of the feeder circuit from one for extremely compact switchgear since the gas is used only
bus to the other (for double-bus type 8DB), and for isolation in for its insulating qualities and interruption takes place in a
both the double-bus type 8DB and single-bus type 8DA. vacuum. Use of SF6 reduces the space requirements for the
Use of SF6 insulating gas excludes environmental contamination switchgear, isolates the switching elements from environmental
(such as rodents, moisture, dirt, corrosive atmospheres, contamination, and allows significant reduction of maintenance.
etc.) so that the primary components do not require periodic
maintenance. Due to the high dielectric strength of SF6 gas, an
extremely compact arrangement is possible. Since the circuit
breaker is fixed-mounted, maintenance associated with drawout
mechanisms is eliminated.
SF6 use in SIMOSEC switchgear
SF6 is used in the SIMOSEC switchgear design for the load-
interrupting switch and for the switch-disconnector in a variety
of configurations. This design takes advantage of the main
characteristics of SF6 and minimizes the environmental issues
associated with the gas.
The switch is enclosed in a welded, stainless-steel vessel or
enclosure. The enclosure is sealed-for-life, so there is no need
to periodically replenish the gas. The switch mechanism itself is
maintenance-free, with no need to perform contact alignment,
contact adjustment or similar functions. Since the switch is
sealed, it is isolated from contaminants in the atmosphere,
further prolonging the life of the switch.
The filling pressure of the gas is low, 7.25 psig, and only a small
quantity of gas is used. The enclosure is welded and a stainless
steel bellows is used to transfer mechanical motion, eliminating
the need for sliding or rotating seals and gaskets. The annual
leakage rate is below 0.1 percent per year, so no replenishment
of the gas is needed over the life of the switchgear.
The switch enclosure is sealed-for-life, so there is no need to The information provided in this document contains merely general
provide for periodic maintenance of the gas. A gas density descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
indicator, essentially a “go/no-go” device, is provided, indicating use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
whether the amount of gas in the switch is acceptable or if the further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
switch is “not ready for service.” As discussed in the section of this
of contract.
issue relative to “characteristics and properties,” the SF6 gas in
the switch is largely free of degradation over the entire life of All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
the switch. Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
The switch also includes a viewing window or port, so that the
position of the switch blades can be visibly verified as required Siemens Industry, Inc.
by certain U.S. regulations and codes. 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A340-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 54
Interrupter switch technology comparison -
type SIMOSEC SF6 switch - conventional air switch
In TechTopics No. 53, the characteristics of SF6 (sulfur This comparison illustrates the superiority of the type SIMOSEC
hexafluoride) gas that make it advantageous for use in medium- SF6 load-interrupter switch in comparison to traditional load-
and high-voltage electrical equipment were discussed. This interrupter air switches.
issue of the TechTopics series will discuss this issue further by
comparing the features of conventional, medium-voltage load-
interrupter switches operating in air with those operating in an
SF6 gas environment.
The table on the next page shows some of the major
characteristics of medium-voltage load-interrupter switches
that influence the application or the space required. Of course,
the table data for air switches is generic, and the specific data
for a particular vendor of air switches can vary significantly.
The air switch dimensions shown are for the most common
(15 kV 600 A) switch, and the dimensions for a 27 kV switch
are significantly greater. Even though typical data is used
for the air switch, the table is considered valid for an overall
understanding. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
From the data in the table, these observations can be made: further development of the products. An obligation to provide the

Endurance: The switching endurance of the type SIMOSEC SF6 of contract.
switch is significantly higher than that of an air switch that
merely meets the ANSI C37.22 endurance requirements. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

Environmental: The switching performance does not own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
deteriorate in adverse environments since the type SIMOSEC
SF6 switch is isolated from the atmosphere. Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road

Size: The type SIMOSEC SF6 switch (without operator) is
Wendell, NC 27591
over 90 percent smaller than the basic air switch, allowing
for a great reduction in space for the overall type SIMOSEC Subject to change without prior notice.
switchgear installation. Order No.: E50001-F710-A341-X-4A00

Maintenance: Maintenance required for the switch itself is
essentially eliminated.

Characteristic Type SIMOSEC SF6 switch Medium-voltage air switches
Switching life:
Mechanical High: Low – ANSI C37.22 requires:
1,000 operations 500 operations up to 15 kV
350 operations at 27 kV
Electrical Very high: Low – ANSI C37.22 requires:
100 operations at 600 A 50 operations up to 4.76 kV
30 operations for 4.8 to 15 kV
10 operations for over 15 to 27 kV
Welded, stainless steel switch enclosure, sealed- Switch in air, exposed to contaminants, corrosive influences,
Environmental
for-life, isolated from contaminants dust, dirt
Very small: Large:

Basic 600 A switch module for up to 27.6 kV Basic 600 A switch module for up to 15 kV 600 A
Size
(without enclosure) is about 14"D x 8"W x 9"H (without enclosure) is about 28"D x 25"W x 26"H (10.5 cubic feet)
(0.6 cubic feet)
Yes
Visible isolation Large viewing window for verification of position Yes
(CLOSED – OPEN – GROUNDED)
Integrated fault-making (make-proof) grounding

for outgoing feeder cables
Functionality No integral grounding capability
Inherently prevents simultaneous CLOSED and
GROUNDED positions
Manual spring operator (standard)

Manual spring operator (standard)
Operation means Motorized spring operator (optional)
Motorized spring stored-energy operator (optional)
Motorized spring stored-energy operator (optional)
Very low: High:

Small moving mass High moving mass
Mechanism force Short travel distance Long travel distance
Easier operation Harder operation
Increased reliability Lower reliability
None:
Gas handling Switch enclosure sealed-for-life Not applicable
No gas handling during maintenance
Less than 0.1% per year:

Welded, stainless steel gas enclosure
Gas leakage Switch enclosure sealed-for-life Not applicable
Bushings welded to enclosure
No sliding or rotating seals
Extremely low: High:

Switch enclosure sealed-for-life Switch operates in air
Maintenance of No contact inspection or replacement Switch needs adjustment, inspection
switch module No lubrication for operating mechanism Operating mechanism requires lubrication
Insignificant contact erosion during switching Arcing contacts subject to erosion
No arc chutes Arc chutes subject to degradation
TechTopics No. 55
Capacitor trip devices
Capacitor trip devices (CTDs) have been used with medium- The principle of a basic capacitor trip device is very simple.
voltage circuit breakers for decades. Even though CTDs are A capacitor is connected to a half-wave rectifier or a bridge
workhorse components in the switchgear, Siemens still receives rectifier, and charged from the normal ac control power supply.
questions about the basic function and need for them. The charging time of the capacitor is typically in the vicinity
A CTD is an energy storage device for “impulse” type loads, for of 10 cycles or so. The charging current is limited by a series
situations in which the normal source of control power may resistor, both to protect the capacitor from excess current, and
not be present when action is required. The classic application to protect the bridge rectifier. The capacitor is isolated, with no
for a CTD is for tripping of a medium-voltage circuit breaker in continuous load connected to the capacitor output circuit. When
installations that derive the control power from the ac primary a protective relay or any other trip contact closes, the capacitor
system through a control power transformer (CPT). If a bolted output is connected to the circuit breaker trip coil circuit (or to
fault occurs on the ac primary system (or any major fault on the solenoid circuit of a lockout relay), and the stored capacitive
a weak power system), the voltage on the primary bus will be energy is released to trip the circuit breaker or lockout relay.
depressed and the secondary voltage from the CPT will be at a When the ac supply is at rated voltage (240 Vac, for example),
low value. An energy storage device is needed so that the power the capacitor will charge to the peak of the ac voltage, or
to trip the medium-voltage circuit breaker will be available even 339 Vdc. The capacitor stays at this voltage as long as the
under fault conditions. incoming supply voltage is maintained. When the ac voltage is
The most common use of CTDs is to trip medium-voltage circuit lost, the capacitor begins to discharge slowly. If a trip command
breakers. A secondary application is for actuation of lockout is received, the charge on the capacitor is released to trip the
(device 86) relays powered from the ac supply of a CPT. A circuit breaker.
separate CTD is required for each circuit breaker or lockout relay. The capacitor size is selected so that it has sufficient energy to
A CTD must never be connected to parallel (multiple) loads. operate the trip coil of the circuit breaker. Ideally, the capacitor
size and charge current magnitude are tuned to the inductance
and resistance of the tripping solenoid (an RLC series circuit).
The objective is to produce a discharge current through the
tripping solenoid that emulates the magnitude of current and
current duration that the solenoid would experience if operated
from a dc tripping supply voltage.

For convenience, most applications of CTDs are designed for use Advantages
with conventional dc trip coils on the circuit breaker, in line with
Economic for small installations with only a few circuit
the objective of matching the coil characteristics to the decaying breakers, compared to use of a battery
dc output of the capacitor. CTDs are nearly always furnished
with a capacitor size that provides more energy than the ideal
Particularly suited to installations in isolated locations, or
minimum. unattended substations, where the user wishes to avoid the
initial cost and ongoing maintenance of a station battery
An important consideration in the design of the capacitor trip
circuit is that it must have sufficient energy to trip the circuit
Suitable for use in outdoor installations where battery
breaker even when the ac control power supply is at the capacity is reduced at low temperatures.
minimum voltage of the allowable range in ANSI/IEEE C37.06. Disadvantages
For a 240 Vac supply, the standard stipulates that the circuit

Capacitor trip devices cannot be used for continuous loads –
breaker shall operate properly with a minimum control voltage
thus, they cannot be used with a red light in the trip circuit
of 208 Vac. Siemens’ practice during production tests is to
to monitor trip coil integrity, nor with a trip coil supervision
charge the capacitor from a source adjusted to 208 Vac, and
circuit of microprocessor relays
then disconnect the source. The CTD must be able to trip the
circuit breaker if the tripping command is issued 10 seconds
Use of ac control power precludes the use of communications
after the ac supply is removed. This assures that the CTD has devices (protective relays, power meters) that require dc
enough energy to perform its design function even when control power for communications when the ac power is off
conditions are not optimal. For perspective, the rated (such as, immediately after a fault)
(maximum) permissible tripping delay specified for a medium-
Uneconomic for large installations, compared to use of a
voltage circuit breaker in ANSI/IEEE C37.04 and C37.06 is two battery
seconds, so the 10-second value used in Siemens’ production
testing provides a large margin compared to the requirements of
An electrolytic capacitor is used, which has limited life,
the standards. particularly in high temperatures. The periodic maintenance
program must include functional testing (annually) of the
So far, the basic concept of a capacitor trip device, as typically capacitor trip device.
installed directly on a circuit breaker, has been discussed. There
are also more complex devices, which include an electronic
circuit to maintain capacitor charge after the ac supply is lost.
The electronic circuit is powered by rechargeable batteries,
typically of size AA. The Siemens Enerpak model A-1 is an
example of this type of unit. This device will maintain a voltage
on the capacitor sufficient to trip the circuit breaker for
140 hours after the ac supply voltage is disconnected. While
the charging system makes these devices more complex, the
underlying principle of the device is identical to the basic device
described.
The CTD uses a charged capacitor, so care must be exercised
when performing inspection or maintenance activities. The
capacitor self-discharges after removal of the ac source, but the use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
discharge time is relatively long. The capacitor must always be further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
discharged before any work is done in the area of the capacitor, respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
or of wiring to which the capacitor is connected (such as, the trip of contract.
circuit of the relays or the tripping contact of a control switch).
The preferred method of discharging the capacitor is to Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
disconnect the ac control power, and then use the circuit own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
breaker control switch to issue a trip command that discharges
most of the stored energy through the circuit breaker trip coil. Siemens Industry, Inc.
Finally, short-circuit the terminals of the capacitor to remove any 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
remaining residual charge.
Alternatively, the capacitor can be discharged directly. This must Subject to change without prior notice.
not be done with a short-circuiting conductor, but must be done Order No.: E50001-F710-A342-X-4A00
with a circuit having a resistor to limit the current magnitude. A All rights reserved.
five-watt, 500-ohm resistor works well for this purpose.
TechTopics No. 56
Switchgear outdoor enclosure type - Why isn’t it NEMA 3?
One of the enduring questions from customers is, “Why Tests required for NEMA 3R enclosures include a rod entry test,
isn’t outdoor switchgear classified as NEMA 3?” The simple a rain test, an icing test and a corrosion test.
answer is that switchgear conforming to ANSI/IEEE standards Rod entry test: This test is equivalent to that specified in
(C37.20.2 or C37.20.3) passes requirements substantially more ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 or C37.20.3.
rigorous than those required for a mere “NEMA 3” (or “NEMA
3R”) designation. Rain test: The NEMA 250 test is conducted with water
sprayed from nozzles with a pressure of 5 psi, approximately
The NEMA enclosure designation scheme (NEMA 1, NEMA 3, equivalent to rain driven by a 5-mph wind. The spray must
NEMA 12, etc.) is defined in NEMA Standard 250, entitled be directed at the top and exposed sides. This is inferior
“Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).” to the driven rain test specified in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 or
It does not apply to medium-voltage equipment, as shown in C37.20.3. In the C37 test, the water pressure is 60 psi, and
its title. Further, NEMA 250 is not a universal standard in the the nozzles are oriented so that the upper edge of the water
sense that it does not automatically apply to any particular spray is horizontal. The intent is to simulate rain driven by a
apparatus. It only applies if the standard for the particular 65-mph wind. Further, in the C37 test, additional nozzles are
category of equipment calls for NEMA 250 in the standard. added, aimed at the mounting surface (e.g., concrete pad)
For metal-clad switchgear, ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 is the relevant around the equipment so that the test checks to see if water
standard, while for metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear, that splashes up from the ground enters the enclosure.
the relevant standard is ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3. Neither standard The NEMA 250 rain test is greatly inferior to the ANSI/IEEE
accepts NEMA 250 for enclosure requirements. C37.20.2 or C37.20.3 driven rain test.
NEMA 3R enclosures must provide a degree of protection
against rain, sleet and damage from external ice. Rain and sleet
are an issue with outdoor switchgear but ice is not, as there
are no external handles for operating mechanisms (for circuit
breaker or switch operation).

Icing test: The NEMA test is intended for enclosures that
have operating mechanisms (for switches, circuit breakers
or similar devices) protruding through the enclosure and
exposed to the weather. Since switchgear does not have
such operating mechanisms on the exterior of the enclosure,
the icing test is irrelevant.
Corrosion test: NEMA requires a 200-hour salt spray test of
the paint system. This is equivalent to the requirement of
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 or C37.20.3. (It should be noted that
revisions of C37.20.2 and C37.20.3 are imminent, and it
is expected that the salt spray test requirement in these
standards will be increased from 200 hours to 600 hours).
In summary, outdoor enclosures conforming to ANSI/IEEE
C37.20.2 or C37.20.3 exceed the requirements of an enclosure
rated 3R to NEMA 250. Since ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 and C37.20.3
do not recognize NEMA 250, Siemens does not show a “NEMA
3R” designation on our switchgear.
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A344-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 57
Arc flash hazard labels
The 2002 edition of the NEC® (NFPA 70®) introduced a A similar requirement is included in article 130.5 (c) of NFPA
requirement that most electrical equipment be field marked 70E-2012, as follows:
to warn of potential arc flash hazards. Since then, Siemens “Equipment labeling. Electrical equipment such as,
has had frequent requests to provide such labels. However, switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter
as a manufacturer, Siemens does not have the information to socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are in other
determine the incident energy, which is necessary to complete than dwelling units and are likely to require examination,
an arc flash hazard label that is recommended in a number of adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized,
publications. shall be field marked with a label containing all the following
First, what does the NEC say? NFPA 70-2011 (NEC), article information:
110.16, requires that equipment be FIELD MARKED to warn of (1) At least one of the following:
potential arc flash hazards.
a. available incident energy and the corresponding working
“110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Electrical equipment, such distance
as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter
socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are in other b. minimum are rating of clothing
than dwelling units and are likely to require examination, c. required level of PPE
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized
d. highest Hazard/Risk Category (HRC) for the equipment
shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential
electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as (2) Nominal system voltage
to be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, (3) Arc flash boundary.”
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.
Both NFPA 70 (NEC) and NFPA 70E emphasize “field marked,” as
FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E®-2009, Standard for Electrical Safety in the code-making groups recognize that the manufacturer does
the Workplace, provides assistance in determining severity not have the required information to determine the level of arc
of potential exposure, planning safe work practices, and flash hazard. The manufacturer does not know:
selecting personal protective equipment.

The actual short-circuit current available at the individual
FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998, Product Safety Signs and circuit (the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear is NOT
Labels, provides guidelines for the design of safety signs and necessarily the worst arc flash hazard)
labels for application to products.”

The protection settings

The approach distance that the user considers appropriate
The operating scenario.

All of these factors, and more, affect the calculations of arc flash The relevant documents are the NEC, NFPA 70E, IEEE 1584
incident energy. and a great many technical papers. Most of the commercially
This is why the NFPA 70 (NEC) and NFPA 70E established the available short-circuit program vendors also provide information
requirement for labeling as a field requirement imposed on the on calculation of the arc flash hazard level, as do the suppliers of
user, not a requirement for the manufacturer. personal protective equipment.
Standards and code issues Specialty label firms (e.g., Hazard Communications at
www.safetylabel.com) have a wide variety of labels available,
Article 110.16 of the NEC requires that equipment be field such as the generic label shown below. While this shows a
labeled to warn of potential arc flash hazard. generic label from one firm, other suppliers have labels that are
Article 130.5 of NFPA 70E-2012 requires a flash hazard analysis of a similar nature.
to determine the flash protection boundary and the personal
protective equipment required for persons within the flash
protection boundary. Article 130.5 specifies several methods
that can be used. One is the “classic” Ralph Lee formula from a
1982 technical paper. Another calculation method is the scheme
developed by the IEEE 1584 working group several years ago
and embodied in IEEE 1584-2002.
Both of these methods have been widely incorporated in
commercially available short-circuit calculation programs, and
the more well known of these programs give the user the option
of using either the Ralph Lee formula or the IEEE 1584 method.
The IEEE 1584 method generally yields results that are less Generic arc flash label (from www.safetylabel.com)
conservative than the Ralph Lee method.
Regardless of method, the system short-circuit current available
at the fault location must be known, and more importantly, the A generic label warns of the arc flash hazard but does not list
time duration of fault current flow. This requires knowledge of the flash protection boundary that is discussed in NFPA 70E,
the protective settings of the circuit, including the time-current or define the personal protective equipment required. The
characteristics (TCC), pickup settings and time settings. It also flash protection boundary distance varies for each circuit in the
requires knowledge of the operating scenario (such as, number lineup, and also varies depending on the operating scenario
of sources, closed or open tie, paralleled mains, etc.). (such as, tie closed or not, local generation on or not). These
issues are both addressed in a special label shown in the next
The manufacturer does not know all of these critical information column. This label is of similar format to that first proposed by
elements. It is not appropriate to assume that the actual system DuPont, one of the main driving forces in the creation of IEEE
short-circuit current available is equal to the maximum rating 1584. This label requires that all information shown in red be
of the switchgear, as the worst case for the amount of incident provided for each individual label. Thus, each label for each
energy may correspond to a lower value of short-circuit current compartment of the switchgear will be unique.
with a longer time duration. The worst case often occurs just
below the point of transfer between the long-time portion
of the TCC curve on a low-voltage trip device, and the next
(higher current) characteristic, be it short-time or instantaneous.
Similarly, the worst case on medium-voltage switchgear
probably is not at the maximum fault rating of the switchgear,
where the tripping delay of the protective relay will always be
shortest.
Likewise, it is not appropriate to assume that all protective
device settings will be at the maximum of the setting range, as
this would yield a value of incident energy completely out of
touch with reality, and would require an unnecessarily high level
of personal protective equipment. In addition to producing a
very overestimated value for incident energy, use of the highest
possible settings would represent a severely mis-coordinated
system in almost all cases.
Since the manufacturer can’t know the critical facts, and the
facts change whenever the installation is reconfigured or the
operating scenario changes, both NEC and NFPA 70E require
that equipment be field labeled.
Detailed arc flash label from www.safetylabel.com)
The detailed label clearly shows why the equipment must be

field marked with the hazard information. The user should have
short-circuit calculations performed by a competent engineer,
preferably using one of the commercial short-circuit calculation
programs to determine the short-circuit current available. Most
(if not all) of the commercially available short-circuit calculation The information provided in this document contains merely general
programs now have a module to calculate the incident energy,
with options to use the IEEE 1584 method or the Ralph Lee further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
method. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
The manufacturer does not have the required information to of contract.
determine the incident energy or the flash protection boundary,
and therefore, the manufacturer cannot put this information on Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
an equipment label. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

References: 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

NFPA 70-2011 (NEC) National Electrical Code®

NFPA 70E-2012 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A343-X-4A00

IEEE Std 1584-2002, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard
Calculations © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 58
What is the difference between
E-rated and R-rated current-limiting fuses?
In medium-voltage motor control equipment with NEMA Class ANSI/IEEE C37.46 defines the performance requirements for
E2 controllers, current-limiting fuses are used in series with medium-voltage current-limiting fuses. A few of the defining
the main vacuum contactor. The vacuum contactor is intended requirements follow.
to switch only load-or low-level fault currents, and cannot E-rated fuses
withstand the full short-circuit current of the system without
protection. The function of the vacuum contactor is to switch Melting time-current characteristics:
the load many times. The load is most often a motor, where the
For fuses rated ≤ 100 A, melting time shall be 300 s for a
vacuum contactor is intended to switch the normal, full-load current in the range of 200 percent to 240 percent of the
current as well as the locked-rotor current of the machine. The continuous current rating of the fuse.
load is also frequently a power transformer, where the vacuum

For fuses rated > 100 A, melting time shall be 600 s for a
contactor must withstand magnetizing inrush current, switch
current in the range of 200 percent to 264 percent of the
the normal continuous current of the transformer, and switch
continuous current rating of the fuse.
moderate overload and low-level fault currents. The major
function of the current-limiting fuses is to protect the vacuum R-rated fuses
contactor against short circuits.
The fuse shall melt in the range of 15 s to 35 s at a current of
The fuses must be selected to protect the vacuum contactor, 100 times the R number.
coordinate with the overload relay, and must also have The standard adds that R-rated current-limiting type fuses are
appropriate characteristics to protect the connected load for backup type fuses for use in high-voltage motor starters to
currents higher than those handled by the vacuum contactor. increase the interrupting rating of the combined package (series
The characteristics needed to properly protect a rotating rating).
machine are different from those required to protect a power
transformer, so fuses tailored to the protection needs have been
developed.

It is apparent that the requirements for the time-current The melting characteristics of medium-voltage fuses (including
characteristics for E-rated and R-rated fuses are totally different E-rated fuses) are a function of the particular manufacturer’s
from each other. Why is this, and what does it mean from the design, and ANSI/IEEE C37.46 specifically recognizes that the
point of view of application? It goes back to the applications for melting time at current values above those specified in the
which the fuses are intended. standard will vary by manufacturer. Therefore, the standard
R-rated fuses are backup type fuses (not full range) intended for does not attempt to specify melting times for E-rated fuses
motor applications. These fuses are designed with “R” numbers for currents that approximate the transformer inrush current/
defined in ANSI/IEEE C37.46, which seem to bear no relation to duration, nor for short-circuits. Instead, the standard focuses on
their use. However, the key factor is their use. Let us use a typical moderate overload currents (220 percent to 240 percent or
4R fuse for purposes of illustration. A 4R fuse must melt in 15 220 percent to 264 percent of continuous capability, depending
to 35 seconds for a current of 400 A (100 times the R number). on the fuse size). By doing so, the standard provides a
Table 10 of ANSI/IEEE C37.46 requires that a 4R fuse have a benchmark for moderate overload protection of the transformer.
continuous current capability of 130 A in an ambient of 40 °C. Let us consider an example. An 100E fuse would probably be
The typical application for a 4R fuse would be for a motor with a used for protecting a transformer with self-cooled, full-load
full-load current of the order of 60 A to 70 A, or around 80 A to current of around 70 A, and with a forced-cooled, full-load
100 A including service factor. The locked-rotor current would current in the range of 85 A to 90 A (133 percent). The 100E
be around 400 A. Thus, the standard specifies the melting time fuse characteristics are set by ANSI/IEEE C37.46 in the range
requirement for the fuse in the approximate vicinity of the locked- of 220 A to 240 A (220 percent to 240 percent of continuous
rotor current of the machine (4R x 100 = 400 A and 60 A FLA x 6 = current capability). In turn, 220 A to 240 A corresponds to
360 A locked-rotor current). around 300 percent of the transformer self-cooled, full-load
The sizing of the fuse may seem a bit undersized, but the fuse current, or about 250 percent of the forced-cooled, full-load
application must consider the effect of two consecutive starts current. Hence, the standard sets a benchmark for the E-rated
from ambient temperature to have the same capability as the fuse melting time-current characteristics in the range of small
machine. overloads of the transformer.
The motor overload-relay protective settings must be selected The standard is not really concerned with “good” overload
such that the vacuum contactor will perform normal switching, protection of the transformer, since it recognizes implicitly that
including switching of the full-load current and switching of any fuse does not provide protection in the overload range that
the locked-rotor current. The R-rated fuse must be selected is as good as can be provided by a protective relay.
to provide some margin between time-current characteristics The E-rated fuse is a “general purpose” fuse, while the R-rated
of the fuse and those of the motor-overload relay. Thus, the fuse is a “backup” fuse, as defined in ANSI/IEEE C37.40. When
specification of the time-current characteristics of the R-rated used on a vacuum contactor, both types of fuses are used in
fuse by ANSI/IEEE C37.46 is intentionally oriented to current a backup “role,” meaning that the fuse must be selected to
values that are in the range of the locked-rotor current of the interrupt currents that are above the interrupting rating of
rotating machinery. The protection must assure that the vacuum the vacuum contactor alone. The overload relay (for motor
contactor operates for load and locked-rotor currents, and the applications) or overcurrent relay (for transformer and mixed-
fuse operates above the locked-rotor current and for currents load applications) must be selected and set to protect the
above the interrupting capacity of the vacuum contactor alone. load device, and to protect the fuse from overheating due to
In the discussion in the preceding paragraph, the protection of overload currents between the continuous current rating of the
the load cable is ignored, as the motor is the limiting factor in fuse and the minimum interrupting current of the fuse. The
protection of the load circuit for a motor load. minimum interrupting current for an E-rated fuse is that current
that causes the fuse elements to melt in one hour (up to 2.2
E-rated fuses, on the other hand, are not intended to provide times the fuse E rating). The minimum interrupting current
motor protection. Instead, they are general purpose (not full for an R-rated fuse is available from the fuse manufacturer (or,
range) type fuses intended primarily for transformer and for Siemens equipment, published in the controller instruction
load-cable protection. The limiting conditions for the load manual), but is typically in the range of one time to three times
cable and for the transformer are somewhat similar, since the fuse continuous current rating. It should be noted that
the heating of both is a function of I2t. The transformer is minimum interrupting current will vary by fuse type, rating and
the significant element from the protection perspective, manufacturer, and the reader is advised to check the specifics of
because the magnetizing current of the transformer is a fairly each situation.
consistent characteristic, as is the thermal damage curve of the
transformer.
Comparison of a particular fuse manufacturer’s melting time-
current curves confirms this discussion. For low currents, the
melting time curves are relatively close to each other for E-rated
and R-rated fuses. However, for very high currents, the melting
time curve of the R-rated fuse is nearly vertical, whereas that
of the E-rated fuse is much more sloped. Thus, for very high
currents, the E-rated fuse more closely approximates an I2t
heating curve (applicable to cables and transformers), whereas
the R-rated fuse interrupts more quickly to protect the associated
vacuum contactor.
In summary, Siemens generally uses R-rated fuses for motor
applications, and E-rated fuses for transformer (or combination
load) applications. The characteristics of the fuses are
determined in major part by ANSI/IEEE C37.46, and the standard
defines fuse melting time-current characteristic requirements
in terms that ultimately relate to the needs of the loads that the
fuses are intended to protect.
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A345-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 59
Control power sources for switchgear
Medium-voltage, metal-clad switchgear requires source(s) of However, ac power obtained directly from the CPT is not
control power for operation. Power is required for the circuit acceptable for supplying the trip circuit of the circuit breakers.
breakers and for auxiliary devices, such as microprocessor relays In the event of a short-circuit on the power system, the voltage
and meters. If the switchgear has space heaters, enclosure supply to the primary of the CPT will be reduced to a very low
lighting or convenience outlets, 120/240 Vac power will also be value, perhaps to near zero if the fault location is close to the
needed for these items (space heaters, lighting and convenience CPT. This will reduce the CPT secondary voltage to near zero, and
outlets are standard on outdoor equipment and optional for there will be inadequate power to trip the circuit breaker.
indoor equipment). To overcome this, capacitor tripping (refer to TechTopics No. 55
For many installations, some source of 120/240 Vac power for a discussion of capacitor tripping) has been used for decades
will be required. Very often, this source is a control power to trip medium-voltage circuit breakers when only an ac source
transformer (CPT) installed in the switchgear. It is preferred that from a CPT is available.
the CPT be connected to the incoming power, ahead of any Another means to deal with this issue is to use an
disconnect switch or main circuit breaker (some utilities will not uninterruptible power supply to provide power for tripping of
allow the CPT to be connected on the line side of their revenue the circuit breaker with an ac source. This is relatively expensive
metering equipment). For dual-source systems, it is desirable to and only rarely used. The long-term reliability of commercially
include an automatic transfer scheme for secondary power. If available, light duty, small capacity UPS systems is also of
the CPT provides power for closing of circuit breakers, the CPT concern.
must have power before electrical closing of the circuit breakers
is possible. If the switchgear has space heaters, the space A dc source is the preferred control power source for tripping of
heaters must be energized, especially when the main circuit medium-voltage circuit breakers. Most frequently, the same dc
breaker is open. Both of these reasons dictate that the CPT source (battery) is used to supply power for closing and tripping,
should be connected to the incoming power, not to the load side and the spring charging function. With the nearly universal use
(e.g., main bus) of any switching device. of modern microprocessor protective relays and meters, and the
increasing use of communications together with remote control,
Alternating current (ac) control power is often used for spring a source of dc control power is becoming almost a necessity.
charging and closing of circuit breakers. This is convenient,
particularly if the ac source is from a CPT in the switchgear. If dc What factors influence the choice of control power source, and
is used for tripping and ac is used for other purposes, then the particularly the tripping source?
size of the dc source is reduced if non-essential control power
needs are served from the ac source.

AC from local CPT:

Inexpensive, particularly for isolated locations

Requires capacitor trip if used for the tripping supply

Capacitor life is limited and may require periodic
replacement, particularly in high temperatures

Relatively low maintenance cost, even if capacitor tripping
used

If used to supply devices with communications features,
communication will be lost whenever the primary source is
de-energized, and during severe short circuits.
DC from battery:

Higher cost, particularly if battery is installed inside the
switchgear

Battery life depends on battery type and ambient
temperatures

Higher maintenance cost, particularly if electrolyte levels descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
require periodic check use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of

Virtually necessary if communications and microprocessor
relays are used. of contract.
In connection with battery life, a superb paper was presented
at the IEEE Petroleum & Chemical Industry Committee technical All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
conference (PCIC) in September, 2006 in Philadelphia. The
paper dealt with real-world experience with a wide variety of
battery types, and highlighted the severe negative effect of Siemens Industry, Inc.
high ambient temperatures on the life expectancy of certain 7000 Siemens Road
battery types. Siemens recommends this paper for your Wendell, NC 27591
consideration: PCIC-2006-16 “Batteries, Always Expected to
Perform But Why Don’t They?”, Roger N. Pocock (Saft America) Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A347-X-4A00
and E. Roy Hamilton (Chevron ETC), contained in conference
record IEEE Cat. No. 06CH37831. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 60
Use of cable for connections in medium-voltage switchgear
For many years, it has been common practice to use Power cables used for distribution system wiring outside of the
unshielded, insulated cable in medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear must be shielded. The purpose of the concentric
switchgear and metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear for outer shield is to make the dielectric field uniform, providing
connections to such devices as voltage transformers (VTs), a uniform dielectric stress for the cable insulation. Such a
control power transformers (CPTs), surge arresters, etc. Often, shield is required for cables installed in permanent installations
the cable used is applied at a higher voltage than the same operated above 2,000 volts, in accordance with NFPA 70®-
cable could be used if it were shielded, e.g., 15 kV cable used 2011 NEC article 310.10(E). However, article 300 of the NEC
in 38 kV switchgear. Occasionally, Siemens is asked if this is does not apply to conductors that form an integral part of
allowed by the standards for medium-voltage switchgear. The equipment, such as factory-assembled control equipment
answer is yes, this is in full conformance with the ANSI/IEEE or listed utilization equipment, as indicated in NEC article
standards and the NEC®, as the application of the cable is not 300.1(B). Hence, use of non-shielded cable as an integral part
like a “normal” shielded cable application. of equipment complies with the requirements of the NEC.
In a “normal” shielded cable application, the cable is located Our switchgear conforms to the requirements of the applicable
inside a grounded metallic shield, placing a ground plane ANSI/IEEE standards for the switchgear (C37.20.2, Standard for
directly adjacent to the cable insulation. For shielded cable, Metal-Clad Switchgear, or C37.20.3, Standard for Metal-Enclosed
the cable insulation provides the entire dielectric integrity, and Interrupter Switchgear). The requirements relative to insulation
must be capable of handling the full dielectric levels associated haven’t changed significantly from the 1969 version (then part
with the rated system voltage. As applied in switchgear, the of ANSI/IEEE C37.20). The standard continues to allow use of
dielectric stress on the cable insulation is quite different. cable for connections in medium-voltage switchgear.
The dielectric levels for medium-voltage switchgear are shown
below.
Maximum design voltage of switchgear

Withstand voltage
4.76 kV 8.25 kV or 15.0 kV 38.0 kV
60 Hz withstand voltage (1 minute) 19 kV 36 kV 80 kV
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 60 kV 95 kV 150 kV

The requirements for insulation used on conductors (whether For 15 kV switchgear, the rated high potential (60 Hz withstand
rigid or flexible) are contained in clause 6.2.1.3 of ANSI/ voltage) of the complete equipment is 36 kV, and the insulation
IEEE C37.20.2-1999 (or the similar clause 6.2.7.1 of ANSI/ of the cable must withstand at least 15 kV (approximately
IEEE C37.20.3-2001), which defines the test requirements for 40 percent) of this level. The remaining 60 percent (or so) of the
insulation used on bus bars. This particular clause is commonly dielectric capability is provided by the insulating supports, air
referred to as the “foil test,” and simply stated, requires that clearance and the like.
tin foil (or a similar flexible conductor) be wrapped around the Siemens medium-voltage switchgear designs fully comply with
exterior of the insulated sample and connected to a power these requirements. Siemens has over 40-years experience
frequency high-potential test set. The conductor is connected with unshielded cables used for connections to VTs, CPTs, surge
to ground, and the exterior foil energized at full rated line-line arresters and similar connections, with excellent field experience.
voltage (4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV or 38 kV, according to the
switchgear rating) for one minute. If the insulation successfully
withstands this test, it meets the requirements for use in
medium-voltage switchgear.
For reference, the text of clause 6.2.1.3 of ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-
1999 is excerpted:
6.2.1.3 Test for bus-bar insulation
The insulated bus-bar sample shall have a rated maximum
voltage at the rated power frequency applied from the use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
conductor to an electrode effectively covering the outer further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
surface of the insulation but sufficiently far from the ends respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of the sample to be able to withstand the test voltage. The of contract.
insulated bus-bar sample shall have construction that is
typical of bus bars, elbows, splices, and joints as used in the All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
manufacturer’s design. The ac test voltage shall have a value
not less than the appropriate rated maximum voltage as
shown in Table 1. The ac test voltage shall have a crest value Siemens Industry, Inc.
greater than or equal to 1.414 times the rms value, and the 7000 Siemens Road
wave shape shall be essentially sinusoidal. The test voltage Wendell, NC 27591
shall be applied for 1 min.
The practical effect of the “foil test,” is to require that a certain Order No.: E50001-F710-A348-X-4A00
minimum insulation level exists within the insulation itself, and All rights reserved.
the balance of the required insulation level can be obtained © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
through use of insulating supports, air clearance or any method
the manufacturer selects. To put this in perspective, consider the For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
case of 15 kV class equipment.
TechTopics No. 61
Circuit breaker “standard duty cycle”
Recently, we have fielded many questions about the “standard 1999–generation standards
duty cycle” from specifiers and users of medium-voltage circuit C37.04, clause 5.6: “Rated standard operating duty (standard
breakers in reclosing applications. The standard duty cycle duty cycle). The standard operating duty of a circuit breaker
for medium-voltage circuit breakers is specified in the ANSI/ is:
IEEE standards, and the specification of the standard duty
cycle changed with the approval of the 1999 edition of the O – t – CO – t’ – CO
standards. Where
The standard duty cycle has always been intended as the O = Open
benchmark for circuit breaker application, and the uniform CO = Close – Open
operating cycle for use during the design (type) tests of the t’ = 3 minutes
circuit breaker in the short-circuit laboratory. The standard duty t = 15 seconds for circuit
cycle given in the two generations of standards is as follows: breakers not rated for
1979–generation standards rapid reclosing, and
t = 0.3 seconds for circuit

C37.04, clause 5.6: “Rated Standard Operating Duty breakers rated for rapid
(Standard Duty Cycle). The standard operating duty of a reclosing.”
circuit breaker shall be two unit operations with 15 s interval
between operations (CO – 15 s – CO).”
C37.09 requires that the standard operating duty test (TD4)
be conducted with the duty cycle as defined in C37.04,

C37.09 specified the standard interrupting test (TD4) with either non-reclosing or reclosing. Hence, the 1999 edition
a 15 s interval between opening operations, and included simplifies testing. It also specifies three interruptions in a
reclosing duty tests (TD9 and TD10) with the interval sequence.
between operations equal to the minimum reclosing time in
C37.06, 30 cycles for medium-voltage circuit breakers (see
C37.04 requires that the standard duty cycle be stated on
table 10 of C37.06-1987). the circuit breaker rating label.

C37.04 did not require the standard duty cycle on the circuit
The application guide, C37.010, no longer indicates derating
breaker rating label. factors for vacuum circuit breakers for reclosing duty cycles
that differ from the standard duty cycle.

The application guide, C37.010, gave derating factors and
formulas for interrupting capacity on reclosing cycles that
differed from the standard duty cycle.

In essence, the basis of rating for the circuit breakers, and the
basis of the design (type) tests, has not changed from the 1979
to the 1999 standards. Both generations include a test duty
cycle with a reclosing interval of a minimum time (0.3 seconds
in the 1999 edition, 30 cycles or 0.5 seconds in the 1979
edition). The 1999 standard adds a requirement for a second
CO operation (e.g., a third interruption) after the time interval
t’ (three minutes), which was not in the 1979 standards, and
therefore, the testing performed in accordance with the 1999
standards is more severe than that required under the 1979 (and
earlier) versions of the standards.
Siemens feels that the questions from users about the “standard
duty cycle” arise from confusion between the reclosing duty
cycle used in a particular application and the “standard duty
cycle,” which is the basis of circuit breaker design, application
and design testing. The standard duty cycle establishes a
uniform basis for the performance of circuit breakers. Also, it
establishes a uniform basis for the short-circuit design tests
conducted in the power laboratory.
The short-circuit laboratories have limitations on the number of
interruptions that they can perform in a single operating cycle.
Most short-circuit laboratories use a short-circuit generator
that is disconnected from the power system during an actual
test, and the generator output is maintained by the inertia of
the rotating machine during the test. Under this arrangement,
the machine slows down during each short-circuit episode,
and in turn, the recovery voltage imposed on the circuit
breaker following interruption decreases. The short-circuit
energy available for a subsequent short-circuit episode is also
reduced, and may not meet the current levels required during an
interrupting test. Most laboratories cannot perform duty cycles
in which there are more than two interruptions in a small space
of time, as they need time to increase the speed of the machine
after the second short-circuit. For this reason, the new standard
duty cycle has a three-minute interval between the second
interruption and the third interruption, to allow the laboratory
to connect the short-circuit generator to the power system for a
sufficient time to bring its frequency back up to the 60 Hz area, The information provided in this document contains merely general
and hence, to assure that recovery voltage and short-circuit descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
current will meet the conditions required for a valid test. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Thus, users need have no concern that the 1999 revision of respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
the “standard duty cycle” somehow masks poorer product of contract.
performance. The reverse is really true, as the 1999 standards
add a third interruption to the standard duty cycle test. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Users can apply circuit breakers tested to the new “standard own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
duty cycle” in the 1999 standards without derating factors for
reclosing duty cycles, in accordance with the guidelines in the Siemens Industry, Inc.
C37.010 application guide. 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A349-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 62
A bit of history on circuit breaker standards
A number of issues of the TechTopics series have discussed Another significant reason for changes in the standards has
changes in the ANSI/IEEE standards for switchgear that have been the movement toward globalization of standards. In
occurred in recent years. One of the more controversial changes the electrical field, we are somewhat “blessed” as amperes,
was the revision of the circuit breaker standards to reflect the volts, kilowatts, etc., have always been metric. We didn’t
new “constant kA” rating method, replacing the older “constant have to contend with differences in the basic units, but, even
MVA” ratings basis. This was discussed in TechTopics No. 4 and so, the methodology of circuit breaker ratings and testing
again in TechTopics No. 23. has historically been quite different between the ANSI/IEEE
One of the major reasons that changes are made in the standards and those of IEC.
standards is that we learn more about the behavior of It seems incredible, but this was recognized as a problem at
equipment under short-circuit conditions, and the level of least as early as 1951. In that year, AIEE (which merged with
instrumentation available for use during testing continues to IRE to form IEEE in 1963) began to consider revision of the
make dramatic improvements. Not long ago, actual test short- high-voltage circuit breaker standards to abandon the “total
circuit current was determined by manually drawing a current current basis of rating” and adopt a “symmetrical current basis
envelope on a paper oscillographic output chart that was of rating.” The goals were to simplify application of circuit
several feet long produced during a test. The current itself was breakers, harmonize with the ratings basis of IEC standards,
computed from careful measurements using a triangular scale and demonstrate a standard relationship between asymmetrical
with 50 gradations per inch, and a slide rule or a mechanical (total) interrupting capability and symmetrical interrupting
calculator. Thankfully, those days are behind us. Today, we capability. This effort resulted in the 1964 edition of the circuit
get nearly real-time output of test values. Along with the breaker standards, including C37.04 (ratings basis), C37.09 (test
increase in data accuracy and availability, we have been able to methods), C37.010 (application guide) and C37.06 (preferred
more precisely set up the laboratory test conditions, vary the ratings values). The “collection” was revised in 1979 but without
parameters of the test in finer increments, and significantly major change in the basic scheme. In 1987, the historic “MVA
increase the number of values monitored during tests. class” was finally dropped from the ratings tables. Yet, even
today, many still commonly refer to “500 MVA circuit breakers.”

The underlying technology of the 1964 standards for medium- However, it seems clear that the process of harmonizing the
voltage circuit breakers was the air-magnetic circuit breaker for ANSI/IEEE standards for medium- and high-voltage circuit
indoor (metal-clad) switchgear, and the bulk-oil circuit breaker breakers will continue in the next round of revisions.
for outdoor substation type equipment. Both technologies Even for those engineers who are immersed in the standards
exhibited a “constant MVA” behavior, thus driving the ratings on a daily basis, it is very hard to understand that the effort
basis in the standard. to harmonize with IEC is in its sixth decade and is still far from
However, the technology moved forward with the vacuum completion.
circuit breaker coming to dominate the medium-voltage
arena, and the gas circuit breaker (SF6) dominating for the
higher voltages to the EHV range. These technologies exhibit a
“constant kA” performance, which drove the ANSI/IEEE standards
toward this ratings basis in the 1999 revisions. The “constant kA”
basis of rating had been used in the IEC standards much earlier.
The high-voltage circuit breaker working groups are actively
working to further harmonize with the IEC standards. Changes
have been adopted in the characterization of TRV requirements
with the adoption of IEEE C37.04b and C37.09b, plus IEEE
C37.011-2005. In 2009, the revision of C37.06 was published, The information provided in this document contains merely general
reflecting the new representation for TRV. The revision of C37.06 descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
greatly expands the tables of circuit breaker ratings from the use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
historic tables, which will be daunting to some.
Now that C37.06 has been revised, IEEE is poised to begin of contract.
major revision work on the series of high-voltage circuit breaker
standards. It is expected that the ratings tables in C37.06 will All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
be merged into C37.04. Some discussion of merging C37.04,
C37.06, C37.09 and C37.010 has taken place, but the result
would be a very lengthy document, perhaps 200 pages or more. Siemens Industry, Inc.
The challenge of navigating the IEEE ballot and approval process 7000 Siemens Road
on a document of this length and complexity are formidable, Wendell, NC 27591
suggesting that a split along historic lines may yet continue.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A350-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 63
Recovery of SF6 gas from type SIMOSEC switches at end-of-life condition
The type SIMOSEC air-insulated load interrupter switch design The purpose of this issue of TechTopics is to describe the
uses a hermetically sealed, welded, stainless steel switch basic method for extraction of the SF6 gas from the sealed
enclosure to house the three-position switch, which is the enclosure. While this method is used by Siemens, competent
heart of the product. The switch enclosure is filled with SF6 firms specializing in SF6 gas recovery and recycling will likely
(sulfur hexafluoride) gas, which allows for an extremely have similar techniques of their own that accomplish the
compact switch, and leads to exceptionally long switching objective of recovery of the SF6 with near-zero loss of gas to
life for the switch. Since the switch enclosure is hermetically the atmosphere. The suppliers of SF6 gas have established
sealed, there is no need to replenish the SF6 gas over the life of programs to take back used SF6 gas and either recondition
the equipment. (recycle) it, or if not feasible, to destroy it in a manner
However, the life of electrical equipment is not unlimited, so at acceptable to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
some point the user will decide to retire the equipment. At this Typically, the amount of gas in the switch enclosure is 0.5 kg at
time, the SF6 gas in the switch enclosure must be extracted and a pressure of 150 kPa (21.9 psi absolute or 7.3 psi gauge).
recycled. SF6 is a very potent greenhouse gas, and must not be
simply released to the atmosphere.
1 For purposes of illustration, the switch housing is shown removed from the switchgear
enclosure, but it is not necessary to remove the switch housing from the switchgear in
order to extract the gas.
2 Step 1: Spot weld three weld studs to the stainless steel enclosure, located so as to match
the mounting holes in the SF6 extraction fitting (refer to Figure 1).
3 2 Step 2: Mount the SF6 extraction fitting to the switch housing, using the O-ring gasket
6 between the fitting and the housing to provide a gas-tight seal (refer to Figure 1).
5 5 4
1. Connect drill to shaft

2. Black handles
3. SF6 extraction fitting
4. Switch housing
5. Weld studs
Figure 1: SF6 extraction fitting mounted on switch housing
6. Hose connection point

Step 3: Attach the suction hose from the vacuum pump to the SF6 extraction fitting.
Attach the exhaust hose from the vacuum pump to the cylinder in which the gas
to be recycled will be stored. Then, start the pump (refer to Figures 1, 2 and 3).
Step 4: Attach a standard portable drill to the end of the drill bit on the SF6 extraction
fitting.
1. Vacuum pump Figure 2: Vacuum pump for extraction of gas
Step 5: Start the drill and press the black handles together to apply pressure on the drill
bit. Drill a hole into the stainless steel enclosure.
Step 6: Detach the portable drill, and withdraw the center shaft (the drill bit) to its
extended position.
1 Step 7: Continue operating pump until residual gas pressure is approximately 20 mbar
(2 kPa). At this point, close the valve on the gas cylinder, turn off pump and
disconnect hoses. Remove the SF6 extraction fitting from the switch housing.
The remaining gas in the switch housing will be approximately 2/150 of the original
0.5 kg, or approximately six to seven grams of gas that cannot be recovered.
1. Cylinder for storage of gas to be recycled Figure 3: Gas storage cylinder

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A351-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 64
NFPA 70E - Changes in the 2012 edition
This issue of TechTopics discusses changes to NPFA 70E® Enough background – what about the changes?
Electrical Safety in the Workplace® in the 2009 and 2012 The 2004 edition of NFPA 70E did not explicitly recognize
editions. Changes discussed are those relative to personal the existence of arc-resistant switchgear, and the hazard risk
protective equipment (PPE) for arc-resistant and for non-arc- category (HRC) tables in the 2004 edition made no allowance
resistant medium-voltage switchgear. for a lower HRC with arc-resistant switchgear. The 2009 edition
First, here’s a bit of background regarding NFPA 70E. The recognized arc-resistant switchgear.
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act was The HRC tables in NFPA 70E are only one method of
enacted in 1970, creating the U.S. Occupational Safety and determining the hazard risk category for various activities, and
Health Administration (OSHA). OSHA was charged with actually are not the preferred method. The preferred method
enforcement activities to foster safety in the workplace. OSHA is to determine the incident energy at the working distance for
initially used the National Electrical Code® (NEC®, or more various activities.
formally, NFPA 70®) requirements in its enforcement activities,
but soon realized that the NEC is an installation document and Article 130.7(C)(15) states that “...for tasks not listed, or for
does not really address safety in any significant manner. OSHA power systems with greater than the assumed maximum
also recognized that the federal regulatory process is slow, and short-circuit current capacity or with longer than the assumed
therefore requested that a new consensus standard on safety maximum fault clearing times, an incident energy analysis
in the workplace be created. shall be required...” Up to the 2012 edition, it was difficult to
understand this statement because the Hazard/Risk Category
As a result, NFPA formed a new committee in early 1976 to (HRC) table only provided short-circuit current levels and
create the document NFPA 70E. NFPA 70E was a logical adjunct fault-clearing times for low-voltage equipment, not for
to the NFPA 70 committee responsible for the NEC. The first medium-voltage equipment. This difficulty was resolved in the
edition of NFPA 70E was issued in 1979. The sixth edition of 2012 edition, as table 130.7 (C)(15)(a) now lists maximum
the document was issued in 2004, the eighth edition in 2009, short circuit values and fault clearing times for all equipment
and the 2012 issue is the ninth edition. categories.
NFPA 70E was created at the request of OSHA, and OSHA uses Incident energy calculations are best performed in accordance
NFPA 70E in enforcement activities. OSHA does not technically with IEEE Std 1584. The calculation methods in IEEE Std 1584
enforce NFPA 70E, but OSHA looks favorably on safety will most often (but not always) yield a lower HRC than the
programs that comply with NFPA 70E. Programs that do not task tables in NFPA 70E. However, many users simply rely on
conform to NFPA 70E face a burden of demonstrating that they the tables in the standard, as they have not performed the
have a valid basis for a safety program. This is a burden that calculations of incident energy. It is for this reason that the
most firms prefer not to bear. changes to the HRC tables are highly significant.

Article 100 in the 2012 edition includes the following As can be read from the table, the 2009 and 2012 revisions
definition: recognize a significantly reduced requirement for personal
Switchgear, Arc-Resistant: Equipment designed to protective equipment for certain operations involving arc-
withstand the effects of an internal arcing fault and that resistant switchgear, as compared to the same operations with
directs the internally released energy away from the non-arc-resistant switchgear.
employee. It must be recognized that arc-resistant switchgear is only arc-
The HRC table refers to IEEE C37.20.7 in connection with resistant when all doors and covers are closed and correctly
some medium-voltage equipment, but not for low-voltage secured. Whenever doors are open on arc-resistant switchgear,
equipment. Also, it does not consistently relate “arc resistent” it is no longer arc-resistant, and therefore the HRC is the same
to IEEE C37.20.7. The original issue of IEEE C37.20.7 was as for non-arc-resistant switchgear.
issued in 2001, and was titled “Guide for Testing Medium- Siemens must caution that this is only a summary of the 2012
Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear for Internal Arcing Faults.” edition of NFPA 70E and the reader is strongly encouraged to
The 2007 edition of C37.20.7 was published in early 2008, read and follow NFPA 70E carefully.
further refining the test methodology of the 2001 document. It
also extended the document to cover not only medium-voltage
Maximum Maximum
equipment, but also low-voltage equipment. Because of the System
Upstream
bolted-fault bolted-fault
extension to cover low-voltage equipment, the title changed to fault-clearing
voltage current current
time
“Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated Up To for HRC 2 for HRC 4
38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults.” (sec) (8 cal/cm2)1 (40 cal/cm2)1
While not shown in the table above, the revisions also 0.10 45 kA 63 kA
recognize a reduction in HRC for medium-voltage NEMA E2
0.35 13 kA 63 kA
motor starters that have been tested in accordance with IEEE 15 kV
C37.20.7. For insertion or removal (racking) of starters of 0.70 7 kA 32 kA
non-arc-resistant construction, the HRC is 4. For starters of arc- 1.00 5 kA 23 kA
resistant construction with the doors closed, the HRC is 0.
The following table provides a comparison of the hazard risk Footnote:
category in the 2012 table. 1
Assumed working distance.
Excerpt from Table 130.7(C)(15)(a), Hazard/Risk Category

Classification for arc-resistant and non-arc-resistant switchgear
“Item” Hazard risk category

Non-arc-
Metal-clad switchgear 1 kV to 38 kV Arc-resistant1
resistant
Perform infrared thermography and
02
other non-contact inspections outside 3
(doors closed)
the restricted approach boundary
CB operation with enclosure doors
2 0 descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
closed
Insertion or removal (racking) of CB further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
Doors open 4 4 respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
Dors closed 4 0 of contract.
Opening VT or CPT compartments 4 4 All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Insertion or removal (racking) of VTs, Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
4 0
doors closed own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Footnotes: Siemens Industry, Inc.

1
Arc-resistant switchgear, type 1 or 2 (for clearing times of < 0.5 s with 7000 Siemens Road
a perspective fault current not to exceed the arc-resistant rating of the Wendell, NC 27591
switchgear.
2
Infrared thermography not addressed in NFPA 70E-2012, but HRC 0 Order No.: E50001-F710-A352-X-4A00
inferred as circuit breaker operations with door closed are HRC category=0 All rights reserved.
for arc-resistant equipment. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 65
Arc-furnace switching applications
Arc-furnace transformer switching applications are very This number of operations is far beyond the mechanical
specialized. The special issues of interest for arc-furnace endurance required by ANSI/IEEE C37.06 for “general purpose”
applications are: circuit breakers. For example, the rated mechanical endurance
1. High number of mechanical operations for a 38 kV indoor circuit breaker in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
C37.06-2009 is 1,500 operations. An arc-furnace application
2. Resonant voltage phenomena. would reach the ANSI mechanical endurance limit for a general
High number of mechanical operations purpose 38 kV circuit breaker in only 30 to 50 days. Similarly,
the ANSI limit for 15 kV class circuit breakers is 10,000
Under normal operation of the arc-furnace, the electrodes are
operations for most circuit breakers (up to 31.5 kA
usually withdrawn from the furnace when the need for heat
interrupting) and 5,000 for 15 kV 50 kA circuit breakers. Even
decreases. Thus, the switching operation for the circuit breaker
with a circuit breaker having a mechanical endurance
is a no-load or light-load operation and, accordingly, contact
capability of 10,000 operations, an arc-furnace application
erosion is not typically an issue. Even if the mill chooses to
reaches the circuit breaker endurance in about six to 10
switch the circuit breaker before the electrodes are withdrawn,
months.
the contact erosion is still minimal.
Of course, it is easy to maintain a spare drawout circuit breaker
However, the number of operations per day is very high. It is
element and swap the active circuit breaker for the spare circuit
not unusual for an arc-furnace switching circuit breaker to
breaker when maintenance or overhaul is needed. However,
experience 30 to 50 operations per day with exceptional cases
this is expensive and takes care of the circuit breaker, but
approaching 150 operations per day.
ignores the circuit breaker compartment in the switchgear
structure. Sliding primary disconnect contacts have a limited
endurance as do structure-mounted mechanism-operated cell
(MOC) switches. By ANSI standards, a MOC switch has a
mechanical endurance limit of 1,500 (for 38 kV) or 10,000
(most 15 kV ratings) or 5,000 (15 kV 50 kA) operations to
match the ANSI requirement for the circuit breaker.

Several points should be clear from this discussion of the The magnetic energy trapped in the transformer core will be
number of operations: very large. The amount of capacitance between the circuit
general purpose circuit breaker is not intended for the
A breaker and the transformer is very low. When the magnetic
high number of operations involved with arc-furnace energy trapped in the transformer core (inductance) transfers
switching to the capacitance between the circuit breaker and the
transformer, the resulting voltage on the capacitance will have
If a drawout circuit breaker is used, the associated to be very, very high in order to match the trapped energy.
switchgear should not be equipped with stationary Since the magnitude of inductance is very high and the
structure-mounted MOC switches. magnitude of capacitance is extremely low, the natural
Accordingly, a special purpose, fixed-mounted circuit breaker frequency of the energy interchange between the inductance
should be used to perform routine switching of the arc-furnace and the capacitance will be very high.
transformer. Our type 3AH4 circuit breakers have been Transformers do not like to be subjected to voltage transients
designed specifically for such duty. The type 3AH4 circuit with extremely fast rise times, so the transformer insulation on
breaker is available in ratings of 31.5 kA or 40 kA interrupting the first couple of turns will be stressed, likely beyond its
at up to 38 kV and is designed for a total operating life of design capabilities.
120,000 operations under typical operating conditions with
overhauls performed at intervals of 30,000 operations. A large arc-furnace transformer can be represented as a
Periodic maintenance, consisting primarily of cleaning and network with distributed capacitances and distributed
lubrication, is required at intervals of 10,000 operations. inductances. When the primary circuit breaker (the arc-furnace
Overhaul, at intervals of 30,000 operations, requires circuit breaker) is switched on (closed), a prestrike closing
replacement of the vacuum interrupters and several other transient will be initiated as the circuit breaker contacts
elements, such as the spring charging motor, auxiliary approach the point of contact touch. When the contact gap
switches, close and trip coils, and similar items. becomes small enough (less than 2 mm in a vacuum
interrupter), the voltage across the contacts may exceed the
The type 3AH4 circuit breaker is designed, rated and tested in dielectric withstand of the contact gap and, if so, an arc will be
accordance with IEC 62271-100 (formerly IEC 60056) standard initiated between the contacts before actual contact-touch.
for circuit breakers. These circuit breakers are available only in This prestrike closing transient is characteristic of all switching
a fixed-mount configuration and not in a drawout form. technologies, whether air magnetic, oil, SF6 or vacuum.
Resonant voltage phenomena The prestrike closing transient includes high-frequency
Transient voltage phenomena present a second major issue components. If one of the frequencies in the prestrike closing
that must be considered. transient happens to coincide with a resonant frequency of the
transformer capacitive-inductive network, a resonant voltage
The arc-furnace transformer should be installed in a vault
wave will result. As this wave travels through the transformer
adjacent to the arc-furnace. The connections between the
winding, it may expose particular areas of the winding to
primary equipment in the transformer vault are normally open
voltage stresses that exceed the capabilities of the design.
bus and are mounted on generously sized standoff insulators.
Transformer failure is the probable consequence.
The transformer represents a huge inductance with extremely
Arc-furnace transformers are major investments, and great
small phase-ground capacitance. If a switching transient
care should be exercised to manage voltage transients so as to
occurs, it will cause a voltage transient between the circuit
prevent transformer failure.
breaker and the terminals of the transformer. The transient
magnitude is a function of the magnetic energy trapped in the The voltage transient that can occur is a result of the
transformer core, the inductance of the transformer, together interaction between the prestrike closing transient and the
with the capacitance between the circuit breaker and the transformer capacitance-inductance network (and, to a degree,
transformer. with the system). The susceptibility to resonant-voltage
phenomena depends on the length of cables and their
characteristics (arrangement of the phase conductors, type of
insulation, cross-section, method of shield grounding, etc.).
In order to protect the system from resonant-voltage Arc-furnace summary and recommendations
phenomena, we recommend that the services of a firm Considering the preceding discussions relevant to arc-furnace
competent to perform high-frequency voltage transient studies applications, we recommend the following:
be employed. The voltage transient study must model the
conductor arrangement between the circuit breaker and the The arc-furnace transformer feeder circuit breaker at the
transformer to correctly reflect the capacitance elements. We switchgear should be a conventional drawout circuit breaker
emphasize the need for competence in performing high- or an outdoor circuit breaker, used for backup protection of
frequency voltage transient studies, as our experience is that the arc-furnace and its associated dedicated circuit breaker
many firms advertise such capability but few actually have the and not for routine switching of the arc-furnace
expertise. Siemens Metals & Mining Technologies group has The arc-furnace transformer should be switched routinely by
extensive experience in performing these kinds of studies and a dedicated fixed-mounted special purpose circuit breaker,
can determine the types, ratings and locations of voltage- such as our type 3AH4, located in the transformer vault
transient mitigation elements.
The connections between the arc-furnace transformer and
Several points must be emphasized in this discussion of its associated routine switching circuit breaker should be by
resonant-voltage phenomena: means of open bus bars to minimize capacitance
he circuit breaker should be located as close to the arc-
T A transient-voltage study should be performed by an
furnace transformer as possible, preferably in the organization that is competent to perform high-frequency
transformer vault itself. It is preferred that the connections transient voltage studies. This study must determine the
between the circuit breaker and the arc-furnace transformer exposure to transient-voltage phenomena, including
be made using open bus in air rather than using shielded resonant-voltage exposure, and, in turn, the type, ratings
cables. This places the high-inductance transformer, voltage- and location of appropriate voltage-transient mitigation
transient mitigation devices and the circuit breaker all in elements (R-C network, high-frequency ground bus and/or
close proximity and minimizes the influence of more remote surge arresters).
components
or arc-furnace switching applications, regardless of the
F
switching technology employed, a transient-voltage study is
needed to determine the types, ratings and location of
protective elements (such as surge arresters, high-frequency
ground bus and/or R-C elements) necessary to mitigate
voltage-transient problems
ince the circuit breaker for the routine switching of the arc-
S
furnace transformer should be located directly adjacent to
the arc-furnace transformer, the cables that connect from
the arc-furnace circuit breaker to the upstream source
should be protected by a conventional drawout circuit
breaker or an outdoor circuit breaker, such as our type SDV7.
This upstream circuit breaker should be used only to The information provided in this document contains merely general
energize and de-energize the cables to the arc-furnace descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
circuit breaker and not to energize and de-energize the arc- use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
furnace transformer itself. The protection at the upstream further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
circuit breaker should be set to provide short-circuit respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
protection for the cables and backup overcurrent protection
for the arc-furnace transformer and associated directly All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
connected arc-furnace transformer circuit breaker. Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A213-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 66
Clearances
One of the more common questions we hear from customers Users and specifiers frequently point to the distances required
concerns the clearance distances mandated by the ANSI/IEEE in the ANSI/IEEE transformer (C57) standards or to those in the
standards for switchgear and circuit breakers. Our answer is National Electric Safety Code (ANSI C2 or NESC), and argue
the standards do not dictate the required clearances used in that these distances also apply to switchgear and circuit
these products, at least not in terms of inches or millimeters. breakers. This is generally incorrect, as the application is
The standards for switchgear and circuit breakers are completely different.
essentially performance standards, not construction standards. In capsule form, here are some representative clearances from
In some cases, certain minimum distances are required by UL, the C57 and NESC standards. The various standards do not list
but these are not often the major determinant of clearance the clearances in a consistent manner, either with respect to
distances used in the designs. the maximum voltage or the unit of measure, and do not list
the impulse capability (BIL) consistently. The purpose of this
table is for illustration rather than for precision. In the first
column, the voltage in parenthesis is the typical maximum
design voltage of the switchgear or circuit breaker.
NESC C2-2007 IEEE C57.12.00-2010

Maximum design voltage
Voltage (kV) BIL (kV) table 124.1 table 11
of switchgear (kV)
clearance in (mm) clearance in (mm)
---- 0.6 ---- ---- 1 (25)
---- 0.6 10 2 (50) ----
4.76 5.0 60 ---- 2.5 (64)
15.0 15.0 95 4 (101) 5.5 (140)
15.5 15.0 110 6 (152) ----
27.6 25.0 125 7 (177) 7 (178)
27.6 25.0 150 9 (228) ----
38.0 34.5 150 ---- ----
38.0 34.5 200 12 (304) 13 (330)
Table 1: Clearances in NESC and ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00

The clearance values stated in these documents are for
external clearances between live parts of different phases, for
applications exposed to the weather.
The application in switchgear and in circuit breakers, and
particularly to the clearances used internally, is different. Since
the environment of the energized conductors inside the
switchgear does not include exposure to rain, snow and similar
conditions, the clearances can be smaller than those allowed
for external conductors.
The ANSI/IEEE standards for switchgear and circuit breakers
require that the product pass design tests, including power
frequency voltage-withstand (60-second) and impulse voltage-
withstand (1.2 x 50 µs waveshape) tests.
The standards do not specify the minimum clearances. The
manufacturer is free to choose values appropriate to the
product design and manufacturing process.
The clearance needed to achieve a particular dielectric The information provided in this document contains merely general
performance is a function of the shape of the conductors, the descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
shape of the electric field resulting from nearby structures, the use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
presence and amount of insulation, and other factors. Because further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
these factors can significantly affect the clearance distance respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
necessary to achieve a particular performance, the standards
leave it up to the manufacturer to decide on the combinations All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
of electrode shape, surface finish, insulation and clearance Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
used to meet the performance requirements in the standard. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
There is one area that differs from this discussion, and that is
when the equipment has external conductors. The most 7000 Siemens Road
common instance of this is a circuit breaker with roof bushings, Wendell, NC 27591
whether the equipment is outdoor metal-clad switchgear or is
an outdoor substation-type circuit breaker, such as our type Subject to change without prior notice.
SDV7 circuit breaker. In this situation, we do meet or exceed Order No.: E50001-F710-A214-X-4A00
the clearances shown in the C57 or NESC standards, as the All rights reserved.
external portion is exposed to rain, snow and other
environmental factors. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 67
%dc component
With the changes in the circuit breaker rating structure Table 1: S-factor
introduced in 1999, the specification of interrupting capacity
now includes a “%dc component.” What does this mean, and
how does it relate to the asymmetrical interrupting factor, Rated interrupting
S-factor Contact part time
time
which is the “S-factor” from the previous standards?
In the 1979 and earlier editions of ANSI/IEEE C37.04 “Standard 1.0 4 cycles 8 cycles
rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a
symmetrical current basis,” the asymmetrical interrupting 1.1 3 cycles 5 cycles
capacity of the circuit breaker was given as a multiple of the
1.2 2 cycles 3 cycles
symmetrical interrupting capacity, with the multiplier
dependent on the contact part time of the circuit breaker. The 1.4 1 cycle 2 cycles
multiplier was designated as the “S-factor” and the values were
as shown in Table 1. Thus, the rms asymmetrical interrupting capacity of the circuit
The value for contact part time includes the opening time of breaker was equal to:
the circuit breaker, plus an allowance of 0.5 cycles for
Iasymmetrical = (S-factor) x Isymmetrical
protective relay operating time. The relation of S-factor to
contact part time is shown graphically in Figure 1.
S-factor
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
1 2 3 4
Circuit breaker contact part-time cycles (cycles)
Figure 1: S-factor vs. contact part time

Using an example circuit breaker rated 40 kA with a contact According to ANSI/IEEE C37.04-1999, clause 5.8.2.2, the
part time of 2.0 cycles, the asymmetrical interrupting capability asymmetrical interrupting capacity is calculated from the
would be 1.2 x 40 kA = 48 kA, under the rating structure of following equations:
C37.04-1979. Iasymmetrical = Isymmetrical 1+2 (%dc/100)2
In 1999, the new “constant kA” rating structure was %dc = 100e(-t/45)
introduced, and determining the asymmetrical interrupting
capacity became a bit more difficult. where t is the contact part time (in ms) of the circuit breaker
(including ½-cycle relay time). The value of “45” in the
denominator of the exponent is the circuit time constant of
Table 2: Equivalent S-factor 45 ms, which is the time constant of decay of the dc
component in a circuit with an X/R ratio of 17 on a 60 Hz
S-factor
Equivalent
Conduct
%dc
Equivalent
system.
%dc component
(old) part time S-factor The latter equation is represented in Figure 2, using the time
component (new)
constant of 45 ms and X/R of 17.
1 cycle
1.4 69.3%
(16.67 ms)
69.1% 1.398 From Figure 2 using a contact part of 33.3 ms (2 cycles on a
60 Hz basis), the %dc component would be 47.8 percent.
2 cycles
1.2 46.9% 47.8% 1.207 In turn, substituting this value in the equation for Iasymmetrical
(33.33 ms)
above, we obtain a value of 1.207 times Isymmetrical, which is
3 cycles essentially the value obtained with the older standards and the
1.1 32.4% 33.0% 1.104
(50 ms) S-factor method.
4 cycles If we compare the old S-factor to the modern %dc component
1.0 0% 22.8% 1.05
(66.67 ms) and recognize that the S-factor scheme simplified the factors
so they were “nice round numbers,” we see that the historic
S-factor and the modern %dc component methods of
specifying the asymmetrical interrupting capacity of a high-
Figure 2: %dc vs. contact part for X/R = 17 voltage circuit breaker are essentially equivalent.
%dc component
120
100
80
60
40
20
X/R = 17
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Contact part time (ms)
TechTopics No. 68
Heat generation estimation for historic switchgear type D
(to 4.76 kV) and type F (to 15 kV) with air magnetic circuit breakers
We are often asked for estimated heat generation data for our To estimate the heat generated under actual loading
equipment. These requests are most common for our modern conditions, determine the component heat generation for each
products, but we also have requests for data on the historic of the components indicated in Table 2 (type D) or Table 3
types D and F switchgear designs that used air magnetic circuit (type F). Estimated heat generation for circuit breakers should
breakers. This issue of TechTopics provides information on be adjusted for actual loading based on the ratio of the squares
these historic designs to allow calculation of approximate heat of the actual current and the rated current. To be precise, this
generated by the switchgear under assumed loading adjustment should also be made for the actual current loading
conditions. for the main bus in each individual vertical section, but this is
The heat generation data in Tables 2 and 3 are based on full- frequently ignored in the interests of simplification. Instead,
rated continuous current. Actual heat generation estimates the main circuit breaker loading is usually assumed to be equal
must consider the true loading of the equipment. The amount to the main bus loading in all vertical sections.
of heat generated is related to the square of the current, so a Example: Assume a lineup of type F switchgear with five
circuit breaker operating at one-half rated current will have vertical sections, one 2,000 A main breaker (loaded to
heat generation only one-quarter of that at full rated 1,400 A), three 1,200 A feeder circuit breakers (loading 250 A,
continuous current. Because the effect of the square 600 A and 550 A), with 2,000 A main bus, and including space
relationship is very significant, it is overly conservative to heaters. The lineup includes one voltage transformer (VT)
estimate heat generation based on the assumption that all rollout, one 10 kVA control power transformer (CPT) and non-
sections and all circuit breakers each carry their rated complex electromechanical relaying (for example, three
continuous current at all times. Air conditioning systems sized induction disk relays), and instrumentation (for instance, an
based upon such estimates will be significantly larger than the ammeter with selector switch)
real operating conditions require.

The calculations would be as follows:
If true loading were not considered (for example, all
calculations performed on the basis of full-rated current), the
calculations would yield a heat generation of 8,420 watts, or
about 170 percent of the “real” heat generation.
Table 1: Example
2,000 A circuit breaker at 1,400 A = 1,290 x (1,400/2,000)2 = 632 W
A 1,200 A circuit breaker at 600 A = 910 x (600/1,200)2 = 228 W
Total heat generation for circuit breaker cells 1,090 W
B Vertical sections with 2000 A bus at 1,400 A = 5 x 210 x (1,400/2,000)2 = 515 W
C Space heaters for five vertical sections = 5 x 500 = 2,500 W
E CPT = 1 x 4% x 10 kVA = 400 W
Table 2: Type D switchgear (to 4.76 kV) with type MA or type FA air magnetic circuit breakers - approximate full-load heat generation (in watts)

Category
VT trunnion 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W

CPT (drawout or stationary)
Relaying and instrumentation Electromechanical non-complex 100 W 100 W 100 W 100 W

Continuous current - circuit breaker(rows 1-3) or main bus (row 4)

Category
VT trunnion 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W

CPT (drawout or stationary)
Electromechanical non-complex 100 W 100 W 100 W 100 W
Table 3: Type F switchgear (to 15.0 kV) with type FB or type FC air magnetic circuit breakers - approximate full-load heat generation (in watts)
Footnotes for Tables 2 and 3:

1
pace heaters, when provided, are not normally controlled by a thermostat. Hence, their load is represented as a continuous load. The purpose of space
S
2
Heat generated by current transformers (CTs) is ignored as it is usually insignificant and varies according to the CT ratio as well as the loading.
3
he CPT heat generation estimate is very conservative and assumes that the CPT is operated at full-rated capacity. If normal loading is at less than full
T
rating, heat generation may be adjusted by the square of the percent loading.
4
elaying and instrumentation heat generation estimates are very approximate and are normally estimated based on the number of circuit breaker cells.
R
Extensive relaying and instrumentation may warrant additional conservatism in the estimation of associated heat generation.
5
Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A216-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 69
Fast bus transfer times for GMSG circuit breakers
Automatic fast bus transfer has been the subject of endless During the overlap period, if the normal source should fail,
technical papers over several decades. The “ideal” fast bus the normal source will become energized (backfed) from the
transfer action would transfer the load to the reserve source reserve source, which may result in loss of both sources.
instantaneously on loss of normal supply, with no loss of Simultaneous signals, or a variant, historically have been
power to the load. This is nearly achievable with the new commonly used for routine transfers. Users should carefully
generation of static transfer switches, but these switches are assess the risks associated with overlap during transfers
very costly, and there are significant limitations on short-circuit initiated with simultaneous signals. Except for routine
capabilities with the present static-transfer switch systems. transfers, use of simultaneous close and trip signals is not
Thus, for the immediate future, the vast majority of bus recommended.
transfer activity in large industrial facilities and in power 2. The transfer time should be short enough to avoid
generation plants will involve conventional circuit breakers in significant slowing of motors in order to avoid excessive
medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear. motor inrush currents when the reserve source circuit
Table 1 gives the dead bus times for GMSG circuit breakers, breaker re-energizes the loads. This is important for a variety
based on use of the optional “fast” trip coil used with the rated of reasons:
interrupting time of three cycles (50 ms). W
hen the normal source fails, the driven (motor) loads
Transfer time is an important system design consideration, and slow down and act as generators due to their inertia. As
several aspects should be evaluated when designing the the motor slows, the back electromotive force (EMF) of the
transfer scheme and in the selection of devices and settings: motor “slips“ with respect to normal system voltage,
1. If the reserve-source circuit breaker is given a close signal producing a phase angle between the back EMF and the
simultaneously with the trip signal to the normal-source reserve source.
circuit breaker, overlap can result if the reserve-source circuit In the worst case, the motor back-EMF voltage can be 180
breaker closes before the normal-source circuit breaker degrees out-of-phase with the system voltage. If the
completes the interruption. reserve-source circuit breaker closes when the two
During the overlap time, fault current exposure increases voltages are 180 degrees out-of-phase, the motor
dramatically and may exceed the interrupting capacity of the windings will be exposed to nearly double normal line-to-
circuit breakers used. However, since the overlap period is ground voltage. Since the motor torque is related to the
short, many users feel that the likelihood of a fault during square of the applied voltage, as much as four times
the overlap period is not sufficient to warrant use of circuit normal torque can be applied to the motor shaft. This high
breakers with higher short-circuit interrupting ratings. level of torque may be sufficient to cause severe damage
to the motor shaft.
T
he inrush current will be very high and may exceed the
locked-rotor current seen during a normal start of the
motor. These high levels of current may cause thermal
damage to the motor insulation, leading to premature
failure of the winding insulation to ground.

Dead bus time, ms (cycles)
Source of closing signal
No arcing With arcing
22.5 ms to 39.5 ms 11.5 ms to 33.5 ms
Simultaneous close and trip signals
1.4 cycles to 2.4 cycles 0.7 cycles to 2.0 cycles
Trip, then close, using standard 52b contact on normal-source circuit 49.5 ms to 62.5 ms 38.5 ms to 56.5 ms
breaker to initiate closing of reserve-source circuit breaker 3.0 cycles to 3.8 cycles 2.3 cycles to 3.4 cycles
Table 1: Dead bus times for Siemens type GMSG circuit breakers (based on three-cycle rated interrupting time)
Footnotes:
1
Assumes control voltage at rated value.
2
Dead bus time (no arcing) is the time from contact part on the normal-source circuit breaker to contact make on the reserve-source circuit breaker.
3
ead bus time (with arcing) is the time from the end of arcing (non-fault current) on the normal-source circuit breaker to contact make on the reserve-
D
source circuit breaker.
4
Standard 52b contact is equivalent to a traditional “fast b“ contact. The standard 52b contact closes approximately 4 ms prior to main contact part.
5
The upper and lower values consider the extremes of circuit breaker operating times, 52b contact timing variation and arcing time duration.
T
he very high inrush current may cause the protective An alternative to the use of a residual bus voltage relay is to
relays to operate and thereby shut down the load. This use a time delay relay to impose sufficient time for the
defeats the purpose of the original transfer, which is to residual voltage to decline to 25 percent or lower. One
keep the plant running. reason this alternative is popular is it eliminates the need for
T
he high inrush currents may lead to severe voltage sag on bus voltage transformers, and the time delay relay is
the reserve source, with the result that there may be somewhat less costly than a residual bus voltage relay.
inadequate torque to re-accelerate the motors. One or 5. The automatic transfer function should be disabled if a fault
more of the motors may fail to re-accelerate, with the exists on the load bus, i.e., when the normal source circuit
possibility of damage to the motor. breaker is tripped by overcurrent or differential relays.
3. A scheme to implement fast bus transfer should never be Generally, this is accomplished by using a lockout relay
implemented if the normal and reserve sources are not (device 86) to disable closing of the reserve-source circuit
synchronized. If it is possible that the sources may not be in breaker in the event that overcurrent relays initiate tripping
synchronism, a transfer scheme can be employed with a of the normal-source circuit breaker.
synchronism-check relay to prevent closing of the reserve-
source circuit breaker if the two sources are out-of-phase
beyond a defined limit.
4. If the two sources are not synchronized, or if the transfer
cannot be completed quickly (say, within six cycles), the
transfer should be delayed. A common scheme for The information provided in this document contains merely general
controlling transfer under such conditions employs a voltage descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
relay connected to the load bus to monitor residual bus use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
voltage.
The rule of thumb is transfer is delayed until the residual bus of contract.
voltage is no higher than 25 percent of normal system
voltage. Experience in many systems has suggested that All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
closing the reserve circuit breaker with 25 percent or less
residual bus voltage will not result in excessive shock to the
system. Siemens Industry, Inc.
The amount of time that will be needed for residual bus 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
voltage to decline to 25 percent will vary according to the
amount of motor load, motor type and associated inertia, Subject to change without prior notice.
but the order of magnitude is typically five seconds or so. Order No.: E50001-F710-A217-X-4A00
Certain kinds of process plants may be able to tolerate this All rights reserved.
length of outage, while many will not. For example, in large
power generating stations, if fans or pumps slow down For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
appreciably, the boiler may be pressure surged or a pump
cavitated. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
TechTopics No. 70
Arc-resistant switchgear accessibility types
This issue of TechTopics discusses the “accessibility types” for In addition, modifiers (or suffixes) may be added to these type
arc-resistant switchgear. Accessibility types define the designations:
placement of cotton indicators used during internal arcing uffix A: A suffix used if no other suffix applies
S
tests of switchgear. The condition of the indicators following
an internal arcing test is one of the major determinants as to uffix B: Arc-resistant functionality is maintained in
S
whether a test specimen has met the requirements of the designated low-voltage compartments
standard for a successful test. uffix C: Arc-resistant functionality in compartments
S
The most commonly referenced standards for arc-resistance adjacent to the compartment in which the arc occurs
are ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007 and EEMAC G14-1 (1987). Both uffix D: A modification of type 1 in which one or more of
S
documents are derived from concepts established in Annex AA the enclosure surfaces is excluded from the arc-resistant
of IEC 298 (1981), which was the pioneer document that category. For example, type 1D-SR would indicate a design
defined internal arcing tests. with arc-resistant functionality on the front and the right
EEMAC G14-1 (1987) was very similar to the IEC 298 document side only, with the rear and the left side considered
and reflected lessons learned in the years since the IEC inaccessible to personnel.
document was issued. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 was first issued in The working group for ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 chose not to adopt
2001, revised in 2007 and incorporated improvements over the accessibility type scheme of IEC or EEMAC for several
both the IEC and EEMAC documents. CSA issued a new reasons. First, the accessibility types in the various documents
standard, C22.2 No. 0.22 in 2011, adopting much of the differ, and the working group wanted to make it clear that an
language of ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007. The new CSA document accessibility type in one document might not be identical in
effectively replaces the old EEMAC G14-1, as EEMAC is no performance to that in another document. In addition, the
longer operational. EEMAC document identified types A, B and C, but types A and
The accessibility types defined in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 are B concerned personnel safety whereas type C related to the
paraphrased below: amount of damage to the equipment during the test. Type C
was thus considered as irrelevant to personnel safety.
ype 1: Arc-resistant functionality at the front of the
T
equipment only.
ype 2: Arc-resistant functionality at the front, rear and sides
T
of the equipment only.

The type designations determine where flammable cotton The new CSA C22.2 No. 0.22 (2011) document uses the same
indicators are placed around the test group of switchgear in accessibility types defined in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007. These
the high-power test laboratory when an internal arcing test is differ from the accessibility types in the older EEMAC G14-1
conducted. Indicators are placed around the equipment as (1987) document, but roughly correspond as follows.
follows:
Vertical indicators are placed 100 mm from the enclosure
walls, from the floor to a height of 2 m (79”), facing areas IEEE C37.20.7-2007 and CSA
thought to be likely to emit gases during the test. The EEMAC G14-1 (1987)
C22.2 No. 0.22 (2011)
indicators cover approximately 40 to 50 percent of the area
of the switchgear wall being evaluated.
Horizontal indicators are placed at a height of 2 m (79”) Type 1 Type A
above the switchgear mounting surface and cover
essentially the entire area from 100 mm to 800 mm from
the switchgear wall.
Type 2 Type B
In both cases, the indicators extend beyond the switchgear
by at least 300 mm so as to evaluate the effect of gases
escaping at an angle from the enclosure.
Type 2C Type C
Tests are conducted on a number of test specimens so that all
of the switchgear configurations utilized for production orders
have been evaluated in the test laboratory. The criteria for
success in testing are summarized as follows: Some Canadian users request a modified type C or type 2C in
Criterion 1: Properly secured covers and doors do not open. which an arc in the main bus compartment of metal-clad
Distortion may occur. switchgear is not allowed to propagate into the main bus
compartment (of the same circuit) of an adjacent section. This
Criterion 2: The enclosure remains essentially intact. Small is a unique requirement and is not pertinent to personnel
parts (up to 60 g) may be ejected. safety, so is not supported in the ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007
Criterion 3: No openings in the enclosure wall are created by document.
the arcing in the areas being evaluated (essentially in the The preferred rated arcing current is equal to the rated short-
area of the vertical indicators). Openings above the 2 m time current of the assembly and the preferred rated arcing
(79”) elevation can occur provided that they do not cause duration is 0.5 s. Earlier standards suggested an arcing
ignition of the cotton indicators. duration of 1.0 s, but a study performed by the ANSI/IEEE
Criterion 4: No indicators ignite due to escaping gas. C37.20.7 working group determined that an arcing duration of
Indicators may be ignited by other causes, for instance, as a 0.5 s was sufficient. This study considered a worst-case
result of a label that ignites and causes the cotton indicator situation of a group of switchgear fed by a transformer with
to ignite, but this must be clearly documented (usually with the primary of the transformer protected only by fuses (in
high-speed video). other words, transfer tripping of the high-voltage source is not
Criterion 5: The grounding connections are maintained. possible). The study considered the thermal withstand
capabilities of transformers and the protection of the
transformers, and this led to the selection of the preferred
duration of 0.5 s.
Several of the members of the ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 working Finally, the discussion in this issue of TechTopics is only
group co-authored an IEEE paper on application of arc-resistant intended as a brief summary of the ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007
switchgear. One of the key recommendations of this paper is document. The reader is strongly encouraged to read the
that arc-resistant switchgear should include some form of actual C37.20.7 guide. There is a great deal of additional
protection that responds to an internal failure of the discussion in the testing guide with which users should be
switchgear and initiates tripping of all sources of power in the familiar.
event of an arcing fault. A variety of protection forms may be References:
appropriate, including differential protection, arc-detection
sensors (for example, light sensitive or pressure sensitive), 1. ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.20.7-2007, “IEEE Guide for Testing
partial differential protection or zone-selective (reverse Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for Internal
interlocking) protection. These forms of protection are Arcing Faults,” IEEE
particularly appropriate when multiple power sources are (http://standards/ieee.org)
involved, a situation not covered in the selection of the 2. EEMAC G14-1 (1987), “Procedure for Testing the Resistance
preferred arcing duration of 0.5 s. of Metal-Clad Switchgear Under Conditions of Arcing Due to
No discussion of arc-resistant switchgear is complete without a an Internal Fault,” EEMAC
few caveats. Arc-resistant equipment is only deemed “arc- (http://www.electrofed/com)
resistant” when it is in its “arc-resistant” condition. This requires 3. “Strategies for Mitigating the Effects of Internal Arcing Faults
that the equipment be properly installed in accordance with in Medium-Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear;” Wactor,
the manufacturer’s instructions, that all doors and covers be Olsen, Ball, Lemmerman, Puckett, Zawadzki; presented at
properly secured and that any exhaust vents be free of 2003 IEEE PCIC conference, (PCIC-3-09) IEEE
obstructions. In particular, if a door is open to a medium- (http://www.ieee.org)
voltage compartment, the equipment is not in its “arc-
4. CSA C22.2 No. 0.22-2011, “Evaluation Methods for
resistant” condition and the level of protection to personnel
Arc-Resistance Ratings for Enclosed Electrical Equipment.”
may be compromised.
In addition, the concept of arc-resistant construction considers
only the thermal and pressure effects of arcing and does not
consider other effects of arcing that may present a hazard.
Internal arcing in switchgear equipment liberates huge
quantities of heat energy, as the temperature at the arc roots
may approach 20,000 K, significantly hotter than the
temperature of the surface of the sun. This causes extreme
pressures as copper, steel and other materials are vaporized.
Gases released may include toxic gases. Sound pressure levels
are typically extremely high. These and other conditions must
be considered in the selection of personal protective
equipment.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A154-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 71
Generator circuit breakers
This is the first in a series of TechTopics dealing with generator A short-circuit fault current is composed of a decaying dc
circuit breakers. It includes a general introduction to the component superimposed on an alternating component (the
subject as well as a table of ratings and related capabilities for symmetrical current), with the dc component having an
the Siemens type GMSG-GCB generator circuit breakers. These exponential decay and the ac component having a constant
circuit breakers have been designed and tested in accordance rms value over the entire fault (no ac component decay). The
with IEEE standard C37.013-1997, along with the amendment dc component has an initial value determined by the
C37.013a-2007. instantaneous ac component current at the instant of fault
IEEE C37.013 was first issued in 1989 and was revised in 1997. initiation and this then decays exponentially with a time
These editions both covered generator circuit breakers for large constant that is a function of the system parameters (X and R
machines (for example, over 100 MVA) as reflected in the or X/R ratio). Thus, the dc component decays and the short-
listing of continuous current ratings (from 6.3 kA to 20 kA and circuit waveform always includes current zeroes at each
beyond) and short-circuit ratings (from 63 kA to 160 kA and (offset) half-cycle. The nature of this fault current is discussed
beyond). As experience grew with the use of the standard, a in some detail in TechTopics No. 44 - Anatomy of a short-
movement developed to extend the applicability of C37.013 to circuit.
smaller machines. This led to the creation of amendment
C37.013a-2007 that extended the machines covered by the
document down to 10 MVA and broadened the range of
continuous currents (down to 1,200 A) and short-circuit
ratings (down to 20 kA).
A new revision is anticipated in 2015, which will be redesigned
as ANSI/IEEE 62271-37-013, a dual-logo IEEE and IEC
document.
Circuit breakers applied to generator switching applications are
subject to conditions quite different from those of a normal
distribution circuit breaker used in industrial, commercial and
utility systems. Distribution circuit breakers, whether of the
outdoor substation type or of the drawout type for use in
metal-clad switchgear, conform to IEEE C37.04 (basis of
ratings), IEEE C37.06 (preferred ratings), IEEE C37.09 (testing)
and IEEE C37.010 (application).
Circuit breaker type1
Table 1: Rated values and related capabilities IEEE C37.013 clause Units
15-GMSG-GCB- 15-GMSG-GCB- 15-GMSG-GCB-
40-XXXX-110 50-XXXX-137 63-XXXX-173
Rated maximum voltage (V) 5.1 kV 15.0 15.0 15.0
Power frequency 5.2 Hz 60 60 60
1,200, 2,000, 1,200, 2,000, 1,200, 2,000,

Rated continuous current 5.3 A
3,000, 4,000 FC 3,000, 4,000 FC 3,000, 4,000 FC
Rated dielectric strength (withstand voltage)

1. Power frequency, one minute 5.4.2 C37.013a, Table 4 kV 38 38 38
2. Impulse kV peak 95 95 95
Rated short-circuit duty cycle 5.5 CO-30 min-CO CO-30 min-CO CO-30 min-CO
Rated interrupting time2 5.6 ms < 80 ms < 80 ms < 80 ms
Rated short-circuit current

1. System source (100%) (I) 5.8.1 kA sym 40 50 63
2. Generator source (50%) 5.8.2.3 kA sym 20 25 31.5
dc component % 75 64 61
Asymmetry ratio (historical "S" factor) ---- 1.46 1.35 1.32
Asymmetrical interrupting (ref) kA rms 57.9 67.5 83
Delayed current zero capability ms 40 30 30
Closing and latching capability (274% I) kA peak 110 137 173
Short-time current carrying capability (100% I) 5.8.2.7 kA sym 40 50 63
Short-time current duration 5.8.2.7 s 3 3 3
Transient recovery voltage (TRV) rating 5.9

System source C37.013a, Table 5
1. E2 peak voltage kV 27.6 (1.84 V) 27.6 (1.84 V) 27.6 (1.84 V)
2. RRRV (TRV rate) kV / µs 3.5 4.5 4.5
3. T2 time-to-peak µs 9.3 (0.62 V) 7.2 (0.48 V) 7.2 (0.48 V)
Generator source C37.013a, Table 6

1. E2 crest voltage kV 27.6 (1.84 V) 27.6 (1.84 V) 27.6 (1.84 V)
Out-of-phase sources C37.013a, Table 9

1. E2 crest voltage kV 39.0 (2.6 V) 39.0 (2.6 V) 39.0 (2.6 V)
1,200, 2,000, 1,200, 2,000, 1,200, 2,000,

Rated load-current switching capability 5.10 A
3,000 3,000, 4,000 3,000, 4,000
Out-of-phase current switching capability 5.12 kA 20 25 31.5
Mechanical endurance operations 10,000 10,000 10,000
Footnotes:
1
“ xxxx” in type designation refers to the continuous current rating, 1,200 A, 2,000 A or 3,000 A, as appropriate. The 4,000 A fan-cooled rating is
achieved using a 3,000 A circuit breaker, in combination with fan cooling in the switchgear structure.
2
I nterruption time is based on the first current zero occurring not later than 33 ms (for 50 ms interrupting) or 66 ms (for 83 ms interrupting) after
fault initiation, i.e., %dc component less than 100.
One of the distinguishing characteristics of applications to Another aspect of a generator circuit breaker application is that
generator switching is that generators have a limited rotating the transient recovery voltage (TRV) across the contacts as the
inertia and they slow down during short-circuits. interrupter opens is much greater than for a distribution circuit
This introduces two problems. First, the ac component is no breaker. For typical 15 kV distribution circuit breakers, the rate
longer a constant rms value, but, in fact, decays. This condition of rise of TRV during a symmetrical fault interruption at 100
is most severe with low-inertia machines, such as gas turbines, percent of rating is 0.92 kV/µs. In contrast, for generator circuit
where the time constant of decay of the ac component can be breaker applications, the corresponding value is 3.2 to 4.5 kV/
faster than the corresponding dc decay. Under this condition, µs for systems ranging from 10 MVA up to 400 MVA (based on
the superposition of the dc component on the ac component transformer size).
will result in a potentially long period in which the actual fault This is just a brief overview of the conditions that make a
current does not pass through zero. This is a problem as circuit generator circuit breaker application quite different from the
breakers, and especially vacuum circuit breakers, actually ordinary distribution application. These issues will be explored
interrupt as the current passes through a normal current zero. in more detail in subsequent TechTopics issues.
This phenomenon is referred to in IEEE C37.013 as “delayed The ratings and related capabilities of the Siemens GMSG-GCB
current zeroes” and is a condition for which the performance of family of circuit breakers are listed in Table 1.
the generator circuit breaker must be determined by testing.
This situation is exacerbated by differences in the values of the
system X/R ratio between distribution applications and
generator applications. The basis of interrupting ratings and
testing for distribution circuit breakers is a system X/R ratio of
17 (at 60 Hz) that gives a time constant of dc decay of 45 ms.
Thus, in a distribution application, the dc component is nearly
completely decayed after just a few cycles. However, the basis
of rating for a generator circuit breaker is a system X/R ratio of
50 (at 60 Hz), which gives a time constant of dc decay of
133 ms, and hence the dc component decays only very slowly.
This means that the dc component of the current at the instant
of interruption is much larger for a generator application than
it would be in a distribution application.
Compounding this situation is the fact that as the machine
slows down, it loses synchronism with the power system, such
TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
that there can be a significantly higher voltage across the makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
contacts of the interrupter as the circuit breaker opens to projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
interrupt the fault. Theoretically, this out-of-phase condition use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
can be as great as 180 electrical degrees, but as a practical use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
matter, is considered to be no greater than 90 electrical applicability through an independent qualified professional.
degrees. The out-of-phase condition is limited to 90 electrical
degrees to prevent damage to the shaft of the machine if
switching occurred with the generator and system more than use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
90 degrees out-of-phase. further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
The out-of-phase switching application also exists when a respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
machine is being brought up to speed and is being
synchronized with the power system. Synchronizing All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
equipment, including a synchronism check function, is almost Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
universally used with large machines to prevent closing of a own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
circuit breaker while the machine is out-of-phase with the
power system by more than a nominal amount. Closing under Siemens Industry, Inc.
a severe out-of-phase condition would lead to very high 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
transient currents that would cause the protective relays to
initiate circuit breaker opening. However, due to the time Subject to change without prior notice.
required for interruption, damage to the machine would most Order No.: IC1000-F320-A264-X-4A00
likely occur before the interruption process could be All rights reserved.
completed. © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 72
Generator circuit breaker applications - delayed current zeroes
TechTopics No. 71 discussed the major issues that make a However, the dc component has a rate of decay, determined by
circuit breaker application for a large generator quite different the values of the system elements, reactance (X) and
from a normal circuit breaker application. For convenience, a resistance (R). The system X/R ratio determines the time
normal circuit breaker application will be referred to as a constant (τ ) of decay of the dc component. The dc component
“distribution application,” but this can include transformer of the short circuit declines exponentially from the initial value,
applications, motor feeders, bus tie applications, capacitor with a time constant that is determined by the values of the
switching and others. This issue of TechTopics explores the circuit inductance (reactance) (X) and resistance (R). The time
aspect of delayed current zeroes for generator circuit breaker constant is calculated from the following:
applications in more detail. τ = (X/R)/2πf
The premise of an ordinary distribution short-circuit application where
is that the system symmetrical short-circuit current has a
constant value. Therefore, the symmetrical current does not τ = time constant of dc decay, in seconds
decay over time. Of course, if time goes on long enough, this is X = system inductance to the point of the fault, in ohms
not correct, but for the relatively short time increments that
R = system resistance to the point of the fault, in ohms
are relative, the assumption is both conservative and
sufficiently accurate. We can think of this situation as one with f = system frequency, in hertz (Hz).
an infinite time constant of decay of the ac component (the In both the ANSI/IEEE and the IEC standards, the time constant
symmetrical current) of the short-circuit current. of dc decay for distribution applications is standardized at
The dc component of the short-circuit current, on the other 45 ms, which corresponds to a X/R ratio of 17 for a 60 Hz
hand, is a function of the circuit conditions at the time of fault system. This subject is explored in more detail in TechTopics
inception. The instantaneous value of the symmetrical current No. 44.
that would exist in the steady state condition determines the
value of the dc component.
The dc component is equal to the value of the instantaneous
ac steady-state current at the instant of fault inception, and is
of opposite polarity so the ac component and the dc
component cancel each other at this instant and the short-
circuit current thus starts at an instantaneous value of zero
current.
If the dc component had no decay, the peak value of short-
circuit current for a fully offset asymmetrical fault would be
twice the peak of the ac component, or 2 x 1.414 x Iac, where
Iac is the rms value of the symmetrical current.

However, for applications for large generators, the situation is When interruption occurs at a current zero in one of these two
different, for two reasons. The X/R ratio of the system is phases, the remaining fault is a two-phase fault and will also
typically higher than in distribution applications, with X/R ratios have current zeroes. Thus, in the real world, we have to worry
of 50 and higher not uncommon. In fact, in IEEE C37.013, the about a delayed current zero in a single phase, but do not have
time constant for generator circuit breakers is set at 133 ms, to worry about extremely long delays while we wait for the
corresponding to an X/R ratio of 50 in a 60 Hz system. In a current to exhibit a zero crossing.
generator application, the system is typically dominated by a Now we understand the phenomenon of delayed current
very large step-up transformer and by a large generator. Both zeroes. What does it mean for a generator circuit breaker? And,
are highly inductive, which results in a very high X/R ratio. how do we deal with this issue in the short-circuit laboratory?
For a generator source fault the inertia of the machine is First, if the application is subject to delayed current zeroes, we
limited, and this is the factor that results in a rate of decay of need to conduct tests to explore the ability of the circuit
the ac component of short-circuit output current of the breaker to withstand some level of delay in the arrival of the
machine into a fault. Particularly for gas turbine machines, the first current zero. In practice, the manner in which this
rate of decay of the symmetrical current from the machine (a capability is demonstrated is to set up a circuit that has delayed
function of the inertia, among other factors) can be current zeroes and then progressively increase the amount of
significantly faster than the decay of the dc component (a delay until the limits of the laboratory are reached.
function of the generator X/R ratio).
The following curve is an excerpt of a report on one of our type
If the fault current consists of a decaying ac wave GMSG-GCB generator circuit breakers, successfully interrupting
superimposed on a relatively more constant dc component, the after a delayed current zero interval of over 39 ms, measured
result will be a wave that lacks current zeroes for an extended from contact part (shown by the vertical line). Thus, the arcing
period. The fault current shown in Figure 1 exhibits this type of time for this interruption is over 39 ms, well over two cycles on
behavior, with the first current zero occurring just prior to a 60 Hz system.
100 ms.
Future issues of TechTopics will discuss other matters that
IEEE C37.013-1997 contains a more extreme example of a make application of circuit breakers for large generators more
current waveform with the first current zero delayed by a very challenging than normal distribution applications.
long time, approximately 133 ms (reference Figure A.2 in IEEE
C37.013-1997).
While intuitively interesting, such extreme mathematical
examples are not of practical significance due to the nature of
generator connections and system grounding. The fault
representation shows only one phase, and in a grounded
distribution system the single phase-to-ground fault would be
possible and likely, which would be the worst-case condition.
However, almost no large generators are operated in solidly
grounded mode, but rather are resistance grounded to limit
damage to the machine in the event of a single phase-to-
ground fault. Thus, any real fault would be a three-phase fault,
of which only one phase could be fully offset. The other two
phases would not be heavily offset, and both of the other two
phases would have non-delay current zeroes.
Figure 1: Offset fault current, I, delayed current zero
40
.020
.030
.040
.050
.060
.070
.080
.090
.100
.110
.120
.130
.140
.150
.160
.170
.180
.190
.010
-40
-80
-120
Figure 2: Test of GMSG-GCB generator The information provided in this document contains merely general
circuit breaker with current zero occurring descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
39 ms after contact part use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A234-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 73
Generator circuit breaker applications - transient recovery voltage
TechTopics No. 71 discussed the major issues that make a IEEE C37.013 gives the TRV values for generator circuit breaker
circuit breaker application for a large generator quite different applications, but uses different variables to describe the TRV
from a normal circuit breaker application. For convenience, a waveshape. The revision of C37.013 began in early 2009, and
normal circuit breaker application will be referred to as a the TRV representation will be harmonized with that in the
“distribution application,” but this can include transformer new C37.06 document, as well as with the IEC representation.
applications, motor feeders, bus tie applications, capacitor The revision of C37.013 is anticipated in 2015, and will be
switching and others. This issue of TechTopics explores one redesigned as ANSI/IEEE 62271-37-013, a dual-logo IEEE and
aspect of generator circuit breaker applications, very high IEC document.
transient recovery voltages (TRV), in more detail.
The values in the tables are not strictly comparable, but are
ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009 is the standard for distribution circuit nonetheless enlightening. The following table lists TRV values
breakers. It replaced ANSI C37.06-2000. C37.06 shows for distribution and for generator circuit breakers.
transient recovery voltage values that distribution circuit
As mentioned, the TRV values have somewhat different
breakers must withstand during the short-circuit switching
meanings, but this is a matter of the details. A glance at the
tests required by IEEE C37.09. C37.06 includes transient
rate of rise of recovery voltage (RRRV) values in the tables will
recovery voltage values harmonized with the values in IEC
readily show that the rate of rise of TRV requirements for
62271-100 and also uses the method of definition of the TRV
generator circuit breakers are much more severe than for
waveshape that is used in the IEC standards.
distribution circuit breaker applications.
Circuit breaker type Distribution1 Generator2
Standard IEEE C37.06 IEEE C37.013a-2007
Source or type T100, Class S2 System source Generator source
Rated maximum voltage, kV 15 15 15
TRV peak value, kV uc = 29.2 kV E2 = 1.84 V = 27.6 kV E2 = 1.84 V = 27.6 kV
Time to peak, µs t3 = 32 µs3 T2 = 0.62 V = 9.3 µs T2 = 1.35 V = 20.3 µs
RRRV, kV/µs 0.92 kV/µs 3.5 kV/µs 1.6 kV/µs
Footnotes:
1. TRV peak value (uc) interpolated for rated maximum voltage V = 15.0 kV.
2. Values selected from tables in IEEE C37.013a-2007 for transformer (system) up to 100 MVA and generator up to 100 MVA.
3. New t3 value is approximately 1.138 x historic T2 value.
Circuit breaker type Distribution1 Generator2
Standard IEEE C37.06 IEEE C37.013a-2007
Source or type Out-of-phase, Class S2 Out-of-phase
Rated maximum voltage, kV 15 15
TRV peak value, kV uc = 28.2 kV1 E2 = 2.6 V = 39.0 kV
Time to peak, µs t3 = 63 µs3 T2 = 0.892 V = 13.4 µs
RRRV, kV/µs 0.62 kV/µs 3.3 kV/µs
Footnotes:
1. TRV peak value (uc) interpolated for rated maximum voltage V = 15.0 kV.
2. Values selected from tables in IEEE C37.013a-2007 for transformer (system) up to 100 MVA and generator up to 100 MVA.
3. New t3 value is approximately 1.138 x historic T2 value.
TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens Siemens Industry, Inc.
makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer 7000 Siemens Road
projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’ Wendell, NC 27591
use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
use this information in field operations consult with or verify its Subject to change without prior notice.
applicability through an independent qualified professional. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A265-X-4A00
The information provided in this document contains merely general © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
of contract.

TechTopics No. 74
Heat generation estimation for type GM-SG or GM-SG-AR switchgear
(up to 15 kV)
generated by the type GM-SG or GM-SG-AR switchgear under continuous current. Because the effect of the square
assumed loading conditions. relationship is very significant, it is overly conservative to
The heat generation data given in the table is based on full- estimate heat generation based on the assumption that all
rated continuous current. Actual heat generation calculations sections and all circuit breakers each carry their rated
must take into account the true loading of the equipment. continuous current at all times. Air-conditioning systems sized
Table 1: Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts (W)) for type GM-SG or GM-SG-AR switchgear (up to 15 kV)

Category
Circuit breaker cell with circuit breaker 576 W 888 W 1,391 W 2,473 W
Voltage transformer (VT) rollout 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W

Control power transformer (CPT) (drawout or stationary)
Relaying and instrumentation Electromechanical non-complex 100 W 100 W 100 W 100 W

200 W to 200 W to 200 W to 200 W to
Electromechanical complex
300 W 300 W 300 W 300 W

Table 2: Calculations
2,000 A circuit breaker at 1,400 A = 888 x (1,400/2,000) = 2

435 W
1,200 A circuit breaker at 250 A = 576 x (250/1,200) = 2
25 W
A 1,200 A circuit breaker at 600 A = 576 x (600/1,200)2 = 144 W
B Vertical sections with 2,000 A bus at 1,400 A = 3 x 190 x (1,400/2,000)2 = 279 W
C Space heaters for three vertical sections = 3 x 400 = 1,200 W

E CPT = 1 x 4% x 10 kVA = 400 W
Notes on assumptions:
1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally controlled by a thermostat. Hence, their load is represented as a continuous load. The purpose of space
2. Heat generated by current transformers is ignored as it is usually insignificant and varies according to the CT ratio as well as the loading.
3. The CPT heat generation estimate is very conservative and assumes the CPT is operated at full-rated capacity. If normal loading is at less than full rating,
heat generation may be adjusted by the square of the percent loading.
4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation estimates are very approximate and are normally estimated on the basis of the number of circuit breaker
cells. Extensive relaying and instrumentation may warrant additional conservatism in the estimation of associated heat generation.

conditions, determine the component heat generation for each
of the components indicated in Table 1. Estimated heat
generation for circuit breakers should be adjusted for actual
loading based on the ratio of the squares of the actual current
and the rated current.
To be precise, this adjustment should also be made for the The information provided in this document contains merely general
actual current loading of the main bus for each individual descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
vertical section, but this is frequently ignored in the interest of use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
simplification. Instead, the main circuit breaker loading is further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
usually assumed to be equal to the main bus loading in all respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
vertical sections. of contract.
Example: Assume a lineup with three vertical sections, one All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
2,000 A main circuit breaker (loaded to 1,400 A), three Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
1,200 A feeder circuit breakers (loading 250 A, 600 A and own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
includes one VT rollout, one 10 kVA CPT and microprocessor
7000 Siemens Road
relaying, and instrumentation. The calculations would be as Wendell, NC 27591
described in Table 2.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A149-X-4A00
calculations performed on the basis of full-rated current), the
calculations would yield a heat generation of 5,036 W or about © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
176 percent of the “real” heat generation.
TechTopics No. 75
Ferroresonance in ungrounded systems with
voltage transformers connected line-to-ground
Ferroresonance can occur when voltage transformer (VT) The value of the magnetizing reactance of the VT is a function
primaries are connected line-to-ground in a circuit that is of the flux in the iron core. The coupling capacitance of each
normally ungrounded or that can become ungrounded during phase of the system is the value of capacitance between the
certain switching operations. When the VTs are connected line- primary phase conductor and ground. The magnetizing
to-ground on an ungrounded system, the VT primary becomes reactance and coupling capacitance form a parallel circuit of
a principal path for system ground current. capacitance (C) and inductance (L) from line to ground, in
Ferroresonance can occur when a system transient occurs that other words, an LC circuit. If the VT operates in its linear
causes a ringing current (resonance) between the magnetizing magnetic range, no particular problem exists. However, the LC
reactance of the VT and coupling capacitance to ground, under circuit requires only a relatively small voltage transient to make
conditions in which the VT secondary circuit is lightly loaded. the circuit ring at the resonant frequency of the LC circuit.
Once the circuit begins to ring (resonate), constructive
The “IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & interference during the oscillations causes the voltage to
Definitions” (formerly known as IEEE Std 100), contains this increase to high levels. When the voltage reaches a sufficiently
definition (among others): high level, the VT magnetic circuit is driven into saturation,
“Ferroresonance...A phenomenon usually characterized by causing the reactance to collapse. However, the charge
overvoltages and very irregular wave shapes and associated trapped in the capacitance at this high-voltage level is still
with the excitation of one or more saturable inductors significant, and the capacitive charge is discharged through the
through capacitance in series with the inductor.” (low) saturated VT reactance.
This definition elegantly describes the phenomenon, but more If the VT secondary circuit is lightly loaded, there is very little
importantly gives an indication of the problem ferroresonance resistance (and therefore, losses) and the current through the
poses for the system. The overvoltages that result from VT winding can easily reach levels that will damage the VT
ferroresonance will overstress the dielectric capabilities of the winding before the VT fuse interrupts. (In this respect, it should
system and also will likely damage the voltage transformers. be noted that primary fuses for VTs do not protect the VTs from
damage by overcurrent, but are intended to separate the VTs
Now, some more discussion of what actually happens during a
from the power system so that a complete power system
ferroresonance condition.
shutdown is avoided.)

The “classic” method to deal with this situation is to add
resistance (R) to the circuit, converting it from a simple LC
circuit to a RLC (damped) circuit. Two methods are commonly
used to avoid problems with ferroresonance:
1. Connect the VTs with primary windings connected in
grounded wye, with secondary windings connected in open
delta, with a loading resistor across the open delta (probably
most common). The resistance value should be chosen so
that dissipation during ground fault conditions is
approximately 50 percent of the continuous VA rating of a
single VT.
2. Connect the VTs with both primary and secondary in wye,
with a loading resistor across the secondary of each VT.
Various references indicate that the resistor dissipation
during ground fault conditions should be in the range of the
excitation watts of the VT, up to 50 percent of the
continuous VA of a single VT. Problems have been reported
with the lower value, and a higher value is recommended. The information provided in this document contains merely general
In either case, VTs must be rated for full line-to-line voltage. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Ferroresonance is an infrequent occurrence, very much further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
influenced by system topology and conditions. It is also respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
influenced by the inductance of the VT and the nature of
system transients. Thus, ferroresonance does not happen in All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
every system. For those applications in which ferroresonance is Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
a problem, loading resistance in the VT secondary circuit is own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
normally sufficient to alleviate the affects of ferroresonance.
7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A121-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 76
Heat generation estimation for SIMOSEC load-interrupter switchgear
We are often asked to provide estimated heat generation data The heat generated is dominated by the heat generation in the
for our equipment. This issue of TechTopics provides estimated fuses. To illustrate, consider a section with 5.5 kV fuses and
heat generation for SIMOSEC load-interrupter switchgear maximum full-load current (FLC) of 100 A.
equipment. From Table 1, an unfused switch section (at 600 A) would
The heat generation data given in the table is based on the generate 215 W. At 100 A, this section would generate
operation at the maximum currents shown, and includes the 215 x (100/600)2 = 6 W (by the ratio of the squares of the
losses of the main bus. For the table, a main bus current of currents). The fused switch at 100 A has heat generation of
600 A has been assumed in all cases. Since the heat generation 350 W. Nearly all of the heat generation is due to the fuses,
of the main bus is low (35 watts per section), this condition is and only about two percent is due to the switch and main bus.
conservative but not excessively so. This example is illustrative for typical fuse sizes used, but if the
To estimate the heat generated for a multiple-section lineup of maximum FLC increases, the portion of the heat generation
equipment, add the heat generation for each section from the attributable to the fuses decreases due to a larger conductor
table. Heat generation by space heaters should be assumed to cross-section in the fuses.
be continuous. For a worst-case example of 600 A maximum FLC in a 5.5 kV
fuse, the total heat generation is 650 W, with 215 W from the
switch and main bus, so that about 33 percent of the heat
generation is from the switch and main bus (instead of two
percent as in the previous example).

Table 1: Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts (W)) for type SIMOSEC load-interrupter switchgear
Fuse rating
5.5 kV 15.5 kV / 17.5 kV 27.6 kV

Section description
Maximum FLC (A) Watts Maximum FLC (A) Watts Maximum FLC (A) Watts
40 A and below 125 W 30 A and below 175 W 25 A and below 200 W
41 A - 80 A 200 W 31 A - 75 A 425 W 26 A - 40 A 300 W
Fused switch section

81 A - 150 A 350 W 76 A - 430 A 750 W 41 A - 90 A 450 W
(includes main bus)
151 A - 240 A 500 W ---- ---- 91 A - 156 A 700 W
241 A - 600 A 650 W ---- ---- ---- ----
Unfused switch section

215 W @ 600 A
(includes main bus)
Blank section
35 W @ 600 A
(main bus only)
Auxiliary section (with control

35 W (main bus) plus transformer heat generation, assumed not higher than 5% of CPT kVA rating (in watts)
power transformer (CPT))
Space heaters 75 W per section (375 mm or 500 mm wide) or 100 W per section (750 mm wide)
Footnotes:
1. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour
2. Maximum FLC (A) = maximum full-load continuous current of the circuit.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A135-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 77
Residual voltage on load side of an open circuit breaker
Siemens is occasionally asked to comment on the existence of The resulting circuit is a simple capacitive voltage divider, as
a voltage on the load side of an open circuit breaker. For illustrated in the schematic.
convenience, this will be called “residual voltage.” Most often, Consider a typical example, a lineup of 13.8 kV switchgear with
this is a result of measurements made during commissioning a a main circuit breaker, eight feeder circuit breakers and one tie
project, when there is no load on the switchgear bus and the circuit breaker arranged in a two-high (stacked) configuration.
main circuit breaker is in the connected position and open,
with the incoming source (the line side of the main circuit In this example, the load-side main bus consists of
breaker) energized. Any feeder or tie circuit breakers connected approximately 45 feet (about 14 meters) of copper bus. The
to the main bus are open. capacitance between the open contacts of the vacuum
interrupter, C1, is of the order of 15 picofarads (pf). The
In this situation, the open contacts of the circuit breaker capacitance of the main bus is of the order of 10 pf per meter
constitute a capacitor in series with the incoming source and (refer to IEEE C37.015, clause B.2), or 140 pf for this example.
the load-side (main) bus. The main bus has capacitance to
ground, but in the situation described, has no other load as the
feeder and tie circuit breakers are open. Figure 1: Schematic
Variables:
Vin Incoming source voltage on the line

Vin side of an open main circuit breaker
Vout Voltage on main bus (load side of

C1 main circuit breaker)
C1 Capacitance between the open

contacts of the vacuum interrupter
Vout
C 2 Capacitance of the switchgear main
bus to ground.
C2
The voltage relationship for a capacitive

voltage divider is:
C1
Vout = Vin
(C1 + C2)

In this example, when energized at 13.8 kV phase-phase (8 kV The standards for switchgear do not recognize an open circuit
phase-ground), the expected voltage on the load side of the breaker as an isolator. In an outdoor distribution circuit breaker
main circuit breaker (in this example, on the main bus) with all situation, air disconnect switches should be located on each
feeder and tie circuit breakers open would be: side of the circuit breaker to provide the isolation function
Vout = Vin (C1/(C1 + C2)) before maintenance is performed. In a drawout, metal-clad
switchgear situation, the circuit breaker should be withdrawn
Vout = 8.0 kV (15/(15 + 140)) from the connected position to the test or disconnected
Vout = 8.0 kV (15/155) position, as IEEE C37.20.2 recognizes this as the condition that
fulfills the function of an isolator.
Vout = 755 volts.
The National Electric Code® (NEC)® ANSI/NFPA 70® also
This is a very simplistic example and ignores several factors,
recognizes an open circuit breaker does not provide an
such as the capacitance of the circuit breaker conductors and
isolating function. Specifically, article 490.22 says (in part):
primary disconnect assemblies in the feeder circuit breaker
cubicles. These factors would increase the load-side 490.22 Isolating Means. Means shall be provided to
capacitance, reducing the resulting voltage (Vout) calculated. completely isolate an item of equipment from all
However, this does not alter the basic concept that, in the ungrounded conductors. The use of isolating switches shall
situation described, the open circuit breaker is essentially a not be required where there are other ways of de-energizing
capacitor in series with the capacitance of the load-side the equipment for inspection and repairs, such as draw-out-
conductors to ground, and thus that there will be a voltage on type metal-enclosed switchgear units and removable truck
the load side of the circuit breaker. panels.
The capacitance values cited are representative, but will vary When a load is connected to the main bus, the residual voltage
from installation to installation. The capacitance between the largely disappears. To illustrate this, consider the previous
open contacts of the vacuum interrupter will vary with the example, with one of the feeder circuit breakers closed, and
diameter of the contacts and the gap between them. The bus with a cable circuit of 20 meters (66 feet) length connected to
bar capacitance is an approximation based on a review of the the feeder circuit breaker, but with the switch or circuit breaker
literature, but is believed to be representative. The figures at the remote end open. Therefore, closing the feeder circuit
presented in the example are for purposes of illustration of the breaker only picks up the capacitance of the feeder circuit
physics phenomena rather than an attempt for precision. cable. For the example, the cables must be shielded (in
accordance with NEC), for which typical cable capacitance is
What are the ramifications of this residual voltage? Siemens
200 pf/m to 400 pf/m (refer to IEEE C37.015, clause B.2).
believes this is an academic issue rather than a practical issue.
No person should be working on the main bus in this For this situation, the residual voltage (Vout) becomes:
condition, as this would violate numerous documents relating Vout = Vin (C1/(C1 + C2))
to safety.
Vout = 8.0 kV (15/(4,000 + 15 + 140))
Vout = 8.0 kV (15/4,155)
Vout = 28 volts.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
regulations and NFPA 70E® (Electrical Safety in the Workplace)
require that any circuit over 50 V be treated as energized until
it is isolated and safety grounds are installed. The description
of an Electrically Safe Work Condition in NFPA 70E is:
A state in which an electrical conductor or circuit part or
near has been disconnected from energized parts, locked/
tagged in accordance with established standards, tested to
ensure the absence of voltage, and grounded if determined
necessary.
Siemens considers it mandatory that safety grounds be applied
before any work is performed on equipment over 50 V. In
metal-clad switchgear, isolation requires withdrawal of the
drawout circuit breaker to the test or disconnected position.
Tests for the presence of voltage are required before any work
can be performed on the conductors. After it has been verified
that the conductors are de-energized, safety grounds are to be
applied. The information provided in this document contains merely general
Therefore, the processes required by OSHA and NFPA 70E will use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
place the equipment in an electrically safe work condition, and further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
eliminate any residual voltage. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A252-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 78
Personal protective equipment (PPE) required
with metal-clad switchgear
There is growing awareness among electrical practitioners The recognition of the reduced PPE needed is contingent on
of the need for appropriate personal protective equipment meeting two additional conditions:
(PPE), such as arc-rated (as well as flame-resistant) clothing, Clearing time under arcing conditions must be 0.5 seconds or
face shields, arc flash hoods, dielectric gloves and the like. less
This interest is a result, at least in part, of the increasing
requirements in the regulatory environment (for instance, The prospective fault current must be no higher than the rated
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)) and in arcing current of the equipment.
the evolution of NFPA 70E®-2012, the Standard for Electrical The first condition requires that the user select settings
Safety in the Workplace. The availability of educational forums, for the protective relays that will provide a clearing time
and particularly of the annual IEEE Electrical Safety Workshop, of less than 0.5 seconds under arcing conditions. The user
has also contributed to increased interest in the field. must determine the settings, and must also consider the
As users have considered the implications of PPE, particularly interrupting time of the circuit breaker(s) that will have to
where the incident energy exposure is high, they have been interrupt the fault. For example, if the interrupting time of
drawn to evaluate the use of arc-resistant, medium-voltage the circuit breakers is 5 cycles (83 ms), and several circuit
switchgear. Testing of equipment to determine the ability to breakers must operate to clear any conceivable fault (thus
withstand internal arcing events is in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7-2007. requiring an interposing lockout relay – device 86), the total
Testing is conducted at the specified internal arcing current clearing time is approximately 83 ms plus 8.3 ms (assumed
and duration. Normally, the arcing current value is equal to the lockout relay operating time), plus an allowance for margin.
short-circuit current rating of the equipment, and the preferred For an approximation, this would indicate that the allowable
arcing duration is 0.5 seconds. protective relay operating time must be around 0.5 seconds,
less 100 ms (0.1 second), or a net of 0.4 seconds relay
The 2009 and 2012 editions of NFPA 70E recognize reduced operating time.
PPE requirements for certain operations involving arc-resistant
switchgear that has been tested under internal arcing
conditions in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7.

For the assumed five-cycle interrupting time circuit breaker, the An example of this extension of the table is the elaboration
following values apply: of additional operations involving ground and test devices
Relay operating time 0.400 s (G&T devices), where NFPA 70E only lists the operation for arc-
resistant switchgear.
Circuit breaker interrupting time 0.083 s
It should also be noted that NFPA 70E does not list operations
Interposing or lockout relay operating time 0.008 s in exactly the same language, so some of the operations
Allowance for margin 0.009 s shown have been elaborated from those described in NFPA
70E.
Total clearing time 0.500 s.
It must be remembered that arc-resistant switchgear is only
The second condition mandates that the rated internal arcing
classified as “arc resistant” when it is in its intended installed
current of the equipment (in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
condition, with doors and panels closed and securely latched
C37.20.7) must be at least equal to the rated short-circuit
(or bolted, if applicable), and with the actual installation
current of the equipment, assuming that the equipment is
conforming to the instructions of the manufacturer. The
applied on a system that has an available short-circuit current
equipment is not in its intended installed (arc-resistant)
that is approximately the short-circuit rating of the equipment.
condition when the equipment has open panels or doors, as
This is generally the case, as few users would intentionally
is the case when a circuit breaker is being inserted into the
purchase equipment with a short-circuit current rating that is
compartment from outside the unit, or rear cable connection
significantly in excess of the available short-circuit current on
compartments are open for inspection of cables, and the
the system (including future considerations).
like. Under these conditions, the level of PPE required with
Table 1: Hazard/risk category (HRC) metal-clad switchgear lists arc-resistant equipment is the same as that required for the
some of the operations for which NFPA 70E recognizes a lower equivalent non-arc-resistant equipment.
PPE level for arc-resistant, metal-clad switchgear than for non-
arc-resistant, metal-clad switchgear. Some of the operations
listed in Table 1 are not listed in NFPA 70E, but are considered
to be consistent with the principles of NFPA 70E.
Table 1: Hazard/risk category (HRC) metal-clad switchgear1
HRC Arc-resistant Non-arc-resistant HRC

category equipment equipment category
Infrared thermography outside restricted approach boundary
0 Infrared thermography outside restricted approach boundary 3
(doors closed)2
Circuit breaker operation Circuit breaker operation
0 2
(door closed) (door closed)
Circuit breaker operation Circuit breaker operation
NA 4
(door open)3 (door open)
Insertion or removal of circuit breaker Insertion or removal (racking) of circuit breaker
0 4
(door closed) (door closed)
Insertion or removal of circuit breaker Insertion or removal (racking) of circuit breaker
4 4
(door open) (door open)
Insertion or removal of voltage transformer (VT) or
Open VT or CPT compartments
0 control power transformer (CPT) on or off the bus 4
(for example, to insert or withdraw VT or CPT)
(door closed)
Insertion or removal (racking) of G&T device Insertion or removal (racking) of G&T device
0 4
(door closed) (door closed)4
Insertion or removal (racking) of G&T device Insertion or removal (racking) of G&T device
4 4
(door open) (door open)4
Footnotes:
1
Based on NFPA 70E table 130.7 (C) (9) for operations performed while equipment is energized
2
Not shown in NFPA 70E. HRC category = 0 inferred as circuit breaker operations with door closed are HRC category = 0 for arc-resistant equipment
3
NA as door of arc-resistant equipment is interlocked to prevent closing of circuit breaker with door open
4
Not in NFPA 70E. HRC category = 4 inferred from comparable operations with circuit breaker.
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A390-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 79
Working space required around electrical equipment
This issue of TechTopics discusses the depth of working Condition one covers installations in which the wall or other
space (or clearance) required around electrical equipment as equipment located directly across from the equipment being
specified in the National Electrical Code® (NEC®), NFPA 70® for considered is insulated, with no grounded or live parts
purposes of maintenance and examination. The information in exposed. This condition is pretty rare, so is seldom applicable.
this issue is based on the 2011 edition of the NEC. Condition two is the condition in which the wall or other
The requirements for working space are primarily contained equipment directly across from the equipment being
in NEC Articles 110.26 (for low voltage) and 110.34 (for high considered is grounded (as with equipment in a power
voltage). Since the two sections are mostly similar, we will equipment center outdoor enclosure, or with an ordinary
consolidate our discussion. wall across from the equipment front) or does not have
The NEC uses the expression “clear distance,” which means that exposed live parts. Concrete or masonry walls are considered
the working space cannot be used for other purposes, such as grounded surfaces. Condition two is probably the most
as storage. When a person needs to work on the equipment, common condition.
the person must not be impeded by extraneous items in Condition three covers installations with electrical equipment
the working space area. Often there are auxiliary devices or located on both sides of the working space. Condition three is
systems around the switchgear (for example, panelboards, applicable for “common-aisle” installations, where two groups
battery systems, tool cabinets), and such items must be moved of equipment face each other. It would also apply in a situation
away from the NEC clear working space, or the working space where the front of one group of equipment faces the rear of a
must be increased to allow for the required clear working space second group of equipment.
between the switchgear and the auxiliary devices or systems. Condition three requires more distance than condition two, at
Table 1 is a composite of the essential information in NEC least in part due to the reduced working space when doors of
tables 110.26(A)(1) and 110.34(A). The table shows required the facing groups are open. If two groups of equipment face
minimum clear distances. These distances are measured from each other, and each has hinged doors that can open 135°,
the (potentially) exposed live parts (if not enclosed), or from then these doors can reduce the working space available.
the opening of the enclosure when the parts are inside an For example, assume 13.8 kV switchgear, with 36” (0.9 m)
enclosure. wide doors opened to their full open position, approximately
Thus, even though the live parts might be some significant 135°. The open door extends slightly over 25” (0.635 m) into
distance back from the enclosure opening, this distance is the working space. If the required clear distance from Table 1
ignored when determining the required clear distance. In the is 72” (1.8 m), and over 25” (0.635 m) is occupied by an open
case of metal-enclosed or metal-clad switchgear, the distance door, then the “real” working space is less than 47” (1.2 m)
is measured from the front of the switchgear or from the rear (72”-25”) (1.8 m-0.635 m), which is less than the distance
of the switchgear, as applicable. required for condition two (60”) (1.5 m) that is presumably a
There is often confusion about which “condition” shown in the less severe condition. Thus, a user considering use of condition
table applies. three may also wish to increase the working space above that
required by the NEC to compensate for working space that may
be impeded by open doors.

Table 1: Working spaces
Nominal Minimum clear distance2

Common system
voltage
voltages phase-phase4
phase-ground Condition one1 Condition two1 Condition three1
0 - 150 1203, 120/2403, 208Y; 240Δ 36" (0.9 m) 36" (0.9 m) 36" (0.9 m)
480 (Δ or Y)
151 - 600 36" (0.9 m) 42" (1.07 m) 48" (1.22 m)
600 (Δ or Y)
2,400 (Δ or Y)
601 - 2,500 36" (0.9 m) 48" (1.2 m) 60" (1.5 m)
4,160 (Δ or Y)
4,800Δ
6,900 (Δ or Y)
7,200 (Δ or Y)
2,501 - 9,000 12,000Δ 48" (1.2 m) 60" (1.5 m) 72" (1.8 m)
12,470Y
13,200 (Δ or Y)
13,800 (Δ or Y)
24,000Δ
9,001 - 25,000 26,400Δ 60" (1.5 m) 72" (1.8 m) 108" (2.8 m)
34,500Δ or Y
Footnotes:
1
Description of conditions:
Condition one: exposed live parts on one side of the working space; parts on other side are not live or grounded, or are guarded by insulating materials.
Condition two: exposed live parts on one side of the working space; grounded parts on the other side.
Condition three: exposed live parts on both sides of working space.
2
Distances are measured from exposed live parts, or from the enclosure or from the opening if the parts are enclosed.
3
Single phase.
4
Assumes normally balanced system voltages with phase-phase voltage essentially equal to phase-ground voltage times 1.73.
Alternatively, the user may wish to implement procedures that NFPA 70E Article 120 provides the steps to achieving an
prohibit opening doors or compartments on one side of the “electrically safe work condition” as (in brief):
working space when doors or compartments on the other side 1. Determine all possible sources of electrical energy
of the working space are also open.
2. Switch “off” each source using a disconnect device
In earlier days, users often were concerned only with working
space in front of equipment. However, with changes in 3. Visually verify disconnects are fully open, or that drawout
regulations and the NEC, working space requirements also apply type devices are in the fully withdrawn position
to the rear of the equipment when there is need to maintain or 4. Test for the presence of voltage
examine live parts at the rear of the equipment. In the earlier
5. Ground the phase conductors with grounding equipment
days, it was considered that the equipment should not be
rated for the available fault duty.
opened for maintenance or examination unless the equipment
was de-energized. These steps make it clear that conductors must be treated as
if they are live parts (energized parts) until they are proven
However, Occupational Safety and Health Administration and
otherwise.
NPFA 70E® (Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace) now
are premised on the concept that parts must be considered as The NEC is enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ),
being energized until it is proven that they are not energized. defined in NEC Article 90 as the organization responsible for
enforcing the requirements of the NEC. This is usually the local
or state electrical inspection agency for the particular site.
The AHJ has great latitude in interpreting the requirements
of the NEC, and enforcement of the code varies significantly
from one jurisdiction to another. Thus, the user should always
consult with the local AHJ before arriving at firm conclusions on
requirements for installations, including issues of working space.
This discussion deals with the working space required to
perform operations or examine the equipment, or to perform
maintenance. It does not deal with the issue of clearances
required around equipment from sides that are not required to
be accessible for maintenance.
For example, if the manufacturer requires that the side of the
equipment can be located a certain distance (for example, 6”
(15 cm)) from the nearest wall, the NEC rules would not apply
unless there is some maintenance operation or examination that
would have to be performed at that side of the equipment. In
simple terms, the NEC requirements for clear working space only
apply to areas where work needs to be performed.
This article is intended for informational purposes only and is not
meant to be a comprehensive summary of the requirements and
specifications set forth in the NEC (NFPA 70). Equipment owners
are solely responsible for ensuring safe working environments
and compliance with regulations. Those responsible for
design of facilities must comply with the clear working space The information provided in this document contains merely general
requirements around equipment in the most current version of descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
the NEC (NFPA 70) applicable to the installation. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A391-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 80
Special tests-type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker gearbox lubrication
The type SDV7 outdoor substation distribution vacuum circuit

breaker recently introduced in the marketplace is an evolution
of the SDV family of circuit breakers, first introduced in the A A
early 1980s. The type SDV7 circuit breaker features very
compact dimensions, allowing use of the type SDV7 to replace
many older outdoor circuit breakers used in substations. Many
older circuit breakers were of the bulk oil type and were quite
compact. As a result, today’s modern air-insulated circuit
breakers are often too large to fit in the available space.
The redesign of the outdoor distribution circuit breaker was B
undertaken to decrease the overall size of the circuit breaker.
The decrease in size of the type SDV7 enclosure, compared to
earlier designs, comes about because the circuit breaker
operating mechanism and the vacuum interrupter poles have
been completely reoriented.
C D
The new circuit breaker has the vacuum interrupter pole units
arranged horizontally, above the operating mechanism, which
positions the connection pads on the vacuum interrupter poles
quite close to the bushing connection pads. The section view
of the type SDV7 circuit breaker (Figure 1) shows the short
current path from the connection pads on the vacuum
interrupter poles to the roof-mounted bushings.
The stored-energy operating mechanism for the circuit breaker A Bushings
is below the vacuum interrupter poles, accessible through the B Vacuum interrupters
door on the right side of the enclosure as shown in Figure 1. C Low-voltage compartment
The user’s protective relays and other instrumentation D Operating mechanism
elements are installed in the low-voltage control compartment,
accessible through the door on the left side in the illustration.
Figure 1: Type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker - section view

Figure 2 shows a view of the operating mechanism (at bottom) A Main shaft
in relation to the vacuum interrupter poles (at top). As shown, A
B Gearbox
this arrangement is possible as the operating mechanism has C Drip pan
been inverted from the orientation as used in the type SDV6
distribution circuit breakers and in the type GMSG indoor
drawout circuit breakers for use in metal-clad switchgear.
A B
A Vacuum interrupters
B Operating mechanism Figure 3: Type SDV7 with type 3AH35 operating mechanism visible
Because the gearbox in the type SDV7 distribution circuit

Figure 2: Type 3AH35 operating mechanism
breaker is used in an inverted mode, special tests were
undertaken to assure that the functionality of the gearbox
The heart of the operating mechanism is the enclosed gearbox, drive would be unimpaired by this unusual mounting and by
which allows for manual and electrical charging of closing the high ambient temperatures common in outdoor circuit
springs, and serves as a mounting platform for many of the breaker applications. Figure 3 shows the gearbox, as installed
elements important to the closing and opening functions. in the lower portion of the operating mechanism of a type
In most of our earlier designs, the operating mechanism is SDV7 distribution circuit breaker.
oriented with the main rotating shaft near the bottom and the The gearbox is mounted directly to the bottom plate of the
gearbox drive located in the upper portion of the operator. In mechanism housing. The mounting incorporates special
the type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker design, as shown in purpose gasket material, in combination with a gasket sealant
the illustration, the main rotating shaft is located near the top compound, to assure long-term resistance to leakage. The
and the gearbox drive is located near the bottom. gasket material consists of aramid fibers bonded together with
We have applied the gearbox in other orientations for many nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) or nitrile rubber.
years in certain special applications, such as high continuous The gasket material is used in combination with a silicone
current generator circuit breakers and in special circuit breakers rubber sealant to further assure long-term sealing and bonding
for mining application where space is highly restricted. of the gasket system to the gearbox flange and the mounting
plate. This gasket/sealant combination provides an oil-resistant
seal suitable for applications from minus 50 °C to beyond
150 °C.
Since the gearbox operates at atmospheric pressure, the
application of the gasket and sealant imposes relatively modest
stresses on the system.
To confirm the suitability of the system, an endurance test was
conducted on the gearbox and mounting in a chamber at
elevated temperature. The gearbox was held at an elevated
temperature of 70 °C, and the spring-charging motor was
operated at irregular intervals to simulate circuit breaker
operations and to avoid stagnation in the grease. It was felt
that allowing the grease to remain in one condition for long
periods of time would be a less severe test case, so operations
at irregular intervals were employed to avoid this occurrence.
The elevated temperature was chosen as leakage of grease
would be more likely at higher temperatures, and high-internal
ambient temperatures are common in outdoor circuit breaker
enclosures on sunny summer days.
After a period of weeks under these conditions, only very
minor leakage of grease from the gearbox was observed, thus The information provided in this document contains merely general
demonstrating the validity of the gasket/sealing system. The descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
leakage of grease occurred at the rotating crank shaft bearings, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
and leakage from this location is normal for other applications
of the gearbox. No leakage occurred at the mounting location of contract.
where the gasket/sealant system is used.
During other tests on various distribution circuit breakers in the All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
type SDV family, it has been observed that a small amount of
lubricant is disbursed around the enclosure as various cranks,
bearings and the like move at high speed during the closing Siemens Industry, Inc.
operation. Some users may find this objectionable but this is 7000 Siemens Road
completely normal. Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A403-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 81
Arc-flash incident energy mitigation
The issue of arc-flash incident energy has grown significantly in The latest revision of NFPA 70E recognizes reduced PPE
recent years as users and specifiers have become more aware requirements for arc-resistant switchgear for certain operations
of electrical safety. Occupational Safety and Health when the equipment is in its arc-resistant condition.
Administration (OSHA) regulations, National Fire Protection Recent technical literature is rich with papers on the subject of
Association (NFPA®) standard NFPA 70E®, and technical papers arc-flash incident energy calculation, primarily using the
presented in IEEE publications and conferences, as well as techniques presented in IEEE Std 1584. From these papers, the
other venues, have increased this awareness. calculation of incident energy involves multiple factors,
As a consequence, design engineers are actively working to including:
design systems so that the maximum arc-flash incident energy The magnitude of bolted fault current
of their systems will not exceed a particular value. This is
generally correlated to the ratings for arc-flash protective The design of the protection system, including arc-sensing
clothing and the hazard/risk categories (HRC) in NFPA 70E. HRC systems
category 3 personal protective equipment (PPE) must have a The duration of the arcing current
minimum arc rating of 25 cal/cm2, while HRC category 4 PPE
The working distance from the arc
must have a minimum arc rating of 40 cal/cm2.
The system configuration (for instance, tie circuit breakers
Engineers have begun to specify limits for incident energy in
closed or alternate sources connected)
their equipment purchase specifications. An example of such a
requirement follows: Whether or not the equipment is in its arc-resistant state (all
doors and panels correctly closed and secured, equipment
“The medium voltage arc-resistant switchgear shall be
correctly installed, as required by IEEE Std C37.20.7).
designed such that it will mitigate arc-flash hazards to a
maximum of 25 cal/cm² (HRC category 3 arc rating) in A switchgear supplier has no control over any of these critical
accordance with NFPA 70E.” factors. The switchgear manufacturer does not determine the
bolted fault current and cannot reduce it. Similarly, the
The switchgear manufacturer cannot comply with such a
equipment vendor does not specify the protection relays or
requirement, because it demands performance that depends
configuration. The switchgear supplier does not determine ‒
on many factors over which the switchgear manufacturer has
nor can the supplier enforce ‒ any particular protective relay
no control.
settings, most especially the time delay from fault inception to
When equipment furnished is qualified as “arc-resistant” the sending of trip signals to all sources of power. Lastly, the
switchgear by design testing to the requirements of IEEE Std equipment supplier has no control over the working distance.
C37.20.7, there is no problem with a limit, such as 25 cal/cm²,
provided that the equipment is in its arc-resistant condition,
and assuming that the duration of the arcing event is no
greater than the rated duration of 0.5 s, regardless of the
location of the arcing fault inside the arc-resistant equipment.

Since the factors that determine the amount of incident energy NEC 110-16 field marking for potential arc-flash hazards
cannot be controlled by the switchgear manufacturer, claims
The subject of limiting arc-flash incident energy to a fixed
cannot be made that incident energy will be limited to a
value situation described in this issue of TechTopics is similar
particular value. This is a shared responsibility between the
to the requirement in the National Electric Code® (NEC®)
consulting engineer or designer, and the owner or operator of
(NFPA 70®), article 110-16 that requires that electrical
the equipment. The consulting engineer is responsible for
equipment be field marked to warn of potential arc-flash
determining the incident energy for various operating
hazards. Code-Making Panel no. 1, responsible for article
scenarios and for determining the protective device settings
110, recognizes that the equipment manufacturer cannot
and operating procedures, and it is the responsibility of the
mark the equipment with the incident energy exposure as
owner or operator to maintain the system, adhere to the
the manufacturer does not have the required information
specified settings and scenarios, and to update the studies
and cannot control future changes to the conditions under
when system conditions change.
which the incident energy is determined.
Arc-detection schemes
References:
It is desirable that arc-resistant equipment employ protection
means to detect an arcing fault within the equipment, and to NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace“
rapidly initiate tripping of all sources of power to the arcing NEC NFPA 70 National Electric Code
fault, preferably well under the rated arcing duration of 0.5 s
OSHA regulations, 29 CFR parts 1910 and 1926
(refer to IEEE/PES T&D Conference paper, “Strategies for
Mitigating the Effects of Internal Arcing Faults in Medium- IEEE Std C37.20.7, “IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed
Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear” for discussion). Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults“
Typical protection schemes used for this purpose use light IEEE Std 1584, “IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard
sensing to detect the presence of an arc, with simultaneous Calculations“
current sensing to provide security (assurance of a correct ”Strategies for Mitigating the Effects of Internal Arcing Faults
“trip” decision), rather than relying on the presence of light in Medium-Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear,“ co-authors
alone. Traditional bus differential protection can also be quite include T. W. Olsen. 2001 IEEE/PES Transmission and
effective in detecting not only an arcing, but also any other Distribution Conference and Exposition, (Conference Paper)
kind of fault inside the bus differential zone of protection. Cat. No.01CH37294.
Today the most common scheme employs light sensors, so
the rest of the discussion will focus on equipment that uses
light sensing to detect the presence of an arc and to initiate
tripping of all power sources.
If an arcing event is initiated but is not located inside the
zone of protection of the light detection system, as for
example, an arc on the line side of a main circuit breaker and
on the line side of the current transformers, even if the light
emitted by an arcing fault is detected, the sensing system will The information provided in this document contains merely general
not send a tripping signal to all sources of power. This is due descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
to the design of the light sensing system, which requires not use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
only that light be sensed, but also that there be confirmation
by simultaneous current in the protected circuit.
of contract.
If the fault is on the line side of the current transformers, the
sensing system will not see current and tripping will not be All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
initiated. Even if the system does not have the security
feature of requiring a confirming current signal, if the fault is
on the line side of the main circuit breaker, tripping of the Siemens Industry, Inc.
main circuit breaker would not remove the fault. 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A409-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 82
Continuous current capability in ambient temperatures other than 40 °C
One of the questions that seems to be asked often is that of Example 1: 3,000 A bus in 50 °C ambient
the continuous current carrying capacity of equipment in For example, consider the continuous current carrying
ambient temperatures other that the rated maximum capability of a main bus in metal-clad switchgear, for which
ambient temperature of 40 °C. On the surface, this is a the applicable standard is ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2. The limit of
simple question to answer, but as with many other issues, it temperature rise for silver-plated copper bus joints is 65 °C,
is not as simple at it appears. and considering the maximum rated ambient of 40 °C, this
The fundamental relationship is that temperature rise is means that the limiting total temperature for the insulation
related to the square of the current. Therefore, if the that supports or covers these buses is 105 °C. Suppose that
equipment has a certain temperature rise at its rated we are interested in the continuous current capability of a
continuous current, the current that can be carried 3,000 A bus in an exterior ambient temperature of 50 °C.
continuously in some other ambient temperature can be From the equation,
calculated as a ratio of the squares of the currents. Iambient = (105-50)
In mathematical terms: 3,000 65
Iambient = (Θmax ‒ Θambient) solving
Irated Θrated Iambient = 3,000 (105-50) = 3,000(0.9198) = 2,759 A
where 65
Iambient is the current at the actual ambient temperature of Example 2: 3,000 A bus in a 20 °C ambient
the application As another example, consider the same arrangement as in
Irated is the rated continuous current in a 40 °C ambient example 1, but with an exterior ambient of 20 °C. From the
Θmax is the maximum allowable temperature for the equation,
materials involved Iambient = (105-20)
Θambient is the actual ambient temperature of the application 3,000 65
Θrated is the allowable temperature rise for rated solving

continuous current. Iambient = 3,000 (105-20) = 3,000(1.1435) = 3,430 A
The values that are used for this formula must be selected 65
based on the limiting factors for this application, which are So, it’s really simple, right?
not the same for all components of the equipment.

Remember, the discussion mentioned that this is not as How to manage this? It is actually very simple – merely use a
simple as it may first appear. The reason is that there are higher primary current rating for the CT, for example,
various limiting temperatures and temperature rises in the 3,500:5 or 4,000:5. Try it in the formula; for 3,500:5 the
equipment. allowable current would be 2,858 A, while for 4,000:5, the
For the metal-clad switchgear example, some of the allowable current would be 3,266 A. Of course, this does not
limitations are: change the limit on bus current calculated in example 1, but
it changes the allowable limit for the CTs so that they are no
longer the limiting factor.
Allowable rise (°C) / Example 4: current transformers with 20 °C ambient
Description Reference
ambient (°C)
So, take the situation of example 2 with 3,000 A and with
20 °C external ambient, and consider the CTs in the circuit
Bus, circuit breaker and
C37.20.2-1999, breaker cell. As in example 3, the rated ambient temperature
other main current- 65/40
carrying parts
table 3 for the current transformers is 55 °C. To get the ambient
inside the switchgear for the current transformers, 15 °C
must be added for internal air temperature rise to the
C57.13-2008,
external ambient of 20 °C. In the calculations, the resulting
paragraph 4.4.2 and
Current transformers 30/55
C37.20.2-1999,
ambient for the CTs is 35 °C. Substituting in our equation:
paragraph 5.6.3 Iambient = (85-35)
3,000 30
Cable connection pads C37.20.2-1999, solving
45/40
(for outgoing cables) table 3
Iambient = 3,000 (85-35) = 3,000(1.2910) = 3,873 A
30
This reinforces the lesson learned from example 3. In a
Example 3: current transformers with 50 °C ambient situation of higher exterior ambient than the rated ambient
Use the situation of example 1 with 3,000 A bus and with of 40 °C, the component with the lowest temperature rise
50 °C exterior ambient, and consider the current limit is the boundary restriction on allowable current. For
transformers (CTs) in the circuit breaker cell. CTs have a rated the situation of a lower exterior ambient temperature than
temperature rise of 30 °C in an exterior ambient of 40 °C. For 40 °C, the components with lower temperature rise limits
switchgear, the basis of rating of CTs is that the air inside the are no longer the boundary restriction.
switchgear rises 15 °C above the ambient outside the So, given 20 °C exterior ambient temperature, the main bus
switchgear, so the actual rated ambient inside the switchgear is the limiting factor, with an allowable current of 3,430 A,
(the ambient for the CTs) is 55 °C. Also, the ambient has to versus the theoretical limit of 3,873 A for the CTs. In the
be recalculated for the example, as in a 50 °C exterior example of the 50 °C exterior ambient temperature, the
ambient, the ambient around the CT would be current transformers were the limiting factor, at 2,449 A as
55 °C + (50 °C – 40 °C ) = 65 °C. Substituting in our equation: compared to 2,759 A for the main bus.
Iambient = (85-65)
3,000 30
solving
Iambient = 3,000 (85-65) = 3,000(0.8165) = 2,449 A
30
What this shows is that when operating in an ambient above
the rated 40 °C ambient, the component of the switchgear
with the lowest temperature rise limitation is the most
restrictive condition in the application of the product. In
example 1, a capability of 2,759 A was calculated for the bus
based on the 65 °C temperature rise limit in C37.20.2, but in
example 3, a limit of only 2,449 A is found.
Summary
Hopefully, the examples and mathematics in this issue of
TechTopics have made the issue simple to understand. The
underlying principle of the discussions is that the electrical
life of switchgear or circuit breakers is determined by the
temperatures to which the insulating materials are exposed
(the reader might wish to review TechTopics No. 15 for more
discussion on the life of insulating materials). So, the
objective of all the mathematical gyrations is to produce
limiting current capabilities that expose the insulating
materials to the same total temperatures as they experience
when operating at rated continuous current in a maximum
ambient of 40 °C.
For those so inclined, you may wish to check the calculation
results in this issue of TechTopics by referring to the IEEE
standard, C37.20.2, on metal-clad switchgear, table 10. The
values in the calculations can be verified in this table, by
referring to the relevant column in the table for the The information provided in this document contains merely general
temperature rise limit of the component (reference IEEE descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
C37.20.2-1999, “Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear”). use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: E50001-F710-A459-V1-4A00
TechTopics No. 83
Arc-resistant construction for outdoor distribution circuit breakers
Siemens has expanded the SDV7 family of outdoor The public awareness of the hazards to which workers are
substation type distribution circuit breakers to include an exposed in the workplace is growing. This awareness
option for arc-resistant construction. The family now actually began long ago, with the creation of Occupational
includes: Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) as a result of the
N
on-arc-resistant type SDV7-SE circuit breakers with Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of
stored-energy operating mechanism 1970. This gave the Federal Government the authority to
establish and enforce regulations for worker safety.
A
rc-resistant type SDV7-SE-AR circuit breakers with stored-
energy operating mechanism One of the first consequences of the OSHA regulations was
that the National Electrical Code® (NEC ®) NFPA 70® became
N
on-arc-resistant type SDV7-MA circuit breakers with mandatory in most areas of the county. This impacted
magnetic-actuator operating mechanism industrial, residential and commercial installations and led
A
rc-resistant type SDV7-MA-AR circuit breakers with to the introduction of third-party listed products (for
magnetic-actuator operating mechanism. example, UL-Listed products) for such markets. However,
utility installations are not subject to the NEC when the
The option for arc-resistant construction is being offered to
utility is acting in its role as a distributor or generator of
response to desires expressed by utility firms for an arc-
electric power. So, the impact of OSHA on utility customers
resistant circuit breaker, tested to the requirements of the
was not immediate in the early years after the OSHA
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 guide for internal arcing tests of metal-
legislation was enacted.
enclosed switchgear.
In recent years, OSHA has been more active in enforcing the
The concept of arc-resistant outdoor circuit breakers is new
regulations, even in the utility arena. In particular, 29CFR
to some utility users in the distribution segment of the
1910.269 applies to utilities, along with various other parts
utility industry, but is not new to personnel in the
of the OSHA regulations. A few excerpts from the OSHA
generation segment of the utility industry. Some of our
regulations are:
utility distribution customers ask why they should specify
arc-resistant outdoor distribution circuit breakers. This issue 1910.269(a)(1)(i)
of TechTopics addresses that issue. This section covers the operation and maintenance of
electric power generation, control, transmission, and
Data from National Institute for Occupational Safety and
distribution lines and equipment.
Health (NIOSH) www.niosh.gov for the 1992-2000 period
reports that approximately 300 persons per year were killed 1910.269(a)(1)(ii)(B)
in workplace incidents over this period. Each of these To electrical installations, electrical safety-related work
fatalities naturally received significant media coverage, practices, or electrical maintenance considerations
increasing the awareness of the public of the hazards to covered by Subpart S of this Part.
which workers were exposed.

Note 1: Work practices conforming to 1910.332 through Awareness of hazards to workers also grew, particularly after
1910.335 of this Part are considered as complying with 1990, at least in part due to activities of two safety committees
the electrical safety-related work practice requirements of of the IEEE Industry Applications Society. The first is the Safety,
this section identified in Table 1 of Appendix A-2 to this Operations, and Maintenance Subcommittee of the Industrial
section, provided the work is being performed on a and Commercial Power Systems Committee (I&CPS), while the
generation or distribution installation meeting 1910.303 second is the Safety Committee of the Petroleum and Chemical
through 1910.308 of this Part. This table also identifies Industry Committee (PCIC). The I&CPS Subcommittee was the
provisions in this section that apply to work by qualified driving force in creation of the IEEE Yellow Book, IEEE 902,
persons directly on or associated with installations of “IEEE Guide for Maintenance, Operation, and Safety of
electric power generation, transmission, and distribution Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.” In turn, the PCIC
lines or equipment, regardless of compliance with Safety Committee took the concept of electrical safety to a new
1910.332 through 1910.335 of this Part. level with the creation of the IEEE IAS Electrical Safety
Note 2: Work practices performed by qualified persons Workshop. The first workshop was held in Dallas in 1992, and
and conforming to 1910.269 of this Part are considered the nineteenth workshop took place in Daytona Beach in
as complying with 1910.333(c) and 1910.335 of this Part. February, 2012, with nearly 400 persons participating.
1910.269(a)(1)(iii) The objective of the Electrical Safety Workshop (ESW) is to

This section applies in addition to all other applicable provide a forum for the exchange of ideas for preventing
standards contained in this Part 1910. Specific references electrical accidents and injuries in the workplace, and to
in this section to other sections of Part 1910 are provided accelerate application of technology, work practices, standards,
for emphasis only. and regulations. In the time since the first ESW was
inaugurated, the rate of worker injuries due to electrical causes
These provisions suggest that the rules that OSHA applies in has decreased markedly, indicating that the mission of the ESW
general industry also apply to utilities. is being accomplished.
Section 1910.132 in subpart I of the OSHA regulations The attendance at the ESW by members of the utility industry
requires that the employer provide personal protective is growing, and with this, the recognition that use of arc-
equipment (PPE) appropriate for the hazards involved. resistant outdoor substation distribution circuit breakers can
1910.132(d)(1) reduce the level of hazards to which the utility electrical worker
The employer shall assess the workplace to determine if is exposed. For more information, see the ESW website at
hazards are present, or are likely to be present, which www.ewh.ieee.org/cmte/ias-esw/
necessitate the use of personal protective equipment To comply with OSHA, the worker in the vicinity of an
(PPE). If such hazards are present, or likely to be present, energized circuit breaker must use the appropriate arc-rated
the employer shall: PPE. A higher level of PPE is necessary with non-arc-resistant
1910.132(d)(1)(i) equipment, which is one significant reason that utilities are
Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of beginning to require arc-resistant equipment.
PPE that will protect the affected employee from the While OSHA does not directly enforce NFPA 70E®, OSHA
hazards identified in the hazard assessment; generally accepts practices that comply with NFPA 70E as
In turn, 1910.335, Safeguards for Personnel Protection being in compliance with OSHA regulations. It is understood
requires the following: that NFPA 70E does not (strictly) apply to electric utilities, but
we are not aware of a document of comparable rigor solely for
1910.335(a)(1)(i)
the utility industry.
Employees working in areas where there are potential
electrical hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, Arc-resistant construction of electrical equipment is intended
electrical protective equipment that is appropriate for the to give an extra degree of protection to personnel in the
specific parts of the body to be protected and for the work to vicinity of energized equipment, and particularly to direct the
be performed. exhaust of extremely hot gases resulting from an arcing event
inside the equipment away from the personnel. While there are
Note: Personal protective equipment requirements are
other ways to protect personnel from the hazards of arcing
contained in subpart I of this part.
events inside equipment, use of outdoor distribution circuit
The reference to subpart I in 1910.335(a)(1)(i) includes the breakers that are qualified as arc resistant offers an effective
information in 1910.132(d), which is part of subpart I. means to increase the level of protection to personnel.
Figure 1 shows the key elements of the arc-resistant enclosure
design of the type SDV7 family of circuit breakers and the
method of exhausting gases. The enclosure is provided with
channels on the two sides of the enclosure. These channels
3 have top-mounted pressure-relief flaps, designed to open in
3 the event of an internal arcing event, and exhaust arcing
2 byproducts upwards, away from operators. The type SDV7-AR
1 enclosure has been tested to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 for
2
accessibility type 2B, arc-resistant around the four sides, with
the low-voltage compartment doors open or closed. For
discussion of arc-resistant accessibility types, refer to
TechTopics No. 70 - Arc-resistant switchgear accessibility types.

1. Relief opening descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
2. Relief channel use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
3. Exhaust flap on top of relief channel respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
Figure 1: Type SDV7-AR arc-exhaust system All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A134-X-4A00
TechTopics No. 84
Space heater - sizing and application principles
Use of space heaters in metal-clad switchgear and in Siemens viewpoint is that space heaters are intended to
outdoor distribution circuit breakers is a frequent topic of minimize condensation, and must be energized at all times.
discussion. These discussions make it clear that there is little When space heaters are furnished in equipment, our
understanding of why space heaters may be needed in standard practice is to continuously energize the space
enclosed switchgear, and what function they are intended heaters. When the user requires thermostatic control,
to serve. Especially in these days of energy conservation, Siemens furnishes a non-adjustable thermostat in each
there is a strong temptation to de-energize space heaters or vertical section of the equipment. The thermostat turns the
use adjustable thermostats set to a relatively low space heaters “on” when the temperature inside that vertical
temperature, which keeps the space heaters turned off section is lower than approximately 40 °C (104 °F).
when they are needed most. Use of adjustable thermostats How did Siemens arrive at this practice? The goal of using
with low “off” temperature-settings greatly increases the space heaters is to raise the temperature inside the
likelihood of condensation. enclosure so that the temperature is high enough to prevent
The three most critical concepts to keep in mind with condensation in most reasonable circumstances. The basic
respect to space heaters are: tool for this discussion is the psychrometric chart, which is
1. Space heaters are intended to reduce the likelihood of available at many websites, such as www.uigi.com/UIGI_IP.
condensation on insulation. pdf, www.truetex.com/psychrometric_chart.htm, and
others. An example of a psychrometric chart is included on
2. See item 1. page two, but the reader is encouraged to search for these
3. See item 1. charts on the internet, where charts with a greater level of
detail are readily available.
The key point is that space heaters have nothing to do with
human comfort. In the psychrometric chart (refer to page two of this issue),
the curved line that is the upper limit on the chart is the line
The fundamental goal is to reduce the chance that
that indicates 100 percent relative humidity. Condensation
condensation will occur on insulating surfaces, and
is probable when the air inside the enclosure is saturated
condensation is, perhaps, the number one problem with
with water vapor, which is the situation with 100 percent
electrical installations. When users experience insulation
relative humidity. The goal is to raise the temperature inside
problems in switchgear or in outdoor circuit breakers, more
the enclosure to decrease the relative humidity to a point
often than not the root cause can be traced to moisture
where condensation is unlikely. Siemens considers that if
(condensation), sometimes exacerbated by the presence of
the relative humidity is reduced to 80 percent or lower, then
dirt and other contamination.
the likelihood of condensation occurring is reduced to a
reasonable degree.

2
www.usa.siemens.com/hvac
Psychrometric Chart
5.2 °F 6.3 °F 1. Relative humidity 80%

(2.9 °C) (3.5 °C)
Engineering 2. Relative humidity 100%
I-28
Again, looking at the psychrometric chart, consider an All of this assumes the worst case, in which the equipment
example of a temperature of 32 °F (0 °C) and 100 percent is not carrying substantial current. In olden days, some
relative humidity. To reduce the relative humidity to 80 engineers argued that if the equipment were energized, the
percent, the temperature inside the enclosure would have to losses in the equipment would be sufficient to prevent
be increased by 5.2 °F (2.9 °C), as shown by the lines plotted condensation. The reality is that, in many cases, this is valid.
on the chart. However, in many cases, it is not valid.
For a second example, consider a temperature of 77 °F A very simple example will illustrate the dilemma. Suppose
(25 °C) and 100 percent relative humidity. To reduce to 80 there is a 1,200 A circuit breaker unit, and suppose that this
percent relative humidity would require an increase in the unit is carrying 200 A.
temperature inside the enclosure of 6.3 °F (3.5 °C). If the circuit breaker unit meets the ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2
Two conclusions arise from these examples. First, only a limits on temperature rise, the highest temperature rise at
moderate increase in temperature is needed to reduce the 1,200 A would be 65 °C. In many instances, it would be
likelihood of condensation occurring. Second, the absolute lower, but we can use 65 °C for this discussion.
temperature is irrelevant. If the relative humidity is 100 What would the highest temperature rise of the buses and
percent inside the enclosure, regardless of the temperature connections in this example unit be with a current of 200 A
inside the enclosure, supplemental heating is needed to instead of 1,200 A? Heating is a function of the square of
drive the relative humidity down to a reasonable value, or the current and the resistance. For a given unit, resistance is
there will be a strong likelihood of condensation. It is this constant, so the temperature rise of the 1,200 A unit at
last point that leads to our conclusion that space heaters 200 A actual current would be (2002/1,2002 ) x 65 °C =
must be energized at all times to minimize the likelihood of 1.8 °C (3.2 °F).
condensation occurring.
Also, this level of temperature rise in the conductors would If adjustable thermostats are used, they should be set to
be considerably higher than the resulting increase in keep the space heaters “on” in line with the values given
temperature of the air inside the enclosure. From the above for our non-adjustable thermostat.
psychrometric chart calculations performed earlier, this single thermostat for an entire lineup should not be
A
would not be sufficient to reduce the likelihood of used. The amount of heat generated by current in each
condensation to the extent that Siemens would feel vertical section differs, and space heating may be needed
comfortable with. in some vertical sections, but not in others.
The example above assumes a modest current of 200 A, T
he need for heat to minimize condensation is higher at
one-sixth of the circuit breaker rating for this example. It higher temperatures than it is for lower temperatures. In
should be clear that the situation is more severe in the case the 32 °F (0 °C) example, a temperature increase of 2.9 °C
of a circuit that is not carrying current, such as for a is needed to bring relative humidity down to 80 percent,
normally-open tie circuit breaker, where the heat generated whereas at 25 °C, an increase of 3.5 °C is needed.
during normal operation is essentially none.
This discussion does not deal with the need to reduce the
From the examples discussed, a rule-of-thumb was selected likelihood of condensation in low-voltage compartments
that the air temperature inside the enclosure should be (for example, in control and protective relay compartments).
raised about 4 °C (7.2 °F) in order to have reasonable The focus of this discussion is on the high-voltage
confidence that the relative humidity will be reduced to components.
80 percent, and the risk of condensation mitigated.
Space heaters are often not specified for use in indoor
From this discussion, one can understand why Siemens switchgear, as indoor switchgear is often in a climate
position is that space heaters should be energized at all controlled area in which the relative humidity is maintained
times. The exception to this would be when the load being at levels at which condensation is unlikely to occur.
carried in the unit is high enough to produce significant
heating of the air in the enclosure so as to reduce the One last observation before this discussion is closed. The
relative humidity to 80 percent or less. This level of possibility always exists that the rate of change of outside
temperature rise on bus and connections is likely to be temperature and humidity can exceed the rate at which the
significantly higher than just 4 °C, as all of the heat in the equipment can respond in reducing relative humidity inside
bus bars would not convert into heating of the air in the the enclosure. In such instances, condensation can occur.
enclosure. The object of using space heaters is to reduce the likelihood
of condensation occurring, but no system can fully eliminate
Siemens often receives requests for adjustable thermostats the possibility.
from users. We speculate that the desire for an adjustable
thermostat comes from confusion between personnel
comfort and the need to minimize condensation. The use of
an adjustable thermostat is an invitation for the user to
reduce the thermostat setting to save energy, in the process,
significantly increasing the likelihood of condensation. As
the likelihood of condensation increases, so also does the
likelihood of ultimate catastrophic failure due to The information provided in this document contains merely general
condensation. descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
Siemens practices and recommendations are: further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
S
pace heaters are a highly recommended option for any respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
installation, especially any application where the of contract.
likelihood of condensation is relative high. Space heaters
are a standard component of any outdoor switchgear or Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
outdoor circuit breakers that we supply. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
A
s standard, we prefer to continuously energize space
heaters, and no thermostat is provided.
7000 Siemens Road
W
hen thermostatic control is required, a non-adjustable Wendell, NC 27591
thermostat should be used in each vertical section. Our
standard thermostat is selected to open at 110 °F +/- 5 °F Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: E50001-F710-A460-V1-4A00
and close at 100 °F +/- 5 °C temperature inside the
enclosure. This keeps the space heaters “on” at all times © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
unless the temperature inside the enclosure exceeds
110 °F +/- 5 °C. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 85
Temperature limitations for user’s power cables
Siemens has been asked about the limitations on First, ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 specifies that the temperature rise
temperature for user’s cable connections to switchgear for for cable connection pads (the surface to which a cable lug
many years. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 (for metal-clad switchgear) is attached) must be limited to 45 °C rise at full load, instead
and ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 (for metal-enclosed interrupter of the normal 65 °C rise allowed for a bolted bus bar
switchgear) indicate that the temperature in the cable connection joint. This limit was selected for compatibility
termination compartment should not exceed 65 °C when with 90 °C cables. As a side note, the cable terminals (cable
the equipment is operating at its full continuous current lugs) which we provide are UL-listed for 90 °C.
rating with the switchgear in a location with an ambient of Second, the National Electrical Code® (NFPA 70®) contains
40 °C. In ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2-1999, this temperature limit language that would exempt most installations from having
inside the cable connection compartment is indicated in to adjust cable ampacity. Specifically, article 310.60
clause 5.5.5, excerpted below: indicates:
5.5.5 Temperature limitations for air surrounding 310.60 Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts.
insulated power cables
(B) Ampacities of Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000
The temperature of the air surrounding insulated cables Volts. Ampacities for solid dielectric-insulated conductors
within any compartment of an enclosed assembly shall shall be permitted to be determined by tables or under
not exceed 65 °C when the assembly is engineering supervision, as provided in 310.60(C) and (D)
a) Equipped with devices having maximum current rating (1) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one
for which the assembly is designed. calculated or tabulated ampacity could apply for a given
b) Carrying rated continuous current at rated voltage and circuit length, the lowest value shall be used.
rated power frequency. Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to
c) In an ambient air temperature of 40 °C. adjacent portions of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall be
NOTE — This temperature limitation is based on the use permitted to be used beyond the point of transition, a
of 90 °C insulated power cables. Use of lower temperature distance equal to 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10 percent of the circuit
rated cables requires special consideration. length calculated at the higher ampacity, whichever is
less.
This has caused some users concern because this would
suggest that cable ampacity must be adjusted downward
due to excess temperature. We think this is not necessary in
most cases.

In a typical section of metal-clad switchgear, the length of Because of this, there is even less need to consider ampacity
cable from the point of entry to the cable lug is about 32” derating of cables connected to the switchgear.
(813 mm) for a connection near the entry point (for example, Specific situations for a particular project may require that the
bottom entry cables to a circuit breaker in the lower cell), or user adjust the ampacity, and each circuit and each application
about 82” (2,083 mm) for a connection far from the entry should be individually considered.
point (for example, bottom entry cables to a circuit breaker in
the upper cell). The exception in NEC clause 310.60(B)(1) Siemens believes that most applications will not need to
indicates that if the length of cable inside the higher ambient consider adjustment of the cable ampacity.
area (the switchgear) is less than 10 percent of the length of
the circuit, then the adjustment of ampacity is not needed. So,
for the two examples, the circuit length would have to be more
than 320” (about 27’) (8.1 m) or 820” (about 69’) (20.8 m) in
order to avoid decreasing the cable ampacity.
Most external circuits would be significantly longer that these
limits, and therefore, calculation of a lower cable ampacity
should be unnecessary.
This discussion is premised on the equipment being used at its
rated continuous current capability. At rated continuous The information provided in this document contains merely general
current, the temperature rise limits of the ANSI/IEEE standards descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
may be approached (but not exceeded). Since circuit heating is
proportional to the square of the current in the circuit, we respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
recognize that the actual temperatures in the equipment will of contract.
be considerably reduced when the current is less than rated
continuous current. Because of the square relationship, even a All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
small reduction in current from the rated current makes a large Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
difference in heating. Consider a circuit breaker operating at own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
90 percent of rated current. Based on the square relationship,
the heating in the conductors would be only 81 percent of that 7000 Siemens Road
at rated current. Wendell, NC 27591
A final point to consider is that the NEC, article 210.19(B)
generally requires that the branch circuit conductors be sized
Order No.: E50001-F710-A467-V1-4A00
for 125 percent of the continuous load (but the NEC has many All rights reserved.
supplemental qualifiers). If a user is following this NEC © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
requirement, the temperature of the cables will be well below
the limits imposed by the cable temperature class. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
TechTopics No. 86
Use of unshielded cables for connections in
medium-voltage switchgear and motor controllers
Several years ago, the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70® or As used in factory-assembled products, the unshielded cable
NEC®) was revised to require that insulated cables for feeder is mounted on insulating supports, particularly when the
circuits over 2,000 volts phase-to-ground use shielded cable rated voltage of the product exceeds the rating of the cable
construction. For decades, the code had allowed use of itself. For example, 15 kV cable is used for connections to
unshielded cables for feeder circuits. This change in the voltage transformers, control power transformers, and surge
code has caused users to ask why it is that switchgear arresters in metal-clad switchgear rated up to 38 kV. The
manufacturers still continue to use unshielded cables inside requirement of the standards is that the assembled
of the switchgear. equipment be able to withstand dielectric tests, including
lightning impulse withstand tests and power frequency
Article 300 of the NEC covers wiring methods. Article
withstand tests at the ratings of the equipment (in the case
300.1(B) indicates that the provisions of article 300 do not
of 38 kV metal-clad switchgear, 150 kV BIL and 80 kV one-
apply to conductors that are an integral part of equipment,
minute 60 Hz withstand voltage). The equipment is able to
including “factory assembled control equipment” and “listed
meet these requirements because the total insulation
utilization equipment”. The code actually says:
system, including the air surrounding the cables, the
( B) Integral parts of equipment. dielectric strength of the insulating supports, and the
The provisions of this article are not intended to apply to dielectric strength of the cable insulation, is sufficient to
the conductors that form an integral part of equipment, pass the tests for the complete switchgear.
such as motors, controllers, motor control centers, or
Shielding of cables in feeder circuits outside of the factory-
factory assembled control equipment or listed utilization
assembled switchgear or controllers is required by the code.
equipment.
The shield is a grounded outer covering for the cable. The
This statement in the code has been unchanged since at purpose of the shield is to confine the electric field between
least the 1993 edition (if not earlier) of the NEC. the conductor and the grounded shield so that the dielectric
stress on the insulation is uniformly and symmetrically
Article 300.1(B) provides the clear basis for use of
distributed around the circumference of the cable, and so
unshielded cables inside medium-voltage switchgear and
that the installation is free of sharp concentrations of
medium-voltage motor controllers. The procedures and
dielectric stress. The shield must be in intimate contact with
standards that third-party certification agencies (including
the insulation.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards
Association (CSA), and others) use to investigate compliance
of switchgear and motor controller designs to determine if a
listing mark can be applied to the products include the NEC.
In short, for a product to be UL-Listed or C-UL Listed, it must
meet the NEC.

For factory-assembled equipment, the high-voltage
components are enclosed in an overall metal enclosure, so
that a shield on individual conductors in the equipment is
unnecessary. Further, in the equipment, the design of the
cable support system avoids sharp concentration of
dielectric stress so that a shielded cable is not needed.
Terminations of the shielded cable must also be made with
care, to provide for a smooth dielectric transition from the
shielded condition to the unshielded condition. This
transition is usually done using a stress cone kit to terminate
the shield and move the grounded exterior away from the
conductor while reducing the unit dielectric stress. For
decades, stress cones were created using a great deal of
electrical tape and substantial labor, but the process has
evolved greatly over the years with the advent of convenient
stress cone termination kits from a number of
manufacturers.
Another significant drawback to stress cones in switchgear
and controllers is the substantial space required if shielded use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
cables were used. Shielded cables require a significant further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
amount of space at each end of the cable for installation of respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
the stress cone kit. Also, the minimum bending radius for of contract.
shielded cables is twelve times cable outside diameter,
whereas the minimum bending radius for unshielded cables All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
is only eight times outside diameter (and even less with
extra-flexible appliance connection cables used in
controllers). Siemens Industry, Inc.
7000 Siemens Road
The two factors, high cost and large space requirements,
Wendell, NC 27591
preclude use of shielded cable in switchgear.
For further discussion of the use of cables in medium Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A107-X-4A00
voltage equipment for connections between components,
please refer to TechTopics No. 60. © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
TechTopics No. 87
Ground and test devices
This issue of TechTopics is one of several on the subject of The applicable standard for ground and test devices is IEEE
protective grounding in switchgear assemblies. This C37.20.6, “IEEE Standard for 4.76 kV to 38 kV Rated Ground
particular issue focuses on the ground and test device, and Test Devices Used in Enclosures”. For decades, there was
which is a device that is typically used to apply temporary no standard for ground and test devices. This was remedied
personal protective grounds to medium-voltage conductors with the first edition of C37.20.6 in 1997, and the revised
in the switchgear assemblies. edition in 2007.
The ground and test device is a very important element of The C37.20.6 standard defines four broad categories of
the process of creating an electrically safe work condition as devices, including:
defined by NFPA 70E®, the Standard for Electrical Safety in S
imple manual – a device with upper and/or lower
the Workplace, and as required by OSHA regulations. Under terminals with provisions for connecting the phase
the concept of NFPA 70E, achieving an electrically safe work conductors to ground.
condition requires:
C
omplex manual – a device with upper and/or lower
1. Identify all possible energy sources for the equipment terminals, and with a manually operated switch that
2. Open and isolate each of the identified sources allows for connection of the upper or the lower terminals
3. W
here possible, visually verify that the sources are to a set of test terminals. The test terminals, in turn, have
isolated provisions for connecting the phase conductors of the
selected side (upper or lower) to ground.
4. Apply lockout/tagout devices to all identified sources
S
imple electrical – a device with one set of terminals
5. U
se appropriate voltage test device to verify absence of (either upper or lower) and an electrically operated switch
voltage to allow connecting this set of terminals (either upper or
6. A
pply temporary personal protective grounds to the lower, as applicable) to ground even if the system is
phase conductors before contacting them. energized. The device may be provided with test ports
that allow voltage testing of both the upper and the lower
As described, there are many steps that must occur before
terminals of the device. The device has the capability to
the grounds are applied. In essence, grounding is the last
apply the ground even to a system that is energized.
step in a coherent process. If the entire process is not
followed, including all of the first five steps, there is a risk of C
omplex electrical – a device with upper and/or lower
shutting down a live system and disrupting the production terminals, and with a manually operated switch to allow
process, and most importantly, a significant risk of injury to for connection of the upper or the lower terminals to the
personnel. The risk to personnel arises from the false sense power-operated grounding switch. The device has the
of security when the personnel believe the conductors to be capability to apply the ground even to a system that is
grounded when they are not grounded. energized. The device may be provided with test ports for
voltage testing.

IEEE C37.20.6 specifies performance requirements for Siemens has tested our ground and test devices under these
ground and test devices, but leaves construction aspects to conditions, with qualification regarding the connection from
the manufacturer. The major need in construction of a the terminals to the ground system. These tests were
ground and test device is to provide interphase, outerphase, witnessed by UL. The testing was performed with multiple
and inter-terminal barriers to reduce the chance of ground cables per phase, on those devices which are used
inadvertently bridging from live conductor to ground or with cables. The number of cables is selected so that the
between terminals of the device. This is particularly cables can withstand the current. This typically requires
important with manual devices, where the user applies three or four 4/0 cables per phase, and thus demands that
cables or other conductors to make the ground connection. the device tested be equipped with NEMA four-hole pads
Manual devices are often available with NEMA 4-hole pads suitable for connection of multiple cables per phase. Devices
for connection of grounding cable lugs, and may be suitable for use with grounding clamps are, of course,
available with ground stirrups or ground bails. A ground limited to the fault current and duration that corresponds to
stirrup (or ground bail) is a device that provides a round rod the capabilities of the grounding clamps and cables. For
for connection of grounding clamps. more discussion of grounding cables, refer to TechTopics No.
88.
Manual devices are often used with maintenance ground
clamps, available from several suppliers. These devices need With any ground and test device, it is imperative that the
to be applied with insulated tools (typically called “hot user develop comprehensive operating instructions to
sticks”). A ground clamp, with attached cable, secured to the implement the requirements of NFPA 70E. These are needed
end of a hot stick perhaps six to eight feet long, is not an to avoid unintended shutdown of the electric system, and to
easy device to manipulate. This is another reason why it is ensure that the operating personnel and others near the
necessary to provide barriers to prevent inadvertent bridging equipment are protected during use of the devices.
between phase and ground or from one terminal to another. Siemens ground and test devices
It is very important to verify that the primary system is de- Of the devices listed in the standards, Siemens offers simple
energized before the grounding is established, since a manual and simple electrical devices. Complex devices, as
manual device does not have the ability to establish ground the term implies, are very complicated, and as a result
on an energized system. require great care in use and proper maintenance. Due to
The capabilities of the ground and test device must be space constraints, complex electrical devices often cannot
coordinated with the switchgear structure with which it is to be constructed with the same basic operating mechanism of
be used and meet the current withstand ratings of the the corresponding circuit breaker. Since such devices are
switchgear. highly specialized, and produced in very low volumes,
reliability becomes questionable. For these reasons, Siemens
The capabilities of the ground and test device are validated does not offer complex devices, either manual or electrical.
by subjecting the device to short-circuit design (or type)
tests to validate the momentary and short-time current Siemens offers the following types of devices:
withstand ratings. The device must pass a test in the power For use in type GM-SG switchgear up to 15kV -
laboratory in which the device successfully withstands a type GMSG-MO simple manual device:
single-phase momentary test at the rated short-circuit A simple manual device is offered, which has two sets of
current with the first peak current during the test equivalent terminals (upper and lower) and has manually operated
to the peak withstand current of the device (260% of the hookstick-operable single-pole double-throw switches to
rated short-circuit current). The test duration is at least ten allow connection of either the upper terminals or the lower
power-frequency cycles, with current flowing to the ground terminals to ground. The hookstick-operable switches
conductor from the nearest phase conductor. The test must should be actuated with the device inside the switchgear
be repeated as a three-phase test, including ground, with compartment. The preferred operating sequence is:
peak current at 260% occurring in the nearest phase to the
ground conductor. Install all horizontal barriers between the hookstick-
operable switches and the upper and lower terminals
The ground and test device must withstand a short-time
current test at the rated short-circuit current for two C
lose and lock the hinged door on the device that covers
seconds, with current flow to the ground bar from the the terminals that are not intended to be tested and
furthest phase conductor. grounded
Lastly, the ground and test device must withstand the same C
lose but do not lock the hinged door on the device that
dielectric withstand tests (one minute power-frequency covers the terminals that are to be tested and grounded
withstand voltage and full-wave lightning impulse withstand Insert the ground and test device in the cell and rack to
voltage) as are required for the switchgear. the connected position
2
U
se the hookstick to open the hinged door that covers the Figure 1: Section view of type GMSG-MO manually operated ground and
terminals that are to be tested and grounded test device
U
se a voltage measuring device rated for the system
voltage to test the terminals for the presence of voltage. Side view
Follow the NFPA 70E procedure to validate the test
instrument: First test that the voltage measuring device B
properly indicates voltage on a known live conductor; A F
second, test the terminals that are to be grounded for the D
presence of voltage; finally, check the voltage measuring G
device on a known live conductor to verify that the test
E
instrument is still working correctly
A
fter it has been verified that there is no voltage present
on the terminals that are to be grounded, use the
hookstick to remove the horizontal barriers between the F
A C
switches and the terminals that are to be grounded G
U
se the hookstick to move the switch blades to the
terminals to be grounded, and latch the switch blades in
the fully connected position.
Figure 1 shows a section view of the type GMSG-MO manual
ground and test device, illustrating the upper and lower
terminals and the switch blades. The switch can be in the
neutral position, or can be moved to ground the upper or Item Description Item Description
lower terminals. A detent maintains the switch in the A Primary contacts Switch in neutral
E
neutral position, and the hookstick operable switch blade position
B Upper terminals
latches when connected to either power terminal. Padlock provision
Removable horizontal barriers are included between the C Lower terminals F
(hasp)
switch blades and the upper terminals, and between the D Switch in up position G Removable barriers
switch blades and the lower terminals. Non-removable
vertical barriers are provided between poles. The horizontal
barriers are removable with a hookstick to allow for
operation of the switches.
Figure 2: Type GMSG-MO manually operated ground and test device: use
Figure 2 shows use of a hookstick to close the switch to of a hookstick to close and latch the switch on the lower terminal of the
ground the lower terminals of the left phase on the device phase on the left
(normally, system phase A). The horizontal barriers are
shown in place between the switches and the lower
terminals for the center and right phases (normally system
phases B and C). The vertical barriers between phases are
also shown.
This device is available for use with type GM-SG family of B Item Description
metal-clad switchgear with rated short-circuit current up to A Hookstick
50 kA. The device is suitable for use in 1,200 A, 2,000 A or
Door over
3,000 A circuit breaker cells (and 4,000 A for fan-cooled
D D D upper
arrangements) without adapters. B
terminals
The switches eliminate the need for multiple cables per E E Switches
A C
phase to achieve grounding currents equal to the rated C C Lower
C
short-circuit current of the equipment. Since the device has terminals
built-in grounding conductors (the switches in combination D Switches
with the ground bus system), this eliminates the need for
Removable
the user to provide or maintain grounding cables for use
E horizontal
with the device. Therefore, the type GMSG-MO manual barrier
ground and test device is not offered with provisions for
connection of cables, either using conventional cable lugs or
grounding clamps.
3
The device is suitable for voltage (dielectric) testing of the Figure 3: Section view of type GMSG-EO electrically operated ground
upper terminals or the lower terminals, and also for and test device
checking phasing between the upper and the lower
terminals. In either case, probes and detection devices rated Side view
for at least the voltages involved must be used.
A C
For use in type GM-SG switchgear up to 15kV –
type GMSG-EO simple electrical device: D
Several electrically operated devices are available. These

devices have three power carrying terminals (upper or E
lower, depending on the specific application), plus three F
non-power carrying terminals for voltage testing only. The F
device also includes an electrical operator capable of closing
the vacuum interrupter contacts against fault currents equal G
to the short-circuit capacity of the switchgear. As with the
manual devices, the electrical devices are suitable for use in
1,200 A, 2,000 A or 3,000 A (as well as fan-cooled 4,000 A
units) without adapters. The devices are suitable for up to
B
50 kA ratings, and devices suitable for use on equipment
rated 63 kA are also available.
Figure 3 illustrates a section view of a typical electrically
operated ground and test device. This example shows a
device which is intended to ground the upper terminals of a Item Description Item Description
type GM-SG switchgear circuit breaker compartment. A A Upper test ports E Vacuum interrupter
comparable device is available for grounding the lower B Lower test ports
terminals. In either case, the opposite set of terminals is F
Vacuum interrupter
Upper conductive contacts
arranged with “dummy” primaries, adequate for carrying the C
primary
current involved in voltage testing of the equipment, but
G Lower dummy primary
not intended to carry higher currents. D Power connection
Figure 4 shows a front view of the device above. Test ports

for testing for the presence of voltage on the upper
terminals or the lower terminals are shown. These test ports
Figure 4: Type GMSG-EO electrically operated ground and test device:
also allow for conducting phasing tests between the upper use of a hookstick to close and latch the switch on the lower terminal of
and lower terminals. In either case, probes and detection the phase on the left
devices rated for at least the voltages involved must be
used. The photo also shows interlocks necessary for the
correct sequence of operation. All operations of the power-
B
operated closing mechanism to establish the ground on the
system are performed using a remote plugin control cord so F
that grounding operations are conducted by personnel
standing remote from the switchgear section in which the E
device is being used. The photo shows the receptacle on the
A
device to which the remote plugin control cord is attached D
when in use.
Item Description Item Description

A Open/close indicator Stored-energy operator
D
(not visible)
Upper test ports and
B
test port slide E Selector switch
Lower test ports and Remote control cable
C F
test port slide receptacle
4
For use in type GM38 switchgear up to 38kV – type Figure 5: Section view of type GM38T manually operated ground and
GM38T simple manual device: test device
A simple manual device is offered, which has two sets of

terminals (upper and lower) and provisions for use of Side view
grounding cables. The preferred device has NEMA four-hole
pads for bolting cable lugs to the pads, but an alternate
arrangement with ground stirrups is also available. With the B
four-hole pads, the device passes the current withstand tests H
G
of C37.20.6. When equipped with ground stirrups, the
current and duration limits of the cables and ground clamps
(if applicable) used apply. D
A
Figure 5 shows a section view of the manual device. For
illustration purposes, the upper terminals are shown with
NEMA four-hole pads while the lower terminals are shown C
with ground stirrups for use with ground clamps. The front
of the device has padlockable doors over each set of
terminals. The device includes a ground bar on the lower E
front (not shown), that connects to the ground bar in the F
switchgear when the device is inserted into the switchgear.
Vertical barriers are provided between phases, as well as a
horizontal barrier between upper and lower terminals. These
barriers are not removable.
Figure 6 shows a view of the front of the devices, with both
A Padlock angles E Alternate arrangement
doors open to show the upper and lower terminals.
Four-hole pad for cable
This device is available for use with type GM38 metal-clad B F Compartment barrier
connection
switchgear up to 38 kV, with rated short-circuit current up to
Ground stirrup (or bail) G Primary stud
40 kA. The device is suitable for use in 1,200 A, 2,000 A or C
for ground clamp
3,000 A (fan-cooled) circuit breaker cells without adapters.
D Standard arrangement H Primary contact finger
The device is suitable for voltage (dielectric) testing of the
upper terminals or the lower terminals, and also for
checking phasing between the upper and the lower Figure 6: Type GM38T manually operated ground and test device with
terminals. In either case, probes and detection devices rated upper door open
for at least the voltages involved must be used. The user
must provide cables to connect from the device terminals to
ground. A Item Description
Upper door
A
(shown open)
Upper
B
terminals
Lower door
B B B
C (shown
closed)
Lower
D terminals
(behind door)
C Ground bar
for connection
D D D E
of user’s
cables
5
For use in type GM38 switchgear up to 38 kV – Figure 7: Type 38-3AH3-GTD electrical ground and test device (for
type 38-3AH3-GTD simple electrical device: grounding lower terminals)
Two electrically operated devices are available. These

devices have three power carrying terminals (upper Side view
terminals or lower terminals, depending on the specific
application), plus three dummy (non-power carrying)
A B
terminals for voltage testing only. The device also includes
an electrical operator capable of closing the vacuum
interrupter contacts against fault currents equal to the F
short-circuit capacity of the switchgear. As with the manual
devices, the electrical devices are suitable for use in
E
1,200 A, 2,000 A or 3,000 A (fan-cooled) circuit breaker
compartments without adapters. The devices are suitable for
use with type GM38 switchgear rated up to 40 kA.
Figure 7 illustrates a side view of a typical electrically G
operated device. This example shows a device which is
intended to ground the lower terminals of a switchgear C D
circuit breaker compartment. A comparable device is
available for grounding the upper terminals. In either case,
the opposite set of terminals is arranged with “dummy”
primaries, adequate for carrying the current involved in
voltage testing of the equipment, but not intended to carry
higher currents.
A Upper test ports E Vacuum interrupter
Figure 8 shows a front view of the device above. Test ports
for testing for the presence of voltage on the upper B Upper test well F Upper dummy primary
terminals or the lower terminals are shown. These test ports C Lower test ports G Lower conductive primary
also allow for conducting phasing tests between the upper
D Lower test well H Primary contact finger
and lower terminals. The photo also shows interlocks
necessary for the correct sequence of operation. All
operations of the power-operated closing mechanism to
establish the ground on the system are performed using a
remote plugin control cord so that grounding operations are
Figure 8: Type 38-3AH3-GTD electrical ground and test device
conducted by personnel standing remote from the
switchgear section in which the device is being used. The
photo shows the receptacle on the device to which the
remote plugin control cord is attached when in use.
B
F
D
E
A

A Open/close indicator Stored-energy operator
D
(not visible)
Upper test ports and
B
test port slide E Selector switch
Lower test ports and Remote control cable
C F
test port slide receptacle
6
Ground and test devices have a long history of use, dating
back to at least the 1950s. Over the decades of use, the
designs have evolved to include greater functionality,
improved interlocking functions, and increased ratings. The
Siemens devices have also changed to eliminate special
primary disconnect arrangements and adapters for use in
circuit breaker compartments of different ratings.
In addition, the design test requirements for ground and test
devices have evolved, particularly since the introduction of
IEEE C37.20.6. While use of ground and test devices was
rare in the early days, today, ground and test devices are
increasingly specified by users as the best way to apply
temporary grounds to the phase conductors in switchgear in
compliance with OSHA and NFPA 70E requirements, so as to
achieve an electrically safe work condition.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A136-X-4A00
7
TechTopics No. 88
Application of maintenance grounds in switchgear
This issue of TechTopics is one of several on the subject of This involves establishing a ground connection that is
protective grounding in switchgear assemblies. TechTopics capable of carrying the available system fault current for the
No. 87 discussed ground and test devices used in metal-clad duration that upstream protective devices (e.g., circuit
switchgear. This issue of TechTopics discusses other means breakers, fuses or other devices) would allow the fault
of applying safety grounds in switchgear. current to flow.
Temporary personal protective grounds (often called “safety Many steps must occur before the safety grounds are
grounds”) are a very important element of the process of applied. In essence, grounding is the last step in a coherent
creating an electrically safe work condition as defined by process. If the entire process is not followed, including all of
NFPA 70E, the Standard for Electrical Safety in the the first five steps, there is a risk of shutting down a live
Workplace, and as required by the Occupational Safety and system and disrupting the production process, and a
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. significant risk of injury to personnel.
Under the concept of NFPA 70E, achieving an electrically In the application of safety grounds to the electrical system,
safe work condition requires: it is imperative that the user develop comprehensive
1. Identification of all possible energy sources for the operating instructions to implement the requirements of
equipment NFPA 70E. These are needed to avoid unintended shutdown
of the electric system, and to reduce the hazards that the
2. Opening and isolating each of the identified sources operating personnel and others near the equipment may be
3. W
here possible, visually verifying that sources are exposed to.
isolated There are a number of ways that safety grounds can be
4. Applying lockout/tagout devices to all identified sources applied:
5. U
sing appropriate voltage test device to verify absence G
round and test device
of voltage G
rounding switch (earthing switch)
6. A
pplying grounds to the phase conductors before G
round studs, or ground bails, or ground pads.
contacting them.
Let us examine each in turn.
Today, many specifications for switchgear products include
requirements for temporary grounding, with most Ground and test device
specifications calling for ground and test devices, and other Unless used with grounding studs or ground bails, a ground
specifications requiring grounding switches (or as termed in and test device has been tested to carry the rated short-
IEC standards, “earthing switches”), ground studs or similar circuit current of the switchgear for a duration of two
devices. Regardless of the means specified, the intent seconds. See TechTopics No. 87 for a more complete
includes the desire to be able to establish a ground discussion.
condition on the primary conductors, to achieve what NFPA
70E® calls an “electrically safe work condition”.

Grounding switch (earthing switch) Ground studs, ground bails or ground pads
Grounding switches are a popular option in equipment These types of grounding means are very similar, so we will
constructed to IEC standards, principally IEC 62271-102 discuss them as a group. Figure 2 shows an example of
(replacement for IEC 60129), but have generally not been ground studs, both with and without the available
favored in markets based on ANSI/IEEE standards. Figure 1 grounding stud cover. The ground stud shown is probably
shows a grounding switch in switchgear, with the left hand the most commonly used type, usually referred to as a ball-
photo showing the switch in the normal service position stud type. The equipment should be designed to meet the
(not grounded) and the right hand photo showing the equipment dielectric ratings even when any grounding stud
switch in the grounded position. cover on ground studs is removed. Whether ground studs or
The interphase barriers have been removed from the ground bails, the short-circuit capability of the ground stud
grounding switch for the photos of Figure 1. Most often, or ground bail is limited to the capabilities of the grounding
these switches do not have a fault-making capability, cable and/or grounding clamp, whichever is lower.
although fast-acting switches with a making capability are In the case of ground pads, the situation is somewhat
available. If the switch has a making capability, the different. A grounding pad, such as can be supplied in a
minimum capability is two making operations, with an manual ground and test device, is simply a NEMA four-hole
optional extended capability of five making operations. In pad to which multiple cables per phase can be connected.
short, IEC earthing switches have a limited electrical With multiple cables, the short-circuit capability can
endurance. In addition, the available ratings for IEC earthing approach the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear.
switches are often relatively limited. However, with ground pads, when only one cable per phase
A grounding switch, as can be seen, has bare conductors. is used, the same short-circuit limitation applies as with
Therefore, installation of a grounding switch in ANSI/IEEE ground studs or ground bails.
metal-clad switchgear violates one of the principles of What are the limits imposed by cables? These limits are
metal-clad switchgear, that all conductors in the switchgear contained in ASTM F855, “Specifications for Temporary
structure are insulated. The purpose of the insulation is to Grounding Systems to be used on De-energized Electric
decrease the likelihood of faults in the switchgear, Power Lines and Equipment”, and are essentially determined
particularly arcing faults. from the physical limits of the cables themselves. For the
most commonly used grounding cable, a 4/0 cable, the
limitation is 43 kA for 15 cycles. This equates to about
15.2 kA for two seconds, based on simple I-squared-T
comparison. The rated short-time duration in most
switchgear assemblies is two seconds, as is the rated
permissible tripping delay of circuit breakers to ANSI/IEEE
C37.04.
Figure 1: Grounding switch - left in normal (non-grounded) position, Figure 2: Ball-type ground stud - left with cover removed, right with
right in ground position cover in place
2
So, for a typical switchgear assembly rated 40 kA short- Regardless of the system used, the user must have a
circuit, three 4/0 cables per phase would be required to comprehensive process to achieve the level of protection for
achieve 40 kA short-time current capability for two seconds the operator as contemplated by NFPA 70E.
of the grounding path. This is possible only with multiple
cables per phase, which in turn requires ground pads. With
ground studs or ground bails, the most commonly used
ground cable is capable of only a small fraction of the short-
circuit current available on the system.
A significant issue with the use of ground studs, and with
ground clamps, is that the devices must be properly installed
on the equipment to achieve the performance for which the
ground cable and clamp system is capable. A number of
years ago, one of our customers investigated various
grounding clamps and grounding systems in the short-
circuit laboratory, using grounding clamps from a variety of
grounding system vendors. The results made it quite clear
that an excellent clamp/cable system, installed improperly,
would not deliver the performance intended. The information provided in this document contains merely general
When grounding cables and grounding clamps are descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
employed, the user must be sure that the system short-
circuit capacity and fault duration are within the capabilities respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of the grounding cables and ground clamps used, to avoid of contract.
any possibility that a system could become re-energized
with the grounds in place, which could result in the failure All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
of the grounding system to protect the personnel as Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
intended. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
NFPA 70E provides the process to achieve an electrically safe Siemens Industry, Inc.
work condition. A key element of the process is the 7000 Siemens Road
installation of temporary personal protective grounds. Wendell, NC 27591
Siemens recommends that ground and test devices be used
in metal-clad switchgear. We recognize that grounding
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A138-X-4A00
cables and grounding clamps (to ASTM F855) are widely All rights reserved.
used and may be the only option available outside of the © 2012 Siemens Industry, Inc.
switchgear, such as in terminal chambers, manholes, and
similar locations. For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
3
TechTopics No. 89
Venting of exhaust gases from arc-resistant equipment
When an arcing event occurs inside switchgear, the arc The type GM-SG-AR medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear
produces extremely high temperatures, of the order of and type SIMOVAC-AR medium-voltage controllers are
20,000 K at the arc terminals. This high temperature is classified as arc-resistant equipment, and have been tested
sufficient to vaporize materials in the vicinity of the arc, for resistance to internal arcing. They are qualified to carry a
including steel, copper, aluminum, as well as insulating type 2B accessibility rating per IEEE C37.20.7. As shown in
materials. The hot vapor produced by the arcing event equipment instruction manuals, the equipment must be
combines with the oxygen in the air, producing various installed with a plenum system to exhaust any hot gases,
metal-oxides. As these metal-oxides are expelled from the burning particles and other arc byproducts created during
vicinity of the arc, they cool and become minute particles in the unlikely event of an internal arcing fault away from the
the air. These materials appear as black smoke for copper equipment, preferably to the outside environment. Siemens
and iron, and gray smoke for aluminum. These materials recommends this arrangement as it affords an increased
should be considered as hazardous and personnel should level of protection for personnel that may be working in
not be allowed in the area without special filtered breathing proximity to the equipment when an internal arcing fault
apparatus, as well as other appropriate personal protective occurs. Not only does this isolate personnel from the
equipment (PPE). elevated pressures and temperatures associated with the
For these reasons, Siemens strongly recommends that the arcing event, as demonstrated during qualification testing,
gases from an internal arcing event not be exhausted into but it also separates personnel from the hazards associated
an area in which personnel may be present, and further with the potentially toxic gases generated by exhausting the
recommends that gases be exhausted to the outside arcing byproducts away from equipment and out of the
environment and not to the inside of the building or enclosed space of the switchgear or controller room.
enclosure housing the switchgear. Siemens understands that site conditions for a given project
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 states that equipment qualified as arc- may not allow for the installation of the plenum system to
resistant is “... intended to provide an additional degree of the building exterior, and therefore, that the exhaust
protection to the personnel performing normal operating outlet(s) might have to be located inside the building. To
duties in close proximity to the equipment while the maintain the arc-resistant qualification while allowing for
equipment is operating under normal conditions.” It further indoor placement of the plenum exhaust(s), the following
states “Such equipment cannot ensure total personnel conditions must be observed:
protection under all circumstances that may exist at the time 1. A
ny exhaust plenum must extend a minimum length of
of an internal arcing fault.” two (2) meters from the switchgear or motor controller
In any event, the user must take appropriate actions to periphery before exhausting into the room.
protect personnel from the hazards of internal arcing in
electrical equipment.

2. E
ach exhaust plenum outlet must be at least 2.4 meters 5' (1.5 m)
above the floor. The exhaust plenum can exit the
equipment in any direction (either side, front, rear, or
top of the pressure relief channel), but at the exhaust
plenum outlet, the exhaust plenum must be oriented in
the horizontal plane.
3. T
he outlet(s) must exhaust into a restricted access area
that is inaccessible to personnel when the equipment is
energized, and free of flammable and or combustible
materials. This restricted access area shall extend a
minimum of three meters directly in front of the exhaust 10’ (3 m)
outlet and 1.5 meters to each side of the exhaust outlet.
4. V
entilation provisions must be incorporated in the
building design to mitigate the hazards associated with
potentially toxic gases generated as a result of arcing or
its consequences. Such gases may contain vaporized
metals and gases from burning insulation materials.
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 reinforces the restricted area philosophy,
stating “Personnel must not be permitted to be in the area
of the switchgear pressure-relief vents or in areas to which Figure 1: Restricted area required in vicinity of exhaust plenum outlet
exhaust gases are vented.”
Figure 1 shows the configuration of the area in the vicinity
of the exhaust plenum outlet that must be restricted.
Whenever the equipment is energized, the restricted area
must be kept clear of personnel and of combustible or
flammable materials. The restricted area must not be used
for storage of any items.
Figures 2 and 3 illustrate the essential concept of the
pressure relief channel on top of the equipment, and the
exhaust plenum (or duct) that extends away from the
equipment to direct the exhaust gases out and away from
the equipment. In Figure 2, a group of SIMOVAC-AR
medium-voltage controllers is shown, with the exhaust gas
path illustrated. Arcing gases are directed to the top-
mounted pressure relief channel (PRC), and from there to
the exhaust plenum.
In Figure 3, a group of SIMOVAC-AR medium-voltage Figure 2: SIMOVAC-AR exhaust plenum arrangement
controllers (only one section shown) is connected to a group
of type GM-SG-AR medium-voltage metal-clad switchgear
(again, only one section shown). In this example, the arcing
gases are directed to the top-mounted pressure relief
chamber (PRC) on the controller, and the PRC is in turn
connected to the PRC above the metal-clad switchgear, and
a single plenum exhaust duct is used to direct the exhaust
gases out and away from the equipment.
In either event, the exhaust plenum may exit the top, to the
front, to the rear, or to either side of the equipment
assembly for flexibility in adaptation to the user’s building.
The exhaust end of the plenum must be oriented in the
horizontal plane. The exhaust plenum may be of any
reasonable length, but must extend at least two meters
beyond the periphery of the equipment.
Figure 3: SIMOVAC-AR in lineup with GM-SG-AR exhaust plenum

arrangement
2
Siemens highly recommends that the gases generated by an
internal arcing event be exhausted outside of the building or
enclosure that houses the switchgear or motor controllers.
We recognize that building conditions may not allow for
exhaust outside of the building. In such cases, the user may
not have any choice but to exhaust into the building,
whether into the equipment room or into another area
inside the building. In any event, the user must take
appropriate actions to protect personnel from the hazards of
internal arcing in electrical equipment, including protection
of personnel from the hazards associated with the gases and
other byproducts exhausted during an arcing event.

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A140-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 90
Temperature ratings for external cables
One of the issues that is addressed in the standards for Low-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear
switchgear and controllers is that of coordination of the The standard for this equipment is IEEE Std C37.20.1. The
temperatures in switchgear or controller equipment with requirements are equivalent to those in C37.20.2 and
those of the user’s power cables used for incoming and C37.20.3. However, as will be discussed, National Electric
outgoing power connections. The temperatures obtained in Code® (NEC®) treats them differently.
the switchgear or controller must not cause heating in cables
Medium-voltage controllers
that stress them beyond their ratings, nor can the cables
For medium-voltage controllers, the applicable standard is
cause heating problems in the switchgear or controller.
UL 347 (fifth edition), which has replaced the historic ICS-2
The temperature limitations in switchgear assemblies and standard for motor controllers. Table 2 of this standard
medium-voltage controllers are based on the use of cables allows a temperature rise of 50 °C at the terminals to which
with insulation rated for 90 °C. The actual language of the the user’s cables are connected, and a total temperature of
standards varies according to the type of equipment, but the 90 °C when the exterior ambient upper limit of 40 °C is
intent is essentially the same. considered. As with switchgear assemblies, this is predicated
on the use of insulated power cables rated for 90 °C use. The
Metal-clad switchgear and metal-enclosed interrupter
UL standard adds a bit more explanation as “The temperature
switchgear
on a wiring terminal or lug is measured at the point most
For switchgear assemblies constructed to IEEE Std C37.20.2
likely to be contacted by the insulation of a conductor
(metal-clad switchgear) and IEEE Std C37.20.3 (metal-
installed as in actual service.”
enclosed interrupter switchgear), the allowable temperature
rise at the terminals to which user’s cables are connected is From this, it is very clear that the requirements of the
45 °C over a 40 °C ambient outside the enclosure (reference, switchgear assemblies standards and the medium-voltage
IEEE Std C37.20.2 table 3, for connections that are silver- or controllers standard are synchronized with the use of 90 °C
tin-surfaced). The table adds a footnote that these insulated power cables.
temperature limits are based on 90 °C insulated cable. Clause
5.5.5 of the standard elaborates and says
“This temperature limitation is based on the use of 90 °C
insulated power cables. Use of lower temperature rated
cables requires special consideration.”
For metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear (IEEE Std

C37.20.3), the language differs editorially, but the functional
requirement is the same as for metal-clad switchgear.
Answers for infrastructure and cities.

National Electrical Code (NEC ®) considerations Lower cable temperature ratings – 75 °C
The NEC considers the temperature rating of terminals for A reverse situation applies if the user’s cables have a rated
connection to external cables somewhat differently. For low- temperature of 75 °C. In this situation, if the circuit is loaded
voltage equipment, NEC 110.14(C)(1)(b)(2) indicates that to the full continuous current rating of the switchgear feeder
conductors with temperature ratings higher than 75 °C can circuit breaker unit, the terminations in the switchgear will
be used, but ampacity must be in accordance with the 75 °C be at 45 °C temperature rise, and total temperature suitable
ampacities shown in table 310.15(B)(16). Since switchgear for 90 °C cables but too hot for 75 °C cable insulation. The
in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1 is tested based on the use temperature rise of the cable terminal mounting pad for the
of 90 °C insulated power cables, the user should be able to external cable terminal lugs would need to be reduced so
take advantage of the higher ampacity of the 90 °C cables as that the temperature rating of the cable insulation (75 °C) is
compared to 75 °C ampacities. However, the user is not exceeded. As discussed in the preceding section, this is a
encouraged to seek agreement to this from the Authority situation in which loading at a fraction of the switchgear
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), as some inspection authorities rating is very helpful. In the 900 A load/1,200 A circuit
insist on 75 °C ampacities. breaker example, the temperature rise of the terminal pads is
reduced from 45 °C to about 25 °C, and this 20 °C reduction
For medium-voltage, the NEC is somewhat more certain. NEC
brings the temperature of the cable terminal mounting pad
110.40 says that the user’s power cables shall be permitted
down to the temperature rating (75 °C) of the cable
to use the 90 °C temperature rating and ampacity as given in
insulation.
tables 310.60(C)(67) through 310.60(C)(86), as applicable
to the particular cable. It appears that few, if any, power cable manufacturers still
offer 75 °C rated cables, so this situation is not very typical of
Excerpts from the NEC articles 110.14 and 110.40 at
modern installations.
provided at the end of this issue of TechTopics.
Summary
Higher cable temperature ratings – 105 °C
All of this discussion has considered only the temperatures in
It is recognized that some newer cable types are rated for
the switchgear and the temperatures of the cables and the
105 °C insulation temperature. Such cables should be used at
cable insulation. However, there is another factor that is
their 105 °C ampacities only with considerable caution. If a
involved in any real situation, and that is the consideration of
circuit has a full-load capability that is lower than the rating
voltage drop in the system. While higher temperature ratings
of the switchgear feeder circuit breaker that serves the
on cables allow for heavier loading on cables, they result in
feeder, then the temperature rise of the switchgear will be
greater voltage drop in the conductors. Voltage drop and
lower than the standard limit, and additional heat given off
power quality issues are assuming greater importance, and
by the cables will likely not be deleterious.
this often results in the need to increase the size of cables to
For example, if a circuit breaker feeder rated 1,200 A is reduce voltage drop.
feeding a cable circuit with a full load requirement of 900 A
In sum, medium-voltage switchgear assemblies and medium-
(75 percent), then the temperature rise of the cable terminal
voltage controllers are designed and tested for use with
mounting pad, normally 45 °C, is reduced to about 25 °C
power cables having a 90 °C temperature rating. The user is
(0.75 x 0.75 x 45 = 25 °C). In this situation, the additional
encouraged to consult with the local AHJ to determine if the
heat of “hot” cables would not be an issue.
ampacities of 90 °C cable can be utilized. Care should be
However, consider the same 1,200 A feeder, supplying a exercised if the user intends to use class 105 °C cables at the
cable circuit with a full-load current of 1,200 A. In this case, 105 °C ampacities.
the cable terminal mounting pad should be considered to be
at 45 °C temperature rise, but the cable would not be at
90 °C – instead, the cable would be at 105 °C. In this
condition, heat would be conveyed into the switchgear from
the “hot” cables, and the performance (and life expectancy)
of the switchgear could be adversely affected.
2
Excerpts from NEC:
“110.14 Electrical Connections…
( 1) Equipment Provisions. The determination of

termination provisions of equipment shall be based on
110.14(C)(1)(a) or (C)(1)(b). Unless the equipment is
listed and marked otherwise, conductor ampacities used
in determining equipment termination provisions shall
be based on Table 310.15(B)(16) as appropriately
modified by 310.15(B)(6).
…
110.14(C)(1)
( b) Termination provisions of equipment for circuits

rated over 100 amperes, or marked for conductors larger
than 1 AWG, shall be used only for one of the following:
(1) Conductors rated 75 °C (167 °F) The information provided in this document contains merely general
( 2) Conductors with higher temperature ratings, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
provided the ampacity of such conductors does not
exceed the 75 °C (167 °F) ampacity of the conductor size of contract.
used, or up to their ampacity if the equipment is listed
and identified for use with such conductors All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
10.40 Temperature Limitations at Terminations.

1 Siemens Industry, Inc.
Conductors shall be permitted to be terminated based on 7000 Siemens Road
the 90 °C (194 °F) temperature rating and ampacity as Wendell, NC 27591
given in Table 310.60(C)(67) through Table 310.60(C)
(86), unless otherwise identified.” Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A146-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 91
Current transformer relaying accuracies – IEEE compared to IEC
In today’s business atmosphere, we can no longer consider This discussion will deal primarily with current transformers
only the current transformer standard common in the U.S., having a rated secondary current of 5 A. A supplementary
principally the IEEE C57.13 standard for instrument discussion of current transformers with rated secondary
transformers. Many multi-national firms now wish to design current of 1 A is also included.
facilities that can be constructed in any geographic area, not
simply in the U.S. or Canada. Outside North America, the IEEE C57.13 CT relaying accuracy classes
most common standards for current transformers are the IEEE defines two fundamental relaying accuracy
IEC 61869-1 and 61869-2 standards (replacement for the designations, one headed by a “C” and the other by a “T”
old IEC 60044-series), the first specifying common designator. The C and T leading designators signify the type
characteristics for instrument transformers, and the second of construction of the current transformers.
specifying characteristics pertinent to current transformers. The C designator applies to a current transformer which has
The IEEE and IEC standards developed independently, and fully distributed secondary windings, and in which the
the resulting standards are quite different. However, the leakage reactance (or, leakage flux in the core) is very low.
fundamental physics underlying current transformers are In turn, this means that the relaying accuracy can be
the same. This issue of TechTopics discusses the relaying or calculated (hence, “C”). Essentially, C relaying accuracy class
protection accuracy classifications of current transformers to applies to a current transformer of the toroidal, bushing or
the two differing standards’ philosophies, and provides an window type, commonly called donut-type transformers.
example of the accuracy of one particular current Another type of current transformer which falls into the C
transformer to both of the standards. class is a bar-type current transformer, where the primary
conductor passes through the current transformer window
A word of caution: The discussion is highly simplified so as but there is only one primary turn in the transformer.
to illustrate the basic principles.
The T designator applies to a current transformer in which
Metering accuracy will not be addressed in this discussion. there is a high leakage reactance that impacts the relaying
Historically, separate current transformers were often accuracy, so that the accuracy must be determined by test
specified for metering purposes and for protection (relaying) (hence, “T”). These types of transformers are commonly
purposes, but this is seldom required with modern called wound-type CTs, and have multiple primary turns.
switchgear. Current transformers with relaying accuracy as Wound-type CTs are typically applicable only for very low
well as excellent metering accuracy can generally serve both ratios, and these current transformers have very limited
purposes. short-circuit strength. As a result, they are rarely used in
modern metal-clad switchgear.

Since T class accuracy CTs are seldom used today, these will The relaying accuracy class of a donut-type current
not be discussed further, except to say that the fundamental transformer can be determined from the secondary
meaning of the accuracy class is similar to that of a C class excitation curve for the current transformer, available from
CT. the manufacturer. An example of a secondary excitation
curve for one of our current transformer families is shown in
IEEE C57.13 C-class relaying accuracy calculation Figure 1. This curve will be used in the example calculation
The most common relaying accuracy class for current of the CT relaying accuracy.
transformers is the C designation, which requires a
maximum limit of ratio error at 20 times rated primary Figure 1: Secondary excitation curve example
current of 10 percent. The C designation is followed by a
number, which is a secondary terminal voltage that the CT ,
will support while meeting the error limit (≤ 10 percent) at
,
20 times rated primary current. In turn, the common ,
,
,
secondary terminal voltage classes have a direct link to the
allowable secondary circuit burden on the CT. The common
generic accuracy classes in the standard, with the associated
secondary burdens, are as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: IEEE C57.13 relaying accuracy classes and burden data
Secondary Secondary Total

Resis- Induc-
terminal burden Imped- power
tance tance
voltage designa- ance (Ω) (VA at
(Ω) (mH)
(V) tion 5 A)
10 B-0.1 0.09 0.116 0.1 2.5
20 B-0.2 0.18 0.232 0.2 5.0
50 B-0.5 0.45 0.580 0.5 12.5 Secondary exciting current 60 Hz
100 B-1.0 0.50 2.30 1.0 25.0 61-300-148-xxx
200 B-2.0 1.00 4.60 2.0 50.0

400 B-4.0 2.00 9.20 4.0 100.0
800 B-8.0 4.00 18.40 8.0 200.0
As an example, consider a 1,200:5 ratio current transformer,
as shown in the curve. For a limit of error current of 10
percent with 20 times rated current flowing, the error current
It will be seen that, with the standard rated secondary upper limit would be 10% x 5 A x 20 = 10 A. At 10 A
current of 5 A, the short-circuit current of 20 times current secondary excitation current, the voltage from the curve
would be 100 A, which when multiplied by the burden would be about 340 V. For the 1,200:5 ratio, the secondary
impedance in the table, results in the secondary terminal winding resistance is 0.418 Ω, so the voltage “lost” in the CT
voltage shown. For example, with 20 times rated current itself due to a secondary current of 100 A would be 0.418 x
flowing in a B-4.0 burden, if the accuracy limit is met, the 100 = 41.8 V. So, the relaying accuracy class of this CT would
secondary terminal voltage would be 400 V and the CT be 340 – 41.8 ~ 298 V. For conservatism, this unit would be
accuracy class is C400. rated at 280 V, or C280. With the discrete classes in the
standard, this would be a C200 current transformer.
In the case of multi-ratio current transformers, the accuracy
limits are always based on the full winding of the current One aspect that this illustrates is that practical units do not
transformer, i.e., the highest available tap. For a lower tap fall neatly into the accuracy classes in the standards (C100,
ratio, the accuracy is determined from the full winding- C200, C400, and so on). In reality, the values seldom just
accuracy rating, multiplied by the ratio of the selected tap to barely fall into a class such as C100. The secondary terminal
the full winding ratio. Hence, for a C400 current transformer voltage usually falls above one class rating but not up to the
with 1200:5 full winding ratio, the accuracy at the 50 next class rating. The user can benefit from having more
percent tap ratio (600:5 for this example) would be C400 information about the capabilities of the CT than is provided
times 0.50 = C200. by the discrete classes in the standard. This is why Siemens
publishes relaying accuracies for current transformers used in
our metal-clad switchgear using the actual accuracy class
voltage, in this case, C280 rather than merely C200.
2
IEC 61869-2 protection (relaying) accuracy classes T
he final element of the IEC designation is the ALF. A
The classification scheme of IEC 61869-2 is substantially designation of 10 indicates that the accuracy limit applies
different from that of IEEE C57.13, but since the underlying at 10 times rated current.
physics are the same, the two systems are able to be
If these concepts are now converted to the terms used in
correlated, at least in part.
IEEE, the following is seen:
In IEC, the current transformer class of interest to this
T
he rated output is equivalent to specifying the secondary
discussion is the class P protective current transformer. The
burden. The output power is the square of the rated
rated output classes in IEC are 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30, where
current times the burden in ohms (Ω), or for rated current
the number represents the load output in VA at rated
of 5 A, 25 times the burden.
secondary current. The preferred accuracy classes are 5P (5
percent maximum error) and 10P (10 percent maximum F
or an IEEE C57.13 current transformer, the allowable error
error). Lastly, IEC has an accuracy limit factor (ALF), which is always 10 percent. However, in IEEE, the secondary
indicates the multiples of rated secondary current at which burden has a 60-degree impedance angle, whereas in IEC
the accuracy class applies. The typical value of the ALF is 10, the secondary burden is purely resistive. As a consequence,
with values of 20 and 30 also available. So, the complete an IEEE current transformer with a limiting error of 10
accuracy specification for a particular current transformer percent with the IEEE burden will have a limiting error of 5
might be 20 VA class 5P10, to signify a transformer with less percent with the IEC resistive burden. Therefore, in IEC
than 5 percent error at 10 times rated current, with a load terms, the accuracy is a 5P class rather than 10P.
output of 20 VA.
F
or an IEEE C57.13 current transformer, the ALF is always
IEC discusses the excitation characteristic and defines it as the 20.
“ ...graphical or tabular presentation of the relationship Now, the IEEE C57.13 relaying accuracy classes and burden
between the rms value of the exciting current and a data presented in Table 1 earlier in this issue is reviewed, and
sinusoidal voltage applied to the secondary terminals of the secondary terminal voltage column along with the
a current transformer, the primary and other windings impedance column is extracted, the equivalent IEC accuracies
being open-circuited, over a range of values sufficient to corresponding to the IEEE accuracy classes can be constructed
define the characteristics from low levels of excitation up in Table 2.
to 1.1 times the knee point emf.”
Table 2: IEC protective accuracy vs. IEEE relay accuracy (for 5 A CTs)
This is essentially the same manner as a secondary excitation
curve is obtained for transformers to IEEE C57.13. In addition Equivalent
Secondary Secondary
to defining the excitation characteristic in this manner, this is Impedance IEEE relay IEC
terminal burden
how current transformers with low-leakage reactance are (Ω) accuracy protective
voltage (V) designation
accuracy
tested for accuracy in IEC. The manner of testing to IEEE
standards is essentially the same. So, the secondary terminal 2.5VA –
10 B-0.1 0.1 C10
voltage is obtained in tests of both IEEE and IEC transformers 5P20
in essentially the same manner. 20 B-0.2 0.2 C20
5.0VA –
5P20
But, how is some equivalence or correspondence between 12.5VA –
accuracy requirements to IEC and to IEEE determined? 50 B-0.5 0.5 C50
5P20
First, the components of the IEC accuracy designations have 25VA –

100 B-1.0 1.0 C100
5P20
to be understood.
50VA –
200 B-2.0 2.0 C200
T
he first element of the IEC designation is the rated output. 5P20
T
he second element of the IEC designation (the value in 100VA –
400 B-4.0 4.0 C400
5P20
front of the P) is easy to understand. 5 designates 5
percent allowable error, whereas 10 designates 10 percent 200VA –
800 B-8.0 8.0 C800
allowable error. 5P20
3
What we also see is that the rated output in IEC is equal to the The secondary terminal voltage is determined at 20 times
VA calculated for IEEE C57.13 current transformers, as shown rated secondary current, or 20 A for a CT with 1 A secondary.
in the last column of the Table 1 in this issue of TechTopics. An error current of 10 percent would thus be 2 A. The voltage
from the curve at 2 A excitation current is about 570 V. The
1 A CTs as compared to 5 A CTs secondary resistance of the CT is 3.92 Ω. The voltage “lost” in
How is this altered for a current transformer with 1 A rated the CT itself is 20 A x 3.92 Ω ~ 79 V. Therefore, the accuracy
secondary current instead of 5 A? In this case, the secondary class of this current transformer is 570 – 79 = 491; for
burden is increased by a factor of (I5/I1)2 = (5/1)2 = 25 from conservatism, we rate this current transformer at C400 relay
those in the table earlier in this issue of TechTopics. So, for accuracy. The secondary burden for a 1 A current transformer
example, a C100 current transformer with 5 A secondary is with C400 relaying accuracy would be 4 Ω x (5 A/1 A)2 =
rated on the basis of a 1 Ω secondary burden, whereas a 100 Ω.
C100 current transformer with 1 A secondary would be rated
on the basis of a 25 Ω secondary burden. The VA output in This illustrates that the relay accuracy number for current
either case is I2 x burden, or 25 VA for this example. transformers with 1 A secondary is rather significantly
different from that of a similar current transformer with 5 A
The change of rated secondary current also changes the secondary.
calculation of the C relay accuracy. Consider the 500:1 CT in
the secondary excitation curve shown in Figure 2.
makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
Figure 2: Secondary excitation curve example
projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
, applicability through an independent qualified professional.

,
of contract.
Secondary voltage 60 Hz


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A149-X-4A00

61-300-119-xxx Secondary exciting current 60 Hz 4
TechTopics No. 92
Heat generation estimation for SIMOVAC non-arc-resistant and
SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant medium-voltage controllers
Siemens is often asked to provide estimated heat generation For the main bus, the data assumes operation at full-rated
data for our equipment. This issue of TechTopics provides continuous current.
information that allows calculation of approximate heat
generated by the SIMOVAC non-arc-resistant and
conditions, determine the component heat generation for
SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant medium-voltage controller
each of the components indicated in the table, with
equipment under assumed loading conditions.
adjustments if necessary for differing currents. For simplicity,
The heat generation data given in the table for motor assume that main bus loading in each vertical section is
controllers is on the basis of operation at 1.0 service factor, equal to the total estimated load of the controller lineup, and
and assumes that each controller includes a 0.75 kVA control adjust the heat generated for each vertical section by the
power transformer that is only lightly loaded when the motor square of the percentage of total estimated load to rated
is running. The current value for motor controllers is the main bus current. Space heater load should be assumed to
current typical for a machine using the fuse size shown. be continuous.
For transformer feeders with class E fuses installed in series
with a class E controller, it is assumed that the continuous
current in amperes is in the range of 70 percent to 80
percent of the E-rating of the fuse. For load-interrupter
switches (LIS) with fuses, fuse current is also assumed to be
in the range of 70 percent to 80 percent of the fuse E-rating.
As with motor controllers, the current used is considered
representative of the current for a transformer protected by
the fuse size shown.
For applications which differ from these assumptions,
convert the heat generation shown for the typical currents to
that for the specific application by the ratio of the squares of
the currents.

Approximate heat generation (in watts) for SIMOVAC non-arc- Approximate heat generation (in watts) for SIMOVAC non-arc-
resistant and SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant medium-voltage controllers resistant and SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant medium-voltage controllers
Full-voltage Component FVNR
Fuse size Typical FLA1
Typical full- non-reversing size FVR
Component
Fuse size load amperes (FVNR)
size 38R 490 A 758 W
(FLA)1 Full-voltage
reversing (FVR) 48X 600 A 956 W
2R 27 A 43 W 57X 689 A 1,247 W

Contactor 720 A
3R 40 A 57 W 450E 348 A 503 W
4R 60 A 88 W 600E 451 A 724 W
6R 83 A 118 A 750E 520 A 956 W
9R 121 A 181 W Component FVNR

Fuse size Current
size FVR
12R 151 A 228 W
450E 348 A 439 W
18R 241 A 451 W LIS switch 600 A
600E 451 A 586 W
24R 343 A 692 W
LIS switch 750E 520 A 650 W
15E 11 A 22 W
1,200 A 900E 630 A 1,015 W
20E 14 A 24 W
FVNR
25E 18 A 27 W Component size Rated current
FVR
30E 21 A 30 W
1,200 A 188 W
40E 28 A 43 W
Contactor 400 A 2,000 A 206 W
50E 35 A 46 W Vertical section with main bus
3,000 A 250 W
65E 46 A 59 W
4,000 A 413 W
80E 56 A 70 W
FVNR
Component size
100E 72 A 87 W FVR
125E 88 A 104 W Space heaters per vertical section 200 W
150E 105 A 120 W Voltage transformers (VTs) (set of three, including
50 W
isolation switch)
175E 130 A 167 W
200E 140 A 186 W
250E 180 A 254 W Conversion factor: Watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.
300E 225 A 354 W Footnote:
350E 263 A 448 W
1
S
ee text for assumptions used for typical current. For motors, typical
current is that for a machine typically protected by the size of fuse
400E 300 A 562 W
shown. For transformers, current is in the range of 70 percent to 80
450E 348 A 659 W percent of the fuse E-rating, with specific value considered typical
for a transformer protected by the fuse size shown.
2
As an example of the method of calculation, consider a
lineup of controllers with six vertical sections, with the
components shown in this table.
Component Quantity Watts/component Total

Vertical section with 3,000 A main bus, with total loading 2,200 A 6 220 x (2,200/3,000)2 = 108 W 648 W
Controllers 400 A with 12R fuses 3 228 W 684 W
Controller 400 A with 24R fuses 1 692 W 692 W
Controllers 400 A with 250E fuses 2 254 W 508 W
Controller 720 A with 57X fuses 1 1,247 W 1,247 W
600 A LIS with 450E fuses 1 439 W 439 W
Space heaters 6 200 W 1,200 W
VTs, one set of three 1 50 W 50 W
Total heat generation for assembly 5,468 W
TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens Siemens Industry, Inc.
makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer 7000 Siemens Road
projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’ Wendell, NC 27591
use this information in field operations consult with or verify its Subject to change without prior notice.
applicability through an independent qualified professional. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A179-X-4A00
The information provided in this document contains merely general © 2013 Siemens Industry, Inc.
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
of contract.

3
TechTopics No. 93
Capacitor switching performance classes
The requirements for capacitance current switching for With respect to capacitance current switching, restrike
circuit breakers have been expanded significantly in the IEEE performance is the expected probability of restrike during
Standards. Amendments to the basic circuit breaker interruption of capacitance current. The concept of the
standard, IEEE C37.04-1999 and the test standard, IEEE probability of restrike was introduced to recognize that a
C37.09-1999 were approved to modernize the capacitor “restrike-free” circuit breaker is practically impossible, as it
switching requirements and tests. These amendments are would require an infinite number of capacitor switching
C37.04a-2003 and C37.09a-2005. These amendments interruptions to demonstrate that a restrike will never
harmonize the requirements for capacitance current happen.
switching with those of IEC. They also provide more rigorous
Restrike performance for classes C2, C1, and C0:
requirements for demonstrating capacitance current
switching capabilities. lass C2: No restrikes occur during the test series. If a
C
single restrike occurs, the entire test series must be
The amendments to C37.04 and C37.09 introduce new
repeated with no restrikes on the second set of tests.
classifications of circuit breakers, and also a bit of confusion
between the two standards. The classifications for lass C1: Up to one restrike may occur during the test
C
capacitance current switching circuit breakers shown in the series. If more than one restrike occurs, then the entire
standards are: test series must be repeated with no more than one
restrike on the second set of tests.
lass C1: A circuit breaker with low probability of restrike.
C
lass C0: If tested for capacitance current switching
C
lass C2: A circuit breaker with very low probability of
C
capability, one restrike per interruption is allowed.
restrike.
The design of the tests for Class C2 results in a circuit breaker
lass C0: A circuit breaker with an unspecified probability
C
with a likelihood of restrike that is about 10 percent of the
of restrike.
likelihood with a Class C1 circuit breaker. A Class C0 circuit
C37.04a does not discuss a Class C0 (nor does the breaker, on the other hand, could have a 100 percent
application guide, C37.012-2005), whereas C37.09a does. likelihood of restrike on each interruption, so this is not a
This reflects evolution of thinking on the subject within the class of circuit breaker that the user would want to apply for
standards working groups. As discussed later in this issue, capacitor bank switching.
Class C0 is somewhat meaningless, and it is likely that it will
be eliminated in the present revision efforts on C37.04 and
C37.09. The Class C0 designation was intended to represent
the historic “general purpose” circuit breaker that was
discussed in earlier standards, for which no capacitance
current switching tests were necessary.

In this issue of TechTopics, the most severe capacitance Note in the required tests indicated above, 80 percent of the
current switching tests will be focused on - those for isolated BC2 tests (50 percent of the BC1 tests) must be tests with
bank and/or back-to-back bank switching (BC). Other tests, minimum arcing time. The standards focus on minimum
for line-charging (LC) and cable-charging (CC) applications, arcing time as this is the most severe case for the circuit
are less severe, but have somewhat similar test breaker. Minimum arcing time is obtained when the contacts
considerations as for the BC tests. Tests conducted in three- part immediately prior to a current zero. When this happens,
phase laboratory test arrangements, rather than those for the contact gap is very small, but the system voltage is at a
single-phase testing, will also be focused on. maximum, so that the stress on the very small contact gap is
most severe, and hence, the likelihood of a restrike following
The BC1 test series is performed with a current in the range
the interruption of the current is much greater. This focus in
of 10-40 percent of the capacitance current switching rating
essence multiplies the “value” of the tests. If random
of the circuit breaker, and requires 24 opening operations (or
switching were used, only a few tests would take place with
close-open operations at manufacturer’s option). The test
the most severe minimum arcing time. By focusing on
series including the following required operations:
minimum arcing time, the test series simulates the severity
our opening operations, at various contact part times,
F that a much greater number of operations with random
distributed approximately at 15 degree intervals, on each contact part times would impose on the circuit breaker.
polarity.
For Class C2 and Class C1, the description above is greatly
ix opening operations, at minimum arcing time, on each
S simplified. The standard allows additional restrikes during a
polarity. test series, provided that certain sequences of tests are
repeated under conditions established in the standard. Since
dditional opening operations, with contact part time
A
these situations are confusing, we have chosen to use the
distributed at various times, so as to bring the total
simplified requirements shown above. The reader is referred
number of opening operations to at least 24.
to the text of IEEE C37.09a-2005 if further detail is desired.
The BC2 test series is performed with a current of at least
100 percent of the capacitance current switching rating of
the circuit breaker, and requires 80 close-open operations,
with the test series including the following required
operations:
our close-open operations, at various contact part
F
times, distributed approximately at 15 degree intervals,
on each polarity. makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
2 close-open operations, at minimum arcing time, on
3 projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
each polarity.
dditional close-open operations, with contact part time
A applicability through an independent qualified professional.
distributed at various times, so as to bring the total
number of opening operations to at least 80.
Thus, for the combined BC1 and BC2 tests, a total of at least use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
104 tests (three-phase) are required to demonstrate the further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
Class C2 capability. If more tests are required in order to
of contract.
obtain the required number of minimum arcing time tests
(12 in BC1, and 64 in BC2), then the total number of tests All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
would exceed 104. Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
In both the BC1 and BC2 test series, the minimum arcing
times shall all occur on the same phase. The minimum arcing Siemens Industry, Inc.
time is determined by changing the instant of contact part in 7000 Siemens Road
increments of 0.3 ms until the minimum arcing time is Wendell, NC 27591
obtained. The minimum arcing time is that time, for which
changing the contact part time by one more increment of Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A171-X-4A00
0.3 ms changes the interruption from minimum arcing time
to maximum arcing time. © 2013 Siemens Industry, Inc.
2
TechTopics No. 94
Circuit breaker interlocking and operating requirements
When manufacturers and specifiers discuss circuit breaker If the trip circuit uses circuit breaker auxiliary switch
operational and interlocking requirements, several terms are contacts (52a contacts, closed when the circuit breaker
used repeatedly. Despite the common use of these terms, it is closed) or other equivalent contacts, the trip coil of
seems clear that many persons do not understand what the circuit breaker cannot be energized until these
these terms imply or require. This issue of TechTopics is contacts in the trip circuit are made. Therefore, the
intended to discuss several of the frequently used but often circuit breaker main contacts are permitted to close or
misunderstood terms. touch momentarily before opening.
First, the terms that apply to all medium-voltage circuit If the tripping command is initiated mechanically
breakers will be discussed, whether stationary mounted (as (manually) and held in the actuated position before a
in outdoor distribution type circuit breakers) or drawout closing signal (whether electrical or mechanical) is
mounted (as in metal-clad switchgear). applied, the circuit breaker main contacts are not
permitted to close, even momentarily. If the
Trip-free
mechanism design requires, the circuit breaker may
IEEE C37.04 for medium-voltage circuit breakers requires
discharge stored energy but the main contacts are not
that they be trip-free, which is a condition in which the
permitted to move more that 10 percent of the open
mechanism is designed such that the tripping or opening
gap distance. The dielectric withstand capability of the
function takes precedence over the closing function. The
open gap shall not be reduced, and the main contacts
requirements as elaborated in the standard are:
shall assume the fully open position.
If a closing operation is in progress, and a tripping signal
Trip-free is a requirement of all medium-voltage circuit
(either mechanical or electrical) is received, the circuit
breakers, whether stationary mounted or drawout mounted.
breaker shall react as follows:
Trip-free is an important safety feature, as it assures that the
If the closing signal and the tripping signal are initiated
decision to open a circuit breaker dominates over the
simultaneously, the circuit breaker contacts are
command to close. Further, and probably most important, if
permitted to close or touch momentarily before
there were no trip-free functional requirement, it would not
opening.
be possible to lock a circuit breaker open (fundamental to
If the closing signal is initiated before the tripping lockout-tagout procedures) when performing maintenance.
signal is initiated, the circuit breaker contacts are
permitted to close or touch momentarily before
opening.

Anti-pump Drawout circuit breaker interlocks
IEEE C37.11 for circuit breaker control circuits requires the Drawout circuit breakers must have interlocks for the
anti-pump function. This requires that when an electrical following:
closing command is issued, only a single closing operation
o prevent moving the circuit breaker between the TEST
T
results. This is normally accomplished by incorporating an
position and the CONNECTED position while the circuit
anti-pump relay in the close circuit. The anti-pump relay is
breaker is closed.
energized at the same time that the close signal is applied.
The anti-pump relay is connected so that it seals in as long as o prevent closing of the circuit breaker while the circuit
T
the close signal is maintained. The anti-pump relay, when breaker is at a position between the TEST position and the
sealed in, opens a contact in the close circuit. CONNECTED position.
Thus, the circuit breaker closes, but if the close signal is o positively secure the circuit breaker in the TEST
T
maintained, the close circuit has an open contact in the position and in the CONNECTED position, as well as in the
circuit, preventing further close operations as long as the DISCONNECTED position. While this requirement applies
close signal is maintained. to the three defined positions, most modern designs
positively secure the circuit breaker both in these three
The anti-pump function is a very important feature of control
positions, and also between these positions.
circuits. Without the anti-pump function, if the user
connected a maintained contact in the close circuit, and the he mechanism must prevent closing of the circuit
T
circuit breaker were closed into a fault current, the protective breaker unless the mechanism has full energy (stored
relays would cause an immediate trip action, but the energy) to complete the closing operation. This applies
maintained contact in the close circuit would initiate closing whether the energy stored is in a spring system, or is in a
(again) into the fault. This process is called “pumping”, and magnetic actuator type of operating mechanism.
would lead to ultimate catastrophic failure of some element
he mechanism shall provide protection against
T
in the system, perhaps the conductors leading to the fault,
accidental discharge of stored energy during maintenance
perhaps the circuit breaker, or elsewhere in the system.
activities. This may be accomplished in any of several
Therefore, anti-pump is one of the fundamental
ways:
requirements for every medium-voltage circuit breaker.
he mechanism may be designed to prevent
T
Note that the anti-pump function is reset if the control power
withdrawal of the circuit breaker from the circuit
supply is removed for some reason. When this happens, the
breaker compartment with the stored-energy (spring)
anti-pump relay contact in the close circuit closes to
mechanism charged. Typically, with a design of this
complete the close circuit. Then, if a maintained contact in
type, the user must initiate a closing operation
the user’s control circuit is closed, and the control power is
manually in the DISCONNECT position in the circuit
restored, the circuit breaker will close. However, after this
breaker cell (as control power is not connected in the
initial close operation, the anti-pump relay will be sealed in,
disconnect position), followed by a manual trip
and further closing operations will be prevented until the
operation to open the circuit breaker. This discharges
maintained contact is opened or the control power supply is
the closing energy prior to withdrawing the circuit
interrupted.
breaker from the circuit breaker compartment.
This illustrates that a maintained contact should never be
he mechanism may be designed such that closing
T
used in a close circuit.
cannot be performed when the circuit breaker is
removed from the circuit breaker compartment. This is
usually described as a “blocked closing” condition.
he mechanism may be designed such that, before the
T
circuit breaker is removed from the compartment, the
closing energy is automatically discharged from the
stored-energy mechanism.
2
This latter item is most commonly referred to as the “spring
dump” function. Of the three allowable methods of
preventing accidental discharge of stored-energy (prevent
withdrawal, block closing, and spring dump), only the last
(spring dump) is automatic. The others require that the
operator either perform actions in a particular sequence (for
the prevent withdrawal type), or apply special tools or
procedures when performing maintenance (for the block
closing type).
The other interlocks required for drawout type circuit
breakers are relatively simple to understand, so are not
discussed in detail. TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
We hope this discussion of the interlocks required for circuit projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
breakers is useful. For those wishing further knowledge, the use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
reader should consult the relevant standards, including: use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
applicability through an independent qualified professional.
IEEE C37.04-1999, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-
Voltage Circuit Breakers (clause 6.9). The information provided in this document contains merely general
IEEE C37.11-1997, Standard Requirements for Electrical use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
Control for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
Symmetrical Current Basis (clause 3). respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
IEEE C37.20.2-1999, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear
(clause 7.10). All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
It should be noted that all three of these standards are in the
process of revision, and the next edition of C37.11 is
expected to be approved by the IEEE-SA Standards Board in Siemens Industry, Inc.
2013. Thus, the reader should always consult the latest 7000 Siemens Road
approved revision of any standard. Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A172-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 95
Tie circuit breakers and out-of-phase applications
The application of circuit breakers in a bus-tie configuration The insulation (dielectric) structure of the circuit breaker is
is common in any large electrical installation, whether at low designed on the same basis, that the maximum continuous
voltages (e.g., 480 volts) or at medium-voltage levels (2,400 voltage from line side to load side of an open circuit breaker
volts and above). This application is so common that many will be equal to the phase-ground voltage. The dielectric-
specifying engineers do not think about the application system design for circuit breakers is intended to be free of
limits that apply to use of a circuit breaker to tie together partial discharge (often incorrectly referred to as corona) at
two different electrical systems. voltages reasonably in excess of the phase-ground voltage.
Historically, designs were based on freedom from partial
IEEE C37.010, the application guide for high-voltage circuit
discharges up to 110 percent of system phase-ground
breakers, has for many years indicated that application of
voltage, and more recently up to about 120 percent of
circuit breakers to normally-open tie circuits should be
system phase-ground voltage.
discussed with the manufacturer.
The interrupting performance of the circuit breaker is
Fundamental to understanding the limitations associated
validated during design short-circuit tests, which are similarly
with bus-tie circuit breaker applications is an understanding
conducted on the basis of system phase-ground voltage. The
of how circuit breakers are tested. Medium-voltage circuit
circuit breaker must successfully interrupt with the system-
breakers are designed and tested on the basis of a balanced
(source-) side voltage maintained at the system rated phase-
three-phase system, in which the maximum continuous
ground voltage, and with transient-recovery voltage across
operating phase-ground voltage is 58 percent (1/√3) of the
the open contacts that is a function of parameters that
maximum continuous operating phase-phase voltage. This is
include the system phase-ground voltage. This condition
the basis of the dielectric-system design, and also is the basis
applies for all of the interrupting design tests performed on a
for demonstrating interrupting performance during short-
standard general purpose medium-voltage circuit breaker.
circuit tests.
How does this affect the application of a circuit breaker in a
For normal feeder circuit breaker applications, when the
bus-tie situation? In most cases, there is no issue. However, if
circuit breaker is opened, the load-side circuit is disconnected
the application is such that the voltage across the open
from any voltage sources, which means that the load-side
contacts can be higher than system phase-ground voltage for
conductors are at or near ground potential. Thus, the
long periods, the circuit breaker can be exposed to
dielectric stress across the open circuit breaker contacts is
conditions for which it is not designed. The existing design
equal to the phase-ground voltage.
tests in the standards do not cover the increased voltage
levels possible under this scenario.

Consider the voltage across the open contacts of a circuit If a manufacturer chooses to perform out-of-phase switching
breaker. As discussed, the premise of the standards is that tests (as Siemens does), the preferred rating in IEEE Std.
when the circuit breaker is open, the voltage across the C37.04 is 25 percent of the short-circuit rating of the circuit
contacts will be no higher than 100 percent of system phase- breaker. So, it is quite possible that the interrupting
ground voltage. If both sides of the circuit breaker are capability of the circuit breaker will be exceeded if the circuit
energized, the voltage across the open contacts will be breaker attempts to open with significantly out-of-phase
(ignoring differences in voltage magnitude between the two sources.
systems) a function of the phase relationship between the
Beyond this, the impact on the overall system is undesirable,
sources as indicated in the following table:
posing a significant risk of mechanical damage to rotating
machines and their driven loads.
Voltage across open contacts -
Out-of-phase condition
% of phase-ground voltage For this reason, the closing of a tie circuit breaker between
0° (in phase) 0% two sources that may be out-of-phase should be supervised
by a synchronism check relay (device 25) to prevent closing
30° 51.8%
of the tie circuit breaker if the sources are out-of-phase by
60° 100% more than a nominal amount.
75° 121.8%
One approach to dealing with the out-of-phase situation is to
90° 141.4% use two tie circuit breakers in series, and operate with both
120° 173.2% tie circuit breakers normally open. Under this condition, and
180° 200% assuming reasonably balanced conditions, each circuit
breaker sees no more than phase-ground voltage across the
open contacts. This is an approach adopted by a number of
From this, the circuit breaker is able to withstand an out-of- firms, especially in certain continuous process industries. It is
phase condition of up to 60 electrical degrees continuously, very commonly used in installations where the buses are in
as this would be the same condition that would exist with physically separate lineups of switchgear, connected
one side energized and the other side of the circuit breaker together with metal-enclosed bus duct or other conductors
de-energized. So, the concern arises when the phase (e.g., cables in conduit) external to the switchgear.
difference exceeds 60°. In the worst case situation of 180°
out-of-phase, the insulation from one side of the circuit In addition to solving the problem of a higher voltage
breaker to the other will likely be subject to partial discharges condition across the open contacts of the circuit breaker than
continually, with subsequent deterioration of the dielectric the circuit breaker is designed for, this creates a very
capabilities over time. substantial operational advantage to the user, as it facilitates
maintenance.
However, this discussion only relates to the voltage across
the open contacts. Next, consider the problem of short- In a “normal” tie circuit breaker application, when a user
circuit current interruption. wishes to perform system maintenance, one side (call it bus
A) of the installation is typically de-energized for
If there is a normally-open tie circuit breaker, with the two maintenance and the tie circuit breaker is opened. Then
voltage sources out-of-phase by more than a small amount, when bus A has been maintained, bus A is re-energized, and
when the command is given to close the tie circuit breaker, the other side (call it bus B) is de-energized to perform
there will be a significant transient current between the two maintenance. This allows maintenance of both buses A and B
sources. If the two systems have high short-circuit current but it does not allow maintenance of the tie circuit breaker
available, then the resulting overcurrent may persist for a compartment itself. In order to maintain and clean the
long time, and will likely initiate tripping due to overcurrent. primary disconnects in the compartment with reasonable
With the two sources out-of-phase, the voltage across the safety, both bus A and bus B must be de-energized. This is
contacts immediately following the last current zero will be typically not feasible in continuous process plants, so
higher than normal, and the current may also exceed the maintenance of the tie circuit breaker compartment is often
capability of the circuit breaker to interrupt out-of-phase neglected, which can have very adverse consequences.
currents. IEEE Standards regard out-of-phase switching
capability as an abnormal situation, so do not impose a
mandatory requirement for out-of-phase switching tests.
2
In contrast, if there are two tie circuit breakers in series, both
tie circuit breakers can be open and maintenance can safely
be conducted on each bus and on the tie bus, without need
for a complete plant shutdown. The user must consider
appropriate PPE requirements when performing maintenance
whenever the equipment is not fully de-energized. For
example, with two lineups facing each other across a
common maintenance aisle, if one lineup is energized while
the other lineup is undergoing maintenance, the
maintenance personnel must have PPE with ratings
appropriate to the hazards.
Thus, Siemens recommends that when the application TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
involves two sources that can be significantly out-of-phase makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
on a continuous basis, two tie circuit breakers in series projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
should be used. Both tie circuit breakers should be operated
as normally open, avoiding issues of excess voltage across applicability through an independent qualified professional.
the open contacts. If the two sources are essentially in-phase
(no significant phase difference between sources, some The information provided in this document contains merely general
users prefer to keep one of the two tie circuit breakers closed descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
so that the tie bus remains energized continuously. use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
One might ask how the situation described is similar to, or respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
differs from the situation of a generator circuit breaker. of contract.
When a generator is being brought on line, the generator
source and the system source are often out-of-phase as well All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
as having different voltages. This is not really similar to the
situation in which the sources are out-of-phase on a
continuous basis, as in the generator situation, the process Siemens Industry, Inc.
of bringing the machine on line only takes a short time. 7000 Siemens Road
Typically, the machine is brought up to speed, and when Wendell, NC 27591
desired speed is reached, the field excitation is applied. From
this point, the process of synchronizing the machine with the Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A176-X-4A00
system only takes a very short time, seldom more than a few
minutes. Thus, the voltage stress on the circuit breaker exists © 2013 Siemens Industry, Inc.
only for a short duration, not continuously.
3
TechTopics No. 96
Phase sequence versus phase arrangement
Two of the fundamental issues in electric power that are The phasor diagram represents the phasor (or vector)
often confused are the concepts of: relation of the three phase-ground voltages (for simplicity, in
a balanced system). The diagram is based on counter-
hase sequence, and
P
clockwise rotation, and in a system with 1-2-3 phase
hase arrangement.
P sequence, the voltage with respect to time in phase 1
reaches a peak, followed 120 electrical degrees later by
Phase sequence
phase 2, and similarly, phase 2 is followed 120 electrical
Phase sequence refers to the relation between voltages (or
degrees later by phase 3.
currents, as well) in a three-phase system. The common
representation of this relation is in terms of a phasor The phase sequence in a power system may be the normal
diagram, as below: 1-2-3 phase sequence, or may be reversed, 3-2-1. The
diagram shows both the normal 1-2-3 as well as the reversed
3-2-1 phase sequence. While the common language of
switchgear suppliers uses the 1-2-3 nomenclature, some
purchasers use other designations, such as A-B-C, R-Y-B, R-S-
1 1
T, etc. Regardless of nomenclature, the concept is the same.
Direction of Direction of
Phase sequence is critical in measurements on power
rotation rotation
systems, and for protective relaying, but perhaps most
120° 120° 120° 120° importantly, for rotating machines (so machines do not run
backwards). Modern microprocessor protective relays have a
selectable phase-sequence setting (often called the phase-
rotation setting), so the relay adapts to the phase sequence
without ordinarily requiring changes to the wiring
3 120° 2 2 120° 3
connections. In the historic electromechanical relays (and
1-2-3 phase sequence 3-2-1 phase sequence meters), the wiring connections had to reflect the phase
sequence to enable accurate measurements and protection.

Phase arrangement
Switchgear is constructed with consistent phase
relationships, so that when correctly installed, the user and
maintenance personnel know how the phases are arranged.
The standards specify the required phase arrangement in a
consistent manner. IEEE C37.20.1 (for low-voltage metal-
enclosed switchgear), IEEE C37.20.2 (for medium-voltage
metal-clad switchgear) and IEEE C37.20.3 (for medium-
voltage metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear) all require
that the phase conductors be arranged 1-2-3 from front to
rear, top to bottom, or left to right, when viewed from the
front of the switchgear. Other types of equipment, including
low-voltage switchboards (UL 891) and low-voltage motor makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
control centers (UL 845) also specify this arrangement. projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
It is important to understand that the phase arrangement
(the physical configuration of the bus bars and connections applicability through an independent qualified professional.
in switchgear) almost never changes. Equipment is almost
universally designed for 1-2-3 phase arrangement from top The information provided in this document contains merely general
to bottom, left to right, and front to rear, when viewed from descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
the front of the switchgear. Standards require that when it is use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
necessary to modify this arrangement, the phasing be further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
marked conspicuously.
of contract.
However, the electrical phase sequence of the equipment
can be specified by the purchaser of the equipment. Usually, All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
this involves no change to the switchgear, as the phase
sequence is usually selectable with modern microprocessor
instrumentation and protective devices. If historic Siemens Industry, Inc.
electromechanical meters or relays are used, the 7000 Siemens Road
manufacturer will need to connect the wiring for these Wendell, NC 27591
devices to reflect the electrical phase sequence specified by
the purchaser. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A175-X-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 97
Ratings for retrofitted switchgear
Users are actively pursuing ways to extend the life of existing The 1964 revisions of the standards were based on the
equipment for various reasons, including avoidance of major physics limitations of the technologies of the time, and this
replacement expense and lengthy downtime for replacement resulted in ratings that allowed for greater interrupting
of complete lineups of switchgear. The most common form capacity (in kA) as the application voltage decreased, until a
of life extension is referred to as a “retrofit”, and this may thermal limit was reached. This was embodied in the use of a
take a number of forms. When the first retrofits were done, voltage range factor (K), and rating of a circuit breaker at a
over 20 years ago, the drawout circuit breaker was usually particular interrupting current (I) at rated maximum voltage
replaced with a circuit breaker using the same metal (V), while allowing for an increase in the interrupting current
framework (the “truck”), with the internal elements of the to an upper limit of KI at a minimum voltage, V/K. These
circuit breaker replaced with a modern circuit breaker circuit breakers are often termed as “K-factor circuit
operator. In the typical application for an air-magnetic circuit breakers”, or “constant-MVA circuit breakers”. For further
breaker, the magnetic structure, arc chutes, main contacts, discussion, see TechTopics No. 04, “kA rated circuit breakers
arcing contacts, operating mechanism, and controls were all and switchgear”.
removed and replaced.
In the late 1990’s, the basis of the standards changed again,
Over time, the practice evolved, as the available supply of to eliminate the K factor. The standard with the preferred
used circuit breakers available to begin the retrofit process ratings values, ANSI C37.06, anticipated this basic change in
decreased. Complete new replacement circuit breaker its 1997 edition, where the ratings values were changed to
designs were created, which incorporate no parts from the eliminate the K factor, by setting it equal to 1.0 for all circuit
existing circuit breaker, and which can be provided at breakers. The basis of the change of ratings values in the
reasonable cost. other standards was not completed until the fundamental
standard, IEEE C37.04, was revised in 1999. Subsequent to
Since modern circuit breakers are designed to meet the
this revision of the standards, almost all modern circuit
present day standards, the question of the ratings to be
breakers are rated in terms of the interrupting current (in
applied to the replacement circuit breaker (and hence, to the
kA), which does not increase as voltage is reduced.
overall installation) becomes important.
So, recognizing that modern circuit breakers are rated in kA
The ratings of circuit breakers and switchgear have changed
with no K factor, what ratings apply to the retrofitted
over time. Prior to 1964, the ratings for circuit breakers were
switchgear installation? This issue was addressed in the first
based on total (asymmetrical) current. In 1964, the IEEE
edition of the retrofit standard, IEEE C37.59, “Requirements
C37.04 standard was revised to the symmetrical basis of
for Conversion of Power Switchgear Equipment”, which
rating.
established the philosophy for retrofit ratings that continues
today.

This philosophy is contained in section 5 of C37.59, which Option 2: Increase ratings from the existing ratings to
says “The ratings of all equipment were defined by the some higher ratings:
standards that were in effect at the time of its manufacture. A retrofit application to achieve higher ratings is more
Converted equipment shall continue to meet the original complex, as the retrofit firm must evaluate the entire
ratings unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and switchgear assembly, not just the switchgear cell for the
the converter.” circuit breaker that is being replaced. System maximum
short-circuit currents often increase (especially with increase
So, under C37.59, there are at least two possibilities for
in local generation), and can exceed the short-circuit ratings
ratings of converted (retrofitted) equipment. Either the
of the existing switchgear and circuit breakers. Such
ratings match those of the original installation (the basic
increased system requirements demand that the capabilities
philosophy of C37.59), or the ratings of the original
of the existing equipment be evaluated and addressed.
installation are increased.
One common retrofit of this type is to match the modern kA
Option 1: Match replacement circuit breaker ratings to
ratings, e.g., increasing from the historic 250 MVA class
existing circuit breaker ratings:
switchgear (maximum 36 kA short-time current) to the
C37.59 requires design verification to support the
modern 40 kA rating. A second common type of retrofit is to
capabilities of the retrofitted switchgear. This requires a
increase the short-circuit ratings to a higher class, e.g., from
thorough analysis of the retrofit design in the existing
the historic 250 MVA class to the historic 350 MVA class, or
switchgear structure to demonstrate that the ratings of the
even farther to the modern 50 kA rating. When increasing
retrofitted equipment at least match those of the existing
ratings, the retrofit firm must extend the design verification
installation. The manufacturer must review all of the
process to consider the existing switchgear cubicles as well
performance requirements of the existing equipment and
as the new replacement circuit breakers.
verify either by test or by evaluation of previous tests that
the ratings of the existing equipment will not be reduced by If it were desired to increase our example 250 MVA class
the retrofit process. So, the basis for the verification process switchgear to the modern 40 kA rating, the design
is the version of the standards to which the existing verification process would have to demonstrate that the
equipment was designed and manufactured. structures could withstand the 40 kA short-time current
(increased from 36 kA) and also the mechanical forces from
If the original equipment was rated for circuit breakers with a
an increased peak current of 104 kA (increased from 97 kA).
K factor greater than 1.0, then the retrofitted circuit breakers
Experience indicates that this may often be possible without
must be evaluated in the same manner. Let us consider a
modification of the bus structure or bus supports in the
simple, and quite common, retrofit application, the
existing equipment.
replacement of an existing “250 MVA class” circuit breaker.
These circuit breakers were rated for a maximum voltage (V) However, consider the case of a retrofit to increase from the
of 4.76 kV, with interrupting current (I) of 29 kA at 4.76 kV, 250 MVA class to the 350 MVA class or even the modern
with voltage range factor (K) of 1.24, and maximum 50 kA rating. This would involve increasing the short-time
interrupting current of 29 x 1.24 = 36 kA at V/K = 4.76 / 1.24 current rating from 36 kA to 49 kA (for 350 MVA class) or
= 3.85 kV. Thus, the circuit breakers were capable of a short- 50 kA (for the 50 kA rating), and of more importance, to
time current of 36 kA, and this capability (and the other increase the peak current withstand from 97 kA to 132 kA
ratings) must be maintained after the retrofit process is (for 350 MVA class) or 130 kA (for the 50 kA rating). This will
completed. The retrofit firm must consider this in the design almost always require increasing the level of support of
verification process. conductors (often called “bus bracing”) in the switchgear
structures.
If the existing ratings are maintained with no change, the
time to accomplish the retrofit installation is reduced So, if an increase of ratings is required, the user faces the
(normally) to the time that it takes to remove and install the higher cost associated with the replacement circuit breakers,
circuit breaker element and to validate interlock the costs associated with modifications of bus structures in
functionality. Thus, the downtime and associated cost the existing equipment, and the cost associated with design
involved in the retrofit installation on the circuit is relatively tests to demonstrate the increased ratings of the switchgear
minor. bus system. Depending on the bus system upgrade
requirements, there can be increased downtime for the
complete installation if the bus structure must be modified.
It is our practice to offer retrofits on the basis of option 1,
match existing ratings, unless the user requests increased
ratings on the basis of option 2. Of course, users may choose
to upgrade both the switchgear and the circuit breakers to
meet increased short-circuit system requirements, or to
upgrade either the switchgear or the circuit breakers to
prepare for future expected increases in available short-
circuit current. The decision on how extensive a retrofit
upgrade should be is a complex issue, and must be
addressed on a case-by-case basis.


of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A188-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 98
Ground protection in metal-clad switchgear - ground sensor current
transformers vs. residual connection of current transformers
Providing protection for ground faults is a well-established As discussed in TechTopics No. 50 - Ground sensor current
need, but some users are still confused about the proper transformer cable routing, the shield wires of the primary
protection schemes to be used for various system cables must be carried back through the opening in the CT
configurations. This issue of TechTopics discusses the two and grounded on the load side of the CT. If grounded on the
most common methods of sensing ground fault current and circuit breaker side of the ground sensor CT, the ground
the system conditions for which each is appropriate. current will not be monitored correctly, as the zero-sequence
components of the current passing through the phase
Figure 1 on page 2 shows ground sensing by means of a
conductors will be offset by the zero-sequence ground
toroidal (donut) ground sensor current transformer (CT) that
current returning through the cable shields.
encircles the three-phase conductors and measures zero-
sequence (ground) current directly. Figure 3 on page 2 shows the method of cable routing. This
figure also appears in TechTopics No. 50 - Ground sensor
Figure 2 on page 2 shows sensing of ground current by
current transformer cable routing.
means of an overcurrent relay located in the common return
conductor of the CT secondary current. The scheme in Figure Since the zero-sequence CT does not have to be sized to
2 is appropriate for solidly grounded power systems, but not carry normal phase current, the ratio of the zero-sequence
well suited for low-resistance grounded systems. The scheme CT can be much lower than the ratio of the phase CTs. The
in Figure 1 is the reverse – it is not well suited for use on most common ratio for the zero-sequence CT is 50:5,
solidly grounded systems but is well suited for use on low- although a higher ratio (such as 100:5) is sometimes used.
resistance grounded systems. This is a major benefit of using a zero-sequence ground-
sensor CT, as it allows ground protection to be significantly
Let’s look at each scheme.
more sensitive than phase protection.
Zero-sequence current sensing (Figure 1)
However, to take advantage of this system, ground current
The scheme in Figure 1 is often called zero-sequence sensing
must be limited to lower values than phase current. In low-
and sometimes, direct sensing or core balance. The CT
resistance grounded applications, the ground current is
encircles the three-phase conductors (and neutral, if the
typically limited to 400 A by a neutral ground resistor.
circuit is four wire). When a ground fault occurs, the ground
Sometimes, higher values of current are possible, but 400 A
current (a zero-sequence current) in each of the three phases
is more common than higher values. The neutral ground
(and the neutral) is additive in the primary circuit, which
resistor is almost always a limited-time resistor, usually 10 s
means that the CT will measure ground current directly, and
but occasionally, 60 s.
without influence of differences in the phase CTs.
What is the rationale for use of a neutral ground resistor and
In order to properly sense the ground current, the user’s
a limited time duration? This subject is beyond the scope of
primary cables have to be installed properly.
this issue of TechTopics, but a brief overview will suffice.

Figure 1: Direct ground-current sensing Figure 2: Residual ground-current sensing
52 52
50/51A 50/51A
50/51B 50/51B
50/51C 50/51C
50/51N
50/51N
Motors are typically manufactured with the windings in

Switchgear bus or feeder grounded-wye. If a ground fault occurs in the machine
terminal bars Cable terminations
(insulated) windings, the amount of current that can flow in the fault
Ground shield wire: will be related to the electrical “distance” of the ground
All ground shield wires location in respect to the grounded neutral point. If a ground
must be routed back Stress cone cable
through the ground
fault occurs close to the line terminals of the motor, say 10
terminations
sensor CT opening, and percent of the distance into the winding, there will only be
be connected to the 10 percent of the winding resistance in the path of the fault,
equipment ground bus on and the fault current will be as high as it can be, limited by
the load side of ground Equipment
sensor CT. ground bus the neutral ground resistor and the portion of the machine
winding from the location of the fault and the neutral point.
Zero-sequence If the ground resistor has a rating of 400 A, then a fault 10
ground sensor current Ground cable
lug percent of the way into the winding will allow 360 A of
transformer
ground current to flow. If the fault location is moved to 50
Conduit: Terminate and percent into the winding, the fault current will be limited to
Floor or connect to ground on load
enclosure 200 A. If the fault location is moved to 90 percent into the
side of ground sensor CT
winding (close to the neutral point), the fault current will be
limited to about 40 A.
Figure 3: Correct cable installation with zero-sequence ground current
transformers The zero-sequence current transformer scheme can sense
ground fault currents to this level, and thus, this scheme can
The objective of using a low-resistance grounding scheme is protect up to about 90 percent of a machine’s winding
to allow better protection of motors, and particularly to length. It is not of great consequence that the system does
protect machines in such a way that, in the event of a ground not protect 100 percent of the winding, as the “unprotected”
fault inside the machine, the likelihood that the machine can portion of the winding is near the neutral of the machine,
be repaired (rather than replaced) is increased. where the voltage stress on the windings is lowest.
2
In this system, ground-fault current is limited to a relatively So, a 50:5 ground sensor CT, as above, would support about
low value, and the time duration is also limited to a short- 21 V at 20 times rated current with an error of 10 percent.
time period (based on the time rating of the neutral ground The voltage “lost” in the CT secondary winding must be
resistor), usually 10 s. This is very beneficial, since limiting subtracted, in this case about 1.3 V, so the actual voltage
current to low levels and limiting time to short durations supported on the connected load would be about 19.5 V.
decreases the amount of damage that will occur to the Thus, if more than 19.5 V were required to support the
magnetic-core steel of the machine. If the magnetic-core connected secondary burden, the CT would be pushed
steel is “burned” by excessive current and/or excessive time, farther along (to the right) the secondary excitation curve,
the machine cannot be repaired except by replacing core increasing the degree of saturation. The resulting accuracy
steel, typically not a practical option. Thus, if the core steel is would be considerably greater than 10 percent error.
burned by a ground fault, the machine usually has to be
Calculating on an extremely conservative basis, assume
replaced, rather than repaired.
about 40 feet of wire in the CT secondary circuit from the CT
Why can the zero-sequence or core-balance scheme not be location in the rear of the equipment, through the
used on solidly grounded systems? For this question, the CT switchgear structure to the front of the switchgear, and then
accuracy ratings need to be reviewed. across the hinge loop to the protective relay on the front
door, and return, and assume the typical AWG #14 wire, the
This discussion will be very crude, rather than
resistance of the secondary wire would be about 0.107
mathematically precise, to explain the issue as simply as
ohms. Modern electronic relays have very low burden – let
possible.
us use a very low value of 0.05 ohms for our purposes. The
Figure 4 shows a secondary excitation curve for a common total resistance of the secondary circuit is thus 0.157 ohms.
zero-sequence CT. If the voltage across the CT is 19.5 volts (for the transformer
above), this corresponds to 124 A in the secondary circuit.
124 A is above 20 times rated secondary current, and the
required secondary voltage is at the upper limits of the CT
secondary excitation curve for 10 percent error. Thus, the
conclusion can be drawn that the CT is well into saturation.
A word of caution – this calculation is extremely crude so as
to be as simple as possible. A theoretically correct calculation
would have to use vector summation and the impedance
with both resistive and reactive components. While the
theoretically accurate calculation would not yield such high
levels of saturation, that is not necessary for these purposes.
The example makes it clear that with zero-sequence ground
sensing, the ground fault current must be limited using low-
resistance grounding, such that the zero-sequence current
transformer is not required to carry currents that are high
enough to drive the CT into saturation. In the example, with
0.157 ohms secondary burden, with 400 A flowing in the
primary circuit (40 A in the secondary circuit), the voltage
across the CT would only be a bit over 6 V, and the secondary
excitation current only about 2 A, less than 5 percent error.
Figure 4: Secondary excitation curve for common zero-sequence CT
Turn now to the residual ground sensing scheme as shown in
Figure 2.
A secondary excitation curve is used to calculate the
Residual ground-sensing scheme (Figure 2)
accuracy of a toroidal or window-type CT, which has an
In the residual scheme, the ground fault current is sensed by
accuracy designated with a “C” classification. The method of
means of an overcurrent relay in the common return
calculation is directly related to the definition of accuracy
conductor of the phase CT secondary circuit. This scheme is
classifications in IEEE Std. C57.13, which stipulates that the
not commonly referred to as a zero-sequence sensing
number following the C in the accuracy is the voltage that
scheme, even though it is really a zero-sequence sensing
the CT can support in the CT secondary while not exceeding
scheme. As noted in the discussion of the zero-sequence
10 percent accuracy error while carrying 20 times rated
(direct) ground scheme, ground currents are zero sequence
primary current. Conveniently, 20 times rated current (5 A
currents, and zero sequence currents are additive in the
for a CT with 5 A secondary winding), based on the
neutral. Thus, the residual scheme is a true zero-sequence
secondary values, is 20 x 5 = 100 A, and 10 percent error
sensing method even though is rarely referred to this way.
would mean 10 A secondary excitation current.
3
Since the CTs must have a ratio high enough to carry normal It should be noted that the zero-sequence or core-balance
phase current without overheating, the scheme is much less scheme cannot be used for circuits involving metal-enclosed
sensitive to ground current than the zero-sequence or core- bus (bus duct) connections, or direct connections to power
balance scheme of Figure 1. Thus, the residual sensing transformers. This is because the phase conductors are
scheme cannot provide sensitive ground sensing to protect widely spaced, and a CT large enough to encircle the phase
machine windings. conductors would be excessively large. In addition to being
too large, the secondary resistance of the CT itself would be
The ratio of the three-phase CTs must be equal, and the
much higher than for a normal ground sensor CT, reducing
ground current sensed will have some error introduced by
the accuracy of the CT to lower values. These situations
the difference between the three CTs, but this is seldom an
occur most frequently with main circuit breakers, and
issue.
fortunately, there is a convenient method to sense these
The residual scheme is applicable for use in solidly grounded ground currents, by installation of a CT in the connection of
systems, where the ground fault current is not limited to low the neutral ground resistor to ground.
values. In the residual scheme, CT saturation is only an issue
to the same extent that it would be an issue for the phase
current transformers. If the phase CTs are adequate for phase
current sensing under short-circuit conditions, then they are
also adequate for ground fault current sensing using the
residual scheme.
Summary
Not addressed are other forms of system arrangements,
notably, the ungrounded system and the high-resistance
grounding system.
In the ungrounded system, ground current is limited to the
system capacitive charging current of the cables, commonly
called 3 I0, where the capacitive charging current of each
phase is typically 1-2 A and total ground current typically
4-5 A. This current is too low to be sensed with current
transformers, so a system using voltage transformers is
needed.
Similarly, with the high-resistance grounding system, ground TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
current is severely limited, often to 5-10 A, and the system is makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
designed so that this level of ground current can exist projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
indefinitely. This allows for time to locate the ground fault
without having to immediately shut down the system. The applicability through an independent qualified professional.
ground current can be sensed directly at the ground resistor,
or the ground condition can be detected by monitoring the The information provided in this document contains merely general
voltage across the resistor. However, the determination of descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
which of several feeders is faulted cannot be determined as use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
simply. Typical high-resistance grounding schemes use a further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
pulsing contactor to switch resistance values, resulting in a
of contract.
pulsing current on the faulted feeder, which can be detected
with a clamp-on meter. Since this scheme does not use CTs All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
on each feeder circuit, this scheme is also outside the scope Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
of this issue of TechTopics. own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
The objective of this issue of TechTopics is to illustrate the Siemens Industry, Inc.
proper application of the zero-sequence or core-balance 7000 Siemens Road
scheme (Figure 1) and the residual scheme (Figure 2) for Wendell, NC 27591
sensing ground fault current. The zero-sequence scheme is
suitable for low-resistance grounded systems, while the Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A197-X-4A00
residual scheme is suitable for solidly grounded systems.
4
TechTopics No. 99
Special tests – type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker gearbox
lubrication
This issue of TechTopics discusses the results of follow-on In the few cases that have been reported with more than a
tests and studies performed on the type SDV7 distribution minimum amount of lubricant in the drip pan, the
circuit breaker with stored-energy operating mechanism appearance of the unit is similar to that in the photo below.
subsequent to the issuance of TechTopics No. 80 in 2011.
TechTopics No. 80 mentioned that a small amount of
lubricant visible outside the gearbox is normal and not
detrimental to the operation or the life expectancy of the
type SDV7 circuit breaker. The circuit breaker incorporates a
small “drip pan” to contain any lubricant that is released.
Subsequent to the original studies, reports of a few type
SDV7 circuit breakers with stored-energy operating
mechanism releasing more lubricant than the original tests
revealed were received. This led to further investigations to
validate the original view that the amount of lubricant
released was not detrimental.
The photo below shows the gearbox in the type SDV7 circuit
breaker stored-energy operator, and also shows the drip pan
along with a portion of the gasketing system used on the
bottom of the gearbox. Investigations of this leakage included tests by our lubricant
supplier in an independent laboratory, as well as tests in our
circuit breaker design global center of competence in Berlin,
Germany, and in our design laboratories in Wendell, NC.
Among the tests conducted were tests to determine how
much oil might separate from the lubricant and be released,
and to establish whether the release continues over time or
stabilizes.
The tests conducted by the lubricant supplier were
conducted in accordance with DIN 51817 (a German national
standard), “Determination of Oil Separation from lubricating
grease under static conditions”. This is somewhat similar to
ASTM D1742 for oil separation in storage, but the DIN test is
conducted with the lubricant under modest pressure instead
of a simple storage condition.

The procedure is to cover the lubricant in a container with a The gearbox contains about 800 ml (about 1.7 pints) of
tight-fitting “top” (actually a very fine metallic filter) such lubricant. If the maximum separation of oil shown in the
that any oil released from the lubricant can pass through the tests (eight percent) were experienced in a circuit breaker in
filter, allowing the amount of oil released to be measured. service, this would be 800 ml x 0.08 = 64 ml. The open
volume in the drip pan is about 200 ml, so even if the
One of the tests was conducted at a temperature of 70 °C
maximum amount of oil were to separate, it would be far
with the test continuing for several weeks. A temperature of
less than the volume of the oil pan, and thus would not
70 °C is higher than the highest temperature expected to be
overflow.
experienced in the area of the operating mechanism of an
outdoor circuit breaker even under the worst solar radiation In addition to the tests on the lubricant itself, circuit breaker
conditions. Also, since the gearbox incorporates a means for operators with the maximum amount of oil than can
equalizing pressure both inside and external to the gearbox, separate from the gearbox already removed were subjected
the lubricant is not exposed (during normal use) to the to tests under extreme conditions. These tests included
excessive pressure demonstrated during this test. endurance tests of over 30,000 operations (three times the
published endurance of the operator, and fifteen times the
The chart below from this test shows that even under these
ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009 endurance requirement of 2,000
extreme conditions (pressure and temperature), separation
operations), with operational tests at temperatures ranging
of oil from the lubricant stabilized at eight percent of the
from +70 °C (158 °F) to -20 °C (-4 °F) and tests with
lubricant. The curve of oil separation over time became
contaminants added to the oil already in the drip pan. In
asymptotic at about one week, and changed very little after
every case, the gearbox and operating mechanism
that. The supplier indicates that typical experience in
performed as normal.
automotive applications (the primary market for such
lubricants) is in the area of two to seven percent. The investigations have confirmed that the amount of oil
that can separate from lubricant in the gearbox does not
affect either the expected life of the mechanism or its
operability. Therefore, we have confirmed that the maximum
amount of oil that can separate is not a reason for concern.
Oil‐leaking test
According to DIN 51817
T= 70 oC
9
6
eakage [w%]
4
Oil le
Low‐temperature grease
3
Typ "4938" Fa. Siebert Germany
2
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Time [h]
Even though this amount of oil separation and leakage is not makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
detrimental, some users may not consider this desirable. As a
result, a modification has been introduced in regular use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
production, adding an absorbent pad in the drip pan, as applicability through an independent qualified professional.
shown above.
This pad has the capability of absorbing approximately three descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
times the amount of oil that was shown to be the maximum use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
possible (64 ml) from the DIN 51817 tests. When the pad further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
absorbs oil, it remains dry to the touch, rather than oily. respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
This modification has been introduced into all type SDV7
circuit breakers with stored energy operator. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Absorbent pads also can be provided to any user with type own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
SDV7 circuit breakers produced prior to the introduction of
this pad, for installation in the existing circuit breakers at the Siemens Industry, Inc.
next inspection. Once the front cover of the operating 7000 Siemens Road
mechanism is removed, installation of the pads takes only Wendell, NC 27591
seconds and requires no other modification of the operating
mechanism.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A196-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 100

Third-party listing ‒ UL, C-UL and CSA
For many years, electrical equipment for use in installations The definitions of “acceptable,” “labeled” and “listed” within
that are subject to the National Electrical Code® (NEC®, the meaning of the OSHA legislation, is given in 29 CFR
NFPA® 70) has been required to be listed in order to be 1910.399, which stipulates:
accepted by the local inspection agencies (often referred to
“1910.399 Definitions applicable to this part.
as the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ)). This requirement
Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to
resulted from the original legislation establishing OSHA, the
the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970.
meaning of this Subpart S:
The OSHA regulations have been updated over the years, but
(1) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or
the fundamental requirement is contained in 29 CFR
otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally
1910.303 (available at www.osha.gov), which states (in
recognized testing laboratory recognized pursuant to §
part):
1910.7; or
“1910.303(a) – Approval. The conductors and equipment (2) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind
required or permitted by this subpart shall be acceptable that no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts,
only if approved, as defined in Sec. 1910.399. certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is
.... inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a
1910.303(b)(1)(i) - Suitability for installation and use in State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for
conformity with the provisions of this subpart; enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National
Note to paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section: Suitability of Electrical Code, and found in compliance with the
equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in
listing or labeling for that identified purpose.” this subpart; or
(3) With respect to custom-made equipment or related
installations that are designed, fabricated for, and
intended for use by a particular customer, if it is
determined to be safe for its intended use by its
manufacturer on the basis of test data which the
employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the
Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives.
...

Labeled. Equipment is “labeled” if there is attached to it a The OSHA nationally recognized testing laboratory program
label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally lists 15 NRTLs in total, but of these, only three NRTLs are
recognized testing laboratory: recognized by OSHA to provide certification programs for
(1) That makes periodic inspections of the production of medium-voltage switchgear and only four NRTLs are
such equipment, and recognized by OSHA to provide certification programs for
(2) Whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally medium-voltage controller products. These recognized NRTLs
recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a are:
specified manner.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Listed. Equipment is “listed” if it is of a kind mentioned in
a list that: Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. (ETL)
(1) Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory
UV Rheinland of North America (TUV) (only for UL 347
T
that makes periodic inspection of the production of such
medium-voltage controllers)
equipment, and
(2) States that such equipment meets nationally Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
recognized standards or has been tested and found safe
Of these, UL is by far the most widely accepted, with the CSA
for use in a specified manner.”
a bit less well accepted, with ETL and TUV even less
accepted. It should be recognized that acceptance of the
The OSHA legislation establishes the governing requirement mark by any of the NRTLs is determined by the AHJ, and
that equipment be listed or labeled by nationally recognized some AHJs may accept any of the firms shown above, or only
testing laboratory, commonly referred to as an NRTL. OSHA some of them.
has established a program to recognize NRTLs. OSHA also
Siemens medium-voltage switchgear and medium-voltage
establishes that the fundamental basis of labeling or listing is
controller products are generally listed/labeled by UL, or for
compliance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
some OEM products, recognized by UL.
The OSHA website (https://www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/)
UL and CSA have a memorandum of understanding under
indicates that NRTLs are private sector organizations that are
which a mutual acceptance program for electrical products
recognized by OSHA to perform certification of electrical
has been established. The program allows UL to investigate
products. OSHA also limits the scope of the activities than
and certify products for use in Canada to appropriate CSA
any individual NRTL can engage in, based on the
standards, and allows CSA to investigate and certify products
competencies of the particular NRTL. If the certification of
for use in the United States (US) to the relevant IEEE or ANSI
the product is done under the NRTL program, the
or UL standards. Under this program, a C-UL mark (the UL
certification mark (label or listing) signifies that the NRTL
mark for Canada) is accepted in Canada as equivalent to the
tested and certified the product, and that the product
CSA mark for products for use in Canada, and the CSA mark
complies with the requirements of one or more appropriate
is accepted in the US as equivalent to the UL mark for
product safety test standards. Users of the product can
products for use in the US.
generally rely on the mark as evidence that the product
complies with the applicable OSHA approval requirement(s) The regulations in the US recognize the AHJ, usually the final
and is safe for use in the workplace. jobsite inspection agency and enforcement organization as
the governing body. Some AHJs in particular regions or
The medium-voltage switchgear and medium-voltage
states may choose not to accept one of the NRTLs recognized
controller products that Siemens offers are generally subject
by OSHA. A similar comment applies to the inspection
to the requirements of several IEEE and UL standards,
authorities in Canada.
including:
The discussion in this issue of TechTopics addresses only
IEEE C37.20.2 Metal-Clad Switchgear
installations subject to the National Electrical Code, the NEC.
IEEE C37.20.3 Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear In general, installations subject to the NEC are industrial,
commercial, and institutional installations. Certain types of
IEEE C37.20.4 Indoor AC Switches (1 kV – 38 kV) for Use
installations are excluded, such as electric utilities (when
in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
operating in their regulated utility responsibility), moving
L 347 Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers, and
U vehicles (such as diesel locomotives or ships), underground
Control Centers. mines or mobile mining machinery, and similar installations.
2
While utilities are exempt in their electric utility
responsibility, utility office buildings or the like are normally
subject to the NEC.
Products for electric utilities used in generation, distribution
or transmission, or substation control, are not subject to the
NEC but are subject to the National Electrical Safety Code®
(NESC®), ANSI C2. Thus medium-voltage outdoor substation
type circuit breakers (Siemens type SDV7) are not required to
be listed or labeled by a third party.
In the listing of standards above, one may note that the
standard for arc-resistant equipment, IEEE Std. C37.20.7 is
not listed. This is because UL investigates equipment for arc-
resistance as supplemental activity under the other standards
listed. For example, metal-clad switchgear must first be
investigated to the IEEE Std. C37.20.2 requirements, and
then may be investigated for supplemental characteristics,
for example, outdoor construction or arc resistance. So,
while not listed in the documents recognized by OSHA for
individual NRTLs, listing for arc resistance is still covered as
an option.
Lastly, not all equipment is available as a listed product, even
within a design family which is listed. UL listing is based on a
label for each vertical section (or unit) of an assembly, not a
single label for an assembly of many units. If an individual
unit has a construction that has not been investigated by UL, TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
or the unit has construction not conforming to the standards makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
for the product category, UL does not allow applying a UL projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
label to that unit, even if all other units in the assembly are use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
labeled. A rather common example of this situation is that of use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
a utility revenue metering compartment in a lineup. These applicability through an independent qualified professional.
are constructed to unique requirements of the utility and
usually are not in accordance with the requirements of the descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
equipment standard. For example, utility revenue metering use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
units often do not have full compartmentalization and further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
insulation as required by IEEE Std. C37.20.2, and therefore respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
cannot be labeled as metal-clad switchgear. Similarly, units of contract.
having user-specified devices that are not UL listed or
recognized usually cannot be provided with a UL label. Such
devices include a few seldom-used or special-purpose own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
protective relays, or some emerging-technology devices, that
have not been investigated by UL. However, these instances Siemens Industry, Inc.
of units that cannot be listed are becoming less common as 7000 Siemens Road
time progresses. Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A208-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 101

Siemens medium-voltage, gas-insulated switchgear
bus differential protection
Bus differential protection is often specified in air-insulated The basic concept of bus differential protection is shown in
medium-voltage switchgear, where there is a risk of a short- Figure 1 (one phase shown, other two phases identical).
circuit fault or an arcing fault inside the equipment. These
In this scheme, the zone of protection is the area inside the
faults are typically caused by entrance of vermin (such as
current transformer locations, and includes the main bus
mice or rats), by humid or dirty environments, by
(bus A in this example) and each of the connected circuit
condensation on insulation surfaces, or due to lack of
breakers. The differential relay will respond for any fault
maintenance.
inside the zone, but ignore any fault outside the zone. Any
If a short-circuit or arcing fault occurs inside the equipment fault outside the zone is a through-fault, for which the
(and inside the zone of protection), bus differential conventional overcurrent relays should provide selective
protection will open all circuit breakers connected to the bus. protection.
The bus differential protection operates independently of the
In the Siemens type 8DA (type 8DB double bus is functionally
conventional overcurrent protection, which incorporates
similar), the zone of protection of the bus differential
progressively longer time delays from feeder circuit breaker
scheme encompasses the portions of the switchgear that are
to tie circuit breaker to main incoming circuit breaker, so as
gas-insulated and are of isolated-phase construction, with
to provide selectivity for downstream faults.
the enclosing metal structure separating each phase from
Figure 1: Basic bus differential protection
the other phases.
.W
Main 87B
incoming
Bus tie
Bus B of
W.
Bus A double-ended
switchgear
similar
Feeders
.W
.W
.W
.W

The problems that occur with conventional air-insulated Table 1: Overview of failure causes
switchgear that could result in short-circuits or arcing faults
Share of Failure causes
inside the switchgear are therefore largely impossible with
air- not relevant
the Siemens gas-insulated switchgear. Since the equipment Causes of failures in air-insulated
insulated to gas-
is gas insulated, vermin cannot enter. Humid or dirty switchgear
switchgear insulated
environments are not of concern as the enclosure excludes failures switchgear
external contaminants. Condensation is not an issue as the
Thermocycling 7%
gas purity assures nearly zero water content. The gas-
Mechanical structure failure 3%
insulated portion of the equipment is almost maintenance-
free. Therefore, the issues that make bus differential Mechanical damage from foreign source 7% 
protection desirable in air-insulated medium voltage
Shorting by snakes, birds, rodents, etc. 3% 
switchgear are not problematic for gas-insulated switchgear.
Malfunction of protective device 10%
The basic structure of the type 8DA single-bus gas-insulated
Above normal ambient 3%
switchgear is shown in Figure 2.
Exposure to chemicals or solvents 3% 
Exposure to moisture 30% 
Exposure to dust or other contaminants 10% 

Each phase has its own
gas compartment Exposure to non-electrical fire 7%
(isolated-phase design)
Normal deterioration from age 10%
Severe weather condition 3%
Others 4%
Source: IEEE 493 Gold Book, Annex E, table XVIII, page 479.


Figure 2: Basic structure respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
Table 1 highlights the most common causes of failures in air-
insulated switchgear, as reported in the IEEE “Gold Book”, Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
IEEE Std 493-2007, “IEEE Recommended Practice for the own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Design of Reliable Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems”. As shown in the last column, with gas-insulated Siemens Industry, Inc.
switchgear, over 50 percent of the causes for failures 7000 Siemens Road
experienced in air-insulated switchgear are not relevant to Wendell, NC 27591
gas-insulated switchgear.
The construction of the Siemens type 8DA and type 8DB gas- Order No.: IC1000-F320-A206-X-4A00
insulated switchgear makes the likelihood of a short-circuit All rights reserved.
fault or an arcing fault inside the switchgear extremely low,
far, far lower than in air-insulated switchgear. For this For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
reason, use of bus differential protection with gas-insulated
switchgear is considered unnecessary. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
2
TechTopics No. 102

Tapered bus
On occasion, we are asked to provide tapered bus in our In this example, the user has specified that the main bus at
equipment. Use of tapered bus was a relatively common the most-downstream end only has to be rated for the
practice many decades ago, but has been largely eliminated current for which the loads are configured. The last four
due to changes in the codes and regulations, most notably feeders are 300 A + 200 A + 400 A + 200 A = 1,200 A, so the
the National Electric Code® (NEC) (NFPA 70®). user specifies 1,200 A main bus for this portion of the lineup.
While this concept seems appealing at first glance, it is not a
What is tapered bus? In its simplest form, it is based on the
good practice, and should never be used.
idea that if there are a large number of feeders on a bus, as
you move further from the source, the load current will
decrease (as current is drawn off by feeders upstream), and
therefore the main bus can be reduced in size and will still be
able to handle the continuous current of the application. A
hypothetical example is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1: Example
2,000
2,000 1,200
800 400 300 400 200 300

Figure 2: Example
3,000 3,000
3,000 3,000
2,000 2,000 2,000
A second example, actually more prevalent and perhaps But, what about Figure 2? This situation may be permitted,
reasonable engineering practice, is shown in Figure 2. In this depending on the design. If the configuration of the
example, the main and tie circuit breakers are located at the equipment is such that the 2,000 A bus is protected at its
center of a double-ended switchgear installation, with the continuous current rating of 2,000 A, the NEC permits it.
main circuit breakers sized for 3,000 A and the rest of the How would this be accomplished? A protection scheme
equipment sized for 2,000 A. The tie circuit breaker is also referred to as “partial bus differential” is used. It can have
2,000 A and is normally open. The overall system design is various forms, but the simplest form is shown in Figure 3 on
based on the concept that 3,000 A will only be required page 3. The current transformers on the main circuit
when one of the main circuit breakers is open, the tie circuit breakers are connected to overcurrent relays (device 51, A)
breaker is closed, and a single source is carrying the entire set for 3,000 A. The main circuit breaker current transformers
load. The load on either side of the substation will never are also connected to the tie circuit breaker current
exceed 2,000 A, so all of the buses are actually operated transformers and to another set of overcurrent relays (device
within their ratings. 51, B), and these relays are set for 2,000 A. The scheme
works because the current which flows to the other end of
Earlier, the NEC was mentioned. The NEC treats a situation of
the substation (through the tie circuit breaker) is subtracted
tapered bus as a tap, covered in article 240.21. The code
from the current flowing through the main circuit breaker,
allows taps under certain circumstances, provided that the
and therefore the “B” relays see only the difference in
termination of the tapped conductors contains a overcurrent
current. When the tie circuit breaker is open, the “B” relays
protective device of the proper current rating. It does not
will provide protection for their section of main bus at the
allow a tap to terminate in multiple circuits unless there is
2,000 A rating. The “A” relays only become a factor when the
overcurrent protection that protects the tap section at its
tie circuit breaker is closed and the current through the main
current rating. So, the NEC prohibits the situation in Figure 1
circuit breaker is above 2,000 A.
on page 1.
The scheme shown in Figure 3 on page 3 works under any
operating scenario, including:
Two mains closed and tie open
One main closed, other main open and tie closed
Two mains and tie closed.
2
Figure 3: Example
A
51
B 51
A
51
51 B
3,000 86 86 3,000
3,000 3,000
Loads Loads
2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
When the overcurrent relays detect a short circuit or an TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
overload on their protected main circuit breaker, tie circuit makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
breaker or main bus section, a lockout relay (device 86) trips
the main circuit breaker and the tie circuit breaker, removing use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
the fault from the protected sections. applicability through an independent qualified professional.
Another aspect of this protection scheme is that it avoids
introducing additional time delay for the main circuit descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
breakers to obtain selectivity. In a conventional scheme, use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
feeder circuit breakers have one time delay, the tie circuit further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
breaker has additional time delay, and the main circuit respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
breaker has even longer time delay for tripping. In this of contract.
scheme, the extra time delay for the tie circuit breaker is
avoided.
Unless a protection scheme such as a partial differential own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
scheme is used to protect the bus at the current rating of the
bus, an arrangement such as is shown in Figure 2 is not
7000 Siemens Road
permitted under the NEC. Wendell, NC 27591
Siemens’ practice has been that tapered bus is not furnished
as shown in Figure 1, and tapered bus as shown in Figure 2
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A207-X-4A00
is only furnished when the equipment includes overcurrent All rights reserved.
protection (such as in Figure 3) that protects the buses at © 2014 Siemens Industry, Inc.
current levels no higher than their ratings.
3
TechTopics No. 103

Medium-voltage controllers ‒ fixed-mounted contactors compared to
drawout contactors
For several decades, Siemens has offered Series 81000™ For the most common 360 A controllers, the drawout
medium-voltage controllers incorporating drawout carriage included the contactor, the primary (main circuit)
construction. With the introduction of the SIMOVAC™ family fuses, a control power transformer (CPT) with its primary
of medium-voltage controllers, Siemens has departed from fuses, and primary disconnects (stabs) plus a means to
the drawout construction, and adopted construction with a connect secondary and control circuits. The drawout
fixed-mounted contactor and a structure-mounted isolating function served the role of an isolating means. For larger
switch. This has resulted in a number of questions from controllers rated 720 A, the drawout carriage included the
customers and specifiers, and this issue of TechTopics is primary (main circuit) fuses, the CPT with its primary fuses,
intended to address the features of fixed-mounted contactors and primary disconnects. The contactor itself was fixed
with an isolating switch as compared to drawout mounted. The large size of the main circuit fuses and the
construction. heat generated by the fuses were the reasons for not
locating these elements on the contactor in the Series 81000
First, what do the standards require? The governing standard
design.
is UL 347, “Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers, and
Control Centers”. This is a tri-national standard, also In the SIMOVAC design, all elements are fixed-mounted. The
identified as ANCE NMX-J-564/106 in Mexico and CSA C22.2 isolating switch is fixed-mounted, with a shutter that
No. 253 in Canada. The present UL 347 is the fifth edition, prevents access to line side connections when the isolating
and the revision (the sixth edition) is in ballot as this is switch is open. The switch also includes a grounding
written. With respect to the discussion in this issue of function when the switch is open. The primary (main circuit)
TechTopics, the revisions in the upcoming edition are not fuses are bolt-in type, and along with the CPT and its primary
material. The historic NEMA ICS 3 standard is obsolete and fuses, and the contactor, are fixed-mounted in the structure.
no longer maintained. The essential content of NEMA ICS 3
Why did Siemens make this fundamental change? There are a
has been reflected in UL 347.
number of reasons.
UL 347 specifies that the isolating means can be any of
y removing the fuses and the CPT with its fuses from the
B
these:
drawout carriage, the elements that vary from controller
three-pole switch
A to controller were separated, which resulted in non-
interchangeable drawout carriages. The main circuit fuses
three-pole switch integrated with primary fuses (e.g.,
A
vary by motor or load size and type, and the size of the
hinged fuse mounting)
CPT often varies. Thus, each drawout carriage becomes a
drawout assembly, which may or may not include the
A unique device and interchangeability at the installation is
primary fuses or the contactor. reduced.
The drawout construction of the Series 81000 design used y removing the main circuit fuses from the drawout
B
the last of the allowed options. carriage, a major source of heat is transferred to the
structure from the drawout carriage.

y having the contactor as a separate element,
B Briefly summarized, they are:
interchangeability is vastly increased. Contactors are
A. The isolating switch cannot be opened unless the
fundamentally uniform across an installation, with only a
contactor is open.
few variations (e.g., magnetically-held contactors,
mechanically-latched contactors, and 400 A versus B. The contactor cannot be closed unless the isolating
720 A). Variations of CPT size, CPT fuse size, and main switch is closed (except as in F below).
circuit fuse size do not affect the interchangeability of the
he position of the isolating switch (and the shutter) can
C.
T
basic contactor.
be visually observed through a window in the exterior of
ontactors are largely maintenance free, and therefore
C the enclosure without the need to open any door or cover
the perceived advantage of a drawout contactor for ease of the enclosure.
of maintenance is of lesser importance.
D. When the isolating switch is open, a shutter covers the
The contactor itself seldom needs maintenance, and most openings to the cubicle line side bus system.
maintenance (primarily cleaning of insulation) can be
he contactor cell door cannot be opened unless the
E.
T
performed with the contactor in place in the unit. For those
isolating switch is open (which also grounds the load side
users who wish to have a more readily removed contactor,
of the switch).
for the 400 A rating, a plug-in contactor configuration can be
offered, so that no bolts in the primary circuit need removal F. The control power circuit is disconnected when the
in order to remove the contactor. Removal consists of isolating switch is open, so that maintenance testing with
disengaging the secondary circuit connector plug, turning an external control power source cannot back-energize
the handle-type bolts to loosen the clamps that secure the the CPT and the high voltage portions of the controller.
contactor mechanically, and then simply pulling the
The redesign to use a fixed-mounted contactor configuration
contactor out. For a fixed-contactor installation, the
results in a greatly simplified and modular motor controller
procedure is the same except for the additional step of
structure, easier to specify and use, and easier to install. As a
unbolting the line- and load-side primary connections.
result, this is the configuration adopted for use in the
The photo shows the plug-in 400 A contactor ready for SIMOVAC family of controllers.
removal from the enclosure. The clamping knobs have been
loosened to release the clamps that secure the contactor in TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
the enclosure. The secondary disconnect plug is ready for makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
removal. The process of removal or insertion of the 400 A projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
contactor requires no tools. use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A209-X-4A00

In either the drawout configuration of the Series 81000 or
the fixed-mount installation of SIMOVAC, the required www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
functionality and interlocks required by the UL 347 standard
are maintained.
2
TechTopics No. 104

Arc-resistant equipment ‒ sealing requirements
The need to seal arc-resistant equipment for protection Conditions of installation at actual installations are seldom
against gases escaping is discussed in IEEE Std C37.20.7, the as good as during the arcing tests, and due to these variable
overall standard governing testing of metal-enclosed site conditions, Siemens highly recommends the practice of
equipment under conditions of internal arcing. The standard sealing around the base of the equipment and sealing
requires the manufacturer to provide instructions, and give openings around cables.
the requirement for installing grout in gaps between the
Siemens is occasionally asked to specify the brand or product
foundation, pad, platform or the like and the base of the
to be used for sealing around the perimeter of the
equipment. It also refers to fittings or other means to seal
equipment, and the brand or product to be used to seal
the cables for external connections to prevent arcing gases
conduits. Siemens does not recommend specific materials
from travelling through the conduit system, where they
because there are many products commercially available,
might present a hazard to an employee in an area away from
and the user should be free to use the same materials for this
the equipment, such as where the conduit system enters a
function that are being used elsewhere on the project for
transformer terminal chamber, motor terminal box or other
other types of equipment to suit the specific site conditions.
termination box.
Sealing around the perimeter of arc-resistant equipment
The installation instructions for SIMOVAC-AR™ arc-resistant
The particular materials that might be appropriate depend on
medium-voltage controllers and GM-SG-AR medium-voltage
the application. For sealing around the perimeter of non-arc-
arc-resistant switchgear recommend that all openings
resistant GM-SG metal-clad switchgear, Siemens indicates
between the equipment and the support foundation be filled
(and have for many years) that asphaltic material be used.
with grout around the entire base of the equipment to
The major function in this case is to provide a relatively
prevent escape of arcing byproducts in the event of an
smooth transition at the front of the equipment from the
internal arcing fault. In addition to sealing the area between
floor so that a circuit breaker can be easily rolled into the
the equipment and the foundation, the instructions
unit without damaging the switchgear or the circuit breaker.
recommend sealing all conduits to prevent arcing byproducts
from entering the conduit system, using a flame-resistant With the advent of arc-resistant, metal-clad switchgear and
electric cable or duct-sealing system. Both SIMOVAC-AR medium-voltage controllers, the function of the sealing
medium-voltage controllers and GM-SG-AR metal-clad material around the perimeter changed. In addition to the
switchgear were qualified by conducting internal arcing tests desire to ease the installation of a circuit breaker (in metal-
with third-party oversight by Underwriters Laboratories© clad switchgear), the need to seal any gaps between the
(UL©) without these measures incorporated. However, the foundation and the equipment structure against escaping
mounting surface used during testing is quite flat, leaving gases is added. Asphaltic or epoxy materials should be
few if any gaps between the equipment and the mounting suitable, especially if the gaps are significant. For small gaps,
surface. where grout is not needed to ease circuit breaker installation,
commonly available RTV silicone caulk is suitable.

Sealing conduits Siemens does not profess to be experts on cable installation
In the case of sealing conduits, the materials used to seal methods or materials, which is why we do not recommend a
around the perimeter of the equipment are generally not specific brand or model number of material for sealing the
appropriate. Conduits may be in the area where the arcing perimeter of the equipment or for sealing of conduits. We
fault occurs, and therefore the sealing materials may be also recognize that the user may well have standardized on
subjected to substantially higher temperatures and pressures use of a particular product for these uses, such as for sealing
during an internal arcing event. Fittings intended for use in conduits, elsewhere at the installation site.
hazardous (or classified) environments should be suitable.
For example, a conduit originating in a non-hazardous zone,
travelling to a hazardous (or classified) zone, should be
sealed to prevent hot gases from igniting flammable vapors
that the end of the conduit system.
There are materials available for which the publications makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
indicate acceptability for such applications. For example, projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
searching on the web with a search string of ”duct seal + arc” use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
yields many citations, some of which lead to these products
(among many others):
Ideal Industries, Inc. Duct Seal Compound The information provided in this document contains merely general
besco Fire LLC Fire-Rated Acrylic Intumescent Caulk
A use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
besco Fire LLC Fire-Rated Expanding Foam
A respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract.
merican Polywater® Corporation FST Foam Duct Sealant
A
merson Electric Co. Nelson Firestop Latex Sealant
E All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
merson Electric Co. Nelson Firestop Putty™
E own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
TI, Inc. SpecSeal® Intumescent Sealant

S Siemens Industry, Inc.
TI, Inc. SpecSeal® SSP Putty
S 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
M™ Fire Barrier Silicone Sealants
3
ardner Bender® Duct Seal Compound.
G Order No.: IC1000-F320-A219-X-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 105
Fuses and overload protection for motor starting with class E2
controllers
This issue of TechTopics is concerned with the selection and The highest normal running current of the motor is equal to
setting of overload protection, and the selection of fuses, for the nameplate full-load amperes (FLA) multiplied by the
protection of motors. service factor of the motor (normally, 1.15), and by a factor
to reflect the tripping tolerance of the protective relay. For
There are several fundamentals that must be considered.
electromechanical relays, this factor is usually 1.10, while for
T
he primary fuses in a class E2 fused-contactor microprocessor relays, a factor of 1.05 is considered
combination are selected for short-circuit protection, not reasonable. For this discussion and example, consider a
for overload protection. The fuse protects the contactor motor with a FLA of 140 Amperes (A) and service factor of
(and the load circuit) from short-circuit currents. The 1.15, and a relay factor of 1.05, so the maximum normal
contactor, together with the overload relay, provides running current is 140 x 1.15 x 1.05 = 169 A. A fuse size of
protection for all normal switching and overload 9R is selected, with a continuous current capability of 180 A
switching. (200 A at 104 °F (40 °C) ambient in open air, derated for
capability in an enclosed application).
T
herefore, the fuse must always interrupt currents that
exceed the interrupting capability of the contactor without Next, the overload-current protection must be selected. The
fuses. user often specifies the particular model of protective relay
required. Modern microprocessor relays have a very broad
T
he overload/overcurrent protection relay must assure that
range of protective settings and characteristic curves that
the contactor is not commanded to interrupt currents
may be selected to closely match the motor-thermal capacity,
above its capability.
and this TechTopics issue will not address these details. Our
The standard for medium-voltage motor controllers (UL 347) example shows a representative overcurrent curve selection
provides application information on coordination between and characteristic for the purposes of this TechTopics issue.
the fuse and the overload protection. The standard defines The pickup current of the protective relay should be no less
the take-over current (also often called the cross-over than the highest normal running current calculated earlier, in
current) as the point (on a time-current characteristic curve) this case, at least 169 A. The characteristic selected has a
where the overload-protection curve intersects the fuse pickup setting of 170 A with a very inverse characteristic and
curve. The curve of interest for the fuse is the minimum a six second fixed delay for high currents. The example
melting-characteristic curve, as the fuse-interruption process motor, with full-load current (FLA) of 140 A, has a locked
starts when the fuse melts and begins to introduce rotor current of six times FLA, or 840 A, and an acceleration
resistance into the circuit. time of 4 seconds (s).
The process begins by selection of the main-power fuse size. With this information, the composite curve of fuse minimum-
The fuse selected must have a continuous-current capability melting time and overload current-protective characteristic
that is higher than the highest normal running current of the can be constructed.
motor.
Figure 1: Example of fuse selection and overload protection
Overload relay
Motor starting Take-over point

characteristic 900 A, 18 s
Acceleration Acceleration
time, 4 s LRA = 840 A
time = 4 s
Fuse (at ambient)
Fuse (hot)
estimated
FLA
SF x FLA x 1.05
2
In the characteristic curve, the take-over point is In the example curve, the protective relay operating time at
approximately 900 A and 18 s. The acceleration time of the 840 A is about 18 s, so meets the rule of thumb requirement
motor is given as 4 s, and the locked-rotor current (LRA) is of at least 3 x 4 = 12 s. In the example, the operating time of
840 A. The point (840 A, 4 s) is shown to illustrate that the the fuse at the LRA of 840 A is about 30 s, illustrating that
fuse does not operate during the starting time of the motor. the protective relay, rather than the fuse, will open the
The current at the take-over point should be no lower than contactor in the event of a failed start, and avoid nuisance-
the locked-rotor current of the motor. fuse operation.
One additional fundamental consideration is necessary. The Also, the contactor-interrupting capacity must be considered.
standards for NEMA motors require that the motor be The take-over point should not exceed the contactor-
capable of: interrupting capacity. Contactors are subjected to an
overload test to UL 347, normally at ten times the
T
wo starts in succession, coasting to rest between starts,
continuous current of the contactor, for this example, 10 x
with the motor initially at the ambient temperature, or
400 = 4,000 A. The take-over point on the characteristics is
O
ne start with the motor initially at operating temperature at approximately 900 A and 18 s, so is well within the
with rated load. interrupting capacity of the contactor without fuses.
The more severe of these two conditions is normally that of
two starts from cold condition. During the first start
operation, the fuses heat up significantly due to the starting
current which is six times FLA for most of the accelerating
time. Since the fuse is already “hot”, the effect of the second
start is that the fuse characteristics are altered, as the time
for fuse operation will be shortened as the fuse elements are
already at somewhat elevated temperature. To compensate
for this, the rule of thumb will be used that the melting time
of the fuse at the locked-rotor current must be at least three
times the motor-accelerating time to allow for the condition
of two starts from ambient. Based on these considerations,
Siemens has created the application charts for easy
application of fuses that are contained in the instruction
manuals for the controllers.
It must be cautioned that the application charts assume
typical motor data for medium-duty motors, and special
consideration is necessary when the motor data differs from
the typical data assumed in preparation of the application
charts.

makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer Siemens Industry, Inc.
projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’ 7000 Siemens Road
use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to Wendell, NC 27591
applicability through an independent qualified professional. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A250-X-4A00
The information provided in this document contains merely general All rights reserved.
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
further development of the products. An obligation to provide the For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
of contract. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
3
TechTopics No. 106
Arc-resistant equipment ‒ exit of exhaust plenum from buildings
There are specific requirements for exhaust of gases The hot vapor produced by the arcing event combines with
produced during an internal arcing event that occurs in arc- the oxygen in the air, producing various metal-oxides. As
resistant switchgear or controllers. These requirements are these metal-oxides are expelled from the vicinity of the arc,
primarily imposed by the requirements of IEEE Std. C37.20.7, they cool and become minute particles in the air. These
and the conditions of testing established in that standard. materials appear as black smoke for copper and iron, and
Our published selection and application guides, and gray smoke for aluminum. These materials should be
instruction manuals, together with the drawings for a considered as hazardous and personnel should not be
specific order, provide an overview of the requirements. allowed in the area without special filtered breathing
apparatus, as well as other appropriate personal protective
When an arcing event occurs inside electrical equipment,
equipment (PPE).
the arc produces extremely high temperatures, of the order
of 20,000 K at the arc terminals. This high temperature is For these reasons, Siemens strongly recommends that the
sufficient to vaporize materials in the vicinity of the arc, gases from an internal arcing event not be exhausted into
including steel, copper, aluminum, as well as insulating an area in which personnel may be present, and further
materials. recommends that gases be exhausted to the outside
environment and not to the inside of the building or
enclosure housing the switchgear.
Figure 1: Typical horizontal exhaust plenum (duct) arrangement
A
Figure 2: Exhaust area requirements
5' (1.5 m) Clearance required around exhaust plenum exit.
B Item Description
Fenced (or
otherwise
C A protected area)
with restricted
Item Description
B access
A Pressure relief channel 10' (3 m) Building or PEC
B
B Exhaust plenum (duct) A exterior wall
X (wall thickness)
Exhaust plenum
Arc venting for standard SIMOVAC-AR section C
exit
Figure 1 shows a typical exhaust system arrangement for Such an arrangement is shown in the Figure 3, where the
SIMOVAC-AR arc-resistant, medium-voltage controllers, exhaust plenum is connected to the PRC horizontally,
where the exhaust plenum extends horizontally from the extends through the exterior wall of the building or PEC, and
front of the equipment. The exhaust plenum exits then extends vertically to above the PEC building or roof,
horizontally from the equipment, is routed through the where the plenum transitions to horizontal so that exhaust
interior space of the building or Power Equipment Center of arcing gases is horizontally over the roof of the enclosure.
(PEC), and exits the building or PEC through an exterior wall
When exhausting over the roof of the enclosure, the roof
(not shown) where the exhaust gases and arcing by-products
area clearance around the exhaust plenum exit (flap) should
are vented to the outside environment. In addition to
approximate that shown in Figure 2, and the exhaust flap
allowing exhaust from the Pressure Relief Channel (PRC) in
should be over the roof rather than simply being near the
any of the four horizontal directions (front, rear, or either
roof, so that personnel who may be at ground level in the
side), the PRC design allows for a vertically-oriented exhaust
vicinity of the flap are not directly exposed to the exhaust
plenum.
gases. The direction of exhaust exit must be chosen so that
Figure 2 shows the minimum requirements for the exhaust there is a generous distance from the end of the exhaust flap
area in the vicinity of the exhaust plenum exit. When the to the opposite edge of the building roof so that the clear
equipment is energized, the area shown should be kept clear space approximates that shown in Figure 2.
of personnel and/or combustible or flammable materials.
The roof structure of the PEC or building, and the members
This topic is covered in more detail in TechTopics no. 89.
provided to support the exhaust plenum (duct) must be able
Some users request that the exhaust plenum be arranged so to support the exhaust plenum, including consideration of
that the exhaust outlet is above the roof of the outdoor seismic activity, snow or ice load, and appropriate wind
enclosure, to reduce the horizontal space at ground level loads. The manner of supporting the exhaust plenum must
that must be left unobstructed around the enclosure. not compromise the weather-resistant integrity of the
exhaust plenum.
The support system must also withstand forces that operate
horizontally on the exhaust plenum (duct) that occur when
an arcing fault occurs, since the reaction forces are opposite
A to the direction of exit.

B makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer

of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A248-V1-4A00
Item Description All rights reserved.
A Flap © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
B Support
Figure 3: Typical exhaust arrangement above roof of PEC or building www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
2
TechTopics No. 107
Dummy circuit breaker applications
On occasion, users specify metal-clad switchgear having one There are a number of applications in which a dummy circuit
or more “dummy” circuit breakers. This term has not been breaker may be specified. As a general statement, the
defined in the IEEE Standards previously, but a definition is dummy circuit breaker is considered to be a less costly
being incorporated in the next revision of IEEE Std C37.20.2 alternative to a circuit breaker, particularly when current
presently under development. Somewhat paraphrased, transformers, protective relaying, and other components are
C37.20.2 describes a dummy circuit breaker as a device avoided. So, users specify a dummy circuit breaker as a
similar to a drawout circuit breaker, intended for insertion means to reduce the first cost of an installation. Here are
into a compartment designed for a drawout circuit breaker. several examples of applications in which a dummy circuit
The dummy circuit breaker has jumpers between the line- breaker might be specified:
and load-side primary disconnects, and when installed in a
A. A
s a substitute for a drawout main circuit breaker in a
circuit breaker compartment, connects the line side of the
radial substation (usually with only a small number of
circuit breaker compartment to the load side of the circuit
feeders). See Figure A.
breaker compartment. A dummy circuit breaker has no
operating mechanism, and is not capable of switching B. A
s a substitute for a drawout tie circuit breaker in a
current or voltage. In brief, a dummy circuit breaker is a set double-ended substation. See Figure B.
of drawout jumpers.
C. A
s a means of disconnecting a tie circuit that connects to
The dummy circuit breaker must be able to withstand the a remote switchgear lineup. This is quite similar to Figure
same dielectric voltages and short-circuit currents as the B but with the double-ended source in some remote
switchgear in which it is to be used. This means that the location. See Figure C.
lightning-impulse withstand voltage (BIL) and power-
D. A
s a substitute for a second drawout tie circuit breaker in
frequency withstand voltage capabilities of the dummy
a double-ended substation, where the substation is
circuit breaker must match those of the circuit breaker that it
arranged with two separate lineups connected together
replaces. Similarly, the dummy circuit breaker must have the
with a tie bus duct. The use of a circuit breaker at one
same continuous current-carrying capability, as well as the
end of the tie bus, together with a dummy circuit breaker
same short-time withstand current and peak-withstand
at the other end, allows for de-energizing of the tie bus
current capabilities as those of the circuit breaker it replaces.
duct for maintenance. It also allows complete
A dummy circuit breaker has no switching capability, and de-energization of each side of the substation for
therefore must not be inserted into or withdrawn from a maintenance. See Figure D.
switchgear compartment in which either set of primary
disconnect stabs of the compartment are energized. This is a
basic safety issue that is often overlooked by users, and is the
reason for creation of this issue of TechTopics.
Figure 1: One-line diagram
Figure A Figure B
Dummy Main Dummy Main

circuit circuit circuit circuit
breaker breaker breaker breaker
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
breaker breaker breaker breakerr breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker
Figure C Figure D
Bus duct
Main Main Tie Dummy Main

circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker
Dummy
Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder
circuit
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
breaker
breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker breaker
Tie to
remote
lineup
For any application involving a dummy circuit breaker, key- C. K

ey-type interlocks are required for the local main circuit
type interlocking is required to all possible sources of power breaker, the three local feeder circuit breakers, and for
that could energize either side of the compartment in which the feeder circuit breaker at the remote lineup that is
the dummy circuit breaker is to be installed. The connected to the dummy tie circuit breaker.
compartment for the dummy circuit breaker must have key
ey-type interlocks are required for the local tie circuit
D. K
type interlocking that will prevent racking the dummy circuit
breaker, the three feeder circuit breakers on the side of
breaker into or out of the compartment unless all possible
the equipment that has the dummy tie circuit breaker
power sources have been removed. The implications for this,
and for the main circuit breaker on the same side of the
considering the examples in the figures, are:
equipment.
A. K
ey-type interlocks are required for all three feeder circuit
These recommendations consider that any connection to the
breakers, and for the upstream source (such as a remote
switchgear can be energized, even a feeder circuit breaker. If
circuit breaker or a transformer primary air switch or
there is complete certainty that feeder circuit breakers can
circuit breaker) on the line side of the dummy circuit
never be energized from the downstream side, then the key
breaker.
interlocks on the feeder circuit breakers may not be
B. K
ey-type interlocks are required for both main circuit necessary.
breakers and for all six feeder circuit breakers.
2
The key interlocking is accomplished with a single key-
interlock cylinder installed in each relevant item that must be
interlocked, including any remote items. All of the keys from
these circuits must be installed in a key-interlock transfer
block in order to rotate the keys and release a single key that
is installed in the dummy circuit breaker compartment. When
the key is available to install in the dummy circuit breaker
compartment, the dummy circuit breaker can be racked into
or out of the compartment. When the racking operation is
completed, the dummy circuit breaker key can be returned to
the transfer block (thus locking the dummy circuit breaker so
it cannot be racked), releasing all the other keys so that the
source devices can be closed.
A final word of caution on the use of dummy circuit breakers.
The National Electrical Code® (NEC®) requires that
overcurrent protection be provided for the conductors
connected to the dummy compartment. Since the dummy
circuit breaker does not have any interrupting capacity, this
means that the protection has to be provided by the other
switching devices in the system. In Figure A, this protection
would have to be provided by the upstream protective
device. In Figure B, protection would have to be provided by
the two main circuit breakers. In Figure C, the protection
would also be by the main circuit breaker and by the remote
source to the dummy circuit breaker. Finally, in Figure D, the
protection for the bus duct would be by the main circuit
breaker on the same side of the equipment as the dummy tie
circuit breaker, and by the tie circuit breaker at the other end
of the bus duct. A corollary to the NEC requirement is that
the dummy circuit breaker and the connected conductors
must be equal in capacity to the circuit-switching device
(e.g., the main circuit breaker in Figure A) that provides the TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
overcurrent protection required by the NEC. makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
An alternative when the dummy circuit breaker must be of use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
lower current-carrying capacity would be to provide current use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
transformers and protective relays on the dummy tie circuit applicability through an independent qualified professional.
breaker compartment, arranged to trip the sources of power
in the event of a current in excess of the current capability of The information provided in this document contains merely general
the dummy circuit breaker or its connected circuit. This is
possible, but quite rare, as it reduces the cost savings that further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
the use of a dummy circuit breaker is intended to make respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
possible. of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A251-X-4A00
3
TechTopics No. 108
Lightning-impulse (BIL) ratings for medium-voltage controllers
The standard for medium-voltage controllers, UL 347, Now consider the application. Medium-voltage controllers
specifies the required dielectric-withstand voltage values for are most often used to control rotating machines (motors).
the controllers. For controllers rated over 3.6 kV up to Motors do not have an impulse rating since their windings
7.2 kV, UL 347 specifies that the lightning-impulse withstand are embedded directly in the core steel. However, an
voltage should be either 45 kV or 60 kV. For controllers rated approximation can be made of what the impulse capability of
1,500 V to 3,600 V, UL 347 specifies values of 30 kV or a motor might be by referencing some historic papers and
45 kV. guides.
The SIMOVAC™ medium-voltage controllers have a rated An IEEE working group of the insulation subcommittee of the
lightning-impulse (BIL) voltage of 60 kV for equipment up to rotating machinery committee suggested that the
7.2 kV. approximate impulse capability of motors is 125 percent of
the crest value of the motor’s power frequency (60 Hz) one-
Users have asked Siemens to explain why the dielectric-
minute, high-potential test voltage. For a 4.0 kV motor, the
withstand voltage values for medium-voltage controllers do
crest value of the test voltage is 12.73 kV, while for a 6.0 kV
not match those of metal-clad switchgear. For metal-clad
machine, it is 20.1 kV. Using the estimated factor of 125
switchgear up to 4.76 kV, the impulse rating is 60 kV, while
percent shown in IEEE 141, the equivalent calculated
for switchgear over 4.76 kV up to 15.0 kV, the impulse rating
impulse capabilities would be 15.9 kV for the 4.0 kV
is 95 kV.
machine, and 25.1 kV for the 6.0 kV machine. These values
The simplistic answer is that the standards for switchgear are were not proposed as requirements for motors, but rather, as
created in the IEEE Power & Energy Society’s Switchgear a comparative value for use in insulation coordination
Committee, while those for medium-voltage controllers are studies and the application of surge arresters for motor
made in working groups operating under the procedures of protection.
UL. While this is valid, the real reason that the values differ is
The values computed by the rotating machines working
that the two types of equipment are intended for different
group are not requirements for motors and are merely
applications.
calculated values suggested for use in insulation
To examine this, first consider the requirements for the coordination studies. So the values of 15.9 kV for the 4.0 kV
medium-voltage controllers. The standard for controllers is motor, or 25.1 kV for the 6.0 kV motor may not be the
UL 347, which is also an ANSI standard. For both medium- correct values for impulse capability of a machine. However,
voltage controllers and for medium-voltage, metal-clad one suspects that the real capabilities of the machines would
switchgear, if the equipment is subject to exposure to not be significantly different from those suggested by the
lightning or transient voltages that exceed the capabilities of working group.
the equipment, surge arresters (lightning arresters) should
be applied either in the equipment, or externally where the
exposure to lightning strikes is most significant.
If these values are compared to the 60 kV impulse rating of
SIMOVAC controllers, the values for the controllers are far in
excess of the dielectric capabilities of the machines they
protect. Thus, the conclusion follows that the impulse-
withstand capabilities of medium-voltage controllers are
tailored to the application to motor starting and clearly
appropriate for the equipment.
Reference:
IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol.
PAS-100, No. 8, August 1981, “Impulse Voltage Strength
of AC Rotating Machines”.

makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer Siemens Industry, Inc.
projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’ 7000 Siemens Road
use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to Wendell, NC 27591
applicability through an independent qualified professional. Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No.: IC1000-F320-A261-X-4A00
The information provided in this document contains merely general All rights reserved.
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
further development of the products. An obligation to provide the For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659
of contract. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
2
TechTopics No. 110
Corrosion prevention effects on electrical equipment life
In TechTopics No. 15 - Expected life of electrical equipment, Under these conditions, without applying any environmental
the subject of the expected life of electrical equipment was controls, condensation formation in electrical equipment
discussed with regard to the environmental conditions users leading to corrosion is likely. Once corrosion begins, it
can control. Items, such as attention to cleanliness, degrades the useful properties of the base metal, including
conservative equipment loading, regular maintenance and strength, surface finish and permeability to liquids. This
sufficient ambient-temperature controls, were all described permeability reduction in steel is why, given enough time,
as contributing factors in keeping electrical equipment in the rust spot on the car becomes larger as the metal converts
good working order. to rust and flakes away. For copper, the other metal most
common in electrical equipment, corrosion presents itself as
To further illustrate the influence environmental conditions
that green hue (tarnish) that needs to be scrubbed off of
have on the expected life of electrical equipment, TechTopics
cooking pots. In either case, corrosion in electrical
No. 84 - Space heater - sizing and application principles
equipment could lead to thermal, mechanical or structural
discussed why Siemens recommends the use of space
issues, which have the potential for equipment failure and/or
heaters for humidity control to reduce the likelihood of
personnel injury.
insulation failures due to the formation of condensation
(moisture). This issue of TechTopics discusses another In addition to the proper use of space heaters, appropriate
detrimental effect that condensation may have on the life ventilation and temperature controls, the most widely used
expectancy of electrical equipment ‒ corrosion. methods for controlling corrosion are through the use of
rust-resistant alloys or the application of a finish or surface
Corrosion is, by definition, the destruction of material by
treatment to isolate the base metal from the environment.
electrochemical oxidation due to reactions with an oxidant.
For steel, one of the metals most commonly used in As discussed in TechTopics No. 18 - Bus joint and primary
electrical equipment, corrosion manifests itself as the rust on disconnect plating, silver- and tin-plated copper buses are
your car and is caused when iron oxides form when iron and used by Siemens to maintain good conductivity in the bus
oxygen come into contact with moisture. structure. This is because even though both will tarnish over
time, the oxides formed by both metals are still quite good
For indoor electrical equipment, the normal (usual) service
conductors.
conditions defined in the IEEE standards define the
conditions of humidity (moisture in the air) as follows: For steel components in high-speed or rotating mechanisms
like circuit breaker operators, racking mechanisms or safety
1. T
he average value of the relative humidity, measured
interlocks, Siemens typically uses rust-resistant steel alloys
over a period of 24 hours, does not exceed 95 percent.
like stainless steel. The chromium in the steel forms a passive
2. T
he average value of the relative humidity, over a period layer of chromium oxide, blocking oxygen diffusion into the
of one month, does not exceed 90 percent. base steel.
Because this layer is inherent to the steel and not just a Since coating weight directly affects the coating life (higher
surface treatment, the ANSI/IEEE standards do not require coating weight used increases the service life of the
any tests to demonstrate the corrosion-resistant properties of equipment), Siemens uses G90 galvanized steel. According
components made from these alloys. to the AGA, in industrial environments (where electrical
equipment is typically applied) not only do acid, soot and
For general purpose or enclosure components, Siemens
other pollutants tend to settle on steel surfaces, but also
either finishes the steel with thermosetting polyester-powder
dampness due to condensation may be present and the G90
paint or zinc galvanization.
weight is appropriate for these applications. In addition to
For finishing with powder paint, the steel is prepared before the corrosion-resistant properties, galvanized steel is more
painting by a seven-stage wash system. The thermosetting resilient (scratch resistant) than painted steel and does not
polyester-powder coating is then applied with electrostatic require penetration of the finish to ensure ground continuity
equipment at a nominal 4 mils dry-film thickness, and cured due to the conductivity of the zinc. The sheared and/or
at 374 ºF (190 ºC) for 30 minutes. The completed parts have punched edges tend to be sharp and care must be taken to
a textured appearance that exhibits excellent flexibility and minimize the potential for injury to operating personnel. The
durability. Additionally, the salt-spray (fog) performance of zinc patina has a tendency to have a white powdery
the finish is more than double the requirements found in the appearance, which may prove aesthetically unappealing to
latest ANSI/IEEE and ASTM standards for organic coatings. some users.
However, long-term exposure to ultra-violet (UV) light can
In addition to user-controllable environmental items, such as
cause some level of fading. Depending upon the desired
cleanliness, equipment loading, proper maintenance and
finish color (ANSI 61 gray is standard), the compartments
ambient temperature, corrosion can have a detrimental
internal to the equipment enclosure can appear dark
effect on the life expectancy of electrical equipment. There
requiring additional illumination to increase visibility.
are a variety of methods of combating corrosion in electrical
To ensure proper enclosure continuity to ground, the finish equipment, including the selection of materials and coatings
needs to be penetrated at connection points usually with star suited to specific environments. Based on our technical
washers or the like. expertise and experience, Siemens selects finishes matched
to the application in order to meet or exceed expectations of
When galvanizing, the sheet steel has a layer of metallic zinc
product functionality and life.
applied to the surface. This is either done to the completed
component part by electroplating or hot-dipped galvanizing,
or by using commercially available sheet steel commonly
referred to as “galvanized steel” to create the component
part. Galvanized steel has a zinc coating applied as part of
the manufacturing process. Galvanizing steel protects makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
against corrosion in two ways: as a physical barrier and by projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
cathodic protection. use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
As a physical barrier, the zinc coating provides a barrier to applicability through an independent qualified professional.
moisture and oxygen interaction with the base metal. This
barrier is effective mainly due to zinc’s ability to form a The information provided in this document contains merely general
dense, adherent corrosion by-product known as zinc patina, descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
which leads to a rate of corrosion up to 10 to 100 times use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
slower than untreated iron-based materials according to the
American Galvanizers Association (AGA). Cathodic protection
of contract.
references zinc’s ability to electrochemically sacrifice itself
because it is a less resistant to corrosion and oxidation than All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
steel. Basically, the zinc will corrode before the base steel Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their
and at a much slower rate. The amount of zinc applied to the own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
steel surface establishes the minimum coating weight per
unit area as determined by specific ASTM tests and
7000 Siemens Road
determines the level of corrosion protection. Commercial
Wendell, NC 27591
galvanized steel is designated with the letter “G” followed by
a two-digit number representing the weight of zinc applied Subject to change without prior notice.
in oz/ft2. Order No.: IC1000-F320-A263-X-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 111
SF6 gas and U.S. greenhouse gas emissions
The use of sulfur-hexafluoride (SF6) gas globally has been the Over time, information on the nature of SF6 as a greenhouse
subject of a large amount of discussion for many years, both gas became available, and designs for the circuit breakers
in the U.S., and worldwide. SF6 is recognized as an extremely were improved. Today, many designs for products that use
potent greenhouse gas, primarily because of its atmospheric SF6 gas (for insulation only-not for interruption) have leakage
lifetime of about 3,200 years, with a global warming rates of the order of 0.1 percent per gas compartment per
potential (GWP) of 22,800 years. The reference gas for GWP year, far lower than leakage rates of historic products. For
values is CO2, which is assigned a GWP of 1.0. The EPA circuit breakers that use SF6 gas for insulation and
considers SF6 as the most potent greenhouse gas that they interruption, the leakage rate of present designs is under 0.5
have investigated.1 percent per year.
SF6 was introduced in the 1950s in electrical equipment, and For a more extensive discussion of SF6 and its properties, and
was quickly adopted for high-voltage outdoor circuit usage in metal-enclosed, medium-voltage switchgear, refer
breakers, particularly above 38 kV. It ultimately lead to to TechTopics No. 53.
obsolescence of oil circuit breakers, and also of air-blast
On April 15, 2015, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
circuit breakers. The early gas-filled circuit breakers in the
released a report entitled “Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas
high-voltage arena had relatively high leakage rates, and
Emissions and Sinks: 1990-2013”. This report contains a
hence a relatively large amount of SF6 was released into the
great deal of information (564 pages), but the information in
atmosphere. Exacerbating this situation was the common
the report that relates to SF6 gas is quite interesting.4
practice when maintenance of these circuit breakers was
needed that involved removal of the gas from the circuit The data indicates that the largest share of greenhouse gas
breaker, some users simply released the gas to the net emissions in 2013 is from combustion of fossil fuels,
atmosphere instead of recovering the gas for recycling and/ accounting for approximately 77 percent of total GWP-
or reuse.2 weighted emissions. Of this value, about 40 percent of the
CO2 from fossil fuel combustion came from use of fossil fuels
About the same time that users and manufacturers became
for generation of electricity.5
sensitive to the environmental impact of simply releasing the
gas, substantial rises in the cost of SF6 gas took place, so The report indicates that total net emissions of SF6 in 2013
users and manufacturers had a real economic interest in were 6.9 MMT CO2-equivalent (million metric tons CO2-
conserving the gas and reusing it. Both factors led to a very equivalent), of which net emissions in electrical transmission
substantial reduction in the amount of gas released to the and distribution were 5.1 MMT CO2-equivalent and the
environment.3 remainder of the emissions were from magnesium
production and processing and from semiconductor
The data indicates that emissions by manufacturers have
manufacture.6
remained at a low level through the period of 1990-2013,
with emissions by users declining by 80 percent in the same
period, with much of the reduction occurring in the 1990-
2009 period.
Also for 2013, total emissions and sinks (i.e., net emissions) References:
of greenhouse gases were reported as 5,791.2 MMT CO2-

U.S. EPA web page on the report: http://www.epa.gov/
equivalent. Therefore, net emissions of SF6 comprised
climatechange/ghgemissions/usinventoryreport.html
5.1/5791.2 = 0.088 percent (less than 0.1 percent) of total
net emissions in the U.S.7
Report: Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions and
Sinks: 1990-2013: http://www.epa.gov/climatechange/
Total net emissions for 1990 were shown as 5,525.2 MMT Downloads/ghgemissions/US-GHG-Inventory-2015-Main-
CO2-equivalent, and the emissions of electrical transmission Text.pdf
and distribution were 25.4 MMT CO2-equivalent.
1. R
eport, pages 1-8 and 1-9 (AR4 data used as required
Thus, the data shows that the emissions from electrical by international reporting requirements)
transmission and distribution declined 79.9 percent from
1990 to 2013! 2. R
eport, pages 4-101, 4-102, and 4-107
The EPA report supports the opinion that emissions of SF6 3. R

eport, page 4-102
gas from modern designs of high-voltage and medium- 4. R
eport, section 4.24, pages 4-101 to 4-110
voltage switchgear and circuit breakers is not a significant
factor in global warming and climate change. 5. R
eport, pages ES-9 and ES-12
Switchgear and circuit breaker manufacturers have been 6. R

eport, pages 2-5, 2-17, and ES-7
researching alternatives to SF6 gas for many years, but this 7. R
eport, page ES-7
work has not resulted in a suitable substitute.
8. R
eport, pages ES-7 and ES-16.
At this time, there is no indication that the U.S. EPA will
restrict the use of SF6 in electrical equipment. The California
Air Resources Board (CARB) has mandated that leakage of SF6
be reduced to one percent in 2020. The Siemens types 8DA
and 8DB medium-voltage, gas-insulated switchgear designs,
with a leakage rate of less than 0.1 percent per year, are
already below the 2020 limits mandated by CARB.
CARB also instituted inventory reporting requirements for
owners of SF6 or equipment using SF6, applicable to owners
with 17,800 lbs of SF6. 17,800 lbs of SF6 gas is about the
amount of gas in 2,700 units of single-bus type 8DA
switchgear, or about 1,400 units of double-bus type 8DB makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
switchgear projects or applications, and assumes no responsibility for the readers’
There are no known efforts to impose a tax on SF6 usage. The
Australian government enacted such a tax in 2013 but applicability through an independent qualified professional.
recinded the tax in mid-2014.
of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A267-X-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 112
Use of R-rated fuses in lieu of E-rated fuses for transformers
TechTopics No. 58 discussed the differences between E-rated However, using 50 kA symmetrical system short-circuit
fuses and R-rated fuses in general terms. R-rated fuses are capacity, the 24R fuse has a let-through current of 47 kA
designed primarily to provide motor protection, while E-rated whereas the 450E fuse has a let-through current of 78 kA.
fuses are designed primarily to provide transformer The 24R fuse falls within the proven peak withstand of the
protection. The difference in the load served (motor or contactor, whereas the 450E fuse considerably exceeds it.
transformer) results in differences in the shape of the time
When fuse is applied to protection of a transformer, a
current curves.
number of key elements should be considered:
In the application of current-limiting fuses to NEMA E2
T
he transformer inrush current on energizing, usually
combination medium-voltage controllers, Siemens prefers to
considered as 12 times self-cooled FLA current at 0.1 s,
provide R-rated fuses for motor protection and E-rated fuses
and 25 times FLA current at 0.01 s
for transformer protection. However, a number of factors
must be considered in selecting a fuse for the application, of T
he transformer damage curve, obtained from IEEE Std
which the major issues are continuous current-carrying C57.109 (for liquid-filled transformers) or IEEE Std
capability, fuse let-through current, and coordination with C57.12.59 (for dry-type transformers)
the load characteristics.
The overcurrent relay protective settings
Of particular interest is the let-through current of the fuse.
T
he maximum (unfused) interrupting capacity of the
Due to design differences, the let-through currents of R-rated
contactor
and E-rated fuses of comparable continuous current may be
quite different. The let-through current of the fuse must be T
he peak let-through current of the current-limiting fuse
no higher than the demonstrated peak withstand of the at the system short-circuit current level.
contactor proven during the design interrupting tests
Consider the following example:
conducted to fulfill the requirements of UL 347, “Standard
for Medium-Voltage AC Contactors, Controllers, and Control L iquid-filled transformer, 2000 kVA, with 4160 V primary,
Centers”. This determines maximum fuse sizes for a 278 A FLA, and impedance of 6 percent.
particular type of fuse, R-rated or E-rated, which can be used
T
ransformer inrush, 12 times (3,336 A) for 0.1 s, 25 times
in combination with the controller.
(6,950 A) for 0.01 s
For example, consider two fuses of essentially equal
Fuse characteristics for a 24R fuse and for a 450E fuse
continuous current capability, a 24R fuse and a 450E fuse.
Both fuses are capable of 450 A when tested in open air (to Contactor interrupting capacity (unfused) of 4.8 kA
the fuse standards) and must be reduced in capacity by 20
O
vercurrent relay, Siemens 7SJ62, very inverse, time
percent for use inside a medium-voltage controller unit (to
pickup 360 A, time dial 15.
allow for the higher ambient temperature inside the
enclosure). Therefore, inside the enclosure, both fuses are
capable of 450 x 0.80 = 360 A.
The resulting time current curve, showing both the 24R and the 450E fuse characteristics, is as follows:
Time-current characteristics
1,000
100
10
Transformer damage curve
Relay
Time, s
Inrush (12x)
0.1
Contactor interrupting capability (4.8 kA)
A051B 24R A055F 450E
Inrush (25x)
0.01
100 1,000 10K 100K
Current, A
In this time-current coordination curve, either the 450E fuse TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
or the 24R fuse is seen, in combination with appropriate makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
settings of the overcurrent relay, to provide proper protection
of the transformer. In particular, note the following: use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
T
he fuse curve lies to the left of the transformer damage applicability through an independent qualified professional.
curve, as does the protective relay characteristic curve.
T
he fuse allows the transformer inrush current (both the descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
12 times and the 25 times values) without resulting in use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
nuisance fuse operation.
T
he protective relay allows the fuses to interrupt the of contract.
current for fault values exceeding 4.0 kA (below the
unfused interrupting capacity of the contactor, 4.8 kA).
This example illustrates that proper protection of the own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
transformer and coordinated overcurrent operation of the
class E2 medium-voltage controller can be achieved with
7000 Siemens Road
either R-rated or E-rated current-limiting fuses. Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: IC1000-F320-A269-X-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 113
Preferred locations for current transformers
When designing a relay protection system, the concept of

“zone of protection” in determining the preferred location of Zone 7 Generator protection
current transformers in the system is employed. Circuit breaker
This concept involves decision about the region in an
electrical system that a particular protective relay or Zone 6 Medium-voltage
combination of relays should protect. switchgear protection
To understand the concept, consider an example electrical Zone 5 Transformer protection

system as shown below. The one-line only shows
representative elements; a real system would likely have Zone 4 Medium-voltage
many more circuit breakers and circuits. switchgear protection
The dotted lines in the one-line diagram describe the various

zones of protection in the circuit. The zone of protection is Distribution line
Zone 3
essentially the portion of the circuit within which you want protection
the protection to sense a problem and provide protection.
The goal of protection is to have each major element of a
circuit protected by some form of relaying, and to provide Medium-voltage
backup protection should the primary protection not sense Zone 2 switchgear protection
the fault. The protective zones usually include some degree
of overlap to assure that every circuit element is included in Zone 1
at least one protective zone. Feeder protection
In the one-line diagram, the protective zones are: Z

one 4 is actually two zones, one for the left side of the
switchgear and one for the right side of the switchgear.
Z
one 1 is a feeder zone, where the zone includes the
Each zone includes all circuit breakers connected to that
feeder circuit breaker and the load circuit that the feeder
bus (in the diagram, the main, tie and feeder circuit
circuit breaker serves.
breakers, but in a real installation, there would be more
Z
one 2 is a bus zone, in this example with two main circuit feeder circuit breakers), and extends to side of the circuit
breakers and two feeder circuit breakers, and no tie circuit breakers opposite the main bus.
breaker. The protective zone extends to include the side of
Z
one 5 is a transformer zone, with protection extending to
each circuit breaker opposite the main bus of the
the side of the primary circuit breaker and the side of the
switchgear.
secondary circuit breaker away from the transformer itself.
Z
one 3 is a zone for the interconnecting conductors that
Z
one 6 is a bus zone, similar to zone 2, except in this case
extend from the switchgear in zone 4 to that in zone 2.
involving generator circuit breakers.
The zone extends to the side of each circuit breaker
opposite the cables of the distribution line. This type of Z
one 7 is the generator zone, extending to include the
zone is typically associated with pilot wire relaying and generator, the connecting cables, and the generator circuit
long interconnecting circuits. breaker.
To implement the protection zones, the preferred location of
current transformers is on the side of the circuit breaker
away from the zone. So, in zone 1, the preferred location for Main bus
current transformers (CTs) is on the bus side of the feeder
circuit breaker.
In zone 3, the CTs in the zone 4 switchgear are ideally Vacuum circuit breaker
located on the main bus side of that circuit breaker, and in
the zone 2 switchgear, ideally on the main bus side of that
switchgear.
In zone 4, the main breaker CTs are ideally on the CT location (load side
transformer side of the main, the load feeder CTs ideally on of the circuit breaker)
the load cable side of the circuit, and the tie circuit breaker
CTs on the side of the tie opposite the bus being protected.
Similar thoughts apply for the other zones.
In each situation, the concept is that the zone includes the
circuit breakers at the extremes of the zone, so that any fault
inside the zone will be sensed, and the appropriate circuit
breaker tripped to eliminate the fault. Another fundamental
concept of protective relaying is to cause the smallest So, the portion of the circuit un-protected is extremely small.
possible part of the circuit to be interrupted for any given In addition, due to the nature of GIS switchgear, this region
fault, instead of shutting down the entire system. is probably the most highly secure region of the entire circuit
as the GIS enclosure isolates this portion of the circuit from
These examples illustrate that there are a number of all environmental conditions. Further, if a fault does occur is
applications in which the ideal location of CTs is on the main this small, un-protected zone, it really does not matter if the
bus side of switchgear. The practical reality is that this is not fault is sensed or not, as the circuit breaker itself is failing.
always possible with any kind of equipment, be it gas- Since in this situation, the circuit breaker itself is at fault,
insulated switchgear (GIS) or air-insulated switchgear (AIS). opening of the circuit breaker would not remove the fault.
Due to the nature of GIS, the issue arises more frequently
than for AIS, so our discussion focuses on GIS equipment. For Therefore, there is no practical risk associated with locating
cases in which it is not possible to locate the CTs on the main the CTs on the load side of the circuit breaker instead of on
bus side of the circuit breaker, a judgment must be made as the line (bus) side of the circuit breaker.
to the degree of risk associated with not including some TechTopics are published for informational purposes only. Siemens
portion of the desired zone in the actual zone of protection. makes no guaranty of accuracy or applicability to any specific customer
Consider the example that is probably most common, that of use of this information. Siemens recommends that anyone seeking to
a normal feeder circuit breaker in a GIS lineup. The desired use this information in field operations consult with or verify its
location for the feeder CTs (zone 1 in our example one-line applicability through an independent qualified professional.
diagram) is on the main bus side of the feeder circuit
breaker. However, in GIS switchgear, locating CTs on the
main bus side is very difficult (i.e., expensive) and increases use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of
the switchgear height. The switchgear is designed for further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
installation of CTs on the load side of the circuit breaker, as respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
shown in the illustration of single-bus type 8DA GIS below. of contract.
So judgment is required, assessment of the risk associated
with the location of the CT on the load side of the circuit as All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
compared to the ideal location on the main bus side of the
circuit breaker. The difference in the two locations is that
with the CT on the load side, the circuit breaker is not in the Siemens Industry, Inc.
zone of protection. 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591
What is the risk of not including the circuit breaker in the
zone? Small, almost infinitesimal, but not zero. If the circuit Subject to change without prior notice.
breaker is not in the zone, the protection will not sense a Order No.: IC1000-F320-A270-X-4A00
fault in the circuit breaker. What is the practical significance? All rights reserved.
Siemens position is that this is of little concern in practical © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
terms. If the fault is in the region between the practical load-
side CT location and the ideal main bus-side CT location, the
portion of the circuit that is not protected includes several www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
feet of copper conductor and the vacuum interrupter, all
inside the gas-insulated enclosure.
2
TechTopics No. 114
Low-ratio current transformers in medium-voltage controllers
In medium-voltage motor controller (MVC) design and B

y wrapping the primary conductor through the CT
construction, very frequently there is a need for low-ratio window several times, the turns ratio can be adjusted, and
current transformers (CTs) to correspond to low full-load thereby allow use of a toroidal CT while obtaining
currents of the motors controlled by the starters. At the same acceptable accuracy.
time, users want the equipment to be as compact as possible
A
n alternative is available, that of using wound-type CTs,
while achieving the necessary CT relay accuracy class. To
wherein the CT does have a primary conductor, and the
accomplish both objectives, multiple primary turns are used
primary conductor is wrapped around the CT core multiple
on CTs to allow use of a higher ratio CT (with the desired
times during manufacture. These CTs accomplish the same
relay accuracy class) to provide the effective lower ratio
basic function of a toroidal CT with multiple primary turns,
needed for the application.
but require substantially more space in the MVC
The purpose of this issue of TechTopics is to discuss the compartment and are much less economic.
application of multiple primary turns on CTs as used in
Consider a typical example of use of higher ratio CT to
Siemens’ controllers.
provide the effective low ratio needed. The example CT in
The basic fundamentals of MVC application are: the figure is a 200:5 CT but the application needs a different
(lower) ratio. This 200:5 CT could be used to provide
In a class E2 controller, the short-circuit protection is
effective ratios of 40:5, 50:5, or 100:5 by the use of five,
provided by current-limiting fuses. Overload relays and
four, or two primary turns.
their associated CTs are provided only for overload/locked
rotor and low-level fault protection and are not required In these examples, a 200:5 CT is used with a relay-accuracy
for short-circuit protection. class of C10, which is unchanged as the number of primary
turns is changed. In contrast, if a 40:5 CT were available, its
M
edium-voltage motors often have low full-load currents,
relay accuracy would be approximately C2, which would be
with values of 30 A-50 A not uncommon.
unacceptable for the application. Thus, it is clear that use of
T
he CTs used in MVC construction are toroidal type to higher ratio CTs and multiple primary turns allows for an
conserve space inside the controller compartment. economic solution for the user, efficient use of space, and
sufficient accuracy for the required application.
T
oroidal CTs do not have a primary conductor, but instead
rely on the primary cable that passes through the CT and
connects between the load side of the contactor and the
outgoing cable terminal pads for motor cables. Thus, the
number of primary turns is one, and a low-ratio CT (e.g.,
50:5, turns ratio 10:1) has relatively low accuracy for a CT
that physically fits inside the controller compartment.
CT ratio 200:5 200:5 200:5 200:5
Turns ratio 40:1 40:1 40:1 40:1
Primary turns 1 2 4 5
Effective CT ratio 200:5 100:5 50:5 40:5
Effective turns ratio 40:1 20:1 10:1 8:1
One primary turn Two primary turns Four primary turns Five primary turns


of contract.


7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, NC 27591

Order No.: EMMS-T40021-00-4A00
2
TechTopics No. 115
Third-party listing/labeling and recognition
In TechTopics No. 100, the overall issue of third-party listing The same product, listed for use in Canada, would carry the
of products was discussed. This issue of TechTopics carries mark shown in Figure 2. The addition of the “c” in the mark
the discussion a bit further, and presents examples of designates a product that has been investigated to the
UL LLC. marks that Siemens is authorized to apply to certain requirements for a normal (UL) listing, and in addition,
of our products. certain specified requirements in Canada. In practice, a cUL
listing is equivalent to a CSA listing in most provinces, as
Many of Siemens’ products are available with UL listing or
CSA Group and UL LLC. have a memorandum of
recognition, and UL authorizes the use of a variety of marks
understanding in which the two organizations mutually
on products. Some customers can become confused when
recognize the other organizations marks.
they see differing types of UL marks on different classes of
products. This issue of TechTopics provides a bit of A variant of these marks is used on type GMSG circuit
information about some of the UL marks that can appear on breakers, with both the C and the U.S. additions to indicate
Siemens’ products. A more comprehensive discussion of that the circuit breaker is both UL listed and cUL listed
various UL marks is available at http://ul.com/marks/ul- shown in Figure 3.
listing-and-classification-marks/appearance-and-
In each case, the mark would be supplemented as a
significance/marks-for-north-america/.
minimum with the Siemens name and the UL file number
The most widely used UL mark on Siemens’ products is the (for example, E-141469 for medium-voltage type GM-SG
UL listing mark, as below. This signifies that the product is a switchgear). The user can search the UL website (http://
final product and not simply a component and also that it database.ul.com) for this file number and obtain general
has been investigated by UL for all normal applications of guide information as to the meaning of the listing and the
the product. The marking in Figure 1 is used on a UL-listed overall requirements of the product.
product for use in the U.S.
Figure 4
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 5
For example, the file information for Siemens type GM-SG The UL file E141469 used in the examples applies to type
metal-clad switchgear can be reached by entering GM-SG and type GM38 metal-clad switchgear. For other
“E141469” in the UL File Number search box at the UL products, such as SIMOVAC medium-voltage controllers,
website, which would return the following information in differing file numbers apply.
Table 1:
Note that not every product can be UL (or cUL) listed or
recognized and have the appropriate UL mark applied. An
example is a utility revenue metering section in a lineup of
switchgear. These sections are normally custom
engineered to the detailed requirements of the utility and
since the construction is normally not identical to that
used in the product that is listed, UL does not allow a
listing mark on those sections. In such a case, all of the
sections in the lineup would normally carry the UL mark,
except the section that cannot be listed in accordance
Table 1 with UL restrictions. Other examples of sections that
cannot be UL listed/labeled are sections with a
configuration that has not been investigated by UL for
listing or recognition or a section containing non-listed (or
In turn, clicking on the link for DLAH.E141469 leads to the
non-recognized) components that are not specifically
listing of relevant product information in the UL file, along
identified in the corresponding product UL file.
with another link for general guide information associated
with the product family. This general guide information What is the significance to the user of when specifying a
gives information on the standards used to investigate the product that uses UL listed components and one that uses
products. UL recognized components? There is no significance for
the user, assuming that the product that the component is
Another marking authorized by UL is a recognition mark, of
installed in is a UL listed assembly. For the equipment
which there are two variants loosely corresponding to the
manufacturer, the difference is that the manufacturer can
basic listing marks. The UL recognition program is
use any UL listed component within the component’s
appropriate for component parts or sub-assemblies that are
listing parameters (such as ratings) without additional
part of a larger product or system. The component
paperwork activities with UL. However, for UL recognized
recognition program may contain restrictions on the use of
components, the manufacturer can use any component
the component, as it is a component and not the complete
bearing the recognition mark within the component’s
system. For this reason, a supplier using recognized
recognition parameters (such as ratings) but must have
components generally must comply with additional
the component specifically added to the UL product
requirements to assure that the component is used in the
procedure, an extra cost to the manufacturer but not an
overall assembly in compliance with the requirements of the
issue for the user of the end product.
recognition.
Typically, the recognition mark is used on products that are
intended to be components of a larger assembly, which is
Published by Siemens Industry, Inc. 2015.
designed and manufactured by another firm, usually an
Original Equipment Manufacturer. While Siemens’ circuit Siemens Industry
breakers are UL listed, when Siemens furnishes component 7000 Siemens Road
parts, such as a circuit breaker drawout cell or a skeleton Wendell, North Carolina 27591
unit or a cell parts kit, these items are part of a UL
recognized component product. For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
The marking in Figure 4 is used on a component that is UL
recognized for use in the U.S. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
The equivalent mark for a UL recognized component for use Article No. EMMS-T40034-00-4A00
in Canada follows. As for the UL listing mark, the addition of Printed in U.S.A.
the “C” in the mark designates a component that has been © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
investigated to additional requirements applicable to
Canada in Figure 5. Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
document only contains general descriptions and/or performance
The information in the UL website relating to component features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
recognition is available at the same website cited earlier, which may undergo modification in the course of further
by clicking on the relevant link for components, either development of the products. The requested performance features
are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
DLAH2.E141469 for UL recognition of components for use
concluded contract.
in the US, or DLAH8.E141469 for cUL recognition for
components for use in Canada.
TechTopics No. 116
Arc-resistant switchgear ‒ accessibility type C
This issue of TechTopics continues the discussion of In addition, the standard defines accessibility type
accessibility types for arc-resistant equipment from modifiers (suffixes) to the arc-resistant accessibility types,
TechTopics No. 70, discusses the hazards associated with A, B, C, and D. Suffix A applies when no other suffix
an arcing event, and explains Siemens opinion that type applies and is relevant to all arc-resistant equipment.
2C accessibility does not provide an increased level of Suffix B applies to equipment that maintains arc-resistant
protection for personnel over that provided by equipment functionality when the door of the low-voltage control or
qualified as accessibility type 2B. instrumentation compartment is temporarily open.
Equipment that has been qualified in accordance with the Suffix C is for equipment in which arc-resistant
internal arcing tests established in IEEE Std C37.20.71 is functionality is maintained among compartments internal
intended to provide a degree of protection to personnel to the equipment. Suffix D applies only to type 1
against some of the hazards associated with an internal equipment where one or more of the enclosure surfaces is
arcing event. An arcing fault presents many hazards, excluded due to inaccessibility to personnel.
amongst which are:
Many years ago, the concept of an accessibility modifier C
E
xtremely high temperatures originated in Canada, in which an arc originating in one
compartment is not allowed to migrate into adjacent
R
apid and dramatic atmospheric pressure increases
compartments, i.e., as from one circuit breaker
A
irborne exhaust byproducts (vaporized materials such compartment to another adjacent circuit breaker
as steel, aluminum, and copper, as well as gaseous compartment, or from one circuit breaker compartment to
byproducts of exposure of insulating materials to the an adjacent voltage transformer auxiliary compartment. It
arcing in air) was probably not intended to provide increased protection
to personnel, but over time, many users seem to have
T
he potential for ejection of loose parts (shrapnel) and
formed the perception that accessibility type 2C provides
other materials
greater protection to personnel than accessibility type 2A
E
xtreme noise levels. or 2B.
As discussed in TechTopics No. 70, IEEE Std C37.20.7 Equipment qualified as arc-resistant is intended to prevent
defines two basic accessibility types: 1 and 2. Type 1 significant escape of gases in the areas where personnel
accessibility indicates that the equipment has arc-resistant might be present. When an internal arcing test is
functionality at the front of the equipment only. Type 2 conducted in accordance with the IEEE Std C37.20.7
accessibility indicates that the equipment has arc-resistant standard, the areas in which personnel might be present
functionality at the front, both sides, and the rear of the are evaluated with flammable cotton indicators placed
equipment. 100 mm (four inches) from the vertical surfaces of the
equipment up to a height of two meters (79 inches) and
horizontal indicators placed at a height of two meters in
the area 100 – 800 mm ( 4 – 31.5 inches) from the
enclosure.
These indicators are not allowed to ignite as a result of an Exhaust gases contain potentially hazardous materials and
internal arcing fault, with few exceptions, such as chemicals, including vaporized metals, decomposition
indicators that ignite as a result of a label on the products of insulation exposed directly to the arc,
equipment burning and falling off of the equipment into vaporized paint, and a number of other materials. If the
contact with the indicator. While there is no precise equipment includes an exhaust plenum (exhaust duct) to
correlation, as yet, between the energy necessary to ignite direct the exhaust products outside of the equipment
the cotton indicators and incident energy, the functional room to an area from which personnel are excluded, much
intent is that the internal arcing tests roughly correspond of this hazard is mitigated. However, the procedures
to an incident energy exposure of 1.2 J/cm2 that is defined in the IEEE Std C37.20.7 standard do not evaluate
accepted as the threshold of a curable burn in IEEE Std this hazard and inside the confined space of an internal
1584 calculations. comparment, where significant exposure would be
unavoidable.
So, arc-resistant equipment provides a degree of
protection against the thermal effects of an arcing event, The high temperatures associated with an arcing event
by channeling arcing exhaust gases out of the equipment have been discussed, but only in the context of the areas
away from the areas in which personnel might be located. of the arc and the exhaust stream. But, when an arc
occurs inside an enclosure, the sheet metal surfaces of the
But, in the listing of hazards given earlier, the thermal
compartment in which the arc occurs will experience a
hazard is only one of the hazards associated with an
rapid and significant rise in temperature.
arcing event. What about the others?
Contact with the sheet metal surfaces of such a
The noise associated with an arcing event probably gives
compartment during, or shortly after the occurrence of an
rise to the phrase “arc blast”, as the noise is somewhat like
arcing event, would expose an operator to very high
that of an explosion. Experiments conducted by Richard
temperatures with the potential for injury. Very little is
Doughty and Dr. Thomas Neal2 reported sound levels that
known about these temperatures, other than that the
greatly exceeded the impact or impulsive sound pressure
paint on such sheet metal is usually discolored and the
(noise) limit established by OSHA7 of 140 dB, even for
metal itself is often distorted but otherwise intact.
relatively moderate fault levels4, 5, 6. Their research also
indicated that there is no safe time duration for exposure In summary, if a person were inside a compartment
to such extreme sound levels, i.e., that hearing damage is performing work adjacent to a compartment that
virtually assured. With arc-resistant equipment, much of experienced an internal arcing event, that person will
the sound pressure would be attenuated by the enclosure, likely experience temperatures high enough to result in
but by no means all of the sound pressure. As a result, injury. Certainly, the noise from the arcing event,
unless hearing protection is used in the vicinity of occurring on the other side of a metal side wall, would
energized electrical equipment, severe hearing damage is likely cause hearing damage and the pressure increase
likely to occur3. and gaseous vapor entry in the compartment would
expose that person to a myriad of potential hazards.
Another major hazard associated with arcing is due to
Beyond that, there would be a great potential for
rapid pressure increases. Arc-resistant equipment is
traumatic stress. Altogether, Siemens is led to conclude
designed so that the outer envelope of the equipment
that a person should never be working in an open
stays intact to prevent hot gas escape, which has the
compartment of energized electrical equipment, even if
effect that pressure is not placed directly on personnel
the equipment is qualified as arc-resistant.
although personnel in the area around the equipment
would certainly feel the significant pressure rise in the Some users specify accessibility type 2C to the IEEE Std
room and might perhaps feel uncomfortable. Internally to C37.20.7 document, thinking that the construction will
the equipment within adjacent compartments, this reduce the potential hazard risks making it safe to work
uncomfortable feeling would be dramatically increased as inside the compartment adjacent to the compartment in
the compartment walls would transmit the reduced which the arcing event occurs. The discussion in this issue
pressure waves as they act essentially as drums. This of TechTopics should illustrate that the hazards to
action would expose any personnel inside the personnel working inside a compartment adjacent to one
compartment to increased pressures and any harmful in which an arcing event occurs are only partially
effects. Additionally, as the sheet metal bulges due to the addressed by the tests defined in the standard. As a result,
pressure increase resulting in distortion of the adjacent the working group for the original creation and
compartments, the potential for physical injury due to subsequent revisions of the standard considered seriously
shrapnel or the reduction of space within the comparment not including type C accessibility in the document. It was
is also increased. finally included only because of the potential for widely
varying test protocols that would result if C37.20.7 did
not standardize the requirements.
2
As discussed in this issue of TechTopics, Siemens is of the References:
opinion that accessibility type 2C does not provide an
1. ANSI/IEEE Std C37.20.7-2007, “IEEE Guide for Testing
increased level of protection for personnel as compared to
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for
the level of protection provided by accessibility type 2B.
Internal Arcing Faults,” IEEE (http://standards/ieee.org)
There is some thought that if an arcing event occurs in
equipment that is qualified as accessibility type 2C, the 2. R. L. Doughty, Dr. T. Neal, T.A. Dear, and A. H. Bingham,
damage to the equipment (and hence, the time to restore “Testing Update on Protective Clothing & Equipment for
the equipment to usability) will be reduced. This may be Electric Arc Exposure”, IEEE Petroleum and Chemical
the case with low-level arcing events, but it is doubtful it Industry Conference, Sept., 1997.
is real with arcing faults that approach the ratings of the
3. ANSI/IEEE Std 902-1998 (the “IEEE Yellow Book”), “IEEE
equipment. In arcing events, the sheet metal of the
Guide for Maintenance, Operation, and Safety of
enclosure is distorted in the direction of the adjacent
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems, IEEE (http://
switchgear compartments. This distortion may be
standards/ieee.org)
sufficiently severe to make it necessary to replace or
reconstruct the adjacent compartments so that their 4. “Arc Flash Hazards, Incident Energy, PPE Ratings &
functionality is restored. This is particularly the case when Thermal Burn Injury – A Deeper Look”, T. Gammon, W.
the adjacent compartment is a circuit breaker Lee, Z. Zhang, B. Johnson, IEEE IAS Electrical Safety
compartment as the enclosure may be distorted to the Workshop, Louisville, 2015.
point that secondary disconnects, racking mechanisms,
5. “ Testing update on protective clothing and equipment
mechanically operated switches and the like would no
for electric arc exposure”, R. L. Doughty, T. E. Neal, T. A.
longer function correctly.
Dear, and A. H. Bingham, IEEE IAS Magazine, V5, no. 1,
Several vendors indicate that they can provide equipment Jan/Feb 1999.
with accessibility type 2C, but they do not provide the
6. “Shrapnel, pressure, and noise”, T. E. Neal, R. F. Parry,
details to understand what they can (and more
IEEE IAS Magazine, V11, no 3, May/June 2005.
importantly, what they cannot) do.
7. 29CFR 1910.95(b)(2), Table G-16, footnote (1)
Sampling of competitive information indicates that:
www.osha.gov.
S
ome vendors claim to offer type 2C if the equipment
does not have stacked circuit breaker cells, and with
restrictions on arrangement of auxiliary (VT, CPT or CPT
fuse drawout trays) equipment.
If circuit breakers are stacked, no known vendor can
offer type 2C for the entire equipment including the
rear cable connection compartments. For such designs,
the lower cable compartment cannot exhaust arcing
byproducts and gases except through the upper cable
compartment, and hence, cannot be type 2C in the
rear.
S
imilar logic applies to drawout auxiliary
compartments, such as for VTs, CPTs, or CPT fuses. Siemens Industry
Typically, vendors who can offer two drawout auxiliaries 7000 Siemens Road
Wendell, North Carolina 27591
in a circuit breaker sized cell of non-arc-resistant
equipment have to restrict auxiliaries to one drawout For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
auxiliary compartment per circuit breaker sized cell. Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
In summary, the benefits of type 2C accessibility are
illusory. Even the claimed benefit of reduced downtime to
rebuild a section that has experienced an arcing fault is Article No. EMMS-T40029-00-4A00
not real, and no claim of increased safety for personnel is Printed in U.S.A.
valid. Type 2C only relates to the equipment, not to safety © 2015 Siemens Industry, Inc.
of personnel, as no personnel safety benefit is provided
beyond that provided by equipment of type 2B Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
accessibility.
features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
which may undergo modification in the course of further
development of the products. The requested performance features
concluded contract.
3
TechTopics No. 117
MOC / TOC switches
Certain questions seem to arise often, even on topics that Historically, specifiers of switchgear for complex
have been recognized in the industry for decades. One of continuous process applications (such as in petro-chem
these is the question of mechanism-operated cell (MOC) facilities, steel mills, or utility generating stations)
and truck-operated cell (TOC) switches, where there still is requested a large number of additional auxiliary switches
uncertainty as to what they are and why they exist. for use in their external overall system control schemes.
These auxiliary switches could not be accommodated on
Users are familiar with circuit breaker mounted auxiliary
the circuit breaker removable element itself, as the
switches, typically referred to as 52a and 52b switches.
number of secondary disconnect contacts was limited.
IEEE Std C37.2 (as does IEEE Std C37.20.2) defines the
meaning of 52a and 52b switches, which (paraphrased) To provide the effective number of auxiliary switch
are: contacts that users requested, the MOC switch was
created. IEEE Std C37.2 (and IEEE Std C37.20.2) describe
52a a
circuit breaker operating mechanism actuated
the MOC switch as a mechanism-operated contact or
switch that is closed when the main contacts are
mechanism-operated cell switch, that is mounted in the
closed.
stationary housing (cubicle) and includes the necessary
52b a
circuit breaker operating mechanism actuated linkage so that the switch positions mimic those of the
switch that is closed when the main contacts are 52a / 52b switches. So, the corresponding definitions are:
open.
52MOC-a n auxiliary switch (installed in the
a
These switches are actuated by the circuit breaker stationary housing) that is closed when the
operating mechanism directly, and are mounted on the circuit breaker main contacts are closed.
circuit breaker. In Siemens’ circuit breakers, the auxiliary
52MOC-b n auxiliary switch (installed in the
a
switches are mechanically linked to the main rotating
stationary housing) that is closed when the
shaft of the circuit breaker, so they faithfully mimic the
circuit breaker main contacts are open.
condition of the main contacts.
Siemens’ standard practice is to arrange the MOC switches
Typically, a circuit breaker has a limited number of
so they are operated only in the connected position, not
auxiliary switches, usually eight. Of these, several are
in the test position. Historically, many users preferred to
used in the control circuit of the circuit breaker, with three
have the MOC switches operated through a linkage that
or four auxiliary switches unused and available for use in
operates the switches when the circuit breaker is in the
the user’s control circuits. All of the auxiliary switch stages
connected position, and when the circuit breaker is in the
that are connected to circuits off of the circuit breaker
test position. However, this can be a problem for certain
itself must be connected through secondary disconnect
control schemes, as a circuit breaker that is in the test
contacts. The limitation of the number of secondary
position and closed is not “closed” on the main power
disconnect contacts available also limits the number of
circuit, and the external control scheme must not sense
auxiliary switch contacts available on the circuit breaker.
this as a closed circuit breaker.
Therefore, when the MOC switches are operated in the Assuming that the circuit breakers have the same ratings,
connected as well as in the test position, the 52MOC-a the feeder circuit breakers and main and tie circuit
switches usually need to be in series with a 52TOC-a breakers will all be interchangeable and all will have the
switch that corresponds to the position of the circuit operating linkage for the MOC and TOC switches.
breaker inside the compartment, and the 52MOC-b
The TOC switches are often used for motor circuits, to
switches need to be in parallel with a 52TOC-b switch.
energize space heaters in the motor. In this usage, the
This is why the function of a TOC switch is needed.
circuit breaker 52b (or, more frequently, the 52MOC-b)
IEEE Std C37.2 and IEEE Std C37.20.2 describe the TOC switch is wired in parallel with a 52TOC-b switch so that
switch as a truck-operated contact or truck-operated cell when the circuit breaker is in the connected position and
switch, mounted in the stationary housing (cubicle) and open, the motor space heater is energized by the 52b (or
arranged to indicate the position of the circuit breaker in 52MOC-b) switch, and when the circuit breaker is
the circuit breaker compartment. So, the corresponding removed from the connected position, the motor space
definitions are: heater is energized through the 52TOC-b switch. Again,
the TOC switch not be required if the 52MOC-b switch
52TOC-a n auxiliary switch (installed in the
a
only operates when the circuit breaker is in the connected
stationary housing) that is closed when the
position.
circuit breaker removable element (truck) is
in the connected position, and open when This is an area of switchgear technology in which users
the circuit breaker removable element (truck) have been slow to accept the changes made possible by
is not in the connected position. modern electronic protection relays and programmable
controllers. Many years ago, when it was not uncommon
52TOC-b n auxiliary switch (installed in the
a
to have nine or even more relays on a main circuit breaker
stationary housing) that is open when the
compartment panel (three overcurrent, three differential,
circuit breaker removable element (truck) is
and three voltage) and automatic-transfer schemes used a
in the connected position, and closed when
number of discrete devices and multiple circuit breaker
the circuit breaker removable element
auxiliary switches, all of these MOC and TOC switches
(truck) is not in the connected position.
were necessary.
In this issue of TechTopics, Siemens uses the designations
With today’s electronic multifunction protection relays,
from IEEE Std C37.2, as above. It should be noted that
bay controllers and programmable controllers, the
some users prefer to refer to these switches with alternate
electronic devices do not need the number of auxiliary
forms, 52S for the 52MOC switch, and 52H for the 52TOC
contacts required by the historic schemes, and the need
switch.
for MOC and TOC switches has decreased dramatically.
Siemens’ standard practice is to operate the MOC switches
Unfortunately, old habits die hard, and many user
only in the connected position, not in the test position.
specifications still call for a great number of MOC and TOC
This has the advantage of eliminating the need for a
switches, unnecessarily complicating the engineering and
52TOC-a switch in series with the 52MOC-a switch, as the
manufacture of the switchgear, the commissioning
52MOC-a switch will not be actuated when the circuit
process, and equipment maintenance.
breaker is in the test position and closed. Similarly, the
need for 52TOC-b switch contacts in parallel with
52MOC-b switches is eliminated.
However, if specified by the purchaser, Siemens can
arrange the MOC switches so that they are operated by Siemens Industry
7000 Siemens Road
the circuit breaker in both the connected and the test
positions inside the circuit breaker compartment. Some
users prefer that the MOC switch be operated in both test For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
and connected positions so as to allow for complete Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
system checks during commissioning.
One of the major advantages of use of MOC and TOC
switches is that the circuit breaker is simplified. As an Article No. EMMS-T40036-00-4A00
example, if the user has complex external control scheme Printed in U.S.A.
requirements that relate to the main circuit breaker and to © 2016 Siemens Industry, Inc.
the tie circuit breaker, but fewer requirements for auxiliary
Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
switches on feeder circuit breakers, the additional control
circuit MOC and TOC switches can be provided only in the features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
main and tie circuit breaker compartments, and not in the which may undergo modification in the course of further
feeder circuit breaker compartments. This reduces the development of the products. The requested performance features
purchase cost of the switchgear. Also, the circuit breakers are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
need not be unique for the main and tie circuit breaker concluded contract.
compartments.
TechTopics No. 118
Bolted construction vs. welded construction
Historically, metal-clad switchgear was constructed using So, every frame was placed on an alignment table and
welded frames to support the structure. However, the teased into proper alignment (i.e., hammered into place).
industry has moved away from welded construction to use Finished frames, verified to be within tolerance, were
bolted construction. Siemens was one of the last major handled in a gentle manner and then placed back onto
firms to abandon welded construction, in the middle the alignment table, and were often found to have moved
1980s, when stacked switchgear was introduced. Even out of tolerance.
though welded construction has been obsolete for several
The finished frames were then used in further assembly
decades, we still see specifications inspired by older
steps and the resulting assembly had to then be
examples that call for welded construction. This issue of
individually adjusted to fit into the final assembly and to
TechTopics discusses Siemens’ experiences providing
achieve the desired interchangeability.
products using both construction methods and the lessons
derived from those experiences. After experiencing this for several years, Siemens
converted the assembly to a tab and slot bolted assembly,
What are the perceived benefits of welded construction
using sheet steel fabricated on numerically controlled
versus bolted construction?
machines that produced parts to +/- 0.010 inch tolerance.
Most people would say that welded construction is Results? The parts went together first time every time, the
rugged, indestructible, the image of quality, etc., but that alignment operation was eliminated, the trial fit operation
perception is the opposite of reality. in the final assembly was eliminated, and nagging
problems in field installations disappeared.
Welded structural assemblies are inherently dimensionally
unstable. When metal pieces are welded together, they With a welded assembly, the design must incorporate
often move relative to each other. This movement makes means to adjust mechanisms and mountings to account
it nearly impossible to hold tight dimensional tolerances for the fact that a welded assembly can be dimensionally
which is why in most cases critical interfaces on welded unpredictable. Anything that must be adjustable is
assemblies are machined or added after the welding undesirable because of the expense of performing the
process is complete. As an example, Siemens many years adjustments, the expense of fixtures or tools required to
ago manufactured a welded frame that was intended to enable the adjustment, and the need to instruct the end
have a manufacturing tolerance of +/- 0.010 inches (ten user concerning the adjustment should it ever be needed.
thousandths of an inch) over an assembly of roughly 36
One issue is that the adjustment seldom needs to be made
inches on a side. Two vertical supports were welded to a
at the installation but inexperienced maintenance persons
rectangular frame with all parts held in a robotic welding
or outside maintenance firms often adjust settings that
fixture to assure precise alignment. During welding, the
are not out of spec. When this has happened, the
vertical supports could be observed moving in response to
manufacturer must have well-experienced service
the thermal stresses. In a repeatable, robotic welding
engineers who can analyze a severely misadjusted
configuration, optimized to reduce the amount of
product, re-zero it, and restore it to proper working
movement due to thermal stresses, finished assemblies
condition.
varied by as much as 0.160 inches ‒ 16 times the limit.
Such a design is a disservice to a user, and extremely
costly to a manufacturer.
In summary, how does a welded-structure design measure
up?
On many occasions while demonstrating switchgear to a
potential purchaser, Siemens has used a circuit breaker of
the correct ratings, selected at random, and inserted it
into the appropriate switchgear compartment (type GM-
SG or GM38) without difficulties. The experience
historically with welded assemblies was completely
different – often the circuit breaker and/or the cubicle
required persuasion before both would mate properly.
The lesson is that quality is predictability, and the
predictability of bolted-structural designs was made
possible by the revolution that came with the introduction
of numerically controlled machinery. These modern
machines, along with designs that capitalized on the CNC
capabilities, made possible today’s products, where quality
is designed in, not added afterwards using alignment
operations.
Please be aware that all welded construction is not bad.
When it comes to assemblies where larger manufacturing
tolerances can be accommodated more readily, or when
post-welding process (such as machining) are possible in a
cost-effective and consistent manner, welded construction
is a viable option. For example, the base-frame structures
that form the foundations for many power equipment
center structures commonly use welded construction.
Siemens Industry
7000 Siemens Road
For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.

Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
Article No. EMMS-T40038-00-4A00

Printed in U.S.A.
Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this

development of the products. The requested performance features
concluded contract.
TechTopics No. 119
Momentary ratings – peak or rms?
The meaning of a “momentary rating”, and the ratings The major reason that Siemens still shows the rms
values, are the subject of this issue of TechTopics. When asymmetrical current values is that the NEC® (NFPA 70®)
discussing medium-voltage circuit breaker ratings, the still mentions the asymmetrical current rating.
momentary rating is referred to as the closing and
Article 490.21(A)(4)(3) requires that the closing rating of
latching current rating. For low-voltage power circuit
a circuit breaker be not less than the maximum
breakers, it is referred to as the making current. The
asymmetrical fault current into which the circuit breaker
momentary ratings of switchgear and circuit breakers
can be closed. Similarly, article 490.21(A)(4)(4) requires
have been discussed in previous TechTopics issues
that the momentary rating of a circuit breaker be not less
including 4, 21, 22, 26, and 44.
than the maximum asymmetrical fault current at the
In older versions of the standards, for example, IEEE Std circuit breaker.
C37.04-1979 and IEEE Std C37.20.2-1987, the required
This reference is one of the last references to the
values for closing and latching current (for medium-
asymmetrical current rating in the NEC. Over the years,
voltage circuit breakers) and momentary current (for
the other references to momentary or asymmetrical
medium-voltage, metal-clad switchgear), were stated in
current ratings have been modified. Unfortunately, the
rms asymmetrical (total) current, as 1.6 times the rated
upcoming 2017 edition of the NEC still has these
symmetrical current of the circuit breaker or switchgear.
references so the need to understand what the
IEEE Std C37.04-1979 also contained a condition that the
momentary capability is will remain.
peak value should not exceed 2.7 times the rated
symmetrical current value. Published by Siemens Industry, Inc. 2015.
These values were based on 60 Hz system frequency and Siemens Industry

an X/R ratio of 17. The calculations, however, were 7000 Siemens Road
performed manually with slide rules and were actually Wendell, North Carolina 27591
incorrect. With today’s personal computers, the correct
values can be calculated, which yields a peak value For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
slightly below 2.6 times the symmetrical current rating Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
and an rms asymmetrical value of 1.55 times the
symmetrical current rating.
Modern versions of the standards have changed the rating Article No. EMMS-T40035-00-4A00
Printed in U.S.A.
to be the peak value equal to 2.6 times the symmetrical
current rating for medium-voltage circuit breakers and 2.3
(unfused circuit breakers) or 2.16 (fused circuit breakers) Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
times the symmetrical current ratings for low-voltage document only contains general descriptions and/or performance
power circuit breakers and associated switchgear. features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
Siemens still continues to publish both the peak current development of the products. The requested performance features
values and the rms asymmetrical current values. Why is are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
this? concluded contract.
TechTopics No. 120
High-potential testing – current doesn’t matter!
Siemens often receives questions from testing firms and For medium-voltage switchgear products, the required
users about high-potential testing, particularly with low- test voltages are:
energy dc hi-pot test sets used to conduct tests of vacuum
integrity on circuit breakers. These test sets are designed
to be compact and highly portable, and therefore, have Rated Rated power-
relatively limited output capabilities, and particularly of Field test Field test
maximum frequency
voltage voltage
current. voltage withstand
In most commercial test laboratories and in our factory, ac kV (rms) kV (rms) kV (rms) kV dc
high-potential test sets are used that are relatively large, 4.76 19 14.25 20.2
and hence not readily portable, which have adequate 8.25 36 27 38.2
voltage and current output to allow maintenance of the
15.0 36 27 38.2
required test voltage without tripping the test set on
15.0 generator
current. 38 28.5 40.3
circuit breaker
For high-potential withstand-voltage testing, it is the 27.6 60 45 64
voltage level and the time duration that matter – the
38.0 80 60 85
leakage current during the test does not matter.
In high-potential testing (referred to as power-frequency
withstand testing in IEEE standards), the test voltage is
applied to each conductor in turn with all other At these test voltages, the equipment experiences partial
conductors and the equipment frame grounded. To be discharges and significant capacitive-charging current, so
considered a passed test, the test voltage must be held the test set must be able to support the current required
successfully for 60 seconds. The test voltage is far above at the test voltage. Even if the testing is performed with
the normal service voltage, for example, the test voltage dc test voltage, the most common means of testing in
for typical switchgear rated 15 kV is 36 kV ac. In contrast, actual installations, the test set must still be able to
in normal service, the line-ground voltage would only be support the current required for the duration of the test.
15 kV / 1.732 = 8.7 kV.
When vacuum interrupters are tested for vacuum integrity,
the test voltage is applied across the open contacts of the
vacuum interrupter.
The various possible current paths from one side of the
interrupter to the other (and to ground) include the gap
between the open contacts inside the interrupter, the
exterior (ceramic) surfaces of the vacuum interrupter, the
insulators from each side of the vacuum interrupter to A
ground, the insulating pushrods between the interrupter
C B
and operating mechanism and the tension struts from one
side of the interrupter to the other.
These paths are illustrated in the photo in Figure 1 of the
circuit breaker operating mechanism used in a type GMSG C
circuit breaker. Thus, there are multiple parallel paths for A
current flow. In addition, the ambient humidity when the
test is conducted can influence the current demanded
significantly. This even influences testing in the factory D
and design testing, as there can be adverse atmospheric
conditions that prevent us from conducting design tests in
accordance with the standards until such conditions
abate. Item Description
A Standoff support insulators
When conducting high-potential tests on any equipment,
special care must be exercised to clean the exterior B Tension struts
insulation surfaces, to reduce the surface currents that C Interrupter ceramic insulators
flow across contaminated insulation. Especially in the case D Operating pushrods
of testing for vacuum integrity, the objective is to
determine if the vacuum interrupter has maintained its Figure 1: Type 3AH3 operating mechanism
vacuum integrity, and therefore, the exterior of the
interrupter and other insulating surfaces must be as clean
as possible.
Because of the variability encountered in high-potential
testing, the current during the test can vary considerably,
but the current level is not relevant to the test. For a high-
potential test, the criterion for pass/fail is whether the test
specimen, in this case the vacuum interrupter, sustain the
test voltage for at least one minute without breakdown.
IEEE standard 4, the standard for high-voltage test
techniques, recognizes this limitation and states that
when relative humidity exceeds about 80 percent, the
disruptive discharge voltage during the test becomes
irregular, especially when a disruptive discharge occurs
over an insulating surface, and because of this test results Siemens Industry
can be inconsistent. 7000 Siemens Road
Another aspect to remember about high-potential testing
is that the leakage current increases as the size of the test For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
specimen increases. In our factory, Siemens has no Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
difficulty testing normal shipping groups consisting of up
to five sections of switchgear, but if we attempt to www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
increase the number of sections tested simultaneously,
the leakage current from many parallel paths between the Article No. EMMS-T40037-00-4A00
Printed in U.S.A.
test leads overwhelms even the rather large test sets that
used in the factory. In a jobsite test situation, when the
high-potential test equipment is likely of lower capacity Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
than used in the factory, this becomes a more prevalent document only contains general descriptions and/or performance
problem. features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
For high-potential withstand-voltage testing, it is the development of the products. The requested performance features
voltage level and the time duration that matter – the are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
leakage current during the test does not matter. concluded contract.
TechTopics No. 121
Ground return currents in gas-insulated switchgear
The Siemens type 8DA (single-bus) and 8DB (double-bus)

switchgear use single-phase construction. An advantage
of this construction is that there is no possibility of a
phase-to-phase fault inside the switchgear, and a A
extremely small chance of a single-phase to ground fault
inside the switchgear. The construction makes the high- D1
voltage components and buses essentially immune to the
environment. A further feature is that current
transformers (CTs) can be economic low-voltage toroidal B
type CTs, since the CT primary conductor is the bus bar
inside the switchgear. The CT then has no dielectric stress
imposed on it, eliminating the potential for a dielectric D2
failure inside the CT. Further, since the switchgear
C
housings are non-magnetic cast aluminum, mounting of
the CTs outside the enclosure has no effect on the CT
accuracy.
Questions have been asked about the operation of the CT
in the event of a single phase to ground fault on the
downstream load cables. Since the ground fault current
will return along the cable and then through the
switchgear structure, the concern is that the ground Figure 1
return current will offset the outgoing phase current and
render the protective relay insensitive in the event of a Item Description
single phase to ground fault downstream of the
A Main bus housing
switchgear.
B Vacuum interrupter housing
Simply stated, the ground current does return along the
C Current transformer housing
cable shield conductor, but it does not pass directly
through the switchgear housing, and therefore the D1 Insulator and gas barrier
ground return current does not pass through the CT D2 Insulator
window.
Ground jumpers between main bus housings (A)
E
The graphic in Figure 1 illustrates a typical circuit breaker and interrupter housings (B)
unit of single-bus type 8DA gas-insulated switchgear. The F Ground connection
main bus housing (A) is located at the top, with the
G Main bus housing ground jumpers
vacuum interrupter housing (B) located below, and the
current transformer housing (C) located beneath (B).
The red areas between compartments indicate the epoxy
insulators that electrically separate the compartments
from each other.
Some of these are open to allow gas transfer between
compartments (D2) and some of these (D1) are gas G
A
barriers for the isolation of the switchgear into
appropriate gas zones.
D1 E
The switchgear includes ground jumpers to connect the
various housings together and to the switchgear ground
bus. The photo in Figure 2 shows examples of ground B
jumpers (G) between adjacent housings in the bus bar
area (A), and ground jumpers (E) between the bus bar
housing and interrupter housings (B). However, the D2
manner of grounding in the area of the CTs differs.
C
F
Figure 2
A G A G
E E
D1 D1
Figure 3
B B
Instead, the ground connection (F) is made to the bottom

of the CT housing, preventing the ground return current
from passing directly through the CT window.
D2 D2
This illustrates the concept. All of our gas-insulated
switchgear has grounding connections that are designed
C C
and configured such that the ground return current does
not pass through the CT window, and hence, CTs properly
F F sense phase current and ground current and relays can
operate correctly.
Returning to Figure 1, the epoxy insulator D2 does not Siemens Industry

have a ground jumper directly between the vacuum 7000 Siemens Road
interrupter housing (B) and the CT housing (C). Thus,
there is no current connection for ground return current For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
through the aluminum housings. Instead, the connection Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
is made from the bottom of the CT housing directly to the
ground bus of the switchgear, allowing ground current to www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
return to ground, but not allowing the ground return
current to pass through the current transformer window. Article No. EMMS-T40041-00-4AUS
Printed in U.S.A.
This is illustrated in Figure 3. This shows the connection © 2016 Siemens Industry, Inc.
from the bottom side of the CT housing to the ground bus
system of the switchgear. Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
The CTs are mounted in area C. The epoxy bushing features which may not always specifically reflect those described, or
between the CT housing (C) and the vacuum interrupter which may undergo modification in the course of further
housing (B) does not have a grounding jumper across the development of the products. The requested performance features
epoxy bushing.
concluded contract.
TechTopics No. 122
Current transformer thermal-rating factor
Current transformers have a thermal-rating factor, as

specified in the instrument transformer standard, IEEE Std
C57.13. Due to the number of questions Siemens receives
about the thermal-rating factor (TRF), it appears there is
confusion what the practical meaning of the TRF is.
IEEE Std C57.13 provides a thermal-rating factor curve for
current transformers to give the permissible loading for
the current transformer as a percentage of rated primary
current when the current transformer is in various
ambient temperatures. The figure shown is from IEEE Std
C57.13. Percent of rated primary current is shown on the
vertical axis and ambient temperature (in °C) is shown on
the horizontal axis.
The standard rating basis of all current transformers is
that the current transformer must be capable of carrying
100-percent rated current without exceeding 55 °C
average winding temperature rise while in an ambient of
30 °C, thus a maximum allowable average winding
temperature of 85 °C. In the curve shown, note that a CT
with TRF of 1.0 (the lowest curve) intersects 100-percent
of rated primary current at an ambient temperature of
30 °C.
Current transformers are available in several values of TRF,
depending on rated primary current, such as 1.0, 1.33,
1.5, 2.0, 3.0, and 4.0. As applied in metal-enclosed and
metal-clad switchgear or outdoor air-insulated circuit
breakers, the higher values of TRF are generally not
available due to space and other constraints in the overall
equipment.
The standard recognizes that many current transformers
are used in conditions of ambient temperature quite
different from 30 °C. At the same time, IEEE Std C57.13
maintains a strict upper limit on average winding
temperature of 85 °C.
In metal-enclosed and metal-clad switchgear and outdoor Consider another example of an 800:5 CT with TRF of 2.0
air-insulated circuit breakers, the rated maximum external (installed in switchgear, 148-percent) in a switchgear
ambient temperature is 40 °C, and the temperature rise of compartment rated 1,200 A. For this example, the CT
the air inside the enclosure is considered as 15 °C. As a would be capable of 1,184 A, so the switchgear or circuit
result, the maximum ambient temperature inside the breaker combination would be limited to 1,184 A, instead
enclosure for the purposes of current transformer of the switchgear rating of 1,200 A. To obtain the higher
operation is considered as 55 °C, and the allowable capability of 1,200 A, a higher-ratio CT (e.g., 1,000:5)
temperature rise with 55 °C ambient is 30 °C, maintaining would need to be used.
the upper limit on average winding temperature of 85 °C.
Some might be tempted to request a TRF of 4.0, on the
So, looking at the TRF curve again, for an ambient expectation that a much smaller ratio CT (e.g., 600:5)
temperature of 55 °C, the following capabilities of CTs could be used at 2.95 x 600 A = 1,770 A, or almost
with various TRFs are seen as: 1,800 A as installed in switchgear. As long as the resulting
current is equal to or less than the continuous current
capability of the switchgear, this would be true. So, if the
Capability (%) @ ambient 55 °C / 30 °C switchgear compartment and circuit breaker were rated
TRF
30 °C 55 °C percentage 2,000 A, loading to 1,770 A would be permitted.
However, if the switchgear and circuit breaker were rated
1.0 100 71 73.9
only 1,200 A, the load would need to be restricted to
1.33 133 98 73.9
1,200 A, even though the CT capability would suggest
1.5 150 111 73.9 more.
2.0 200 148 73.9
It should be recognized that with a TRF of 4.0, the
3.0 300 222 73.9 resulting CT secondary wire (in the CT secondary winding
4.0 400 295 73.9 itself, and in the switchgear CT circuit), and all connected
devices, would have to be dramatically larger (and more
costly) than normal. In addition, the voltage drop on
The values for capability at 55 °C ambient, and the ratio of secondary wiring would be much higher, which would be
capability at 30 °C versus 55 °C ambient, were not read highly undesirable. Thus, high TRF values should not be
from the TRF curve. Instead, they were calculated based requested. High TRF values mean that the CT winding
on the fact that the TRF curve is really just a secondary wire size must increase, and considering that
representation of heating based on the square of the the overall size of the CT is normally fixed by the
current. Therefore: switchgear or enclosure design, the extra space for CT
secondary winding wire would have to be taken from the
Iin 55 °C ambient
Iin 30 °C ambient
=
√ 30 °C allowed rise
55 °C allowed rise
When application of CTs at the ambient inside switchgear
= 73.9%
space allotted for core steel, reducing the relaying
accuracy of the CT.
or outdoor air-insulated circuit breakers is considered, a

CT with a TRF of 1.33 is needed to be able to carry almost
100-percent of the rated current for the circuit breaker. Published by Siemens Industry, Inc. 2016.
In practice, most of the current transformers that Siemens Siemens Industry

uses have a TRF of 2.0 (installed in switchgear, 7000 Siemens Road
148-percent) for ratios up to about 1,200:5, and 1.5 for Wendell, North Carolina 27591
higher ratios (installed in switchgear, 111-percent). Thus,
For more information, please contact our Customer Support Center.
the CT capability, as installed in the switchgear or circuit Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
breaker matches the capability of the circuit breaker with
which it is used. www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics
The capability of the current transformer for currents Article No. EMMS-T40040-00-4AUS
above its rated primary current, as an example, 1,200 A Printed in U.S.A.
rated primary current for a CT with 1,200:5 ratio, does not © 2016 Siemens Industry, Inc.
increase the capability of the circuit breaker or switchgear
unit in which it is installed. If the circuit breaker or Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
switchgear is rated for a continuous current of 1,200 A, document only contains general descriptions and/or performance
the combination of the 1,200:5 ratio CT and the
switchgear or circuit breaker configuration is limited to development of the products. The requested performance features
1,200 A (for this example). are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
concluded contract.
Subject to changes and errors. The
information given in thisdocument only
contains general descriptions and/or
performance features which may not always
specifically reflect those described, or which
may undergo modification in the course of
further development of the products. The
requested performance features are binding
only when they are expressly agreed upon in
the concluded contract.
Published by Siemens Industry, Inc. 2016. For more information, please contact Article No. EMMS-T40025-05-4A00
our Customer Support Center. Printed in U.S.A.
Phone: +1 (800) 347-6659
7000 Siemens Road © 2016 Siemens Industry, Inc.
Wendell, North Carolina 27591 www.usa.siemens.com/techtopics

ANSI MV TechTopicsCatalog

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSI MV TechTopicsCatalog

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TechTopics catalog

The released collection from No. 01 to No. 122

TechTopics issue Pages

Answers for infrastructure.

MCOV of ZnO element kV 2.9 3.6 5.4 9.0 11.0

0.5 kA switching surge discharge voltage 8 μs x 20 μs wave kV 8 10 15 25 31

Surge limiter part 18-665-161-xxx -001 -002 -003 -004 -005

Figure 1: Surge limiter selection according to system type

The information provided in this document contains merely general

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

Siemens Industry, Inc.

Subject to change without prior notice.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Answers for infrastructure.

Answers for infrastructure.

C37.04 1979 1999 Rating structure for AC high-voltage circuit breakers

Table 1: The applicable standards

Answers for infrastructure.

Rated maximum voltage = V

The information provided in this document contains merely general

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of

Siemens Industry, Inc.

Subject to change without prior notice.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Answers for infrastructure.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Answers for infrastructure.

For ratings, the circuit breakers are rated in accordance with

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Answers for infrastructure.

Subject to change without prior notice.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Continuous current - circuit breaker (rows 1-3) or main bus (row 4)

Rated current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A 4,000 A

Vertical section with main bus 154 W 187 W 220 W 390 W

Space heaters per vertical section 400 W 400 W 400 W 400 W

Voltage transformer (VT) rollout 50 W 50 W 50 W 50 W

4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA 4% of CPT kVA

Answers for infrastructure.

1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

5. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Continuous current - circuit breaker (rows 1-3) or main bus (row 4)

Rated current 1,200 A 2,000 A 3,000 A

Circuit breaker cell with circuit breaker 461 W 738 W 1,443 W

Vertical section with main bus 211 W 275 W 452 W

Space heaters per vertical section 1,000 W 1,000 W 1,000 W

Voltage transformer (VT) stationary 250 W 250 W 250 W

Answers for infrastructure.

1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

5. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Approximate full-load heat generation (in watts (W)) for

Vertical section with main bus 600 A 60 W Siemens Industry, Inc.

Subject to change without prior notice.

For more information, contact: +1 (800) 347-6659

Answers for infrastructure.

Dead bus times for Siemens type GMI circuit breakers

Dead bus time, ms (cycles)

Trip, then close, using standard 52b contact on normal source 35 to 56 ms 24 to 50 ms

Answers for infrastructure.

Siemens Industry, Inc.

1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

5. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

1. Space heaters, when provided, are not normally

4. Relaying and instrumentation heat generation

5. Conversion factor: watts x 3.415179 = BTU/hour.

It must provide good conductivity, so that the bus system